US Army Corps

of Engineers
Hydrologic Engineering Center

Generalized Computer Program

HEC-2
Water Surface Profiles

User's Manual

September 1990
Revised: September 1991

Approved for Public Release. Distribution Unlimited. CPD-2A

 REPORT DOCUMENTATION PAGE Form Approved OMB No. 0704-0188

The public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 1 hour per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching
existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this
burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of information, including suggestions for reducing this burden, to the Department of Defense, Executive
Services and Communications Directorate (0704-0188). Respondents should be aware that notwithstanding any other provision of law, no person shall be
subject to any penalty for failing to comply with a collection of information if it does not display a currently valid OMB control number.
PLEASE DO NOT RETURN YOUR FORM TO THE ABOVE ORGANIZATION.
1. REPORT DATE (DD-MM-YYYY) 2. REPORT TYPE 3. DATES COVERED (From - To)
September 1990 Computer Program Documentation
revised: September 1991
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE 5a. CONTRACT NUMBER
HEC-2
Water Surface Profiles User's Manual 5b. GRANT NUMBER

5c. PROGRAM ELEMENT NUMBER

6. AUTHOR(S) 5d. PROJECT NUMBER

CEIWR-HEC
5e. TASK NUMBER

5F. WORK UNIT NUMBER

7. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME(S) AND ADDRESS(ES) 8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NUMBER

US Army Corps of Engineers CPD-2A
Institute for Water Resources
Hydrologic Engineering Center (HEC)
609 Second Street
Davis, CA 95616-4687
9. SPONSORING/MONITORING AGENCY NAME(S) AND ADDRESS(ES) 10. SPONSOR/ MONITOR'S ACRONYM(S)

11. SPONSOR/ MONITOR'S REPORT NUMBER(S)

12. DISTRIBUTION / AVAILABILITY STATEMENT

Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
13. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES

14. ABSTRACT
User's manual for a computer program to calculate water surface profiles. The program is intended for calculating water
surface profiles for steady gradually varied flow in natural or man-made channels. Both subcritical and supercritical flow
profiles can be calculated. The effects of various obstructions such as bridges, culverts, weirs, and structures are based on
the solution of the on-dimensional energy equation with energy loss due to friction evaluated with Manning's equation. The
computational procedure is generally known as the standard step method. The program is also designed for application in
floodplain management and flood insurance studies to evaluate floodway encroachments. Also, capabilities are available
for assessing the effects of channel improvements and levees on water surface profiles. Input and output may be either
English or metric units.

15. SUBJECT TERMS

water surface profiles, computer program, river hydraulics, steady gradually varied flow, natural, man-made, channels,
subcritical, supercritical, flow, obstructions, bridges, culvers, weirs, structures, one-dimensional, energy equation, energy,
loss, friction, Manning's equation, standard step method, floodplain management, flood insurance studies, floodway,
encroachments, channel improvements, levees, cross section, conveyance, velocity, critical depth, overbank, conveyance,
slope, reach, roughness coefficient, composite, wetted perimeter, flow regime, discharge, geometry, Manning's n, equivalent
roughness, interpolated cross sections, storage-outflow, split flow, ice cover
16. SECURITY CLASSIFICATION OF: 17. LIMITATION 18. NUMBER 19a. NAME OF RESPONSIBLE PERSON
a. REPORT b. ABSTRACT c. THIS PAGE OF OF
ABSTRACT PAGES
U U U 19b. TELEPHONE NUMBER
UU 334
Standard Form 298 (Rev. 8/98)
Prescribed by ANSI Std. Z39-18
HEC-2
Water Surface Profiles

User's Manual

September 1990
Revised: September 1991

US Army Corps of Engineers

Institute for Water Resources
Hydrologic Engineering Center
609 Second Street
Davis, CA 95616
(530) 756-1104
(530) 756-8250 FAX
www.hec.usace.army.mil CPD-2A
 10 December 1984

Conditions of Use

The following conditions regulate the use of computer programs developed by the Hydrologic
Engineering Center (HEC), Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army.

1. The computer programs are furnished by the Government and are accepted and used by the
recipient individual or group entity with the express understanding that the United States
Government makes no warranties, expressed or implied, concerning the accuracy, completeness,
reliability, usability, or suitability for any particular purpose of the information or data contained
in the programs, or furnished in connection therewith, and that the United States Government
shall be under no liability whatsoever to any individual or group entity by reason of any use
made thereof.

2. The programs belong to the United States Government. Therefore, the recipient agrees
neither to assert any proprietary rights thereto nor to represent the programs to anyone as other
than Government programs.

3. The recipient may impose fees on clients only for ordinary charges for applying and
modifying these programs.

4. Should the recipient make any modifications to the program(s), the HEC must be informed as
to the nature and extent of those modifications. Recipients who modify HEC computer programs
assume all responsibility for problems arising from, or related to, those modifications. User
support from the HEC to third part recipients will only be provided after the second party
demonstrates that program difficulties were not caused by their modifications.

5. This "Conditions of Use" statement shall be furnished to all third parties that receive copies
of HEC programs from the recipient. Third party recipients must be notified that they will not
receive routine program updates, correction notices, and other program services from the HEC
unless they obtain the program(s) directly from the HEC.

6. All documents and reports conveying information obtained as a result of the use of the
program(s) by the recipient, or others, will acknowledge the Hydrologic Engineering Center,
Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army, as the origin of the program(s).
 HEC-2
Water Surface Profiles
User's Manual

Table of Contents

Chapter Page

1 Introduction

1.1 Program Development 1

1.2 Overview of Program Capabilities " 1
1.3 Supplementary Program " 2
1.4 Computer Equipment Requirements " 2

2 Theoretical Basis for Profile Calculation

2.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " 3

2.2 Equations for Basic Profile Calculation 3
2.3 Cross Section Subdivision 4
2.4 Velocity Coefficient " 6
2.5 Friction Loss Evaluation 6
2.6 Computation Procedure . " 7
2.7 Critical Depth Determination " 8
2.8 Program Limitations 9

3 Basic Data Requirements

3.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11
3.2 Flow Regime 11
3.3 Starting Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 12
3.4 Discharge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 12
3.5 Energy Loss Coefficients 12
3.6 Cross Section Geometry 15
3.7 HEC-2 Cross Section Adjustment Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16
3.8 Reach Lengths 17

4 Optional Capabilities

4.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 19
4.2 Multiple Profile Analysis 19
4.3 Critical Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 19
4.4 Effective Flow Options 20
4.5 Bridge Losses 21
4.6 Encroachment Options 21
4.7 Optional Friction Loss Equations 22
4.8 Channel Improvement 23
4.9 Interpolated Cross Sections 24
4.10 Tributary Stream Profiles 24
4.11 Solving for Manning's 'n' 25
4.12 Storage-Outflow Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 26
4.13 Split Flow Option 26
4.14 Ice Covered Streams 26
 Table of Contents (continued)

Chapter Page

5 Program Input

5.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 27
5.2 Record Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 27
5.3 Data Organization 27
5.4 Split Flow Records: SF, JC, JP, TW, WS, WC, TN, NS, NG, TC, CS,
CR, & EE 27
5.5 Documentation Records: AC, C, I1-T9 29
5.6 Job Control Records; J1, JR, JS, J2-J6, EJ & ER 29
5.7 Change Records: IC, NC, NH, NV, QT, ET & CI 30
5.8 Cross Section Records: X1, RC X2 - X5, & GR 31
5.9 Bridge and Culvert Records: SB, SC & BT 32
5.10 Sample Problem Showing Basic Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 32

6 Program Output

6.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 35
6.2 Program Identification Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 38
6.3 Job Control Data 38
6.4 Input Data 39
6.5 Comments and Remarks 39
6.6 Output Labels 39
6.7 Cross Section Data 39
6.8 Flow Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 39
6.9 Special Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 40
6.10 Program Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 40
6.11 Profile Plots 40
6.12 Cross Section Plots 41
6.13 Summary Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 41
6.14 TAPE16 Scratch File for Writing Modified Data Input " 41
6.15 Archive File 41
6.16 Storage-Outflow........................................... 43

7 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 45

8 Supplemental Material 47

Appendices

I Sample Application of HEC-2

II Floodway Encroachment Calculations
III Application of HEC-2 Bridge Routines
IV Application of the HEC-2 Culvert Option
V Special Note Listing
VI Output Data Description
VII Input Data Description

ii
 List of Figures

Figure
Number Page

1 Representation of Terms in Energy Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4

2 Incremental Areas in Subsections 5

3 Definition of Bank Slope When Examining Conveyance Within the Channel 5

4 Profiles Calculated for Subcritical and Supercritical Flows 11

5 Types of Effective Flow Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 20

6 A Stream Cross Section Before and After CHIMP Modification 23

7 Second Order Stream System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 25

8 Sample Problem Profile and Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 33

9 Sample Problem Cross Section .. 33

10 Cross Section Output Display 39

11 Flow Distribution Output Display 40

12 Input File Used to Create TAPE16 File 42

13 Example of TAPE16 File 42

List of Tables

Table
Number Page

1 Equivalent Roughness Values of Various Bed Materials .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 14

2 Criteria Utilized to Select Friction Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 23

3 Typical HEC-2 Data Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 28

4 Control of Program Output 35

iii
 Chapter 1

Introduction

This manual documents Version 4.6 of HEC-2, released February 1991. Appendices provide
sample applications, floodway options, bridge and culvert analysis. Input, output, and special notes
are also presented in the Appendices.

1.1 Program Development

Computer program HEC-2, Water Surface Profiles, originated from a step-backwater program
written in WIZ by Bill S. Eichert in 1964. This early version was developed on a GE 225 system at the
Corps of Engineers Tulsa District office. In 1966 the first FORTRAN version of HEC-2 was released by
the Hydrologic Engineering Center (HEC) under the name "Backwater Any Cross Section."

As the name implied, Backwater Any Cross Section (unlike the other early backwater programs)
was capable of computing water surface profiles in channels with irregularly shaped cross sections.
This program represented a significant step in the development of modern computational techniques
for hydraulic analysis.

The program was revised and expanded and in 1968 was released as HEC-2, Water Surface
Profiles, the second in a series of generalized computer programs issued by the HEC. Since the first
release of HEC-2 in 1968 the addition of new features and improvements have prompted the release
of new versions in 1971, 1976 and 1988.

In 1984 Alfredo Montalvo adapted HEC-2 to the microcomputer (PC) environment. The PC release
of HEC-2 has been accompanied by the introduction of PC based support programs, SUMPO and
PLOT2.

The February 1991 release of HEC-2 (Version 4.6) includes the capability to simulate culvert
hydraulics using the Federal Highway Administration's (FHWA) culvert procedures. The FHWA
procedures were added to HEC-2 by Roy Dodson, Dodson and Associates, Houston, TX.

1.2 Overview of Program Capabilities

The program is intended for calculating water surface profiles for steady gradually varied flow in
natural or man-made channels. Both subcritical and supercritical flow profiles can be calculated. The
effects of various obstructions such as bridges, culverts, weirs, and structures in the floodplain may be
considered in the computations. The computational procedure is based on the solution of the
one-dimensional energy equation with energy loss due to friction evaluated with Manning's equation.
The computational procedure is generally known as the standard step method. The program is also
designed for application in floodplain management and flood insurance studies to evaluate floodway
encroachments. Also, capabilities are available for assessing the effects of channel improvements and
levees on water surface profiles. Input and output may be either English or metric units.

1
1.3 Supplementary Programs
A data edit program (EDIT2) checks the data records for various input errors. An interactive
summary printout program (SUMPO) and graphics program (PLOT2) are available for MS DOS
computers. An input edit program (COED) is available with an HEC-2 input help file. All the
supplementary programs are provided in the HEC-2 PC package.

1.4 Computer Equipment Requirements

HEC-2 is available in two forms: (1) an executable module suitable for microcomputers; and (92)
FORTRAN source code.

The microcomputer module requires an IBM/XT or compatible computer with a MS DOS (2.1 or
newer) operating system with 450 kilobytes (Kb) of available memory (RAM) and a hard disk. A math
coprocessor (8087, 80287, or 80387) is highly recommended to reduce computation times.

The HEC-2 source code is written in FORTRAN77 and has been adapted to a variety of systems
including HARRIS 1000, Intergraph, CDC/MIPS, and SUN workstations.

2
 Chapter 2

Theoretical Basis for Profile Calculation

2.1 General

This section describes methodology used in HEC-2 to calculate water surface profiles. Topics
discussed include equations used for basic profile calculation, cross section subdivision for
determining conveyance and velocity distribution, friction loss evaluation, iterative procedure for
solving the basic equations and critical depth determination. Computational methodology for
calculating flow through bridges is presented in Appendix III and the culvert procedure is described in
Appendix IV. Methodology used by HEC-2 to determine and evaluate floodplain encroachments is
contained in Appendix II.

2.2 Equations for Basic Profile Calculation

The following two equations are solved by an iterative procedure (the standard step method) to
calculate an unknown water surface elevation at a cross section:

(1)

(2)

where: WSlJ WS z = water surface elevations at ends of reach (see Figure 1)

VlJ Vz = mean velocities (total discharge + total flow areas) at ends of reach
a l , az = velocity coefficients for flow at ends of reach

g = acceleration of gravity

he = energy head loss

L = discharge-weighted reach length

Sf = representative friction slope for reach

C = expansion or contraction loss coefficient

3
The discharge-weighted reach length, L, is calculated as:

L = (3)

= reach lengths specified for flow in the left overbank, main

channel and right overbank, respectively

Qlab' Qch' Q rab = arithmetic average of flows at the ends of the reach for the
left overbank, main channel, and right overbank, respectively

Determination of a representative friction slope, Sr, is discussed in Section 4 of this chapter.

Selection of appropriate magnitudes for expansion and contraction coefficients is discussed in
Chapter 3, Section 5 and Appendix III.

- -- --!!!.ERGY GRADE
---.; _LINE

--

DATUM

Figure 1
Representation of Terms in Energy Equation

2.3 Cross Section Subdivision

The determination of total conveyance and the velocity coefficient for a cross section requires that
flow be subdivided into units for which the velocity is uniformly distributed. The approach used in
HEC-2 is to subdivide flow in the overbank areas using the input cross section stations
(X-coordinates) as the basis for subdivision. Conveyance is calculated within each subdivision by the
following equation (based on English units):

k = 1. 486 a r 2/ 3 (4)
n

4
 where: k = conveyance for subdivision

n = Manning's 'n' for subdivision

a = flow area for subdivision

r = hydraulic radius for subdivision (area divided by wetted perimeter)

The total conveyance for the cross section is obtained by summing the incremental conveyances.

~
8
sz r Water Surface
t-\-/-r-----r1""'--"'~_~--,1"7,-L----,7--7--r--,1 ---';;-"'-'1--"
A

Figure 2
Incremental Areas in Subsections

Flow in the main channel is not subdivided, except when the roughness coefficient is changed
within the channel area. HEC-2 has been modified to test the applicability of subdivision of roughness
within the channel portion of a cross section, and if it is not applicable, the program will compute a
composite 'n' value for the entire channel. The program determines if the channel portion of the
cross section can be subdivided or if a composite channel 'n' value will be utilized based on the
following criterion: if a channel side slope is steeper than 5H:1V and the cross section has been
subdivided, a composite roughness 'n c ' will be computed [Equation 6-17, Chow, 1959]. The
channel side slope used by HEC-2 is defined as the horizontal distance between adjacent NH stations
within the channel over the difference in elevation of these two stations (see 5 L and 5 R of Figure 3).

ROeI::)' RIVER TEST 2

cross-sect Ion 3,000
100 - - _ , ·o~o --; :... o~o_,- _ '00 _ '_

! !~!!
!!
j j

Figure 3
Definition of Bank Slope When Examining Conveyance Within the Channel

5
 For the determination of 'n c ', the water area is divided imaginatively into N parts each with a
known wetted perimeter Pi and roughness coefficient n i .

(5)

where: nc = composite or equivalent coefficient of roughness

P = wetted perimeter of cross section
= wetted perimeter of imaginary subdivision i
= coefficient of roughness for imaginary subdivision i

The computed composite 'n c ' should be checked for reasonableness. The computed value is the
channel 'n' value (XNCH) in the detailed output and summary tables.

Channel subdivision is controlled in HEC-2 by the input variable SUBDIV specified in the third field
of the J6 record.

2.4 Velocity Coefficient

The velocity coefficient, el, is computed based on the conveyance in the three flow elements: left
overbank, right overbank, and channel. It is obtained with the following equation:

(6)
=

where: At = total flow area of cross section

AIob , A ch ' Arob = flow areas of left overbank, main channel and right overbank,
respectively

Kt = total conveyance of cross section

KIob , Kch ' Krob = conveyances of left overbank, main channel and right
overbank, respectively

2.5 Friction Loss Evaluation

Friction loss is evaluated in HEC-2 as the product of Sf' and L, where Sf is the re~resentative
friction slope for a reach and L is defined with Equation 3. Alternative expressions for Sf available in
HEC-2 are as follows:

6
 (7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

Equation 7 is the 'default' equation used by the program; that is, it is used automatically unless a
different equation is requested by input. The program also contains an option to select equations,
depending on flow regime and profile type (e.g., S1, M1, etc.). Further discussion of the alternative
methods for evaluating friction loss is contained in Chapter 4, Optional Capabilities.

2.6 Computation Procedure

The unknown water surface elevation at a cross section is determined by an it~rative solution of
Equations 1 and 2. The computational procedure is as follows:

1. Assume a water surface elevation at the upstream cross section

(or downstream cross section if a supercritical profile is being
calculated).

2. Based on the assumed water surface elevation, determine the

corresponding total conveyance and velocity head.

3. With values from step 2, compute Sf and solve Equation 2 for

he'

4. With values from steps 2 and 3, solve Equation 1 for WS z.

5. Compare the computed value of WS z with the values assumed

in step 1; repeat steps 1 through 5 until the values agree to
within .01 feet (or .01 meters).

7
 Criteria used to assume water surface elevations in the iterative procedure varies from trial to trial.
Generally the first trial is based on projecting the previous cross section's water surface elevation on
the average of the friction slopes from the previous two cross sections. The second trial is an
arithmetic average of the computed and assumed elevations from the first trial. The third and
subsequent trials are generally based on a 'secant" method of projecting the rate of change of the
difference between computed and assumed elevations for the previous two trials to zero. The change
from one trial to the next is constrained to a maximum of ±50 percent of the assumed depth from the
previous trial.

Once a 'balanced' water surface elevation has been obtained for a cross section, checks are
made to ascertain that the elevation is on the 'right' side of the critical water surface elevation (e.g.,
above the critical elevation if a subcritical profile is being calculated). If the balanced elevation is on
the 'wrong' side of the critical water surface elevation, critical depth is assumed for the cross section
and a message to that effect is printed by the program. The program user should be aware of critical
depth assumptions and determine the reasons for their occurrence, because in many cases they
result from reach lengths being too long or from misrepresentation of the effective flow areas of cross
sections.

For a subcritical profile, a preliminary check for proper flow regime involves the following
equation:

= (11)

where: velocity head that would exist if critical conditions existed at

the balanced water surface elevation.

At = total flow area

T = water surface width

2
aV2
If the calculated velocity head, -2- ,is less than 94% of 2g )
(aV , the balanced water surface
g test
elevation will be accepted for the cross section. If the calculated velocity head is greater than 94
percent of the test value, the critical water surface elevation will be determined (by a procedure
discussed in Section 2.6) so that a direct comparison of balanced elevation versus critical elevation
can be made.

For a supercritical profile, critical depth is automatically calculated for every cross section, which
enables a direct comparison between balanced and critical elevations.

2.7 Critical Depth Determination

Critical depth for a cross section will be determined if any of the following conditions are satisfied:

(1) The supercritical flow regime has been specified.

(2) Calculation of critical depth has been requested.

(3) This is the first cross section and critical depth starting conditions have been
specified.

8
 (4) The critical depth check for a subcritical profile indicates that critical depth needs
to be determined to verify the flow regime associated with the balanced elevation.

The total energy head for a cross section is defined by:

H = WS +
aV 2 (12)
2g

where: H = total energy head

WS = water surface elevation
aV2
2g = velocity head

The critical water surface elevation is the elevation for which the total energy head is a minimum. The
critical elevation is determined with an iterative procedure whereby values of WS are assumed and
corresponding values of H are determined with Equation 12 until a minimum value for H is reached.

To speed the iteration process, a parabolic interpolation procedure is followed. The procedure
basically involves determining values of H for three values of WS that are spaced at equal 11WS
intervals. The WS corresponding to the minimum value for H defined by a parabola passing through
the three points (on the H versus WS plane) is used as the basis for the next assumption of a value
forWS.

It is presumed that critical depth has been obtained when there is less than a 2.5 percent change
in depth from one iteration to the next and provided the energy head has either decreased or has not
increased by more than .01 feet. The tolerance of 2.5 percent may be changed by program input.

2.8 Program Limitations

The following assumptions are implicit in the analytical expressions used in the program:

(1) Flow is steady,

(2) Flow is gradually varied,

(3) Flow is one dimensional (i.e., velocity components in directions other than the
direction of flow are not accounted for),

(4) River channels have 'small' slopes, say less than 1:10.

Flow is assumed to be steady because time-dependent terms are not included in the energy equation
(Equation 1). Flow is assumed to be gradually varied because Equation 1 is based on the premise
that a hydrostatic pressure distribution exists at each cross section. Flow is assumed to be
one-dimensional because Equation 4 is based on the premise that the total energy head is the same
for all points in a cross section. Small channel slopes are assumed because the pressure head which
is a component of WS in Equation 1 is represented by the water depth measured vertically.

The program does not have the capability to deal with movable boundaries (i.e., sediment
transport) and requires that energy losses be definable with the terms contained in Equation 2.

9
 Chapter 3

Basic Data Requirements

3.1 General
A major portion of the programming in HEC-2 is devoted to providing a large variety of input and
data manipulation options. The program objective is quite simple -- compute water surface elevations
at all locations of interest for given flow values. The data needed to perform these computations
include: flow regime, starting elevation, discharge, loss coefficients, cross section geometry, and
reach lengths. The options available for providing and manipulating input are discussed in the
following sections.

3.2 Flow Regime

Profile computations begin at a cross section with known or assumed starting conditions and
proceed upstream for subcritical flow or downstream for supercritical flow. The direction of flow is
specified on the J1 record (first job record) by setting variable IDIR equal to one for supercritical flow
or zero (or blank) for subcritical flow. Subcritical profiles computed by the program (IDIR = 0) are
constrained to critical depth or above, and supercritical profiles (IDIR = 1) are constrained to critical
depth or below. The program will not allow profile computations to cross critical depth except for
certain bridge analysis problems. In cases where flow passes from one flow regime to another as
shown in Figure 4 below, it is necessary to compute the profile twice, alternately assuming subcritical
and supercritical flow. Results of a subcritical profile (shown as 0 in Figure 4) computed for the

STEEP
MILO SLOPE -SLOPE MILO SLOPE

~/·vr>- -x- __
CROSS SECTIO s-.L..., --- -x-
PROFIL .S
o SUBCRITI AL RUN
x SUPERCRI ICAL RUN
- - - CRITIC L
JUMP
- - ACTUA

Figure 4
Profiles Calculated for Subcritical and Supercritical Flows

11
 example stream would plot at critical depth (above the actual water surface profile) in the steep reach
of stream. Results from a supercritical profile computation (shown as x in Figure 4) would plot at
critical depth (below the actual water surface profile) for both mild reaches of the stream. The final
plotted profile should incorporate computed results from both computations and an analysis of the
hydraulic jump. HEC-2 does not contain the capability to determine the position of the hydraulic jump
or energy losses associated with the jump.

3.3 Starting Elevation

The water surface elevation for the beginning cross section may be specified in one of four ways:
(1) as critical depth, (2) as a known elevation, (3) by the slope area method, and (4) by a rating curve.
By setting the variable STRT on the J1 record equal to minus one, critical depth will be computed and
used as the starting water surface elevation. This method is appropriate at locations where critical or
near critical conditions are known to exist for the range of discharges being computed (e.g., a
waterfall, weir or a section of rapids). When a rating curve is available, the appropriate starting
elevation can be specified by variable WSEL on the J1 record (or the entire rating curve may be
entered with the JR record).

For beginning by the slope area method, STRT is set equal to the estimated slope of the energy
grade line (must be a positive value). The flows computed for the fixed slope are compared with the
starting flow and the depth is adjusted until the computed flow is within one percent of the starting
flow. The water surface elevation thus determined may be used as the starting water surface
elevation for subsequent water surface profile computations.

3.4 Discharge

Discharge may be specified and altered in several ways. The variable 0 on the first job record
(J1 record) specifies the starting discharge for single profile runs, When it is desired to change the
discharge for a single profile run, the variable ONEW on the X2 record can be used to permanently
change the discharge at any cross section.

An alternate procedure utilizes the OT records (discharge table) and may be used to specify from
one to nineteen discharge values for single or multiple profile runs. OT records may be used to
specify starting discharges and to permanently change discharges at any cross section in a data set.
Variable INO on the J1 record directs the program to the field of the OT record that contains the
discharge for that profile. When a value of FO is entered, all discharges on the X2 records and
discharges in the specified INO of the OT records are multiplied by the value.

3.5 Energy Loss Coefficients

Several types of loss coefficients are utilized by the program to evaluate head losses: (1)
Manning's 'n' or equivalent roughness heights 'k' values for friction loss, (2) contraction and
expansion coefficients to evaluate transition (shock) losses, and (3) bridge and culvert loss coefficients
to evaluate losses related to weir shape, pier configuration, and pressure flow, and entrance and exit
conditions.

Manning's 'n'. Because Manning's 'n' coefficient of roughness depends on such factors as
type and amount of vegetation, channel configuration and stage, several options are available to vary
'n', When three 'n' values are sufficient to describe the channel and overbank roughness, the
first three fields of the NC record ('n' value - change) are used. Any of the 'n' values may be
permanently changed at any cross section by using another NC record. Often three values are not

12
enough to adequately describe the lateral roughness variation in the cross section; in this case the
NH record ('n' value - horizontal) is used, The number of 'n' values used to describe the
roughness is entered as variable NUMNH in the first field and the 'n' values and corresponding
cross section stations are entered in subsequent fields. These 'n' values will be used for all
subsequent cross sections unless changed by another NH record. Normally the NH record 'n'
values should be redefined for each cross section with new geometry. If 'n' values change within
the channel, the criterion described in Section 2.3 is used to determine whether 'n' values should be
converted to a composite value using Equation 5.

Data indicating the variation of Manning's 'n' with river stage may be used in the program.
Manning's 'n' and the corresponding stage elevation (beginning with the lowest elevation) are
entered on the NV record ('n' value - vertical), beginning in the second and third fields, respectively.
Variable NUMNV in Field 1 is the number of 'n' values input on the NV records. This 'n' value
option applies only to the channel area.

If for subsequent jobs of the same run it is desired to modify the 'n' values specified on the NC,
NH, and NV records by a factor, variable FN on the J2 record may be used. The desired factor is
entered as variable FN for each job. If the value of FN is negative, the factor is multiplied by the
channel 'n' values on the NC record but the overbank 'n' values are not changed.

There are several references a user can access that shows Manning's 'n' values for typical
channels [USACE, 1959]; an extensive compilation of 'n' values for streams and floodplains [Chow,
1959]; and, pictures of selected streams as a guide to 'n' value determination [Fasken, 1963]
[Barnes, 1967] are available.

Equivalent Roughness 'k', An equivalent roughness parameter 'k', commonly used in the
hydraulic design of channels, is provided as an option for describing boundary roughness in HEC-2.
Equivalent roughness, sometimes called "roughness height", is a measure of the linear dimension of
roughness elements, but is not necessarily equal to the actual, or even the average, height of these
elements. In fact, two roughness elements with different linear dimensions may have the same 'k'
value because of differences in shape and orientation [Chow, 1959],

The advantage of using equivalent roughness 'k' instead of Manning's 'n' is that 'k' reflects
changes in the friction factor due to stage, whereas Manning's 'n' alone does not. This influence
can be seen in the definition of Chezy's "C" (English units) for a rough channel [Equation 6, USACE,
1970]:

C=3261 oglO [1202R]

o k (13)

where: C = Chezy roughness coefficient

R = hydraulic radius (feet)

k = equivalent roughness (feet)

Note that as the hydraulic radius increases (which is equivalent to an increase in stage), the friction
factor ·C" increases. In HEC-2, 'k' is converted to a Manning's 'n' by using the above equation
and equating the Chezy and Manning's equations [Equation 4, USACE, 1970] to obtain the following:

13
 English Units:

1.486R 1 / 6
n = (14)

Metric Unit:

n = (15)

where: n = Manning's roughness coefficient

Again, this equation is based on the assumption that all channels (even concrete-lined channels) are
"hydraulically rough." A graphical illustration of this conversion is available [USACE, 1970].

KH records can be used to describe the horizontal variation of 'k' in the same manner as NH
records are used to describe Manning's 'n' values. Up to twenty values of 'k' can be specified for
each cross section with the use of KH records. Normally, a set of KH records applies to a single
cross section, and an NC record or another set of KH or NH records is used to define 'k' or 'n'
values for the next cross section.

Tables and charts for determining 'k' values for concrete-lined channels are provided in EM
1110-2-1601 [USACE, 1970]. Values for riprap-lined channels may be taken as the theoretical
spherical diameter of the median stone size. Approximate 'k' values [Chow, 1959] for a variety of
bed materials, including those for natural rivers are shown in Table 1.

Table 1
Equivalent Roughness Values of Various Bed Materials

k
(Feet)
Brass, Cooper, Lead, Glass 0.0001 - 0.0030
Wrought Iron, Steel 0.0002 - 0.0080
Asphalted Cast Iron 0.0004 - 0.0070
Galvanized Iron 0.0005 - 0.0150
Cast Iron 0.0008 - 0.0180
Wood Stave 0.0006 - 0.0030
Cement 0.0013 - 0.0040
Concrete 0.0015 - 0.0100
Drain Tile 0.0020 - 0.0100
Riveted Steel 0.0030 - 0.0300
Natural River Bed 0.1000 - 3.0000

The values of 'k' (0.1 to 3.0 ft.) for natural river channels are normally much larger than the actual
diameters of the bed materials to account for boundary irregularities and bed forms.

14
 Contraction-Expansion Coefficients. Contraction or expansion of flow due to changes in the
channel cross section is a common cause of energy losses within a reach. Whenever this occurs, the
loss may be computed by specifying the contraction and expansion coefficients as variables CCHV
and CEHV, respectively, on the NC record. The coefficients are multiplied by the absolute difference in
velocity heads between the cross sections to give the energy loss caused by the transition. Where
the change in river cross section is small, coefficients CCHV and CEHV are typically on the order of
0.1 and 0.3, respectively. When the change in effective cross section area is abrupt such as at
bridges, CCHV and CEHV may be as high as 0.6 and 1.0, respectively. These values may be
changed at any cross section by inserting a new NC record. These new values will be used until
changed again by another NC record. For additional information concerning transition losses and for
information on bridge loss coefficients see Appendix III.

3.6 Cross Section Geometry

Boundary geometry for the analysis of flow in natural streams is specified in terms of ground
surface profiles (cross sections) and the measured distances between them (reach lengths). Cross
sections are located at intervals along a stream to characterize the flow carrying capability of the
stream and its adjacent floodplains. They should extend across the entire floodplain and should be
perpendicular to the anticipated flow lines (approximately perpendicular to contour lines).
Occasionally it is necessary to layout cross sections in a curved or dog-leg alignment to meet this
requirement. Every effort should be made to obtain cross sections that accurately represent the
stream and floodplain geometry. However, ineffective flow areas of the floodplain such as stream
inlets, small ponds or indents in the valley floor should generally not be included in the cross section
geometry.

Cross sections are required at representative locations throughout a stream reach and at
locations where changes occur in discharge, slope, shape, or roughness, at locations where levees
begin or end and at bridges or control structures such as weirs. Where abrupt changes occur,
several cross sections should be used to describe the change regardless of the distance. Cross
section spacing is also a function of stream size, slope, and the uniformity of cross section shape. In
general, large uniform rivers of flat slope normally require the fewest number of cross sections per
mile. The purpose of the study also affects spacing of cross sections. For instance, navigation studies
on large relatively flat streams may require closely spaced (e.g., 500 feet) cross sections to analyze
the effect of local conditions on low flow depths, whereas cross sections for sedimentation studies to
determine deposition in reservoirs may be spaced at intervals of up to five or ten miles.

The choice of friction loss equation may also influence the spacing of cross sections. For
instance, cross section spacing may be maximized when calculating an M1 profile with the average
friction slope equation or when the harmonic mean friction slope equation is used to compute M2
profiles. The J6 record provides the option to let the program select the averaging equation (see
Table 2, page 23).

Each cross section in an HEC-2 data set is identified and described by X1 and GR records.
Variable SECNO on the X1 record is the cross section identification number which may correspond to
stationing along the channel, mile points, or any fictitious numbering system, since it is only used to
identify output and is not used in the computations. Each data point in the cross section is given a
station number corresponding to the horizontal distance from a zero point on the left. The elevation
and a corresponding station number of each data point are input as variables EL(I) and STA(I) on GR
records. Up to 100 data points may be used to describe cross section geometry for most program
applications. When the encroachment options are utilized, no more than 95 data points should be
used, since they generate additional data points automatically to define the encroachment limits. The
channel improvement option also should be used with less than 100 data points since it will generate
data points (four or more depending on the geometry).

15
 Cross section data is traditionally oriented looking downstream since the program considers the
left side of the stream to have the lowest station numbers and the right side to have the highest. The
left and right stations separating the channel from the overbank areas are specified as variables
STCHL and STCHR on the X1 record. End points of a cross section that are too low (below the
computed water surface elevation) will automatically be extended vertically and a note indicating the
extension amount will be printed.

Numerous program options are available to allow the user to easily add or modify cross section
data. For example, when the user wishes to repeat a surveyed cross section, a single X1 record may
be input to identify the cross section and to provide reach length information. X1 record variables,
PXSECR and PXSECE, allow the user to modify the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the repeated
cross section data. Other program options to modify cross section data to model improved channel
sections, encroachments and ineffective flow areas are described in detail in the following chapter.

3.7 HEC-2 Cross Section Adjustment Sequence

The following list describes the sequence of changes performed by HEC-2:

1. Read Cross Section Data, or Read Previous Data for Repeat Cross Section

The previous section data was stored after the modifications listed in Items 2 and 3
below. The elevations and stations for this data are considered the original coordinates
in the following.

2. Add X4 Data Points into the Cross Section Array

X4 data should be in original cross section coordinates, for GR data; but adjusted for
repeat section coordinates of the section as saved in Item 4, below.

3. Adjust Cross Section Coordinates Elevation and Station

PXSECR (X1 record, Field 8 - X1.8) ratio is multiplied times the difference between the
coordinate stations to compute new coordinates. Ratio is applied to the input section
(GR and X4 data), or to the repeat section, as saved in Item 4. (Does not change X4
data in repeat section.)

PXSECE (X1.9) elevation adjustment is added to the elevations of every coordinate point.
(Does not change X4 data in repeat section.)

4. Store the Adjusted Cross Section for Repeat Section Use

The above adjustments are permanent, in that a repeat of the section will include the
changes listed in Items 2 and 3.

5. Perform Channel Modifications Defined by CI Input

CI input should be in original coordinate system, that is the center line station and invert
elevation will be adjusted by the current cross section adjustments (Item 3 above).

CI adjustment is not a permanent change to the cross section in that a repeat of the
section will not include the channel improvement.

16
 6. Add X3 Encroachment Stations and Elevations

Two points are added to define the vertical wall of the left and or right encroachment.
The elevation of the lower point is interpolated based on the cross section data. The
input stations and elevations are in the adjusted coordinate system.

If elevations are also defined, the elevations for stations to the outside of the
encroachment stations (left of the left encroachment and right of the right encroachment)
will be raised to the defined elevation. If no elevation is given, the elevations are raised
to 100,000.

7. Raise Elevation Based on ELSED

All elevations within the channel below ELSED (X3.2) are raised to that elevation. Cross
section stations are added at the intercept of the ELSED elevation with the cross section,
making a horizontal invert at the ELSED elevation.

8. Eliminate Any Duplicate Points

Any exactly duplicated point is eliminated from the cross section array.

9. Compute the Minimum Elevation, ELMIN, for the Section.

10. Begin Commutation of Water Surface Elevation, etc.

3.8 Reach Lengths

The measured distances between cross sections are referred to as reach lengths. The reach
lengths for the left overbank, right overbank and channel used in computations are specified on the
X1 record by variables XLOBL, XLOBR, and XLCH, respectively. Channel reach lengths are typically
measured along the thalweg. Overbank reach lengths should be measured along the anticipated path
of the center of mass of the overbank flow. Often these three values will be equal. There are,
however, conditions where they will differ, such as at river bends, or where the channel meanders
considerably and the overbanks are straight. Where the distances between cross sections for channel
and overbanks are different, a discharge-weighted reach length is determined based on the
discharges in the main channel and left and right overbank segments of the reach (see Equation 3,
page 4).

17
 Chapter 4

Optional Capabilities

4.1 General

HEC-2 has numerous optional capabilities that allow the program user to determine floodplains
and floodways; to evaluate energy losses at obstructions such as weirs, culverts, and bridges; and to
analyze improvements to drainage systems. Detailed descriptions of options associated with
encroachments, bridges, and culverts are contained in Appendices II, III. and IV, respectively. Other
program options include the capability to select from alternative friction loss equations; calculate
critical depth; solve directly for Manning's 'n'; automatically insert program generated cross
sections; specify ineffective flow areas; analyze tributary streams; perform multiple profile analysis in a
single execution of the program; and analyze flow in ice covered streams. These options are
described in detail in the following sections.

4.2 Multiple Profile Analysis

HEC-2 can in a single run compute up to 14 profiles using the same cross sectional data.
Variables NPROF on the J2 record controls the reading of data records. For a multiple profile run, the
NPROF for the first profile is set equal to one or left blank to read in cross section data records. For
all remaining profiles NPROF equals the profile number, Le., 2, 3, 4..... and only J1 and J2 are
required (records NC through EJ are omitted). After the last profile of a multiple profile run. a
summary printout will be generated which provides a concise summary of results for all profiles for
each cross section.

4.3 Critical Depth

Several options related to the computation of critical depth are available in HEC-2. Critical depth
may be requested for each cross section of a subcritical run by coding a value of -1 for variable
ALLDC of the J2 record. As described previously in Section 6 of Chapter 2. the normal tolerance used
to terminate critical depth trial calculations is 2.5 percent of the depth. Other tolerances may be
specified by coding a minus percent value for variable ALLDC. For instance, if a user desires critical
depth to be computed at each cross section with a tolerance of 1.5 percent, a value of -1.5 should be
entered for ALLDC.

As indicated in Section 5 of Chapter 2, critical depth is calculated automatically for cross sections
of subcritical profiles whenever the calculated velocity head exceeds a test velocity head. The
tolerance normally used is also 2.5 percent of the depth. The user can specify an alternative
tolerance to be used for the automatic calculation of critical depth by indicating a positive value for
ALLDC.

19
4.4 Effective Flow Options
A series of program capabilities are available to restrict flow to the effective flow areas of cross
sections. Among these capabilities are options to simulate sediment deposition, to confine flows to
leveed channels, to block out road fills and bridge decks, and to analyze floodplain encroachments.
These program options are illustrated in Figure 5 below.

z
o

~==~~~?7'"
I-
:;
W

•
..J
W LEGE NO:

6 Channel Bank Stations

o GR Data Points

STATION

INEFFECTIVE AREAS:

I I FL.OW BELOW BANK ELEVATIONS B8888S SEDIMENT DEPOSITION

ttif.t~J FLOOD PLAIN ENCROACHMENT 1_ BRIDGE DECK

Figure 5
Types of Effective Flow Options

Sediment deposition may be specified by variable ELSED on the X3 record. The specified
elevation (ELSED) is extended horizontally across the cross section and the area below this elevation
is not considered by the program to carry flow.

Cross sections with low overbank areas or levees, require special consideration in computing
water surface profiles because of possible overflow into areas outside the main channel. Normally the
computations are based on the assumption that all area below the water surface elevation is effective
in passing the discharge. However, if the water surface elevation at a particular cross section is less
than the top of levee elevations, and if the water cannot enter or leave the overbanks upstream of that
cross section, then the flow areas in these overbanks should not be used in the computations.
Variable IEARA on the X3 record and the bank stations coded in fields three and four on the X1
record are used for this condition. By setting IEARA equal to ten the program will consider only flow
confined by the levees, unless the water surface elevation is above the top of one or both of the
levees; in this case flow area or areas outside the levee(s) will be included. If this option is employed
and the water surface elevation is close to the top of a levee, it may not be possible to balance the
assumed and computed water surface elevations due to the changing assumptions of flow area when
just above and below the levee top. When this condition occurs, a note will be printed that states that
the assumed and computed water surface elevations for the cross section cannot be balanced. A
water surface elevation equal to the elevation which came closest to balancing will be adopted. It is
then up to the program user to determine the appropriateness of the assumed water surface elevation
and start the computation over again at that cross section if required.

20
 It is important for the user to study carefully the flow pattern of the river where levees exist. If, for
example, a levee were open at both ends and flow passed behind the levee without overtopping it,
IEARA equals zero or blank should be used. Also, assumptions regarding effective flow areas may
change with changes in flow magnitude. Where cross section elevations outside the levee are
considerably lower than the channel bottom, it may be necessary to set IEARA equal to ten to confine
the flow to the channel. For further information on this option see Appendix III, Section 2.3; Effective
Area Option. The effective flow capabilities of the bridge and encroachment routines are described in
the following paragraphs and in Appendices II and III, respectively.

4.5 Bridge Losses

Energy losses caused by structures such as bridges and culverts are computed in two parts.
First, the losses due to expansion and contraction of the cross section on the upstream and
downstream sides of the structure are computed in the standard step calculations. Secondly, the loss
through the structure itself is computed by either the normal bridge, special bridge, or the culvert
option.

The normal bridge method handles the cross section at the bridge just as it would any river cross
section with the exception that the area of the bridge below the water surface is subtracted from the
total area and the wetted perimeter is increased where the water surface elevation exceeds the low
chord. The normal bridge method is particularly applicable for bridges without piers, bridges under
high submergence, and for low flow through oval and arch culverts. Whenever flow crosses critical
depth in a structure, the special bridge method should be used. The normal bridge method is
automatically used by the computer, even though data was prepared for the special bridge method,
for bridges without piers and under low flow control.

The special bridge method can be used for any bridge, but should be used for bridges with piers
where low flow controls, for pressure flow, and whenever flow passes through critical depth when
going through the structure. The special bridge method computes losses through the structure for
low flow, weir flow and pressure flow or for any combination of these. Refer to Appendix III for a
detailed explanation of HEC-2 bridge capabilities.

The culvert option is a new feature in Version 4.6. The special culvert method is similar to the
special bridge method, except that the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) standard equations for
culvert hydraulics are used to compute losses through the structure. Refer to Appendix IV for a
detailed explanation of the culvert capabilities.

4.6 Encroachment Options

Six methods of specifying encroachments for floodway studies can be used. Stations and
elevations of the left and/or right encroachment (Method 1) can be specified for individual cross
sections as desired. A floodway with a fixed top width (Method 2) can be specified which will be used
for all cross sections until changed. The left and right encroachment stations are made equidistant
from the centerline of the channel, which is halfway between the left and right banks stations.
Encroachments can be specified by percentages (Method 3) which indicate the desired proportional
reduction in the natural discharge carrying capacity of each cross section.

Encroachments can be determined so that each modified cross section will have the same
discharge carrying capacity (at some higher elevation) as the natural cross section (Method 4). This
higher elevation is specified as a fixed amount above the natural (e.g., 1DO-year) profile. The
encroachments are determined so that an equal loss of conveyance (at higher elevation) occurs on
each side of the channel, if possible.

21
 Encroachment Method 5 is an optimization solution of encroachment Method 4. It determines
water surfaces elevation differences between the natural and encroached conditions such that the
target difference is obtained as near as possible.

Encroachment Method 6 is an optimization solution similar to Method 5; however, Method 6

optimizes on differences in the energy grade line elevations. Refer to Appendix II for a detailed
explanation of Encroachment Methods 1 through 6.

4.7 Optional Friction Loss Equations

The friction loss between adjacent cross sections is computed as the product of the
representative rate of friction loss (friction slope) and the weighted reach length. The program allows
the user to select from the following previously defined (see page 7) friction loss equations:

• Average Conveyance
• Average Friction Slope
• Geometric Mean Friction Slope
• Harmonic Mean Friction Slope

Any of the above friction loss equations will produce satisfactory estimates provided that reach lengths
are not too long. The advantage sought in alternative friction loss formulations is to be able to
maximize reach lengths without sacrificing profile accuracy.

Equation 7, the average conveyance equation, is the friction loss formulation that has been
standard in all HEC-2 source files since 1971. Previous HEC-2 source files utilized Equation 8, the
average friction slope equation. Research [Reed/Wolfkill, 1976] indicates that Equation 8 is the most
suitable for M1 profiles. (Suitability as indicated by Reed and Wolfkill is the most accurate
determination of a known profile with the least number of cross sections.) Equation 9 is the standard
friction loss formulation used in the U.S.G.S. step-backwater program WSPRO. Equation 10 has been
shown by Reed and Wolfkill to be the most suitable for M2 profiles.

Another feature of this option is the capability of the program to select the most appropriate of
the preceding four equations on a reach by reach basis depending on flow conditions (e.g., M1, S1,
etc.) within the reach. It is anticipated that this capability may be incorporated into the program as a
standard feature at sometime in the future. At present, however, the criteria shown in Table 2 below,
do not select the best equation for friction loss analysis in reaches with significant lateral expansion,
such as the reach below a contracted bridge opening.

The friction loss equation is controlled by variable IHLEQ on the J6 record as follows:

Value of IHLEQ (J6.1) Friction Loss Equation Used

o Average Conveyance (Equation 7)

1 Program selects equation based on flow conditions (Table 2).
2 Average Friction Slope (Equation 8)
3 Geometric Mean Friction Slope (Equation 9)
4 Harmonic Mean Friction Slope (Equation 10)

When using this option, it is informative to also use a J3 record to request printout of the
variable IHLEQ to identify the equation used for each reach.

22
 Table 2
Criteria Utilized to Select Friction Equation

Is friction slope at current

cross section greater than
friction slope at preceding
Profile Type cross section? Equation Used

5ubcritical (M1, 51) Yes 8

5ubcritical (M2) No 10
5upercritical (S2) Yes 8
I Supercritical (M3,53) No 9

4.8 Channel Improvement

Cross section data may be modified automatically by the CHIMP option of the program to analyze
improvements made to natural stream sections. The CHIMP option simulates channel improvement by
trapezoidal excavation. This option is requested by the CI record which specifies the location of the
centerline (CL5TA), the elevation of the improved invert (CELCH), a new channel reach length (XLCH) ,
a new 'n' value (CNCH), the left side slope (XLSS), the right side slope (RSS) and a bottom width
(BW). Up to five different bottom widths may be specified for the execution of a single run on each CI
record. A maximum of three CI records may be used at each cross section. By using more than one
CI record, a pilot channel can be defined. Figure 6 shows a sample application of the CHIMP option;
note that improved section is modified only by excavation and not by fill. The old channel can be
filled prior to the excavation by entering a negative channel bottom width.

1\60

\ I
V
,
LS1'A=350

1150

~
I-
IJJ
IJJ
lL
~
1140
'" ~~
XLSS=3
I\~

l~
I

~Ul
~2
~
RSS=2
LEGEND:

~
o
X
Area Removed

GR Data Points

GR Data Points Added

i 1130 by CHIMP Option
o 1
~
>
IJJ
I
-l
IJJ 1120

1110
~~ ~ ~J0 ICELCH=
7J" 1110

V
BW=lOO
1100
o 100 200 300 400 500 600

ST:&.TION( IN FEET)

Figure 6
A Stream Cross Section Before and After CHIMP Modification

23
4.9 Interpolated Cross Sections
Occasionally it is necessary to insert cross sections between those specified by input, because
the change in velocity head (L1HV) is too great to accurately determine the energy gradient. Additional
cross sections may be coded manually or a program option may be requested to input interpolated
cross sections. The option specified by the variable HVINS on the J1 record will insert up to three
interpolated cross sections between two adjacent input cross sections. HVINS is the user specified
maximum allowable change in velocity head between adjacent cross sections. When the program
determines that L1 HV between the current cross section and the previous cross section exceeds the
user specified criterion, the program will automatically insert one to three cross sections (depending
on the magnitude of (L1HV/HVINS) - 1).

Interpolated cross sections are determined by raising or lowering and expanding or contracting
the current cross section's shape. They are inserted uniformly between the two input cross sections.
A proportion of the elevation difference determined from the minimum elevations of the two input cross
sections is added (or subtracted) to the elevation coordinates (on GR records) of the current cross
section.

The modification of the horizontal coordinates is a function of the ratio of the channel areas of the
two input cross sections. The channel area (between bank stations) of the current cross section is
determined with the depth of flow from the previous cross section.

Interpolated cross sections will be identified in the output by section numbers of 1.01, 1.02, and
1.03. The option will not add interpolated cross sections in the following cases: (1) if reach lengths
between input cross sections are less than 50 feet, (2) if encroachments have been encountered in
the run, or (3) if the previous cross section is a special bridge or special culvert cross section.

When there is a substantial difference in shape between the previous and current cross sections,
interpolated cross sections generated automatically by the program may not be representative of the
actual stream geometry. The user should always check the reasonableness of interpolated cross
sections.

The number of interpolated cross sections added to each profile may vary with discharge;
therefore, it is advisable not to request them for multiple profile runs because analysis should be made
using exactly the same cross section data.

4.10 Tributary Stream Profiles

Subcritical profiles may be computed for tributary stream systems for single or multiple profiles in
a single execution of the program. In general, data sets are arranged to compute profiles for the main
stream (Reach 1) from the most downstream point to the study limit on the main stream. Data for a
tributary stream (Reach 2), whose starting water surface elevation was determined when Reach 1 was
calculated, follows the data for Reach 1. The first section number for Reach 2 is negative and refers
to the section number in Reach 1 where the starting water surface elevation for Reach 2 was
determined. When a negative section number (on the X1 record) is encountered the program will
search its memory for the computed water surface elevation that corresponds to the negative section
number. The program will then start computing the profile for Reach 2 with the previously determined
water surface elevation.

Occasionally it may be desirable to calculate, in a single run, a profile for a stream system with a
second order tributary (a tributary to a tributary). This may be accomplished if data for the tributary,
with the tributary, is treated as a portion of the main stream. Then the main stream beyond the

24
junction of the two streams, is treated as a tributary. This is illustrated in the Figure 7; numbers 1
through 8 locate cross sections on the main stream, numbers 11 through 16 are cross sections on the
first order tributary and numbers 21 through 22 are cross sections on the second order tributary.

1 2 NUMBERS REFER TO CROSS SECTION

LOCATIONS.

Figure 7
Second Order Stream System

The arrangement of cross section data (X1 and GR records) for the stream system in Figure 7 for
a tributary analysis in a single execution of the program is as follows: 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
-4,5, 6, 7, 8, -14,21, and 22.

Tributary stream profiles should not be calculated simultaneously with encroachment

Methods 3 - 6 and the split flow option.

4.11 Solving for Manning's tn'

The program can be utilized in two ways to solve for Manning's 'n'. HEC-2 can compute 'n'
values automatically from high water data if the discharge, relative ratios of the 'n' values for the
channel and overbanks and the water surface elevation at each cross section are known. The "best
estimate" of 'n' for the first cross section must be entered on the NC record since it is not possible
to compute an 'n' value for this cross section. The relative ratio of 'n' between channel and
overbank is set by the first cross section and will be used for all subsequent cross sections unless
another NC record is used to change this ratio. High water marks are used for the computed water
surface elevation by setting variable NINV on the J1 record equal to one and entering the known
water surface elevation as variable WSELK on the X2 record for each cross section. The average
friction slope equation (see J6 record description) is utilized by the program to solve for 'n' values.
If one of the other friction equations is to be utilized for profile analysis then the program-determined
'n' values should be verified using the appropriate friction equation. Because of the sensitivity of
calculated results to slight errors in observed high water marks, a weighted 'n' (WTN) value is also
calculated at each cross section. WTN is the length weighted channel 'n' calculated from the first
cross section to the current cross section. When an adverse slope is encountered, computations
restart using 'n' values from the previous section, but WTN computations continue.

Another method is to specify the discharge and an assumed set of 'n' values, and have the
program compute a water surface profile which can be compared with the high water profile. For this
method WSELK may be input on the X2 record, without entering the computations, so that it can be

25
easily compared with the computed water surface elevation on the output. The variable FN (J2.6
record) may be utilized to vary the assumed 'n' values for multiple profile trials.

4.12 Storage-Outflow Data

The HEC-2 storage-outflow option can be used to generate HEC-1 [HEC, 1990] input data for
hydrograph routing using the modified Puis method. The modified Puis method requires stream
storage (acre feet or 1000's m3) and corresponding discharges. Stream storages should be
determined for a range of discharges which cover the anticipated range of flows for routed
hydrographs.

The HEC-2 storage-outflow option will write the basic storage-outflow data in a file labeled TAPE?
The option provides HEC-1 KK records for each routing reach identified with the HEC-2 downstream
and upstream section numbers. Corresponding storage and discharge values for each profile are
written to HEC-1 SV and SO records. HEC Training Document No. 30 describes the use of HEC-1
and HEC-2 for river routing.

It should be noted that the storage volumes computed by the program do not include any volumes
blocked out as ineffective flow. If the reach for which storage-discharge data is being generated has
ineffective flow areas, such as those normally located next to bridges, the storage data should be
adjusted accordingly. In some cases, it may be convenient to use high roughness coefficients ('n'
values) to block out these ineffective flow areas. This approach retains the storage volumes
associated with these areas.

It is recommended that the HEC-2 interpolated cross section option not be used in conjunction
with this option. Since the different number of cross sections for profiles in the same run could cause
inconsistencies in incremented storage values. The J4 record controls use of this option.

4.13 Split Flow Option

The HEC-2 split flow option provides for the automatic determination of channel discharges and
profiles in situations where flow is lost from the main channel. The split flow option can model flow
over levees or weirs, overtopping of watershed divides, and flow splits created by diversion structures.
This option allows the user to determine flow splits with weir, or normal depth analyses or by direct
input of rating curves. Use of the split flow option is described in HEC Training Document 18,
"Application of the HEC-2 Split Flow Option." The split flow option is compatible with all HEC-2 options
except Encroachment Methods 3-6.

4.14 Ice Covered Streams

The HEC-2 ice cover analysis option provides the user with the capability to determine water
surface profiles for streams with stationary floating ice cover. The option allows the user to input
different ice thickness in the channel and left and right overbanks, a composite Manning's 'n' value
is determined by the Belokon-Sabaneev formula [USACE, 1982]. In addition to hydraulic analysis the
option determines the potential for ice jams through the application of Pariset's ice stability function
[Pariset/Gagon, 1966].

26
 Chapter 5

Program Input

5.1 General
Fifty-three different records may be utilized to specify the many options and data input
requirements for computer program HEC-2. These records are described in detail in Appendix VII. In
generai the various records may be ciassified into the foiiowing six categories: split fiow,
documentation, job control, change, cross section, and bridge/culvert data records. Records in each
of the six categories are described briefly in the following sections.

5.2 Input Format

Data records are laid out in ten fields of eight columns each. One variable is used for each field
except the first field, where the first two record columns are used for the record identification
characters (i.e., T1, J1, GR). The format specification for each data record is A2, F6.0, 9F8.0. If
decimal points are not indicated in the data, all numbers must be right justified within the field. Where
the user desires to punch a decimal point it may appear anywhere within the field. All blank fields are
read as zeroes. The program uses -1, 1, 10 and 15 to specify certain program options. Any number
without a sign is considered positive.

Besides the fixed field format described above, the HEC-2 program also allows the use of
free-format input. Free format input data is automatically converted to fixed format input and written to
TAPE10. The TAPE10 file may be used for subsequent runs thereby providing faster executions and
allowing more convenient review of input data.

5.3 Data Organization

Data sets for HEC-2 have a range encompassing, at a minimum, a single job (profile) with one
cross section, to a run consisting of fourteen profiles with up to eight hundred cross sections. The
minimum data set would require records T3, J1, NC, X1, GR, EJ, and ER. Multiple profile data sets
using the same cross sections are constructed by successive sets of one or more title (T1 - T9)
records, plus J1 and J2 records for each profile immediately following the EJ record. Table 3
illustrates the organization of data for a typical multiple profile run. Section 5.10 provides a sample
problem illustrating basic input requirements.

5.4 Split Flow Records: SF, JC, JP, TW, WS, WC, TN, NS, NG, TC, CS,
CR, & EE

These records are used to specify input data for the split flow analysis capability. All split flow
data are entered ahead of all other HEC-2 data (AC, C, T1 etc.).

SF: Split Flow Record. The record is required when the split flow option is used. It must be
the first record in the HEC-2 input file.

27
 Table 3

Typical HEC-2 Data Organization

(Multiple Profile Run)

Record Type Record Identification Application

Split Flow SF*, JC, JP, TW, WS, WC, TN, NS, All Profiles
NG, TC, CS,CT,EE*

Documentation AC,C All Profiles

Documentation T1- T9 First Profile

Job Control J1*, J2

Job Control J3 - J6
Change NC*, NH, NV, KH, QT, ET, IC All Profiles
Cross Section X1 *, CI, X2, X3, X4, X5, GR*

Culvert (Special Culvert) SC*

Bridge (Special Bridge) SB* All Profiles
Cross Section X1*,X2*, X3, X4,X5, BT, GR

Change NC, NH, NV, KH, QT, ET, IC All Profiles

Cross Section X1*, CI, X2, X3, X4, X5, GR

Cross Section X1 *, CI, X2, X3, X4, X5, GR All Profiles

Job Control EJ*

Documentation T1 - T9 Second Profile

Job Control J1*, J2*

Documentation T1 - T9 Last Profile

Job Control J1*, J2*

Job Control ER* Terminate Run

*Indicates required records

JC & JP: Optional Split Flow Job Records. These records may be used to input titles or
initialize parameters for split flow analysis.

TW, WS, & WC: Weir Analysis Records. These records provide input for weir coefficients,
elevation-station coordinates, and other data required for loss determination using the weir
assumption.

TN, NS & NG: Normal Depth Analysis Records. These records provide input for normal depth
parameters, elevation-station coordinates and other data required for loss determination using the
normal depth assumption.

TC, CS, & CR: Rating Curve Analysis Record. These records provide input for analysis of split
flows by input rating curves.

28
 EE: End of Split Flow Analysis Record. This record is required to terminate a split flow
analysis. The EE record is the last of the split flow records; it is input just ahead of the first regular
HEC-2 data record (AC, C, T1 etc.).

5.5 Documentation Records: AC, C, T1 = T9

These records allow the user to document HEC-2 output to identify such items as stream name,
study location, discharge frequency, data sources, or other pertinent information that will identify the
unique character of a particular HEC-2 application.

AC: Archival Option. The optional AC record allows the user to document and create a
computer readable record of input data and computed results in a compact form, labeled TAPE96.
The archival file could be utilized with appropriate software to generate profile or cross section plots
and to create new output tables using any of the 86 variables available for summary printout. Multiple
AC records may be utilized to provide alphanumeric comments on the magnetic tape to document
data sources, study assumptions or other pertinent information.

C: Comment Records. These optional records can be used to provide alphanumeric

commentary in the data input list and in the standard cross section output. All the comments are
provided at the head of the input data file. The comments are identified by a unique section number.
The comments are printed with the associated section in program output.

T1 • T9: Title Records. One or more of these records should be used with each job (profile).
Title information provided by these records is printed at the beginning of output for each profile. A
portion of the T3 record is reserved for title information for summary printout tables and cross section
and profile plots.

*: Message in Input File Listing. Messages, notes, explanation of data, etc., can be inserted
anywhere in the input data set by placing the record identifier, *, in field zero of the line containing the
information. The messages will be printed in the input listing, but will not be printed at any other
location in the output. Blank lines may also be included in the input file and will be shown in the input
listing, but will be disregarded by the program during execution.

5.6 Job Control Records: J1, JR, JS, J2 - J6, EJ & ER

These records control the processing of data, specify the level of printout, select various
computation options, and terminate execution of the program. J1, JR, JS and J2 records apply only
to a particular profile and must be input for each profile of a run. Job control records J3 through J6
pertain to all profiles in a run and are only input with job records for the first profile.

J1: Required Job Record. This job record is required for each profile to specify starting
conditions, i.e., discharges, flow regime, water surface elevation, or energy slope. The J1 record also
controls the printing of the data input list and options related to metric units, computer generated
cross sections and the calculation of Manning's 'n' from high water marks.

JR: Optional Job Record. This optional job record can be used to input a starting rating curve;
up to 20 discharge-elevation values may be used.

JS: Optional Job Record. This optional job record may be used to specify assumed lost
discharges for each reach defined in a split flow model. Normally this option is only used when the
split flow option has experienced convergence problems.

29
 J2: Required Job Record. This job record is required for each profile except the first of a
multi-profile run. The use of the J2 record is optional for the first profile. This record controls the
reading of data records, the plotting of cross sections and profiles, modification of Manning's 'n', the
calculation of critical depth and simulates channel modification by trapezoidal excavation. The J2
record also controls the trace option, and requests flow distribution data.

J3: Optional Job Record. This job record is used on the first profile to select variables for
summary printout. The user may select from a list of 86 variables to define summary output tables.
The user also may choose from seven pre-defined tables to summarize data for bridges,
encroachments, channel improvements, and floodways.

J4: Optional Job Record. This job record is used on the first profile to create a file (TAPE?)
with modified-Puis routing data in the format required by computer program HEC-1.

J5: Optional Record. This job record is used to provide various levels of suppression of the
cross section data and summary tables. This record is used with job records for the first profile.

J6: Optional Job Record. This job record is used for the following: to select various equations
for computation of friction loss; to provide for transfer of control of disk/tape output units to system
control records; to control subdivision of the channel for hydraulic computations; and, the labeling of
profile plots.

EJ: End of Job Record. This required job control record follows data for the last cross section
to be read. It serves to terminate the reading of data records. Only one EJ record is required for
both single or multiple profile runs.

ER: End of Run Record. This required job control record terminates the execution of the
program. The ER record follows the EJ record of a single profile run or follows the last J2 record of a
multiple profile run.

5.7 Change Records: IC, NC, NH, NV, KH, QT, ET & CI

These records provide options to initialize and change values related to ice analysis, Manning's
'n', equivalent roughness 'k', discharge, cross section modification by encroachment, and channel
improvement options. When initial values are changed they remain changed for all subsequent cross
sections until another change record is encountered. Change records, IC - ET become effective at
the cross section (X1 record) immediately following the change records. The CI record is input in the
data set following the X1 record where the channel improvement option is to be initialized or changed.

IC: Ice Analysis Data. This optional record is used to specify ice thicknesses, 'n' values, and
specific gravity for the ice analysis option.

NC: Manning's 'n' Description. This record is required to initialize 'n' values and transition
(shock) loss coefficients prior to data for the first cross section. Subsequent NC records may be
utilized to permanently change values at any cross section within the data set.

NH: Horizontal Description of Manning's 'n'. This optional record can be utilized to specify
up to twenty 'n' values that vary with horizontal distance across the cross section. Normally NH
records apply to a single cross section and 'n' values should be redefined by either another set of
NH records or by an NC record for subsequent cross sections.

30
 NV: Vertical Description of Manning's 'n'. This optional record maybe used to specify
channel 'n' values that vary with elevation. Like the NH record, NV records normally apply to a
single cross section. Elevation-roughness data should encompass the full range of flow elevations
expected (e.g., invert to maximum ground elevation).

KH: Equivalent Roughness 'k'. This optional records can be used to specify up to twenty
'k' values that vary with horizontal distance across a cross section. Similar in application to the NH
record.

QT: Discharge Table. This optional record allows the user to input a table of up to 19
discharges for multiple profile runs. Subsequent QT records may be used to change discharge
values at any cross section. The discharge value to be used for a particular run is specified by a
variable on the J1 record.

ET: Encroachment Table. This optional record allows the user to input a table of up to nine
encroachment specifications for multiple profile runs. The encroachment specification to be utilized for
a particular profile corresponds with the field of the QT record selected by the J1 record.

CI: Optional Channel Improvement Record. This optional record allows a user to simulate the
improvement of channels by excavation. Invert elevations, side slopes, 'n' values and bottom widths
may be specified by this option. Up to five different bottom widths may be specified for analysis
during the execution of a multiple profile run. Up to three CI records may be used at a cross section.
By using more than one CI record a pilot channel may be modeled.

5.8 Cross Section Records: X1, RC, X2 - X5 & GR

These records are the basic data that describe the geometric properties of a stream. Each set of
X1 through X5 and GR records defines a single stream cross section. X1 and GR are required
records that provide the basic geometric representation for a reach of stream. X2 through X5 records
provide a series of options related to bridges, effective flow areas, additional geometric data, and high
water elevations.

X1: Required Cross Section Record. An X1 record is required to input data for each cross
section. Values on the X1 indicate the number of GR data points to be read on the following GR
records and locate the cross section by indicating the distance to the immediate downstream cross
section. Other values input on the X1 record locate the bank stations, raise or lower elevations on the
GR records, allow skewing (expansion or contraction of the GR data, and request a line printer plot of
the cross section data).

RC: Optional Rating Curve Record. This optional record provides the capability to input a
rating curve. With this option the water surface elevation at the cross section where the option is
employed is not determined by standard step computations but is based upon the input rating curve.

X2: Optional Cross Section Record. This record provides an array of options related to
discharge, bridges, program traces, and calculation of Manning's 'n'. An X2 record is required for
each application of the special bridge or culvert option.

X3: Optional Cross Section Record. The X3 record provides various options to remove
portions of the GR data from flow calculations. The removed or blocked out areas are referred to as
ineffective flow areas. The X3 record allows the specification of such ineffective flow areas as: areas
behind levees prior to overtopping; areas below a specified sediment elevation; filled areas; and areas
behind specified encroachment stations.

31
 X4: Optional Cross Section Record. This record allows additional ground points to be added
to the elevation station data contained on the GR records. This option is useful when modifying GR
data repeated from the previous cross section or when the effects of proposed obstructions such as
levees, piers or buildings are to be examined.

X5: Optional Cross Section Record. This record is used to input water surface elevations at a
cross section. Elevations or increments of elevation to be added to the water surface elevation of the
previous cross section may be specified. The elevation specified for a particular profile corresponds
with the field of the QT record selected by the J1 record.

GR: Ground Profile Record. This record inputs data that represents a profile of a stream taken
perpendicular to the direction of flow. Up to one hundred pairs of elevation-station data may be
utilized to describe the ground profile.

5.9 Bridge and Culvert Records: SB, SC & BT

These records are utilized to input data for bridge analysis by the normal bridge, the special
bridge, and special culvert methods. X2 and X3 records are also used for bridge and culvert analysis.

SB: Special Bridge Record. This record is required to input coefficients for pier shape, orifice
flow and weir flow for use by the special bridge method. Geometric properties of the bridge such as
weir length, width of piers, and net area of the opening of the bridge can also be input on the SB
record.

SC: Special Culvert Option. This record is required to input coefficients for entrance, exit,
roughness, and weir flow. Geometric data such as elevation, shape, size and number of culverts are
also input on SC records.

BT: Bridge Profile Record. The BT record is used to input bridge geometry for both normal
bridge, special bridge, and culvert analysis. For analysis by the normal bridge method, BT records
are utilized to describe the flow areas of the cross section that are blocked out by the bridge piers,
bridge deck and approach fill. For the special bridge and special culvert methods, the BT records are
used to define the weir profile.

5.10 Sample Problem Showing Basic Input

The following example illustrates the basic input required for most water surface profile
computations. The output for this example is shown in Chapter 6. Chapter 4 describes optional
capabilities which can be developed, with added input to a basic model like this example. Appendix I
provides sample HEC-2 applications of optional program features.

The example data will compute two subcritical water surface profiles starting with a known water
surface elevation. The discharges and starting elevations are shown in the profile plot, and the reach
lengths are shown in the plan plot. Manning's 'n' values are shown with the cross section plots.
Contraction and expansion coefficients are 0.1 and 0.3, respectively.

Three cross sections are used. The first section illustrates the basic floodplain section, with three
flow elements. The second section illustrates the cross section repeat capability. Prior to the third
section the discharge is redefined and the Manning's 'n' values are changed by varying them based
on horizontal stations. The third section also illustrates the effective area option input to ignore the
low overbank area until the elevation of the bank station is exceeded.

32
 PROFILE VIEW

II 0= 450 c1$ I
.,------+__' 0=500 cf. I
IEL-15ft
I--.~BO cf!-. -l.. .,:,Oc::=20=O"-'C!:!.fs"---_.--.j EI =13fl
! I I
II II II
~--"7777--_
Seclion 3
I
JW<x;;k---"'-;!;"T/7r;r--'
'III

.
Secllon 2 ~etionl

PLAN VIEW

--I
I ~d -4'
I I
\--._~ --+--'--'~------"'I
QQ' --

\ ..;..---~.~ . 500' --. .1

r'---
\ ......-.--
~---- Secfion 2 Secllon'

r
Seclion 3

Figure 8
Sample Problem Profile and Plan Views

--\f--/
CROSS grrJQlLL. •• 004
r---··ooe'-=-rrn.ooe--1
z20- ........." ..............
015-'
~.......- - _

~IO'-
..
'"
"'5-
I 1
I I I 1160 1 I I
o 50 100 150 170 2llO 2!iO
STATIONS

CROSS SECTION 2, (NOT sURVEYED)

Basod ott U,S,6.s" quad Gn"mt;

Section 2 Is 10% wId., and 0,411. ..."her thon StctlOft I,

~SECTION 3.

r---" n'O 1O--r-n.0081·004tn.00ll1

~~:="'--"---
~12- -'~_...--_. -~
~8- 2~O I 2~
I I 1 1 I 1260 I
o 50 100 ISO 200 250 300
STATIONS

Figure 9
Sample Problem Cross Sections

33
34
 Chapter 6

Program Output

6.1 General

Computer program HEC-2 provides the user with a wide variety of output control options.
Program output is generally written to output files(s), although on PC systems some output is directed
to the monitor. Commonly used output options are shown in Appendix I, Sample Applications of
HEC-2. Table 4 summarizes output control options.

Table 4
Control of Program Output

Output Control Records

Commentary C
Input Data Listing* J1.1
Detailed Output by Cross Section* J5
Flow Distribution J2.10, X2.10
Traces J2.10, X2.10
Summary Tables* J3,J5
Profile Plots* J2.3

i
Cross Section Plots J2.2, X1.10
Archival Tape (TAPE96) AC
i Storage-Outflow (TAPE7) J4
Fixed Format Input (TAPE 10) FR
Modified Data File (TAPE16) J2.8

*These data are normal program output, but may be suppressed.

The following output is from the Basic Input Example, presented in Chapter 5, page 34. The
default output sequence is: (1) input listing for the first profile, (2) detailed output for the first profile,
(3) printer plot for first profile, (4) input for the second profile, (5) output for the second profile, etc.,
and then (6) summary printout and error messages. There are no printer profile plots for the example
because the program requires five, or more, cross sections before the profile plot is produced. The
sections that follow provide a description of the default and optional output.

35
 --
•

:
HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Ver'sion 4" 6" 0; Febr'Uary 1991

··· ***************************************
•
•
•
•
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS
HYOROLOGIC ENGINEERING CENTER
609 SECOND STREET, SUITE D
DAVIS, CALIFORNIA 95616-4687
RUN DATE 06FEB91 TIME 13:53:59 • • (916) 756-1104 •
********************************************* ***************************************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX
END OF BANNER

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 13:53:59

HEC2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

T1 SAMPLE PROBLEM SHOWING BASIC INPUT

T2 First Profile, Q 200 cfs WSEL = 13 ft, =
T3 Sample Creek
T4 Use as many Title f'ecor'ds (T1- T9) as necessar'y to define the job.

Pr'ofile 1 f'eading field 2 of aT J star'ting at 13 ft. elevation.

Zero values indicate subcr'itical profile starting with known elevation"
J1 ICHECK INQ NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL Fa
2 0 0 13

Manning '5 'n' ,08 overbanks & .04 channel

Contraction coef" 0,,1 and Expansion coef:; 0 ,3
NC ,08 ,08 ,04 ,1 ,3

Dischar'ge table with 2 flows: 200 cfs and 500 cfs

QT 2 200 500

Cr'oss section 1 with 7 GR stations. and bank stations at 150 and 170.
Reach lengths to downstream section are not required for first section"
X1 1 7 150 170
GR 20 0 15 50 12 150 5 160 12 170
GR 15 200 20 250

Repeat Cf'OSS section, 500 ft, f'each lengths, expand 10%, r'aise 0,4 ft,
X1 2 500 500 500 1,1

Revise Manning's 'n' values based on stations at Section 3

NH 4 ,,10 150 ,,08 220 ,04 260 ,08 300

Revise the dischar'ges, star'ting with the next section (SECNO 3)

QT 2 180 450

Reach lengths: 500' left, 400' r'ight, & 450' channel

X1 3 8 220 260 500 400 450

Effective area option to exclude low overbank area until flow exceeds
the bank elevat ion"
X3 10
GR 20 0 16 50 12 150 16 220 8 250
GR 12 260 16 275 20 300

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 2

EJ ends input of reach model.. Following data define added pr'ofiles

--

36
 06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 3

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L··BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR !TRIAL IQC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF

CCHV= .100 CEH'.J= ,,300

'SECNO 1.000
1.000 800 13.00 ,00 13.00 13.07 ,07 ,00 ,,00 12.00
200. 5. 194. 1- 17. 90. 5. O. O. 12.00
.00 ,,28 2,,15 ,,28 ,,080 040 ,080 000 5,00 116,67
000590 0, 0, 0 0 ,00 63,33 180,00

'SECNO 2.000
0"
°
2.000 7,,88 13.28 ,,00 .00 13.35 06 ,,28 ,,00 12.40
200. 4. 195. 1- 15. 97. 4. 1. 1. 12.40
.07 .25 2.02 .25 ,,080 ,040 ,080 ,,000 5,40 132,38
,000517 500, 1 0 ,00 64,40 196,79

1490 NH CARD USED

500" 500"
°
'SECNO 3,,000
3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 16 ,00 ELREA= 12 ,00

3.000 5,,55 13.55 ,00 ,00 13.61 ,06 ,26 ,,00 16.00
180. O. 178. 2. O. 93. 4. 2. 1- 12.00
.14 .00 1.92 .39 ,,000 ,040 ,080 ,000 800 229,,22
,,000649 500" 450, 400, 1 ,00 36,,56 265,78
° °

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 4

T1 Second pr'ofile, only one title r'equir'ed

Read field 3 of QT "Gear'ds and star't at elevation 15 ft
Jl ICHECK lNO NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

3 15

J2 record required for' subsequent pr'ofiles to define pr'ofile number"

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM !TRACE

2
ER r'9cord ends the run"

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 5

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR !TRIAL IDC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF 2

CCHV= .100 CEHV= ,,300

'SECNO 1.000
1.000 10.00 15.00 .00 15.00 15.10 .10 ,,00 ,00 12.00
500. 94. 378. 28. 150. 130. 45. O. D. 12.00
.00 ,62 2,91 ,62 ,080 ,040 ,,080 ,000 5,00 50,,00
,000660 0, 0, 0, 0 0 0 ,00 150,00 200,00

'SECNO 2.000
2.000 9.92 15.32 .00 .00 15.41 .09 ,30 ,,00 12.40
500. 89. 384. 27. 157. 141- 47. 4. 2. 12.40
.06 .57 2.72 .57 ,,080 ,040 080 000 5,40 57,82
,000563 500" 500, 500, 1 0 0 00 161,,33 219,,15

1490 NH CARD USED

'SECNO 3,000

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 16,00 ELREA= 12,00

3.000 7,,60 15.60 .00 ,,00 15.70 .10 ,,29 00 16.00

450. O. 432. 18. O. 164. 24. 7. 3. 12.00
• 11 .00 2.63 .75 ,000 ,,040 ,,080 ,,000 8,,00 221,53

--
,000772 500" 450, 400, 0 0 0 ,00 51,,94 273,47

37
 06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 6

THIS RUN EXECUTED 08AUG90 09:12:05

HEC2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

NOTE- ASTERISK (*) AT LEFT OF CROSS-SECTION NUMBER INDICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST

Sample Cr'eek

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 150

SECNO XLCH ELTRD ELLC ELMIN Q CWSEL CRIWS EG 10*KS VCH AREA ,,01K
1,,000 ,,00 ,00 ,,00 5,,00 200,,00 13,,00 ,00 13,07 5,,90 2,15 111..67 82,,33
1,,000 ,,00 00 ,00 5,,00 500,,00 15,,00 ,00 15,10 6,60 2,91 325,00 194,,70
2,,000 500,,00 00 00 5.40 200,00 13,,28 ,00 13,35 517 2,02 115,,43 87,92
2,000 500,,00 ,,00 ,00 5.40 500,00 15,,32 ,,00 15.41 563 2,,72 344,95 210,64
3,,000 450,,00 ,00 ,00 800 180,00 13,55 ,00 13,61 6,49 192 97.46 70,64
3,000 450,,00 00 ,00 8.00 450.00 15,60 ,00 15,70 7,72 263 18818 16195

1iI1i11i11i11i1~~IiI~~~~~~~~~I:II:llif

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 7

Sample Creek

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 150

SECNO Q CWSEL DIFWSP DIFWSX DIFKWS TOPWID XLCH

1,,000 20000 13,00 00 .00 ,,00 63,,33 ,00
1,,000 500,,00 15,00 2,,00 ,,00 00 150,,00 ,,00

2,,000 200,00 13,,28 ,00 28 ,00 64,40 500,00

2,000 500,00 1532 2.03 ,,32 ,,00 161,33 500,00
3,,000 180,,00 13,,55 ,00 ,26 ,00 36.56 450.00
3,000 450,,00 15,,60 2,,05 .26 ,00 51,94 450.00

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 8

SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES

6.2 Program Identification Block

Each execution of the program will print a program identification block in the upper left corner of
the first page of output. Information contained in the block includes program version number and
date.

6.3 Job Control Data

The first lines of output following the program identification block are title records
(T1 - T9) for the first profile. Following the title information, input data on the J1 record and optional
job records J2 through J6 (if used) are printed. Subsequent sets of T1 through J2 data are printed
prior to execution of the respective profiles.

38
6.4 Input Data

A listing of the input data (records NC through EJ) is printed following the job control data for the
first profile. This listing may be suppressed by coding a minus ten for variable ICHECK(J1.1) on the
J1 record for the first profile.

6.5 Comments and Remarks

Comments to document data sources, study assumptions, or to label specific cross sections may
be input with the data set. These comments will appear immediately ahead of the cross section they
refer to in the input data listing and the cross section data. Remarks (*) only appear in the input
listing in the same sequence they occupy in the input file.

6.6 Output Labels

In order to assist users with interactive terminals, unique labels are generated by the program at
the beginning of each profile (e.g., *PROF 2) and at each cross section (e.g., *SECNO 21.100). With
commonly available system text editors, these labels allow easy location of calculated data within the
cross section data printout. The J5 record can be utilized to suppress all or portions of the cross
section data printout to further facilitate the use of the program on interactive terminals.

6.7 Cross Section Data

Computed results are printed for each cross section following the data input list for the first profile
and following the job control data for subsequent profiles. Headings listing the names of each of the
40 variables arranged in the same spatial order are printed periodically throughout the data.
Appendix VI contains definitions of these variables.

Figure 10
Cross Section Output Display

6.8 Flow Distribution

The cross section data printout shows the distribution of flow in three subdivisions of the cross
section: left overbank, channel and right overbank. Additional output showing the distribution of flow
in overbanks of the cross section may be requested by the user. When the flow distribution option is

39
requested, the program prints out the lateral distribution of area, velocity, percent of total discharge,
and depth for up to thirteen subdivisions of the cross section. Manning's 'n' values are also ~hown
if KH data is used. This program output is requested for all cross sections of a profile by setting
variable ITRACE on the J2 record equal to fifteen. Flow distribution for a single cross section may be
requested by setting ITRACE on the X2 record equal to fifteen. For additional information see
Appendix II.

Figure 11
Flow Distribution Output Display

6.9 Special Notes

Special notes and error messages are printed at various locations in the cross section data to
inform the user of various assumptions or options that have been used during computations. These
notes should be carefully reviewed to assure an accurate profile. Special notes are described in
Appendix V.

6.10 Program Trace

When modifying HEC-2 or installing it on different computer systems, programmers sometimes

find it useful to print out important variables as they are computed to aid in checking, debugging and
understanding the program. Two levels of program trace are available for this purpose. The minor
trace prints values of variables, for each trial, used in the following computations:

(1) Interpolated cross sections

(2) Manning's 'n' from known water surface elevations
(3) Computed water surface elevation
(4) Weir flow
(5) Critical water surface elevation

The major trace, in addition to data printed for the minor trace, prints values of variables used in
the computation of the hydraulic properties of each subarea of a cross section.

ITRACE on the· J2 and X2 records is used to specify the desired level of trace. The minor trace
may be called separately, ITRACE = 1, or in combination with the major trace, ITRACE = 10. If all
cross sections are to be traced, the J2 record is used. If only individual cross sections are to be
traced, the X2 records are used. The trace option can generate very large output files, for this reason
this option is typically not used in normal applications.

6.11 Profile Plots

Profile plots are printed following the cross section data for jobs having five or more cross
sections. These plots show the location of cross sections and elevations of critical depth, water

40
surface, energy grade line, channel invert, left and right bank elevations, and the lowest of the end
stations of the cross section. The vertical and horizontal scales of a profile may be specified by J2
record variables PRFVS and XSECH, respectively. If these variables are omitted the program will
automatically determine the appropriate scale values.

6.12 Cross Section Plots

Printer plots of any or all of the stream cross sections to any scale may be requested by using
the J2 and Xi records. If all cross sections are to be plotted, set variable IPLOT on the J2.2 record
equal to one or ten. If only certain cross sections are desired, IPLOT on the J2.2 record should be left
blank and variable IPLOT on the X1.1 0 record should be set equal to one or ten for the cross section
to be plotted. Vertical and horizontal scales of the plot may be specified constant for all cross
sections in the job using variables XSECV (J2.4) and XSECH (J2.S). If the scale is not specified, the
largest scale which is a multiple of one, two or five that produces three pages of output or less will be
used. For some deep river cross sections, flow may occupy only a small portion of the total cross
section. In this case it may be desirable to enlarge the scale and to print only the cross section points
up to the water surface elevation. This may be done by using a value of ten for IPLOT instead of one.

6.13 Summary Data

Tables may be requested to summarize data in a tabular form for either single or multiple profile
runs. The J3 record may be used to specify user- and pre-defined tables. User-defined tables of one
to 13 variables may be specified from a list of 86 variables. User-defined tables may be specified to
permit summary output that will conveniently print on 72 or 80 column terminals. Seven pre-defined
tables are available to summarize data for bridges, culverts, encroachments, channel improvements,
and flood hazard zones.

6.14 TAPE16 Scratch File for Writing Modified Data Input

Information reflecting changes to cross-sectional data and reach lengths resulting from channel
modification and other program options can be written to an optional scratch file named TAPE16.
This file can be used as a portion of the input file in subsequent runs, providing additional versatility in
the use of program options. With this new file, encroachments can be analyzed and NH or KH
records can be used to define roughness, thus avoiding some of the conflicts that would ordinarily
occur between these options and the channel improvement option.

This option is implemented by entering any negative number in Field 8 of the J2 record. A
TAPE16 file will be written containing information for each cross section of each profile. An example of
an input file utilizing this feature and the corresponding TAPE16 file created by this input file is shown
in Figures 12 and 13 respectively.

6.15 Archive File

The archive file TAPE96, written with the use of the AC record, provides 86 output variables for
each section in standard numeric form. Note that this file contains all of the information found in the
TAPE95 file in a formatted text form rather than a binary form. This feature allows other programs to
easily access this information.

41
 Figure 12
Input File Used to Create TAPE16 File

Figure 13
Example of TAPE16 File

42
 An archival file can be used, with appropriate software, as a basis for further analysis. For
example, additional profile plots can be generated; new output tables can be produced using any of
the variables available for summary printout (J3 record); and cross section data can be verified. This
may be particularly valuable when analysis is required to determine encroachment or floodways within
the study area.

The Archival tape is structured as follows:

Section A. Input data records

Section B. Header block showing program version

Section C. Number of output variables and cross sections

Section D. Alphanumeric names of output variables

Section E. Output variables for each cross section

THIS IS AN ARCHIVAL RUN ALL DATA AND RESULTS ARE SAVED ON UNIT 96

This indicates the unit number (in this example Unit 96) on which the file is written. It is the
user's responsibility to provide the required job control statements to insure that the file written on Unit
96 will appear on magnetic tape or otherwise be saved by the system after execution.

The information written to the tape is formatted 130 character lines. This will allow the tape to be
listed directly on a line printer. It should be noted that the file will contain characters in column one
that are not intended as line printer carriage control. Thus for direct tape listing, the lines should be
shifted one column.

6.16 Storage-Outflow

Storage-discharge data may be written to TAPE? in a format for modified Puis routing using
program HEC-1 . The J4 record defines the downstream and upstream section numbers for each
routing reach. Training Document No. 30 describes the combined application of HEC-1 and HEC-2
for storage routing.

43
 Chapter 7

References

Barnes, Harry H., Jr., "Roughness Characteristics of Natural Channels," Geological Survey
Water-Supply Paper 1849, 1967.

Chow, Yen Te, Open-Channel Hydraulics, 1959.

Fasken, Guy B., Guide for Selecting Roughness Coefficient 'n' Values for Channels, Soil
Conservation Service, December 1963.

Hydrologic Engineering Center, HEC-1, Flood Hydrograph Package User's Manual, September
1990.

Pariset, E, R. Hausser, and A Gagon, "Formation of Ice Covers and Ice Jams in Rivers," Journal
of the Hydraulics Division, ASCE 92:1-24, 1966.

Reed, J.R. and AJ. Wolfkill, "Evaluation of Friction Slopes Models," River 76, Symposium on
Inland Waterways for Navigation Flood Control and Water Diversions, Colorado State University,
1976.

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Backwater Curves in River Channels, EM 1110-2-1409, 7

December 1959.

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Ice Engineering Manual, EM 1110-2-1612, 15 October 1982.

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Hydraulic Design of Flood Control Channels, EM 1110-2-1601,
1970.

45
 Chapter 8

Supplemental Material

The following supporting publications and illustrations are available from HEC for computer
program HEC-2, Water Surface Profiles:

a. Eichert, 8i!! S., ·Survey of Programs for Water Surface Profiles,' HEC Technica! Paper No. 11,
1968. (Published in the Journal of the Hydraulics Division, ASCE, Vol. 96, No. HY 2,
February 1970.)

b. Eichert, Bill S., "Computer Determination of Flow Through Bridges,' HEC Technical Paper
No. 20, 1970. (Published in the Journal of the Hydraulics Division, ASCE, Vol. 96, No. HY 7,
July 1970.)

c. "Water Surface Profiles,· IHD Volume 6, (out of print).

d. Eichert, Bill S., "Critical Water Surface by Minimum Specific Energy Using the Parabolic
Method,· HEC Technical Paper No. 69, 1969. (out of print)

e. HEC Training Document No.5, "Floodway Determination Using Computer Program HEC-2",
January 1988.

f. HEC Training Document No. 18, "Application of the HEC··2 Split Flow Option, April 1982".

g. HEC Training Document No. 26, "Computing Water Surface Profiles with HEC-2 on a
Personal Computer", February 1990.

h. HEC Training Document No. 30, "River Routing with HEC-1 and HEC-2", July 1990.

47
 Appendix I

Sample Applications of HEC-2

 Appendix I
Table of Contents

The following examples illustrate many of the input and output options available in HEC-2. These
examples are contrived to show program features and may not represent realistic models of the actual
streams.

Example
Number Sample HEC-2 Application Page

1 Single Profile Run with Added Cross-Section Input Options and Several
Output Options 1-1

2 Multiple Profile Run with Tributary Profiles, Normal and Special Bridge Input.
Comments are Used to Annotate Input Options ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-9

3 Multiple Profile Run with Channel Improvement (CHIMP) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-16

4 Multiple Profile Floodway with Encroachment Methods 1 through 5.

Output is Limited to Flow Distributions and Floodway Summary Tables 1-20

5 Single Profile run with the Split Flow Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-28

Note: There are additional bridge examples in Appendix III and culvert examples in Appendix IV.
 Example No. 1

Input

T1 Example 1: Single profile subcritical run

T2 Output options include: User design summary, flow distribution, suppress
T2 printer plot of profile, and cross-section printer plot.
T3 Bear Creek
T4 Input options include: Effective area option, encroachment method 1 ,
T5 add points, repeat cross section, and change discharge.
* Starting with energy slope and estimated water surface elevation
J1 0.0092 7800 1756.02
* Supress profile printer plot (J2.3 = -1)
J2 -1
* User designed output with variables and defined table (150)
J3 38 1 3 57 68 150
NC .1 .1 .04 .1 .3

* Use effective area option to only consider overbank when channel banks are
* exceeded (X3.1 = 10).
* Use left encroachment to block low overbank area beyond station 183 (X3.4&5)
X1 1.0 60 767 815 0 0 0
X3 10 183 1757
GR1'767.0 0 1765.4 23 1763.5 49 1'762.0 69 1759.1 87
GR1758.1 103 1756.9 113 1756.9 122 1753.2 127 1753.1 131
GR1757.7 140 1757.7 152 1755.0 160 1755.6 168 1755.6 171
GR1755.6 174 1754.7 177 1755.9 183 1756.0 190 1754.9 208
GR1754.7 220 1753.7 247 1753.3 282 1752.7 321 1750.9 352
GR1748.6 373 1747.2 391 1748.3 404 1752.1 434 1753.6 452
GR1753.7 477 1752.6 499 1753.2 532 1753.4 572 1753.9 613
GR1753.3 644 1754.4 677 1754.7 698 1755.6 728 1756.2 750
GR1755.7 767 1749.9 772 1749.3 775 1748.0 775 1747.4 778
GR1749.3 785 1749.7 789 1752.9 797 1755.5 807 1756.9 815
GR1755.3 827 1756.3 847 1756.2 866 1756.9 871 1759.5 877
GR1760.7 893 1762.0 918 1763.2 936 1764.3 963 1766.2 990

* Request Effective Area option (X3.1 = 10)

X1 2.00 45 768 816 500 480 510
X3 10
GR1764.5 220 1764.2 224 1763.8 232 1763.4 240 1762.5 245
GR1761.2 248 1762.8 255 1762.4 260 1761.4 263 1761.4 267
GR1759.3 271 1758.5 285 1758.7 298 1758.6 315 1757.7 326
GR1755.8 336 1755.7 347 1755.8 358 1757.3 374 1757.3 411
GR1756.5 433 1756.4 459 1755.2 482 1753.5 508 1755.1 539
GR1755.8 550 1758.0 578 1759.0 606 1759.1 632 1760.1 666
GR1759.6 693 1759.4 718 1760.2 748 1759.5 760 1759.8 768
GR1755.5 771 1754.6 773 1753.6 776 1754.6 788 1755.4 795
GR1762.6 816 1761.9 828 1761 .9 851 1762.5 893 1763.9 919

* Channel & left bank 'n' value changed for next and following cross sections
NC .085 .035
* Flow distribution requested for section 3 (X2.10 = 15)
X1 3.00 59 1017 1068 620 550 610
X2 15
X3 10
GR1772.3 0 1772.7 78 1772.7 103 1771.8 112 1771 .2 124
GR1771.5 164 1771.5 182 1771 .3 210 1771.8 225 1769.2 247
GR1769.2 253 1768.3 275 1766.5 310 1765.1 322 1764.1 341
GR1763.1 381 1763.5 486 1764.4 502 1764.1 513 1764.5 534
GR1764.6 557 1764.8 591 1764.2 619 1762.3 647 1760.3 666
GR1760.5 684 1762.4 707 1765.3 735 1765.8 766 1766.0 796
GR1765.8 825 1765.6 860 1765.6 906 1765.8 940 1765.8 980
GR1766.1 991 1765.8 1017 1763.1 1025 1762.4 1032 1761.3 1034
GR1759.4 1053 1761.3 1059 1763.5 1068 1765.1 1093 1765.6 1116
GR1765.5 1134 1766.9 1156 1770.0 1169 1770.5 1188 1770.9 1218
GR1771.5 1234 1771.2 1258 1771 .1 1290 1770.6 1330 1770.1 1365
GR1770.9 1390 1773.5 1415 1777.0 1442 1778.6 1465

1-1
* Cross-section plot to water surface requested for section 4 (X1.10 = 10)
X1 4.00 65 1248 1285 580 600 620 10
X3 10
GR1775.9 254 1775.2 284 1775.0 314 1774.6 358 1774.5 373
GR1774.6 388 1773.8 407 1775.0 424 1775.0 441 1775.7 461
GR1775.7 465 1774.0 466 1774.0 474 1776.9 482 1775.0 488
GR1774.7 503 1773.5 506 1773.9 509 1773.9 512 1773.9 516
GR1772.2 518 1773.9 527 1772.5 543 1772.8 554 1772.9 565
GR1771.9 587 1771.3 619 1770.4 641 1770.6 658 1769.2 680
GR1765.9 697 1763.0 709 1763.7 713 1767.0 733 1768.5 747
GR1769.4 765 1769.4 798 1769.3 833 1768.9 865 1769.1 889
GR1769.0 907 1769.6 941 1769.2 974 1769.9 1006 1769.8 1032
GR1769.6 1060 1770.1 1088 1770.2 1126 1770.5 1159 1770.5 1187
GR1771.0 1198 1768.5 1207 1769.3 1221 1769.2 1248 1764.0 1257
GR1763.0 1263 1764.0 1267 1764.0 1275 1773.7 1285 1781.4 1302
GR1789.6 1320 1789.7 1332 1790.5 1352 1790.2 1373 1788.7 1396

* Cross section 5 is a repeat of cross section 4 raised 5 ft.

X1 5 600 650 670 5
X3 10
* Manning's n values.04changed for next, and following sections
NC .08 .09
X1 6 45 595 694 650 550 630
GR1792.9 0 1791.0 75 1790.6 113 1789.4 164 1788.9 179
GR1787.1 184 1785.3 210 1784.7 263 1782.6 317 1781.0 323
GR1781.4 330 1780.3 339 1779.4 343 1778.4 346 1777.4 350
GR1779.8 353 1779.5 362 1780.0 369 1780.4 395 1779.9 398
GR1780.2 422 1779.1 452 1778.7 476 1778.2 499 1778.0 522
GR1778.0 550 1778.5 579 1779.0 595 1776.6 613 1774.1 626
GR1774.5 635 1775.3 643 1779.8 694 1780.3 705 1781 .7 730
GR1784.9 785 1786.7 809 1787.7 817 1788.2 854 1788.5 878
GR1789.8 907 1792.0 937 1794.0 961 1795.3 987 1797.3 1015

* Add a point to GR array with X4 input.

X1 7.00 55 912 983 590 600 620
X4 1 1785.1 800
GR1798.3 0 1794.5 22 1792.4 44 1790.8 69 1788.1 108
GR1787.4 133 1786.3 164 1785.2 206 1784.1 244 1784.2 281
GR1784.0 316 1783.5 353 1783.6 388 1783.7 418 1782.0 438
GR1782.7 464 1782.6 479 1781.0 488 1781.1 496 1781.2 508
GR1783.1 516 1783.1 540 1781.6 550 1782.7 554 1782.7 558
GR1787.7 561 1786.3 564 1788.8 570 1789.2 584 1788.9 606
GR1787.3 621 1786.4 652 1785.6 680 1784.9 709 1785.3 740
GR1785.1 777 1784.9 806 1784.3 830 1783.9 853 1784.8 886
GR1784.6 912 1783.8 932 1780.6 954 1779.7 963 1777.2 970
GR1779.7 976 1784.5 983 1787.5 1004 1788.8 1024 1790.6 1050
GR1792.1 1077 1794.3 1108 1795.4 1138 1796.7 1169 1798.6 1217

* New discharge read on X2

X1 8.00 68 1089 1140 580 630 600
X2 7000
GR1803.0 0 1801 .5 22 1799.8 36 1796.4 55 1794.1 70
GR1794.6 94 1793.7 123 1792.0 152 1791 .1 182 1790.5 212
GR1790.0 249 1791 .1 270 1792.2 283 1793.0 299 1792.6 324
GR1790.5 337 1789.3 343 1788.9 350 1789.4 375 1789.5 405
GR1789.0 436 1788.4 449 1788.2 461 1788.7 490 1789.2 518
GR1789.5 536 1789.7 548 1788.8 572 1788.4 590 1789.2 596
GR1787.4 599 1787.7 603 1787.6 606 1788.2 613 1788.5 635
GR1787.7 650 1787.5 673 1787.6 708 1787.0 738 1787.3 773
GR1787.1 809 1787.0 847 1787.3 886 1786.9 916 1786.8 946
GR1787.3 979 1787.9 1010 1788.2 1041 1788.4 1070 1788.0 1079
GR1789.5 1089 1788.7 1096 1784.6 1101 1784.3 1109 1784.7 1116
GR1784.6 1119 1785.3 1131 1790.3 1140 1790.8 1148 1791.5 1181
GR1792.3 1208 1792.3 1241 1792.9 1272 1793.6 1302 1794.6 1331
GR1795.8 1358 1798.9 1382 1802.7 1402
EJ
ER

1-2
 Output

HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS

HYOROLOGIC ENGINEERING CENTER
: Ver'sion 4,,6,,0; Febr'uar'y 1991 * 609 SECONO STREET, SUITE 0
* DAVIS, CALI FORNIA 95616-4687
* RUN DATE 06FEB91 TIME 13:53:59 * (916) 756-1104
******************************************** ***************************************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX
END OF BANNER

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 13:53:59

HEC··2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

T1 Example 1: Single pr'ofile 5ubcritical r'un

T2 Output options include: User design summary J flow distribution, suppress
T2 pr'inter' plot of profile J and cross-section printer plot
T3 Bear' Creek
T4 Input options include: Effective ar'ea option J encroachment method 1,
T5 add points, repeat cr'oss section, and change discharge.
Star'ting with energy slope and estimated water sUf'face elevation
J1 ICHECK INQ NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HYINS Q WSEL Fa
0.0092 7800 1756.02
Supr'9ss pr'ofile printer plot (J23 -1)

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

-1

User' designed output with var'iables and defined table (150)

J3 VARIABLE CODES FOR SUMMARY PRINTOUT
38 3 57 68 150

NC ,1 ,,1 .04 ,,1 3

Use effective ar'ea option to only consider over'bank when channel banks are
exceeded (X3.1 = 10).
Use left encroachment to block low overbank ar'ea beyond station 183 (X3.4&5)
X1 1.0 60 767 815 0 0 0
X3 10 183 1757
GR 17670 0 1765.4 23 17635 49 1762,,0 69 1759 1 87
GR 1758,,1 103 1756.9 113 1756,,9 122 1753,2 127 1753,,1 131
GR 1757 .. 7 140 1757,7 152 1755,.0 160 1755,,6 168 17556 171
GR 1755.6 174 1754,7 177 1755.9 183 1756.0 190 1754,,9 208
GR 1754,,7 220 1753,,7 247 1753,,3 282 1752,,7 321 1750,,9 352
GR 1748,,6 373 1747,2 391 1748,,3 404 1752,,1 434 17536 452
GR 1753.7 477 1752,,6 499 1753,,2 532 1753..4 572 1753,,9 613
GR 1753.3 644 1754,,4 677 1754 .. 7 698 1755 .. 6 728 17562 750
GR 1755 .. 7 767 17499 772 1749 .. 3 775 1748,,0 775 1747..4 778
GR 1749.3 785 17497 789 1752.9 797 1755.5 807 1756,,9 815
GR 1755.3 827 1756" 3 847 1756.2 866 1756 .. 9 871 1759,5 877
GR 1760,7 893 1762,,0 918 1763.2 936 1764,,3 963 1766,2 990

Request Effective Mea option (X3" 1 = 10)

_"""""""lll~"
06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 2

X1 2,00 45 768 816 500 480 510

X3 10
GR 1764 .. 5 220 1764.2 224 1763,,8 232 1763.4 240 1762.5 245
GR 1761 .. 2 248 1762.8 255 1762..4 260 1761 .. 4 263 1761.4 267
GR 1759,,3 271 1758,,5 285 1758,,7 298 1758 .. 6 315 1757 7 326
GR 1755,,8 336 1755.7 347 1755.,8 358 1757 .. 3 374 1757 3 411
GR 1756,,5 433 1756,,4 459 1755,,2 482 1753.5 508 1755,,1 539
GR 1755,,8 550 1758,0 578 17590 606 1759.1 632 1760,,1 666
GR 1759.6 693 1759.4 718 1760 .. 2 748 1759.5 760 1759.8 768
GR 1755.5 771 1754,6 773 17536 776 1754 .. 6 788 1755.4 795
GR 1762.6 816 1761.9 828 17619 851 1762.5 893 1763.,9 919

Channel & left bank 'n' value changed for next and following cross sections
NC .085 .035
Flow distr'ibution r'equested for section 3 (X2,,10 = 15)
X1 3.00 59 1017 1068 620 550 610
X2 15
X3 10

1-3
GR 1772,,3 0 1772,,7 78 17727 103 1771,,8 112 1771..2 124
GR 1771,,5 164 1771.5 182 1771,,3 210 1771,,8 225 1769,,2 247
GR 1769.2 253 1768.3 275 1766,,5 310 1765.1 322 1764,,1 341
GR 1763.1 381 1763,,5 486 1764,,4 502 1764,,1 513 1764,,5 534
GR 1764.6 557 1764,,8 591 1764,,2 619 1762.3 647 1760,,3 666
GR 1760,,5 684 1762..4 707 1765.3 735 1765.8 766 1766,,0 796
GR 1765 .. 8 825 17656 860 1765 .. 6 906 1765,,8 940 1765.8 980
GR 17661 991 1765.8 1017 1763.1 1025 1762,,4 1032 1761.3 1034
GR 1759 . 4 1053 1761,,3 1059 1763 .. 5 1068 1765,,1 1093 1765.6 1116
GR 1765,,5 1134 1766.9 1156 1770,,0 1169 1770,,5 1188 1770 . 9 1218
GR 1771.5 1234 1771.2 1258 1771..1 1290 1770,,6 1330 1770,,1 1365
GR 1770.9 1390 17735 1415 1777.0 1442 1778,,6 1465

Cross· section plot to water sUf'face r'equested for section 4 (X1 . 10 = 10)
X1 4.00 65 1248 1285 580 600 620 10
X3 10
GR 1775.9 254 1775,,2 284 1775.0 314 17746 358 1774.5 373
GR 1774.6 388 1773.8 407 17750 424 1775.0 441 1775,,7 481
GR 1775.7 465 1774.0 466 1774,,0 474 1776,,9 482 1775,,0 488
GR 1774.7 503 1773,,5 506 1773,,9 509 1773.9 512 1773,,9 516
GR 1772.2 518 1773,,9 527 1772,,5 543 1772,,8 554 1772,,9 565
GR 1771,,9 587 1771,,3 619 1770..4 641 1770,,6 658 1769,,2 680
GR 1765.9 697 1763,,0 709 1763.7 713 1767.0 733 1768,,5 747
GR 1769,,4 765 1769.4 798 1769,,3 833 1768.9 865 1769.1 889
GR 1769,,0 907 1769.6 941 1769,,2 974 1769,,9 1006 1769.8 1032
GR 1769,,6 1060 1770.1 1088 1770,,2 1126 1770,,5 1159 1770.5 1187
GR 1771.0 1198 1768,,5 1207 1769,,3 1221 1769,,2 1248 1764.0 1257
GR 1763,,0 1263 1764,,0 1267 1764 . 0 1275 1773,,7 1285 1781.4 1302
GR 17896 1320 17897 1332 1790,,5 1352 1790.2 1373 1788,,7 1396

Cr'oss section 5 is a r'epeat of cr'oss section 4 r'aised 5 ft.

(10000000000000000000

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 3

X1 5 600 650 670 5

X3 10

Manning's n values changed for next, and following sections

NC .08 .09 .04
X1 6 45 595 694 650 550 630
GR 1792,,9 0 1791 . 0 75 1790,,6 113 1789,,4 164 17889 179
GR 1787,,1 164 1785,,3 210 1784,,7 263 1782,,6 317 1781,,0 323
GR 1781,,4 330 17803 339 1779..4 343 1778.4 346 1777,,4 350
GR 1779.8 353 1779.5 362 1780,,0 369 1780.4 395 1779.9 398
GR 1780.2 422 1779,,1 452 1778,,7 476 1778.2 499 1778.0 522
GR 1778.0 550 1778,,5 579 1779.0 595 1776,,6 613 1774.1 626
GR 1774.5 635 1775.3 643 1779.8 694 1780,,3 705 1781..7 730
GR 1784 .. 9 785 1786.7 809 1787.7 817 1788,,2 854 1788.5 878
GR 1789,,8 907 1792.0 937 1794.0 961 1795,,3 987 17973 1015

Add a point to GR array with X4 input,

X1 7,,00 55 912 983 590 600 620

X4 1 1785.1 800
GR 1798.3 0 1794,,5 22 1792.4 44 17908 69 1788.1 108
GR 1787,,4 133 1786,,3 164 1785,,2 206 1784 1 244 1784.2 281
GR 1784 .. 0 316 1783.5 353 1783.6 388 1783,,7 418 1782 .. 0 438
GR 1782.7 464 1782,,6 479 1781 . 0 488 17B1,,1 496 1781.2 508
GR 1783.1 516 1783,,1 540 1781.6 550 1782.7 554 1782.7 558
GR 17877 561 1786,,3 564 1788,,8 570 1789.2 584 1788 9 606
GR 1787,,3 621 1786.4 652 1785,,6 680 1784.9 709 1785.3 740
GR 1785,,1 777 1784.9 806 1784 .3 830 1783 9 853 1784,,8 886
GR 1784,,6 912 1783.8 932 1780.6 954 1779 7 963 1777,,2 970
GR 1779,,7 976 1784.5 983 1787.5 1004 1788.8 1024 1790,,6 1050
GR 1792,,1 1077 1794.3 1108 1795.4 1138 1796.7 1169 1798.6 1217

New dischar'ge r'ead on X2

X1 8.00 68 1089 1140 580 630 600

X2 7000
GR 1803.0 0 1801 .. 5 22 1799 . 8 36 1796 .. 4 55 1794,,1 70
GR 1794,,6 94 1793 .. 7 123 1792,,0 152 1791..1 182 1790,,5 212
GR 1790.0 249 1791..1 270 1792.2 283 1793 .. 0 299 1792,,6 324
GR 1790,,5 337 1789,,3 343 1788 .. 9 350 1789 . 4 375 1789 . 5 405
GR 1789,,0 436 1788..4 449 1788.2 461 17887 490 1789,,2 518
GR 1789,,5 536 1789 . 7 548 1788.8 572 1788..4 590 1789.2 598
GR 1787,,4 599 1787.7 603 1787.6 606 1788,,2 613 1788,,5 835
GR 1787 . 7 650 1787,,5 673 1787,,6 708 1787,,0 738 1787.3 773
GR 1787,,1 809 1787,,0 847 1787,,3 886 1786.9 916 1786.8 946
GR 1787,,3 979 1787.9 1010 1788.2 1041 1788.4 1070 1788.0 1079
GR 1789.5 1089 1788,,7 1096 1784.6 1101 1784 .. 3 1109 1784 .7 1116
GR 1784.6 1119 1785.3 1131 1790,,3 1140 1790.8 1148 1791.5 1181
GR 1792,,3 1208 1792 . 3 1241 1792.9 1272 1793.6 1302 1794.6 1331
1802.7

--
GR 1795 .. 8 1358 1798 . 9 1382 1402

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 4

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

0 OLOB QCH OROB AL08 ACH AROB VOL TWA R-8ANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF 1

CCHV= .100 CEHV= .300

'SECNO 1 .000

3265 DIVIDED FLOW

3470 ENCROACHMENT STATIONS= 183.0 990 . 0 TYPE= TARGET= -183000

ELENCL= 1757.00 ELENCR= 100000.00

1-4
3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 1755 .. 70 ELREA= 1756 . 90

1.000 8.82 1756.02 ,00 1756.02 1756.48 ,,46 .. 00 ,,00 1755 .. 70

7800.0 5993.5 1806.5 .0 1668.2 196.8 .0 .0 .0 1756,90
.00 3,59 9,18 . 00 ,100 ,040 ,,000 .. 000 1747,,20 183,00
,009381 0, 0, 0 0 .. DO 614,,26 809,97

'SECNO 2 .. 000
0"
°
3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 1759" 80 ELREA= 1762,60

2.000 7.26 1760.76 ,00 .00 1761.30 ,,54 4.80 .03 1759,80
7800.0 5807.6 1992.4 .0 1562.5 202.8 .0 20.9 6.6 1762 .. 60
.03 3.72 9.82 .00 .. 10O ,,040 ,,000 ,,000 1753 .. 50 268 .. 22
009726 500 .. ,,00 542,,41 810,63

'SECNO 3.000
510" 480" 2
° °
3.000 7.05 1766.45 .00 .00 1767.25 .81 5.87 .08 176580
7800.0 4893.2 2712.7 194.2 1431.9 239.8 102.0 45.9 16.4 1763,,50
.05 3.42 11.31 1.90 ,,085 ,,035 ,100 ,000 1759,,40 310,,46
,,009340 620, 610 550, 2 0 ,00 838,,40 1148,,87

FLOW DISTRIBUTION FOR SECNO= 3,,00 CWSEL=

°
1766,,45

STA= 310, 381, 486" 534, 591 647" 666 .. 684 .. 707, 766" 1017, 1068, 1149
PER Q= 6,2 15,,4 4,1 3,,3 6,0 6,3 7,8 7,,3 3 .. 5 2,8 34 ,8 2,5
AREA= 156,7 330,,3 109,2 103,,0 144,,0 97,8 108 .. 8 114,9 100,,5 166,8 239,,8 102,0
VEL= 3,,1 3,5 2,,9 2,,5 3,,3 5,,0 fL6 4;.9 2,7 1,,3 11,,3 1,,9
DEPTH= 2,2 3 .. 1 2,3 1,,8 2,6 5,1 60 5,,0 1,,7 ,7 4,,7 1,,3

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 5

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IDC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'SECNO 4,000

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON,· EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 1769" 20 ELREA= 1773,70

4.000 8.70 1771.70 ,,00 .00 1772.66 ,96 5.36 .04 1769,20
7800.0 5062.0 2738.0 .0 1514.8 220.2 .0 69.5 26.6 1773,70
.08 3.34 12.43 .00 ,085 035 ,000 ,000 1763,00 59746
,008724 580, 620" 600, 3 0 0 ,00 685..49 128294

'SECNO 5" 000

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 1774, 20 ELREA= 1778,70

5.000 8.88 1776.88 00 .00 1777.69 ,81 5.02 .01 1774,20

7800.0 5166.3 2633.7 .0 1628.3 226.3 .0 94.6 36.2 1778,70
.11 3.17 11.64 .00 ,,085 ,,035 .. 000 ,000 1768,,00 588:21
,007434 600 .. 670 .. 650, 3 .. DO 694,,91 1283,12

'SECNO 6.000
° °
6.000 7.73 1781.83 .00 .00 1782.94 1.11 5.16 .09 1779,00
7800.0 2657.9 5069.6 72.6 739.8 498.0 40.4 117 .8 44.4 1779,80
.13 3.59 10.18 1.80 ,,080 ,,040 ,,090 ,000 1774,10 319,90
,008786 650 .. 630 .. 550, 2 0 0 .. DO 412,,29 732" 19

'SECNO 7,000

3265 DIVIDED FLOW

3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

7.000 9.56 1786.76 .00 .00 1787.19 .42 4.18 .07 178460
7800.0 5012.0 2764.2 23.8 1726.9 351.9 17.9 140.9 52.4 178450
.17 2.90 7.86 1.33 ,080 ,040 ,090 ,,000 1777,20 150,95
.. 005562 590 .. 620 .. 600, 2 0 ,,00 770,94 998,84

'SECNO 8 .. 000
°

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 6

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

3265 DIVIDED FLOW

8.000 6.11 1790.41 ,00 .00 1790.75 ,34 3.55 .01 1789,50
7000.0 5245.8 1754.2 .0 1801.9 223.3 .1 168.5 63.2 1790,30
.21 2.91 7.85 .01 .. 080 040 090 ,,000 1784,30 218,62
,006707 580, 600, 630, 3 0 ,,00 842,54 1141,77
°

1-5
CROSS SECTION 4,,00
STREAM Bear Creek
DISCHARGE= 7800"
PLOTTED POINTS (BY PRIORITY) -B=BOTTOM BRIDGE. T=TOP BRIDGE .X=GROUND .W=WATER SUR .E=ENERGY GRADIENT .C=CRITICAL WSEL

ELEV 1783,0 1764,0 1765,,0 1766,,0 1767,0 1768,0 1769,,0 1770,0 1771,,0 1772,0 1773,0

STA,·FEET
X, E
27 585"
590, X E
595 X E
600. XW E
605, XW E
610. XW E
615, X W E
28 620. X W E
625. "X W E
630, X" W E
635. X W E
29 640. X W E
645. X W E
650,. X W E
855 X W E
30 660, X W E
665. X W E
670" X W E
675, X W E
31 680. X W E
685, X W E
690" X W E
32 695" X" W E
700" X W E
705" X W E
33 710, X W
W
E
E
34 715, X
720 X W E
725, X W E
730, X W E
35 735, X W E
E
740, X W
36 745, X W E
750, X • W E
755, X W E
760" X W E
37 765" X W E
770. X W E
X W E
775" E
780, X W
785. X W E
790. X W E
795. X W E
38 800, X W E
805, X W E
810, X W E
815" X W E
820. X W E
825" X W E
830. X W E
39 835. X W E
640" X W E
845, X W E
850, "X W E
855, .X W E
860, X W E
40 865. X, W E
870, X. W E
875 X W E
880" X W E
885" ,X W E
41 890. ,x W E
895. .X W E
900, X W E
42 905 X W E
910, X W E
915, X W E
920, X W E
925, X W E
930" X W E
935" X W E
43 940" X W E
945" X W E
950 X W E
955, X W E
960, X W E
965, X W E
970. X W E
44 975, X W E
980, X W E
985, X W E
990" X W E
995. X W E
1000 X W E
451005" X, W E
1010 X" W E
1015" X, W E
1020, X W E
1025. X W E
461030, X W E
1035. X W E
1040, X W E
1045, X W E
1050. X W E
1055" X W E
471060" X W E
1065. X W E
1070" X W E
1075" X. W E
1080, X W E
1085, X W E
481090, ,x W E
1095, ,X W E
1100. ,X W E
1105, ,X W E

1-6
 1110, X W E
1115. X W E
1120 X W E
491125. X W E
1130. X W E
1135. X W E
1140, X W E
1145, X W E
1150, X W E
1155 . X W E
501160. X W E
1165. X W E
1170 . X IV E
1175 X W E
1180, X W E
511185, X W E
1190. X W E
1195 . X W E
521200 . X W E
531205 X W E
1210 X W E
1215, .X W E
541220. X W E
1225, X W E
1230, X W E
1235, X W E
1240. X W E
1245 . X W E
551250 .. X W E BANK .
561255, X W E
1260, • X IV E
581265. XXXXXXXXXXX W E
1270 . X W E
591275 . X W E
1280, X W E
601285. BANK .
NRD= o ELLC= 9999999 . 00 ELTRD= 9999999 . 00

EL(I) ,STA(I)
1775 .. 90 254 .. 00 1775 .. 20 284 .. 00 1775.00 314 . 00 1774 . 60 358 . 00 177450 373 . 00
1774 . 60 388 . 00 1773.,80 407.00 1775 . 00 424 . 00 1775 . 00 441 . 00 1775 . 70 461 .. 00
1775 . 70 465 . 00 1774,00 466 . 00 1774.00 474 . 00 1776 . 90 482 .. 00 1775 . 00 488 .. 00
1774 .. 70 503 . 00 1773,50 506 . 00 1773 . 90 509 . 00 1773 . 90 512,00 1773 . 90 516,00
1772 .. 20 518 . 00 1773 . 90 527 .. 00 1772 .. 50 543,00 1772,80 554,00 1772 . 90 565,00
1771 .. 90 587 . 00 1771 . 30 619 .. 00 1770..40 641 . 00 1770 . 60 658,00 1769 . 20 680,00
1765,90 697 .. 00 1763 . 00 709,00 1763,70 713,00 1767,00 733,00 1768 . 50 747,00
1769 . 40 765,00 1769..40 798.,00 1769,30 833.00 1768.90 865 . 00 1769,10 889.00
1769 . 00 907.,00 1769,60 941 .. 00 1769,20 974 . 00 1769 .. 90 1006.00 1769,80 1032 . 00
1769 . 60 1060.,00 1770,10 1088 . 00 1770 .. 20 1126 .. 00 1770 .. 50 1159 . 00 1770.,50 1187 . 00
1771,00 1198.00 1768,50 1207 . 00 1769 . 30 1221 . 00 1769 .. 20 1248 . 00 1764.,00 1257 . 00
1763,00 1263.00 1764.00 1267 . 00 1764 . 00 127500 1773 70 1285 00 1781..40 1302 . 00

--
1789,60 1320 .. 00 1789 . 70 1332.00 1790,50 135200 1790 . 20 137300 1788 70 139600

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 7

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 13:53:59
HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Ver'sion 4.6.0; February 1991

*************************************
NOTE- ASTERISK (*) AT LEFT OF CROSS-SECTION NUMBER INDICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST

Bear Creek
SUMMARY PRINTOUT

SECNO CWSEL EG ALPHA FRCH

1000 1756 .. 02 1756..48 .. 68 .76
2,000 1760.76 1761 .. 30 .79 ,79

3 . 000 1766 .. 45 1767 ,25 2 ,68 ,92

4000 1771,70 1772 . 66 3 .. 04 87

5,000 1776 . 88 1777,69 2.96 81
6.000 1781 . 83 1782 ,94 93 ,80
000 1786,76 1787 . 19 . 97 62
8 .000 1790..41 1790 . 75 ,83 66

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 8

Bear Creek
SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 150

SECNO XLCH ELTRO ELLC ELMIN Q CWSEL CRIWS EG 10*KS VCH AREA ,01K
1.,000 .. 00 00 . 00 1747.20 7800,00 1756,02 00 1756..48 93 81 9.18 186506 80534
2 .000 510.00 .. 00 ,00 1753 . 50 7800.,00 1760,76 00 1761 .. 30 97 . 26 9.82 1765 . 29 790,93

3.000 610,00 ,00 00 1759..40 7800.00 1766 . 45 .00 1767 .25 93.40 11 . 31 1773,78 807,10
.000 620,00 ,00 . 00 1763.00 7800 00 1771 . 70 ,00 1772 .66 87 . 24 12..43 1734 ,96 835 . 08

5000 670,00 .00 ,00 1766,00 780000 177688 ,00 1777.69 74.,34 11.64 1854 .59 904.84
,000 630.00 00 ,00 1774,10 7800 ,00 1781 . 83 ,00 1782 . 94 87.86 10 . 18 1278.22 832.15
7,000 620 . 00 00 ,00 1777.20 7800 . 00 1786,76 ,00 1787 . 19 55.62 7 . 86 2096,67 1045 ,90
8,000 600 . 00 . 00 .00 1784.30 7000,00 1790,41 .00 1790 . 75 6707 785 2025 .. 36 854.71

1-7
 _00000000_

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 9

Bear Cr'eek
SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 150

SECNO Q CWSEL DIFWSP DIFWSX DIFKWS TDPWID XLCH

.000 7800,,00 1756 .. 02 .00 ,,00 00 614,,26 00

2 .000 7800.00 1760 . 76 .00 4 .74 00 542.41 510.00

3,,000 7800,,00 1766.45 .00 5.69 .00 836.40 610,,00

.000 7800.00 1771,,70 .00 5,,26 ,,00 685.49 620,,00

5 .000 7800,,00 1776,,88 .00 5.17 ,,00 694.91 670,,00

6,,000 7800 .. 00 1781.83 .00 4 .95 ,,00 412.29 630,,00

7 .000 7800.00 1786.76 ,,00 4 .94 .00 770.94 620.00

8 .000 7000.00 1790.41 .00 3 .. 65 . 00 842 . 54 600,,00

00000000000000000000

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 10

SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES

1-8
 Example No.2

Input

C
C 16
C 1 X3 CARD UTILIZED TO SPECIFY SEDIMENT ELEVATION (X3.2)
C 2 X5 CARD UTILIZED TO SPECIFY WATER SURFACE ELEVATIONS
C 3 START TRIBUTARIES AT CROSS SECTION 3
C 3.1 X5 CARD UTILIZED TO SPECIFY DIFFERENCE IN CWSEL BETWEEN
C 3.1 SECTIONS 3 AND 3.1 FOR INQS 2,3 AND 4
C 4 EFFECTIVE AREA OPTION USED TO CONFINE FLOW TO BRIDGE OPENING
C 4 UNTIL WEIR FLOW CAN BE EXPECTED (X3.8,X3.9=58)
C 5 BT CARDS DEFINE WEIR PROFILE ONLY ,SINCE PIER IS SPECIFIED THIS
C 5 SPECIAL BRIDGE CAN NOT REVERT TO THE NORMAL BRIDGE ROUTINE
C 6 HIGH WATER ELEVATION OF 59.06 (X2.2)
C 15 WEIR LENGETH DEFINED BY SB.4, BT CARDS ARE NOT REQUIRED
C 15 NO PIER DEFINED ON SB CARD,NORMAL BR. TO BE USED FOR LOW FLOW
C 16 HIGH WATER ELEVATION OF 59.06 (X2.2)
C 24.1 X4 CARD PROVIDES ADDITIONAL GR DATA TO MODEL BRIDGE PIERS
C 24.2 X1 CARD REPEATS GR AND X4 DATA,X2 CARD REPEATS BT DATA
C 26 HIGH WATER ELEVATION OF 59.06 (X2.2)
T1 Example 2, Special and Normal Bridge plus tributary stream profile
T2 Comments used to annotate input data
T3 WOODY CREEK
T4 (See test data file HEC205.DAT for example input)
J1 2 0.0016 45
J2 -1
J3 38 1 9 5 33 55 26 56 42 4
J3 58 62 100 105
* Detailed output omitted by J5 record input.
J5 ·10 -10
QT 9 6000 10000 14000 14000 16000 18000 20000 24000 28000
NC 0.06 0.06 0.035 0.1 0.3
X1 1 15 550 670
X3 10 36
GR 55 0 50 100 45 250 44 500 43 550
GR 35 570 33 575 38 600 39 640 45 670
GR 46 750 43.5 800 44 1050 49 1100 55 1200
X1 2 14 450 540 1700 2050 1900
X3 10 37.5
X5 9 48.5 49.59 51 51 51.2 51.5 51.7 52.4 53
GR 60 0 50 100 47 200 46 400 45 450
GR 36.8 460 37 480 38 510 47 540 49 700
GR 48 750 46 800 49 1000 60 1200
X1 3 14 650 745 1900 1900 2000
GR 65 0 55 50 52 100 53 300 55 400
GR 52 600 50 650 45 660 40.8 700 41 740
GR 53 745 51 890 52 1000 65 1200
X1 3.1 400 400 400 0.95 0.5
X5 ·3 0.6 1 1.05
NC 0.06 0.06 0.035 0.3 0.5
X1 4 21 600 700 1600 1600 1600
X3 10 58 58
GR 70 0 63 100 57.5 250 55 400 54 500
GR 53.5 600 45 610 44 625 44.5 640 46 650
GR 47.5 660 47 670 47 695 55 700 55.5 750
GR 54.5 775 53 825 55 900 57.5 950 63 1000
GR 70 1100
SB 1.25 1.5 3.0 82.5 6 1014 0.67 45 45
X1 5 50 50 50
X2 57 60
X3 10 61 61
BT 7 0 65 500 61 600 60
BT 700 60 800 61 1000 63 1100
BT 70
X1 6 12 350 440 250 250 250 - .3
X2 59.56
X3 10
GR 75 0 60 50 56 300 54.5 350 45 370
GR 46 400 48 420 56 440 58 600 55 650
GR 56 700 75 850

1-9
* Negative section number indicates tributary starting with Section 3 WSEL.
* The water surface elevation will be used with the following input data.
NC 0.06 0.06 0.035 0.1 0.3
X1 -3 14 650 745
X3 10
GR 65 0 55 50 52 100 53 300 55 400
GR 52 600 50 650 45 660 40.8 700 41 740
GR 53 745 51 890 52 1000 65 1200
X1 13.1 400 400 400 0.95 0.5
X5 -3 0.6 1 1.05
NC 0.06 0.06 0.035 0.3 0.5
X1 14 21 600 700 1600 1600 1600
X3 10 58 58
GR 70 0 63 100 57.5 250 55 400 54 500
GR 53.5 600 45 610 44 625 44.5 640 46 650
GR 47.5 660 47 670 47 695 55 700 55.5 750
GR 54.5 775 53 825 55 900 57.5 950 63 1000
GR 70 1100
SB 1.5 3.0 300 76.5 1014 0.67 45 45
XI 15 50 50 50
X2 57 60
X3 10 61 61
X4 10 44 622.9 57 623 57 624.9 46 647.9 57
X4 648 57 649.9 47 674 57 674.1 57 676 47
X4 676.1
X1 16 12 350 440 250 250 250 - .3
X2 59.56
X3 10
GR 75 0 60 50 56 300 54.5 350 45 370
GR 46 400 48 420 56 440 58 600 55 650
GR 56 700 75 850
NC 0.06 0.06 0.035 0.1 0.3
X1 -3 14 650 745
X3 10
GR 65 0 55 50 52 100 53 300 55 400
GR 52 600 50 650 45 660 40.8 700 41 740
GR 53 745 51 890 52 1000 65 1200
X1 23.1 400 400 400 0.95 0.5
X5 -3 0.6 1 1.05
NC 0.06 0.06 0.035 0.3 0.5
X1 24 21 600 700 1600 1600 1600
X3 10 58 58
GR 70 0 63 100 57.5 250 55 400 54 500
GR 53.5 600 45 610 44 625 44.5 640 46 650
GR 47.5 660 47 670 47 695 55 700 55.5 750
GR 54.5 775 53 825 55 900 57.5 950 63 1000
GR 70 1100
X1 24.1
X3 10 60 60
X4 10 44 622.9 57 623 57 624.9 46 647.9 57
X4 648 57 649.9 47 674 57 674.1 57 676 47
X4676.1
BT 16 0 70 70 100 63 63 250 62 57.5
BT 400 61.5 55 500 61 54 600 60 53.5 600
BT 60 57 700 60 57 700 60 55 750 60.5
BT 55.5 775 60.5 54.5 825 61 53 900 62 55
BT 950 62.5 57.5 1000 63 63 1100 70 70
X1 24.2 50 50 50
X2 1
X3 10 60 60
X1 25 21 600 700
X3 10 61 61
GR 70 0 63 100 57.5 250 55 400 54 500
GR 53.5 600 45 610 44 625 44.5 640 46 650
GR 47.5 660 47 670 47 695 55 700 55.5 750
GR 54.5 775 53 825 55 900 57.5 950 63 1000
GR 70 1100
X1 26 12 350 440 250 250 250 - .3
X2 59.56
X3 10
GR 75 0 60 50 56 300 54.5 350 45 370
GR 46 400 48 420 56 440 58 600 55 650
GR 56 700 75 850
EJ
T1 Title input is optional; however,
J1 3 0.0016 48
J2 2 -1
T1 One or more Title records are required for each profile.
J1 6 0.0016 50
J2 3 -1
ER

1-10
 Output

********************************************
• HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES • U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS
• HYDROLOmC ENGINEERING CENTER
: Ver'sion 4,6,,0; Februar'y 1991 • 609 SECOND STREET, SUITE 0
• DAVIS, CALIFORNIA 95616-4687
• RUN DATE 06FEB91 TIME 12:58:27· • (916) 756-1104
"''''''''''*'''*-''''''''''''.''''''''''''''''''''''''*'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''' ***************************************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX
END OF BANNER

06FEB91 12:58:27 PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 12:58:27

HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Ver'sion 4.6.0; February 1991

*************************************
T1 Example 2, Special and Nor'mal Br'idge plus tr'ibutar'Y stream profile
T2 Comments used to annotate input data
T3 WOODY CREEK
T4 (See test data file HEC205,DAT for' example input)

J1 ICHECK INQ NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HYINS Q WSEL FQ

2 0,0016 45

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

-1

J3 VARIABLE CODES FOR SUMMARY PRINTOUT

38 1 9 5 33 55 26 56 42 4
58 62 100 105
Detailed output omitted by J5 record input

J5 LPRNT NUMSEC ********REQUESTED SECTION NUMBERS"'--*-_·-

-10 -10

QT 9 6000 10000 14000 14000 16000 18000 20000 24000 28000

NC 0 ,06 0.06 0.035 0.1 0,3
X3 CARD UTILIZED TO SPECIFY SEDIMENT ELEVATION (X3,2)
X1 1 15 550 670
X3 10 36
GR 55 0 50 100 45 250 44 500 43 550
GR 35 570 33 575 38 600 39 640 45 670
GR 46 750 43,5 800 44 1050 49 1100 55 1200

X5 CARD UTILIZED TO SPECIFY WATER SURFACE ELEVATIONS

X1 2 14 450 540 1700 2050 1900
X3 10 37,,5
X5 9 48,5 49,,59 51 51 51.2 51.5 51. 7 52.4 53
GR 60 0 50 100 47 200 46 400 45 450
GR 36.8 460 37 480 38 510 47 540 49 700
GR 48 750 46 800 49 1000 60 1200

06FEB91 12:58:27

START TRIBUTARIES AT CROSS SECTION 3

-- PAGE 2

X1 3 14 650 745 1900 1900 2000

GR 65 0 55 50 52 100 53 300 55 400
GR 52 600 50 650 45 660 40.8 700 41 740
GR 53 745 51 890 52 1000 65 1200
X5 CARD UTILIZED TO SPECIFY DIFFERENCE IN CWSEL BETWEEN
SECTIONS 3 AND 3,1 FOR INQS 2,3 AND 4
X1 3,,1 400 400 400 0,95 0,5
X5 -3 0,6 1,05

NC 0,06 0.06 0.035 0,,3 0.5

EFFECTIVE AREA OPTION USED TO CONFINE FLOW TO BRIDGE OPENING
UNTIL WEIR FLOW CAN BE EXPECTED (X3,,8,X3,9=58)
X1 4 21 600 700 1600 1600 1600
X3 10 58 58
GR 70 0 63 100 57.5 250 55 400 54 500
GR 53,5 600 45 610 44 625 44.5 640 46 650
GR 47,5 660 47 670 47 695 55 700 55.5 750
GR 54.5 775 53 825 55 900 57,5 950 63 1000
GR 70 1100

SB 1,,25 1,5 30 825 6 1014 0,67 45 45

1-11
 BT CARDS DEFINE WEIR PROFILE ONLY ,SINCE PIER IS SPECIFIED THIS
SPECIAL BRIDGE CAN NOT REVERT TO THE NORMAL BRIDGE ROUTINE
Xl 5 50 50 50
X2 57 60
X3 10 61 61
BT 7 0 65 500 61 600 60
BT 700 60 800 61 1000 63 1100
BT 70
HIGH WATER ELEVATION OF 59.06 (X2 .. 2)
Xl 6 12 350 440 250 250 25D - .. 3
X2 59 . 56
X3 10
GR 75 0 60 50 56 300 54.5 350 45 370
GR 46 400 48 420 56 440 58 600 55 650
GR 56 700 75 850

Negative section number indicates tr'ibutary star'ting with Section 3 WSEL

The water' surface elevation will be used with the following input data
NO 0 .. 06 0.06 0 . 035 0.1 0.3
Xl -3 14 650 745
X3 10
GR 65 0 55 50 52 100 53 300 55 400
GR 52 600 50 650 45 660 40.8 700 41 740
GR 53 745 51 890 52 1000 65 1200

06FEB91 12:58:27
400
-- 400 400 095 0.5
PAGE 3

Xl 13 . 1
X5 -3 0 .. 6 1 . 05

NC 0 . 06 0 .. 06 0.035 0.3 0.5

Xl 14 21 600 700 1600 1600 1600
X3 10 58 58
GR 70 0 63 100 57.5 250 55 400 54 500
GR 53 .. 5 600 45 610 44 625 44.5 640 46 650
GR 47 .. 5 660 47 670 47 695 55 700 55.5 750
GR 54.5 775 53 825 55 900 57.5 950 63 1000
GR 70 1100

SB 1.5 3.0 300 76.5 1014 067 45 45

WEIR LENGETH DEFINEO BY SBA, BT CARDS ARE NOT REQUIRED
NO PIER DEFINED ON SB CARD,NORMAL BR, TO BE USED FOR LOW FLOW
X1 15 50 50 50
X2 57 60
X3 10 61 61
X4 10 44 622.,9 57 623 57 624 .9 46 647.9 57
X4 648 57 649.,9 47 674 57 674 .1 57 676 47
X4 676 . 1
HIGH WATER ELEVATION OF 59.06 (X22)
Xl 16 12 350 440 250 250 250 -.3
X2 59.,56
X3 10
GR 75 0 60 50 56 300 54.5 350 45 370
GR 46 400 48 420 56 440 58 600 55 650
GR 56 700 75 850

NO 0,06 0.,06 0,,035 0.1 03

Xl -3 14 650 745
X3 10
GR 65 0 55 50 52 100 53 300 55 400
GR 52 600 50 650 45 660 40.8 700 41 740
GR 53 745 51 890 52 1000 65 1200

X1 231 400 400 400 0,95 0.,5

X5 -3 0,6 1,05

NO 0.06 0.,06 0035 0.3 0.5

Xl 24 21 600 700 1600 1600 1600
X3 10 58 58
GR 70 0 63 100 57.5 250 55 400 54 500
GR 53.,5 600 45 610 44 625 44.5 640 46 650
GR 47,,5 660 47 670 47 695 55 700 55.5 750
GR 54.5 775 53 825 55 900 57.5 950 63 1000
GR 70 1100

-~~~~~~-

06FEB91 12:58:27 PAGE 4

X4 CARD PROVIOES ADDITIONAL GR DATA TO MODEL BRIDGE PIERS

Xl 24.1 1 1
X3 10 60 60
X4 10 44 6229 57 623 57 624 ,9 46 647.9 57
X4 648 57 6499 47 674 57 674 ,1 57 676 47
X4 676.1
BT 16 0 70 70 100 63 63 250 62 57.5
BT 400 61.5 55 500 61 54 600 60 53.5 600
BT 60 57 700 60 57 700 60 55 750 60.5
BT 55.5 775 60,,5 54.5 825 61 53 900 62 55
BT 950 62,5 57,,5 1000 63 63 1100 70 70

Xl CARD REPEATS GR AND X4 DATA,X2 CARD REPEATS BT DATA

Xl 24,2 50 50 50
X2 1
X3 10 60 60

Xl 25 21 600 700
X3 10 61 61
GR 70 0 63 100 57.5 250 55 400 54 500
GR 53.,5 600 45 610 44 625 44.5 640 46 650
GR 47,5 660 47 670 47 695 55 700 55.5 750
GR 54.5 775 53 825 55 900 57,5 950 63 1000
GR 70 1100

1-12
 HIGH WATER ELEVATION OF 59.06 (X2,2)
X1 26 12 350 440 250 250 250 -,3
X2 59,,56
X3 10
GR 75 o 60 50 56 300 54.5 350 45 370
GR 46 400 48 420 56 440 58 600 55 650
GR 56 700 75 850

06FEB91 12:58:27 PAGE 5

11 Title input is optional; however' J
J1 ICHECK INQ NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL Fa
3 00016 48

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLOC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

-1

06FEB91 12:58:27 PAGE 6

11 One or more Title racor'ds ar'e r'squir'ed for each pr'ofile,

J1 ICHECK INQ NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

6 0,,0016 50

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLOC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

3 -1

06FEB91 12:58:27 PAGE 7

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 12:58:57

HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

NOTE- ASTERISK (*) AT LEFT OF CROSS-SECTION NUMBER INDICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST

WOODY CREEK
SUMMARY PRINTOUT

SECNO CWSEL WSELK 10*KS K*CHSL VLOB VCH VROB ELMIN TOPWID KRATIO IHLEQ

1,,000 45,,60 45,,00 16,08 00 1,,21 5,,96 1,,41 36,,00 794,33 ,,00 ,00
1,,000 46,,92 48,,00 15,87 00 1,,82 6,,68 1,95 36,,00 886,99 ,,00 00
1,,000 48,,37 50,,00 15,,99 00 2,,38 7,,50 2,54 36,,00 944,80 ,,00 00

2,,000 48,,50 ,00 11.53 79 1.40 6,,02 ,92 37,,50 751,67 ,,18 00
2,000 49,,59 ,,00 15,50 79 2,,05 7,,54 1,51 37,,50 897,06 ,01 00
2,,000 51,,20 ,,00 14,90 ,79 2,,59 8,16 2,18 37,,50 952,00 ,04 ,00

3,000 51..18 ,00 20,01 ,65 ,,78 7.48 ,22 40,80 15562 ,,76 00
3.000 52,,99 ,00 25,,54 ,65 128 9,,50 1,44 40,,80 696.48 78 ,,00
3,000 54,,53 ,00 28,10 ,65 2,,06 10 94 2,,52 40,,80 926,,84 73 ,00

3,100 51.78 ,00 21.46 ,25 85 7,,77 ,31 41,,30 16848 ,,97 ,,00
3,100 53,99 ,00 21,,82 ,25 1,38 9,,02 1,64 41,,30 733,,19 ,,08 ,,00
3 100 56,,00 ,00 1851 ,25 2,,05 9,,31 2.47 41,30 955,,84 ,,23 ,00

4,,000 55,,06 ,00 16,,99 ,69 00 6,,98 ,,00 44,00 100,,00 ,,12 ,,00
4,,000 57,,35 ,00 21.44 ,69 ,,00 9,18 ,,00 44,00 100,,00 ,,01 ,,00
4,,000 58,,89 ,,00 14,25 69 2,37 8,18 2,47 44,00 750,,59 ,14 ,00

5,,000 55,,24 00 15,86 ,,00 ,00 6,84 ,,00 4400 100,,00 ,04 ,00
5,000 58,,56 ,,00 15,11 ,00 ,00 8,,27 ,00 44,,00 100,00 ,19 ,00
5,,000 62,25 ,,00 3,67 00 ,69 4,,87 ,78 44,,00 872,70 ,97 ,,00

6,,000 55,,54 59,56 29.45 2,,80 ,,03 871 ,00 44,70 134,,29 ,73 00
6,000 59,,51 59,56 11,05 2,80 1,,60 7,03 1,78 44,70 668,13 ,17 00
6,,000 62,,25 59,56 8,12 2,80 2,10 6,,94 2,,25 44,70 710,27 ,67 00

-3,000 51,18 ,00 19,98 ,00 ,78 7,,48 00 40,80 123 74 73 ,,00
-3,000 52,,99 ,,00 28,06 00 1,34 9,96 ,00 40,80 425 85 ,17 00
-3,,000 54,,53 ,00 28,18 00 2,06 10,95 2,,52 40,80 926 01 67 ,00

06FEB91 12:58:27 PAGE 8

SECNO CWSEL WSELK 10*KS K*CHSL VLOB VCH VROB ELMIN TOPWID KRATIO IHLEQ

13,,100 51.78 ,00 21.46 1,25 ,85 7,,77 ,31 41,,30 168,48 ,96 ,00
13,100 53.99 ,00 21,,82 1.25 1,38 902 1.64 41,,30 733,19 1.13 ,00
13,100 5601 ,00 18,,34 1.25 205 928 2.46 4130 956,,17 1,24 ,00

14,000 55,06 ,00 16,99 ,69 00 6,,98 ,00 44,00 100,00 ,12 ,00
14,000 5735 00 21.45 ,69 00 9 19 ,00 44 00 100,00 ,01 ,00
14,000 58,,88 ,00 14,,31 ,69 2,37 819 2,47 44 00 750,27 ,13 ,00

1-13
 15 ,000 55,,12 ,,00 34,,75 ,00 ,00 7,,42 ,00 44 ,00 94,,20 ,,70 ,00
15 ,000 58,,39 ,,00 36,,83 ,00 ,00 8,,90 ,,00 44 ,00 100,,00 ,,76 ,00
15 ,000 62,,31 ,00 5,,06 ,00 ,99 4,,02 2.10 44 ,00 874,,90 ,68 ,00

16,000 55,,77 59,56 26,40 2 .. 80 1..11 8,38 ,,86 44 ,70 218,,53 ,15 ,00
16,,000 59,,75 59,56 9,83 2.80 1,,56 6.,72 1,,76 44 ,70 682,,08 ,,94 ,00
16,,000 62,,31 59.,56 7,,93 2.80 2,,09 6,88 224 44 ,70 710,,92 ,80 ,00

··3,,000 51,,18 00 19.,98 ,,00 ,,78 7.,48 ,,00 40,,80 123,74 ,,15 .00
·3,,000 52,,99 00 28,,06 00 1,,34 9,,96 ,,00 40,,80 425,85 ,,94 ,,00
.. 3 .. 000 54 .. 53 ,00 28.18 ,,00 2 .. 06 10,95 2,,52 40,,80 926,01 .80 ,,00

23.100 51,78 .00 21..48 25 .. 85 7,77 .. 31 41 ,,30 168.,45 ,96 ,,00

23 .. 100 53,99 ,,00 21,,82 25 1 .. 38 9,02 1,,64 41 .30 733,19 ,13 ,,00
23 .. 100 56,01 .00 18,,34 25 2 .. 05 9 .. 28 2..46 41 .30 956.,17 .24 ,,00

24 ,000 55 .. 06 00 16,,99 .69 ,00 6 .. 98 .. 00 44 .00 100.00 ,,12 .00

24 ,000 57.,35 ,,00 21..45 ,,69 .. 00 9,19 .. 00 44 00 100,00 .01 ,,00
24 ,000 58,88 ,,00 14.31 ,,69 2,37 8,19 2 .. 47 44 00 750,27 13 ,,00

··· 24 ,100 55,,00 .. 00 36,76 ,00 ,00 753 ,00 44,00 94,,19 68 ,,00
24 ,100 57.21 .00 101,,41 ,00 ,00 10,,15 .. 00 44,,00 100.00 ,,46 ,00
24 ,100 57,,18 ,,00 259,61 .. 00 ,00 1624 .. 00 44,,00 100.00 ,23 ,,00

24 ,200 55,23 .. 00 34,,03 ,00 .. 00 7,,33 .. 00 44 ,00 94.,21 04 ,,00

24,,200 57.72 .. 00 101..41 ,00 ,,00 10,,15 ,00 44 ,00 100.,00 ,,00 ,,00
24,,200 58.48 ,00 259,61 ,00 ,00 16,,24 .. 00 44 ,00 100,,00 ,,00 ,,00

25.000 55..41 ,00 14 .. 82 ,00 ,,00 6.70 ,00 44 ,00 100,,00 1,52 ,,00
25 .. 000 58,,38 ,00 15,,81 ,00 ,00 8,,38 ,00 44 ,00 100.00 2,,53 00
25,,000 63.63 ,00 2 .. 32 ,00 1.49 4,,09 .. 57 44 ,00 917,97 10,,59 .00

26,,000 55,,70 59,56 27,27 2,80 ,07 8.47 ,82 44 ,70 207.31 ,,74 ,,00
26 .. 000 59 .. 34 59.56 11,98 2.80 .63 7,,25 ,79 44 ,70 65667 ,,15 ,,00
26 .. 000 63,,64 59.56 4,83 2.80 ,,89 570 ,98 44. 70 725 . 88 ,69 .. 00

_1iI1i11i11i11i11i11i11i11i11i1_

06FE891 12:58:27 PAGE 9

WOOOY CREEK

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 100

SECNO EGLWC ELLC EGPRS ELTRO OPR OWEIR CLASS H3 OEPTH CWSEL VCH EG

5,,000 55,,96 57 .. 00 ,,00 60,,00 6000,,00 ,00 1,,00 ,18 11.24 55.,24 6.84 55.96
5,,000 58.95 57,00 59 . 62 60,,00 10000.00 .. 00 10.,00 ,37 14.56 58 . 56 8.27 59 . 62
5.000 61,,54 57 .. 00 64.69 60 . 00 12540 .. 73 3388.55 30.,00 ,13 18,,25 6225 4,,87 62..45

15000 56,,75 57 .. 00 ,,00 6000 6000 .. 00 ,,00 59 .. 00 ,,00 11..12 55.12 7 .. 42 55,98
15,,000 59,,59 57 .. 00 5962 60,,00 10000 .. 00 .. 00 10.,00 00 14,,39 5839 8.90 59,62
15,,000 6233 57.,00 64,,68 6000 12548 .. 82 3442,20 30.00 ,,00 18.31 62,,31 402 62,,45

1I1111111111_

06FEB91 12:58:27 PAGE 10

WOOOY CREEK

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 105

SECNO CWSEL HL OLOSS TOPWIO OLOB QCH OROB

· -- -. ---.. --...... -------- - .... - - - - - - - - - . - - - - - . - ..... - _.. _.. - _. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .. - ...... - -" --

~

3 .100 51,,78 ,83 02 168..48 16,,56 5981.34 2,,10

3100 53 . 99 ,,94 ,,02 733.19 554.,42 8738 .. 88 706.71
3,,100 56.00 90 .05 955.84 2868.51 10697,73 2433,,76

4,000 55 . 06 3,,04 ,05 10000 .00 6000 . 00 ,00

4,,000 5735 3.,46 ,,10 100,,00 ,00 1000000 ,,00
4,,000 58.89 2,59 ,,07 750,,59 3260,,18 10165.85 2573,,97

5 .. 000 55.24 .. 15 ,,00 10000 ,00 6000,,00 .. 00

5,000 58 .. 56 ,96 .. 00 10000 ,00 10000,,00 ,00
5,000 62 .. 25 2,87 .. 00 872 .. 70 4789 .. 71 7686..46 3523 ,82

6,000 55.,54 ,53 .. 22 134.29 30.,82 5969,18 .00

6 .. 000 59.,51 .32 .. 15 668,13 1089.,15 7330 .. 64 1580,20
6 . 000 62.25 ,,13 ,13 710.,27 3187,18 8958,11 3854.71
.......... _---------------_ .. __ ........................ _.. ----.----------------------_._----------
13 .. 100 51.78 ,83 .02 168..48 16.56 5981 .. 34 2,,10
13,100 53,,99 ,99 ,,04 73319 554.42 8738 . 88 706,,71
13.,100 56 .. 01 ,90 .05 956 . 17 2885 . 87 10672 . 47 2441,,66

14,000 55,06 3,04 ,,05 100,,00 ,00 6000 . 00 .00

14,000 57,35 3 .. 46 .10 100,,00 ,00 10000,,00 ,,00
14,000 58,88 2 . 58 .. 07 750 .. 27 3254 ,97 1017460 2570 .. 44

15,,000 55 ,12 ,,12 .. 05 94,20 .. 00 6000 .. 00 ,00

15.000 58,39 ,,96 ,00 100,00 .. 00 10000 .. 00 .. 00
15.000 62.31 2,,87 ,00 874,90 5705,60 6101..16 4193,24

16000 55.,77 ,75 ,11 218,53 45,81 5921,15 33,04

16 . 000 59,,75 ,,43 ,21 682.08 1168,88 7152,66 1678,46
16,000 62,,31 .. 16 ,,15 71092 3210 .. 47 8915,18 3874,35

1-14
 06FEB91 12:58:27

SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES

-- PAGE 11

NOTE SECNO= 2,,000 PROFILE= 1 WSEL BASED ON X5 CARD

NOTE SECNO= 2,,000 PROFILE= 2 WSEL BASED ON X5 CARD
NOTE SECNO= 2,,000 PROFILE= 3 WSEL BASED ON X5 CARD

NOTE SECNQ= 3,,100 PROFILE= 1 WSEL BASED ON X5 CARD

NOTE SECNO= 3,,100 PROFILE= 2 WSEL BASED ON X5 CARD

WARNI NG SECNO= 5.000 PROFILE= 3 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 6.000 PROFILE= 3 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

NOTE SECNO= 13,,100 PROFILE= 1 WSEL BASED ON X5 CARD

NOTE SECNO= 13,,100 PROFILE= 2 WSEL BASED ON X5 CARD

WARNING SECNO= 15,,000 PROFILE= 1 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 15,,000 PROFILE= 3 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 16.000 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

NOTE SECNO= 23 100 PROFILE= 1 WSEL BASED ON X5 CARD

NOTE SECNO= 23 .. 100 PROFILE= 2 WSEL BASED ON X5 CARD

WARNING SECNO= 24,,100 PROFILE= 1 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 24,,100 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE
WARNING SECNO= 24,,100 PROFILE= 3 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNI NG SECNO= 25 000 PROFILE= 1 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 25,,000 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE
WARNING SECNO= 25,,000 PROFILE= 3 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNI NG SECNO= 26.000 PROFILE= 3 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

1-15
 Example No. 3

Input

T1 Example 3: Channel Improvement (CHIMP)

T2 1ST PROFILE IS NATURAL (IBW=8 on J2.8), (BW=.01 on CI.8)
T3 RABBIT CREEK
T4 (Example 3 based on test data file HEC212.DAT)
T5 Field 12 (Second field of second aT) read for discharge.
J1 12 168.1
J2 1 -1 0
u
J3 120
* Supress detailed output, except for the last two cross sections.
J5 -10 0 2.2
NC .120 .120 .037 0.1 0.3
aT 11 450 600 900 1200 1500 2300 5000 6700 9400
aT 15000 25000
* No CI input for first section; therefore, this section is always natural.
X1 1.05 38 18150 18448 1 - .85
GR 200.0 12000 180.0 12200 170.0 13000 170.0 13200 170.0 13500
GR 170.0 14000 170.0 14400 165.0 14500 170.0 14600 170.0 15950
GR 165.0 18149 165.0 18150 165.0 18151 165.0 18168 160.0 18179
GR 149.0 18188 155.0 18201 158.0 18209 159.8 18229 159.9 18234
GR 159.9 18237 160.0 18255 157.5 18259 157.0 18260 145.0 18282
GR 144.8 18308 144.8 18309 145.0 18310 145.0 18324 150.0 18341
GR 155.0 18353 162.0 18364 163.0 18429 164.0 18447 167.0 18448
GR 172.8 18449 180.0 19250 200.0 20600
* CI input provides center station, elevation, channel 'n' value, and
* side slopes of 3 on 1.
X1 1.55 1200 1300 3684 3.14
CI 18300 147.09 0.025 3 3 10 100 300 400
* CI input of -1 prOVides center station and elevation based on existing cross
* section. Blank fields indicate no change from previous CI input.
X1 1.82 1400 1250 1450 1.7
CI -1 -1 0.025
* No CI incicates no change from previous input.
X1 2.1 1400 1250 1450 1. 76
* CI input changes center station, elevation, 'n' value and side slopes.
X1 2.2 528 528 528 0.5
CI 18400 150 0.015 4 2 100 100 300 400
* The Channel improvement is stopped at this cross section. (BW = 0.01)
X1 2.3 600 600 600 1
CI 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
EJ
T1 CHANNEL IMPROVEMENT: IBW=6, BW=10 UNTIL SEC 2.2, BW=100 AT SEC 2.2
J1 12 168.1
J2 2 -1 6 30
T1 CHANNEL IMPROVEMENT: IBW=7, BW=100 and CHNIM=30 (J2.9)
J1 12 168.1
J2 3 -1 7 30
T1 CHANNEL IMPROVEMENT: IBW=9, BW=300 and CHNIM=20 (J2.9)
J1 12 168.1
J2 4 -1 9 20
ER

1-16
 Output

******************************************** *._..-_._..._--------*-_..._.__.--_.__.
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS •
HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES :
HYDROLOGIC ENGINEERING CENTER
: Ver'sion 4,,6,,0; Febr'uary 1991 609 SECOND STREET. SUITE 0 •
* DAVIS 1 CALIFORNIA 956H3·4687 *
• RUN DATE D6FEB91 TIME 08:38:43· • (916) 7&6-1104 •
******************************************** ***************************************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX
END OF BANNER

D6FEB91 08:38:43 PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 08:38:43

HEC··2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Ver'sion 4.6.0; Febr'uar'y 1991

*************************************
Tl Example 3: Channel Improvement (CHIMP)
T2 1ST PROFILE IS NATURAL (IBW=8 on J2 .. 8). (BW=.,Ol on CI8)
T3 RABBIT CREEK
T4 (Example 3 based on test data file HEC212,DAT)
T& Field 12 (Second field of second aT) read for discharge,

Jl ICHECK INa NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS a WSEL Fa

12 168,,1

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLOC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

-1 8
J3 VARIABLE CODES FOR SUMMARY PRINTOUT

120
Supr'8ss detailed output. except for the last two cross sections"
J& LPRNT NUMSEC ********REQUESTED SECTION NUMBERS---*-···
-10 0 22

NC ,120 . 120 ,037 0.1 0.3

aT 11 4&0 600 900 1200 1&00 2300 5000 6700 9400
aT 1&000 2&000

No CI input for first section; therefore, this section is always natur'al"

Xl 1.0& 38 181&0 18448 1 -.8&
GR 200 . 0 12000 180,0 12200 170 .. 0 13000 170 .. 0 13200 170,,0 13MO
GR 170 . 0 14000 170,0 14400 16& . 0 14&00 170 .. 0 14600 170,,0 1&9&0
GR 16S . 0 18149 16&,0 181&0 16&,,0 181&1 16&.0 18168 160,,0 18179
GR 149,0 18188 1&&,,0 18201 1&8,0 18209 1&9 .. 8 18229 1&9,9 18234
GR 159,9 18237 160,0 182&& 1&7,,& 182&9 1&7 .. 0 18260 14&0 18282
GR 144,8 18308 144,8 18309 14& ,0 18310 14& .. 0 16324 1&0,0 18341
GR 1&&,,0 183&3 162,0 18364 163 . 0 18429 164 .. 0 18447 167,,0 18446
GR 172 . 8 18449 180,0 192&0 200,,0 20600

CI input pr'ovides center station, elevation, channel 'n' value, and

side slopes of 3 on 1"

06FEB91 08:38:43 PAGE 2

Xl 1.&& 1200 1300 3684 3.14

CI 18300 147,09 0,,02& 3 3 10 100 300 400

CI input of -1 provides center' station and elevation based on eXisting cr'oss

section" Blank fields indicate no change from previous CI input.
Xl 1,,82 1400 12&0 14&0 1,,7
CI -1 ·1 0,02&

No CI incicates no change fr'om previous input"

Xl 2 ,1 1400 12&0 14&0 1,,76

CI input changes center' station, elevation, 'n' value and side slopes.

Xl 2.2 &28 &28 &28 0.&

CI 18400 1&0 0,01& 4 2 100 100 300 400

The Channel impr'ovement is stopped at this cr'oss section, (BW = 001)

Xl 2,3 600 600 600 1

CI 001 0,01 001 0 .. 01

1-17
 06FEB91

SECNO
08:38:43

DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG

--- HV HL OLOSS L·BANK ELEV
PAGE 3

Q QLOB QCH QROB AL08 ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

"SECNO 2,200

3265 DIVIDED FLOW

2.200 23.65 174.70 ,00 .00 175.34 ,,63 .58 .00 171,25
25000.0 1679.5 23320.5 .0 2865.4 3533.9 .2 931.7 232.3 173 .. 25
.32 .59 6.60 .10 . 120 ,037 .. 120 ,,000 151 .. 05 14430,,92
.. 001080 528 .. 528 .. 528 .. 2 0 0 ,00 1956.44 18448,,25

"SECNO 2,300

3265 DIVIDED FLOW

2.300 23.30 175.35 ,00 .00 176.05 ,70 .69 .02 172,25
25000.0 1348.4 23651.6 .0 2316.6 3430.0 .1 1015.3 258.1 174,25
.35 .58 6.90 .09 ,120 ,037 ,120 .. 000 152 .. 05 14437,89
001227 soo" sao" 600" 1 0 0 .00 1789 .. 17 18448,,19

06FEB91 08:38:43
--- PAGE 4

T1 CHANNEL IMPROVEMENT: I BW=6 , BW=10 UNTIL SEC 2,,2, BW=100 AT SEC 2 . 2

Jl ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

12 168,1

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

2 -1 6 30

"SECNO 2.200
CHIMP CLSTA= 1840000 CELCH= 150,00 BW= 100" 00 STCHL= 18150,00 STCHR= 18509, 18
EXCAVATION DATA
AEX= 2783,OSQ-FT VEXR= 27,4K"CU-YD VEXT= 29 ,1K"CU-YD
2136 NH VALUES .. 120 18120,000 ,015 18539 180 ,120 20600,000

3265 DIVIDED FLOW

3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 418

2.200 23.23 173.23 ,00 .00 173.54 ,31 .07 .07 171,25
25000.0 152.1 24847.9 .0 986.0 5547.7 .0 753.8 181.5 17959
.28 .15 4.48 .00 ,073 ,015 ,000 ,000 150,00 14460,45
.. 000054 528 .. 528 .. 528 2 0 0 .. 00 1313 .. 75 18496,46

"SECNO 2 .. 300

3265 DIVIDED FLOW

3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 31

2.300 20.45 172.50 .. 00 .00 173.96 146 .08 .34 172,25

25000.0 8.3 24991.7 .0 15.0 2579.0 .0 816.6 193.5 174,,25
.30 .56 9.69 .00 ,016 . 015 000 ,000 152,05 14495,,04
,000578 600, 600, 600, 2 0 0 00 417,45 18447 . 42

06FE891 08:38:43
--- PAGE 5

T1 CHANNEL IMPROVEMENT: I BW=7 • BW=100 and CHNIM=30 (J2,,9)

Jl ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

12 168,1

J2 NPROF I PLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLOC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

-1 7 30

"SECNO 2.200
CHIMP CLSTA= 18400,,00 CELCH= 150,00 BW= 100 .. 00 STCHL= 18150,00 STCHR= 18509 18
EXCAVATION DATA
AEX= 2783 . 0SQ-FT VEXR= 38, OK"CU- YO VEXT= 156, 7K"CU - YO

2136 NH VALUES ,120 18120,000 ,015 18539, 180 ,120 20600,000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 2,47

2.200 21,12 171.12 ,00 .. 00 171.54 ,42 .09 .03 171,25

25000.0 .0 25000.0 .0 .0 4824.0 .0 762.7 129.7 179,59
.33 .00 5.18 .00 .. 000 ,015 ,000 ,000 150,00 18168,29
.. 000080 528, 528, 528 2 0 0 ,00 323,95 18492,24

"SECNO 2,300
3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

1-18
 3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE. KRATIO = ,,26

2.300 17,,27 169.32 00 ,,00 172.48 3,16 .12 .82 172,25

25000.0 .0 25000.0 .0 .0 1752.7 .0 808.0 133.3 174,25
.34 .00 14.26 .00 ,000 ,,015 ,000 ,,000 152,,05 18174,,43
,001224 600, 600 3 0 0 ,00 194,,72 18369,15

--
600"

06FEB91 08:38:43 PAGE 6

T1 CHANNEL IMPROVEMENT: IBW=9, BW=300 and CHNIM=20 (J2,9)

Jl ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

12 168" 1

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

4 -1 9 20

*SECOO 2.200
CHIMP CLSTA= 18400,00 CELCH= 150,,00 BW= 300,00 STCHL= 18150,00 STCHR= 18611,01
EXCAVATION DATA
AEX= 6658" 3SQ- FT VEXR= 117, 8K*CU - YO VEXT= 696,4K*CU-YD

2136 NH VALUES ,120 18130000 ,,015 18631,,010 , 120 20600, 000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO 1,80

2.200 19,27 169.27 ,,00 ,00 169.46 ,20 .03 .00 171,25
25000.0 .0 25000.0 .0 .0 7022.6 .0 1137.8 113.7 180,51
.59
,000031
.00
528,
3.56 .00
528 , 5 2 8
,000
° ,015
0
000

°
,000
,00
150,,00
416" 14
18172,38
18588,52

*SECOO 2,300

3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

3685 20 TRIALS ATTEMPTED WSEL,CWSEL

3693 PROBABLE MINIMUM SPECI FIC ENERGY
3720 CRITICAL DEPTH ASSUMED
2.300 16,04 168.09 168,09 ,00 172.29 4,,20 .06 1.20 172,,25
25000.0 .0 25000.0 .0 .0 1520.3 .0 1196.6 117.8 174,,25
.60 .00 16.44 .00 ,000 ,,015 ,000 ,,000 152,05 18177,15
600, 10 ,,00 185,03 18362,18
,,001840 600" 600" 20
°

06FEB91 08:38:43
-- PAGE 7
THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FE891 08:39:01

HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Ver'sion 4.6.0; Febr'uary 1991

*********************************""***
NOTE- ASTERISK (*) AT LEFT OF CROSS-SECTION NUMBER INOICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST

RABBIT CREEK

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 120

SECNO CWSEL EG VCH 10*KS DEPTH TOPWID CLSTA BW STCHL XLBEL STCHR RBEL

2,,200 174,70 175,,34 6,,60 10,80 23,,65 195644 ,,00 ,01 1815000 171 ,25 18448,00 173,,25
2,200 173,23 173,,54 4,48 ,,54 23,,23 131375 18400,,00 100,00 18150,00 171 ,,25 1850918 179,,59
2,200 171, 12 171,54 5,18 ,,80 21, 12 323,95 18400,00 100,00 18150,,00 171 ,,25 18509 18 179,,59
2200 169,27 16946 3,56 ,31 19,27 416,14 18400,00 300,00 18150,,00 171 ,,25 18611,01 180,51

2,300 175,35 176,,05 6,,90 12,,27 23,30 1789,17 ,00 01 18150,,00 172,25 18448,,00 174 ,25
* 2,300 172,50 173,,96 9,,69 5,,78 2045 41745 ,00 01 18150,,00 172,,25 18448,00 174 ,25
* 2,,300 169,32 17248 14,26 12,24 17,27 194,,72 ,00 01 18150,,00 172,25 18448,00 174 ,25
* 2,,300 168,09 172,29 1644 18,40 16,04 185,03 ,00 ,01 18150,,00 172,25 18448,00 174 ,25

06FEB91 08:38:43

SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES

-- PAGE 8

WARNING SECNO= 1,550 PROFILE= 3 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 1,550 PROFILE= 4 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 2200 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNI NG SECNO= 2200 PROFILE= 3 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE
WARNI NG SECNO= 2200 PROFILE= 4 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 2,,300 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 2,300 PROFILE= 3 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE
CAUTION SECNO= 2,300 PROFILE= 4 CRITICAL DEPTH ASSUMED
CAUTION SECNO= 2,300 PROFILE= 4 PROBABLE MINIMUM SPECIFIC ENERGY
CAUTION SECNO= 2,300 PROFILE= 4 20 TRIALS ATTEMPTED TO BALANCE WSEL

1-19
 Example No. 4

Input

T1 Example 4: Floodway Analysis, METHODS 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.

T2 Existing conditions profile, no encroachment.
T3 NORTH BUFFALO CREEK
T4 (Data based on HEC214.DAT)
J1 2 698.3
* Flow distribution requested for first profile (J2.10 15)
J2 1 .i 15
* Floodway Summary Tables requested.
J3 110 115 200
* Detailed output suppressed. Flow distribution will be displayed.
J5 -10 -10
* Channel will be subdivided when 'n' values change within channel (J6.3 -1)
J6 -1
NC . 12 . 12 . 055 .1 .3
* Discharge Table (aT) has 1% chance flow in all fields.
aT 7 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000
* First profile is natural, ET.2 is blank. (J1.2 = 2 reads aT & ET field 2)
* Method 1 encroachment stations are in fields 9 & 10 (ET.3 = 9.1)
* Method 2 is 250 foot wide floodway centered on channel (ET.4 = 250.2)
* Method 3 is a 12% conveyance reduction (ET.5 = 12.3)
* Method 4 is a one-foot rise to compute encroachments (ET.6 = 10.4)
* Method 5 is the same one-foot rise, but with mUltiple cycles (ET.7 = 10.5)
ET 9.1 250.2 12.3 10.4 10.5 360 610
Xi 29900 23 460 508 0 0 0 1 0 0
GR 712.0 0 708.0 10 703.2 28 701.2 35 699.2 42
GR 697.2 57 695.2 71 693.2 110 691.2 150 691.0 400
GR 689.2 460 681.2 470 681.2 495 689.2 508 691.2 512
GR 693.2 530 695.2 563 697.2 570 699.2 580 701.2 595
GR 703.2 601 709.0 612 712.0 630
* Method must be defined for each cross sections. The other methods continue
ET 9.1 145 385
NH 5 0.12 75 0.10 245 0.055 285 0.10 457 0.12
NH 590
Xi 33700 22 245 285 3000 3000 3800 1 o o
GR 713.0 o 709.2 20 705.2 35 703.2 50 701.2 63
GR 699.2 75 697.2 90 695.2 130 695.2 240 693.2 245
GR 685.0 250 685.0 280 693.2 285 695.2 292 695.2 410
GR 697.2 457 699.2 500 701.2 510 703.2 535 705.2 560
GR 708.7 573 713.0 590
ET 9.1 100 330
NH 6 0.12 48 0.10 115 0.04 140 0.06 160 0.10
NH 360 0.12 410
Xi 35100 19 115 150 1000 1500 1400 1 o o
GR 714.0 o '710.1 23 706.7 36 705.2 48 703.2 64
GR 701.2 76 699.2 92 689.2 115 686.0 116 686.0 136
GR 689.2 140 691.2 145 693.2 150 695.2 160 695.2 360
GR 697.2 370 699.2 375 709.2 395 714.2 410
ET 9.1 100 340
NC 0.12 0.12 0.055 0.1 0.3
Xi 36950 22 193 233 1600 1600 1850 1 o o
X3 10 705.5 705.5
GR 715.0 o 709.2 25 707.2 31 705.2 40 703.2 50
GR 701.2 61 699.2 87 697.2 180 693.2 193 688.0 198
GR 688.0 228 693.2 233 695.2 245 697.2 250 697.2 290
GR 699.2 310 701 .2 370 703.2 410 705.2 445 707.2 465
GR 709.2 500 715.2 512
SB 0.9 1.5 2.9 28 1.5 1050 2.4 688 688
* A value of 0.01 added to input will transfer encroachment stations to the
* BT record for weir flow calculations.
ET 9.11 250.21 12.31 10.41 10.51 100 340
Xi 37000 50 50 50
X2 704 706
X3 10 706 706

1-20
BT 16 0 715 715 25 712 709.2 31 710 707.2
BT 40 709 705.2 50 709 703.2 61 708.5 701.2 87
BT 706.5 699.2 180 706 697.2 290 706 697.2 310 706
BT 699.2 370 708 701.2 410 708.5 703.2 445 709 705.2
BT 465 710 707.2 500 712 709.2 512 715.2 715.2
ET 9.1 100 340
X1 37110 110 110 110 0.2
ET 9.1 10 240
X1 40150 22 95 145 2800 2800 3040
GR 720.2 0 719.2 22 717.2 30 715.2 40 713.2 50
GR 711.2 58 709.2 70 699.2 95 693 105 693 135
GR 699.2 145 701.2 150 701.2 220 703.2 240 705.2 255
GR 707.2 270 709.2 290 711.2 310 713.2 325 715.2 350
GR 717.2 370 719.2 390
EJ
T1 Method 1 floodway profile
J1 3 699.3
J2 2 -1
T1 Method 2 floodway profile
J1 4 699.3
J2 3 -1
T1 Method 3 floodway profile
J1 5 699.3
J2 4 -1
T1 Method 4 floodway profile
J1 6 699.3
J2 5 -1
T1 Method 5 floodway profile
J1 7 699.3
J2 6 -1
ER

1-21
 Output

• HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES .. •

•
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS
HYDROLOGIC ENGINEERING CENTER
: Version 4,6,0; February 1991 • 609 SECOND STREET, SUITE D
• DAVIS, CALIFORNIA 95616-4687
• RUN DATE 06FEB91 TIME 09:21 :40 • (916) 756-1104
******************************************** ***************************************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X xxxxxxx xxxxx XXXXXXX
END OF BANNER

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 09:21 :40

HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

T1 Example 4: Floodway Analysis, METHODS 1 J 2, 3, 4 and 5"

T2 Existing conditions profile J no encroachment"
T3 NORTH BUFFALO CREEK
T4 (Data based on HEC214 ,OAT)

J1 ICHECK INQ NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

2 69B,,3
Flow distribution requested for first profile (J2, 10 = 15)

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

-1 15

Floodway Summar'y Tables r'equested,

J3 VARIABLE CODES FOR SUMMARY PRINTOUT

110 115 200

Detailed output suppr'8ssed, Flow distr'ibution will be displayed"
J5 LPRNT NUMSEC ********REQUESTEO SECTION NUMBERS********

-10 -10
Channel will be subdivided when 'n' values change within channel (J6,,3 :::: ·1)
J6 IHLEQ ICOPY SUBDIV STRTDS RMILE

-1

NC .12 .12 .055 ,1 .3

Discharge Table (QT) has 1% chance flow in all fields ..
QT 7 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 BOOO 8000

First profile is natural, ET.2 is blank. (J1.2 = 2 reads QT & ET field 2)

Method 1 encroachment stations are in fields 9 & 10 (ET.3 = 9.1)
Method 2 is 250 foot wide floodway centered on channel (ETA = 250,2)
Method 3 is a 12% conveyance r'eduction (ET.5 = 12.3)
Method 4 is a one-foot f'ise to compute encr'oachments (ET.6 = 10.4)
Method 5 is the same one-foot rise, but with multiple cycles (ET.7 = 10,5)
ET 9.1 250.2 12 . 3 1004 10,,5 360 610
X1 29900 23 460 508 0 0 0 1 o o
GR 712 .. 0 0 708,0 10 703,2 28 701 . 2 35 699 .. 2 42
GR 697 . 2 57 695 . 2 71 693,2 110 691 2 150 691 . 0 400
GR 689 . 2 460 681,2 470 681,2 495 689 . 2 508 691 .. 2 512
GR 693 .. 2 530 695 .. 2 563 697,2 570 699,,2 580 701 .. 2 595
GR 703,2 601 709,0 612 712,,0 630

06FE891 09:21 :40

--- PAGE 2
Method must be defined for' each cr'oss sections" The other' methods continue

ET 9.1 145 385

NH 5 0,12 75 0,10 245 0,055 285 0,10 457 0,12
NH 590
X1 33700 22 245 285 3000 3000 3800 1 0 0
GR 713 .. 0 0 709,2 20 7052 35 703 . 2 50 701 . 2 63
GR 699 .. 2 75 6972 90 695 .. 2 130 695 . 2 240 693 . 2 245
GR 685,0 250 685 . 0 280 693 . 2 285 695 . 2 292 695,2 410
GR 697,2 457 699 . 2 500 701 . 2 510 703.,2 535 705.,2 560
GR 708,7 573 713.,0 590

1-22
 ET 9.1 100 330
NH 6 0,12 48 0,10 115 0,04 140 0.06 160 010
NH 360 0,12 410
X1 35100 19 115 150 1000 1500 1400 1 0 0
GR 714 .. 0 0 710 . 1 23 706,7 36 705 . 2 48 703 . 2 64
GR 701 .. 2 76 699 . 2 92 689,2 115 686 . 0 116 686 . 0 136
GR 689,2 140 691,2 145 693,2 150 695,,2 160 695.,2 360
GR 697 .. 2 370 699,,2 375 709,2 395 714 . 2 410

ET 9.1 100 340

NC 0.12 0,12 0.,055 0.1 0.3
X1 36950 22 193 233 1600 1600 1850 1 0 0
X3 10 705.5 705.,5
GR 715,0 0 709 . 2 25 707,2 31 705,2 40 703,2 50
GR 701,2 61 699,.2 87 697,2 180 6932 193 688.0 198
GR 688 .. 0 228 693 . 2 233 695,2 245 6972 250 697,2 290
GR 699,2 310 701 . 2 370 703,2 410 7052 445 707,2 465
GR 709,2 500 7152 512

SB 0,9 1..5 2.,9 28 1..5 1050 2,4 688 688

A value of 0.01 added to input will tr'ansfer' encroachment stations to the

8T record for weir flow calculations.
ET 9,11 250 .. 21 12,,31 1041 10 .. 51 100 340
X1 37000 50 50 50
X2 704 706
X3 10 706 706
8T 16 0 715 715 25 712 709.2 31 710 707.2
BT 40 709 705.2 50 709 703.2 61 7085 701.2 87
BT 706,5 699.2 180 706 697.2 290 706 697.2 310 706
BT 699.2 370 708 701.2 410 708 . 5 703.2 445 709 705,2

--
BT 465 710 707,,2 500 712 709,2 512 715 . 2 715,2

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 3

ET 91 100 340
X1 37110 110 110 110 0,2

ET 9.1 10 240
X1 40150 22 95 145 2800 2800 3040
GR 720,2 0 719,2 22 717,2 30 715.2 40 713.2 50
GR 711,,2 58 709,2 70 699,2 95 693 105 693 135
GR 699 .. 2 145 701.,2 150 701,2 220 703,2 240 705 .. 2 255
GR 707 .. 2 270 709.,2 290 711 . 2 310 713,2 325 715,2 350
GR 717 .. 2 370 719.,2 390

06FEB91

SECNQ
09:21 :40

CWSEL CRIWS WSELK

-- HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV
PAGE 4

OEPTH EG
0 OLOB QCH OROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL Ioc ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENOST

FLOW DISTRIBUTION FOR SECNQ= 29900,,00 CWSEL= 698,30

STA= 49 . 57. 71, 110 . 150, 400. 460 . 508, 512 530, 563 .. 570 575,
PER 0= .0 ,2 2,1 4,1 33 .. 6 100 457 ,,6 1..8 1,7 ,1 .. 0
AREA= 45 29 .. 4 159,,9 244,0 1800,0 492 . 0 7288 32,4 109,8 135 . 3 14 ,7 3. 0
VEL= 3 .. 7 1..0 1..3 1.5 1.,6 50 1..5 1..3 1,0 .6 .3
DEPTH= 5 2 .. 1 4,.1 6,1 7 .. 2 8.,2 15 . 2 8,,1 6.,1 4. 1 2,1 ,5

FLOW DISTRIBUTION FOR SECNO= 3370000 CWSEL= 70217

STA= 57" 130 .. 240, 245, 285 .. 410" 457, 522

PER 0= 6. 5 18 .. 7 1..0 43,6 21,,5 62 2.,6
AREA= 325 .. 1 766,8 399 645,8 878,,4 280,6 1964
VEL= 1..6 1..9 2,,0 5,4 2 .. 0 18 1..0
DEPTH= 4,,4 7,0 8 .. 0 16,1 7,0 6.0 3. 0

FLOW DISTRIBUTION FOR SECNO= 35100,00 CWSEL= 703,67

STA= 60, 115. 140 .. 150 160, 360. 384 .

PER 0= 6 .. 3 39,5 6,3 4. 1 41..7 1,9
AREA= 291 .. 6 433,6 124,7 94.7 1693 .. 2 121,,9
VEL= 1..7 73 4,0 3,.5 2.0 1..3
DEPTH= 5,3 17,3 12,5 9.5 8,5 5" 1
FLOW DISTRIBUTION FOR SECNQ= 36950,00 CWSEL= 705,70

STA= 38. 87, 180 . 193 .. 233, 245, 290 310 .. 370 . 450,
PER 0= 3,2 154 37 52 .. 9 4.,0 9 .. 3 3,,3 5,9 2,3
AREA= 197.,2 697,8 136,5 682,,1 138,0 387,,7 1501 3302 194.,0
VEL= 1..3 18 2.,1 6,2 2 .. 3 1..9 1..8 1..4 ,9
DEPTH= 4,0 7.5 10.,5 17,1 11.,5 8 .. 6 7,,5 55 24

FLOW DISTRIBUTION FOR SECNQ= 37000,00 CWSEL= 706,66

STA= 33, 87, 180" 193 .. 233, 245, 290, 310" 370 . 445" 460,
PER 0= 3,8 16 . 1 36 49 .. 7 3,9 9,5 3.5 6,,6 3.2 ,0
AREA= 246.4 7867 149.,0 720,4 149.,5 430,7 169,,2 387,6 264 .. 5 107
VEL= 1,2 1..6 1..9 5 .. 5 2,1 1..8 1..6 1..4 1..0 3
DEPTH= 4.6 8,,5 11 . 5 18 .. 0 12.,5 9.6 8,5 6,.5 3 .. 5 7

D6FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 5

SECNO OEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV
o OLOB QCH OROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IQC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

1-23
 FLOW DISTRIBUTION FOR SECNO= 37110,,00 CWSEL= 706,,77

STA= 34" 87 180. 193" 233" 245" 290. 310" 370" 445" 459.
PER Q= 3,,7 16" 1 3,,6 50 .0 3,,9 9,,5 3.4 6,,6 3" 1 ,,0
AREA= 241,,5 778.2 147,,8 716 7 148.4 426,,6 167.4 382,,1 257.6 9.4
VEL= 1..2 1..7 2,,0 5 6 2,,1 1..8 1..6 1..4 1..0 3
DEPTH= 4,,5 8.4 11 . 4 179 12,,4 9,,5 8.4 6.4 34 .7

FLOW DISTRIBUTION FOR SECNO= 40150" 00 CWSEL= 710,,46

STA= 62. 70" 95" 145. 150 220. 240" 255. 270 290 303"
PER Q= .0 3.2 69,,1 1..5 18 .2 4,,3 2,,0 1..1 .5 .0
AREA= 4 .7 156.4 810,,8 5i ,,3 647 9 i65 1 93,,6 63 .0 45 7 .9
VEL= .4 1 .7 6,,8 2,,3 2 3 2.1 1.7 1..3 .9 .4

--
DEPTH= .6 6.3 16,,2 10,,3 9. 3 83 6.3 4,,3 2. 3 .6

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 6

T1 Method 1 floodway pr'of ile

J1 ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

3 699.3

J2 NPROF I PLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

2 ·1

06FEB91 09:21:40 PAGE 7

T1 Method 2 floodway profile

J1 ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

4 699,,3

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

·1

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 8

T1 Method 3 floodway prof ile

J1 ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

5 699 . 3

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

·1

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 9

T1 Method 4 floodway pr'ofile

J1 ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

6 699,,3

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

5 ··1

06FEB91 09:21:40 PAGE 10

T1 Method 5 floodway profile

J1 ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

7 699.3

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

·1

1-24
 06FEB91 09:21 :40
-- THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91
PAGE
09:22:14
11

HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Version 4.6.0; Febr'Uar'y 1991
*************************************
NOTE - ASTERISK (*) AT LEFT OF CROSS-SECTION NUMBER INDICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST
NORTH BUFFALO CREEK
SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 110

SECNO CWSEL DIFKWS EG TOPWID OLOB QCH OROB PERENC STENCL STCHL STCHR STENCR
29900.000 698.30 .00 698.50 526.75 4001 .. 78 3654.36 343.85 .00 .00 460.00 508.00 .00
29900.000 699.30 . 00 699.84 220.75 1939 .. 17 5432.97 627.85 250.00 360.00 460.00 508.00 610.00
29900.000 699.30 00 699 .. 83 221.75 1952.64 5420.90 626.46 250.00 359.00 460.00 508.00 609.00
29900.000 699 30 .00 699.49 352.80 4284.74 3715.26 .00 .12 155.20 460.00 508.00 508.00
29900.000 699 . 30 .00 699.50 335.10 4170.57 3829.43 .00 .16 17290 460.00 508.00 50800
29900.000 699.30 .00 699.48 364.84 437339 3626.61 .00 .10 143 16 460 .. 00 508.00 50800
33700.000 702.17 .00 702.40 465.45 2091 73 3490.15 2418.12 .00 .00 245 .. 00 285.00 . 00
33700.000 704.54 2.37 704.82 240.00 1954 04 4082.66 1963.30 240.00 145.00 245.00 285.00 38500
33700.000 704.46 2.29 704.72 250.00 1998 .17 3994.61 2007.22 250.00 140.00 245.00 285.00 39000
33700.000 703.16 .99 703.41 304.61 1928.63 3735.99 2335.38 .12 126.51 245 .. 00 285.00 431.12
33700.000 703 .. 33 1..16 703.60 289.24 1872.39 3832.96 2294.65 .17 131.68 245.00 285.00 420.92
33700.000 703.17 1.00 703.45 287.74 1863.63 3876.30 2260.06 .15 131.64 245 . 00 285.00 41938

35100.000 703.67 .00 704.01 323.66 507.39 3666 . 99 3825.61 .00 .00 115.00 150.00 .00
35100 .. 000 705.78 2.11 706.09 230.00 315.53 387288 3811.59 230.00 100.00 115.00 150.00 330.00
35100 .. 000 705 . 75 2 . 08 706 .. 23 213.89 809.26 451306 2677.68 250.00 7.50 115 . 00 150.00 257.50
35100.000 704.60 .94 705 .. 00 232.61 10.41 4018.62 3970.97 .12 113.71 11500 150.00 346.32
35100.000 705.01 .34 705.28 228.61 .00 3501.73 4498.27 .14 115 . 00 115.00 150.00 343.61
35100.000 704.66 .00 705 04 237 .. 98 53 .. 17 3958 . 12 3988.72 .11 111.28 115.00 150.00 349 .. 27

36950.000 705.70 .00 706.04 412.30 1779.05 4234 . 96 1986 .. 00 .00 .00 193.00 233.00 .00
36950.000 707.35 1 .65 707.68 240.00 1617.12 4462.44 1920.43 240.00 100.00 193.00 233.00 340.00
36950 .. 000 707.72 2 .02 708.02 25000 1783.99 4326.31 1889.70 250.00 8800 193.00 233.00 338.00
36950.000 706.65 .95 707.05 229.07 1563.86 4645.78 1790.36 .12 101.86 193.00 233.00 330.93
36950 . 000 707.04 1.34 707.42 227.30 1551.59 4602.02 1846.39 15 105.09 193.00 233.00 332.39
36950.000 706.70 1.00 707 . 17 194.52 1407.98 4905 . 23 1686.79 .17 117.78 193.00 233.00 312 . 30
37000.000 706.66 .00 706 . 91 426.17 1881..13 3978 . 04 2140.83 .00 .00 193.00 233.00 .00
37000.000 707.83 .18 708.14 240 .. 00 1647.94 4394.24 1957.82 240.00 100 . 00 193.00 233.00 340.00
37000 .. 000 708.11 .45 708.38 250.00 1810.97 4272.79 1916 24 250 . 00 8800 19300 233.00 338.00
37000.000 70726 60 707.61 229 . 07 1609.10 4551 .35 183955 12 101.86 193.00 233.00 330.93
37000.000 707.57 91 707.91 22730 1586 74 4525.46 1887..79 .14 105.09 193.00 233.00 332.39
37000000 707.26 .60 707.68 194 . 52 1444 . 69 4825.89 1729.42 05 117 ..78 193.00 233.00 31230

(II:O~~~~~~~~~~~~_

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 12

SECNO CWSEL DIFKWS EG TOPWID OLOB OCH OROB PERENC STENCL STCHL STCHR STENCR

37110.000 706.77 .00 707.03 424 . 84 1872.14 4001 .12 2126.73 .00 .00 193.00 233.00 .00
37110.000 707.94 .17 708.25 240.00 1642.70 4405.85 1951.45 240.00 100.00 193.00 233.00 340.00
37110.000 708.20 .44 708.48 250.00 1804.34 4285.95 1909 71 250 . 00 88.00 193.00 233.00 338.00
37110.000 707.41 .65 707 . 74 247.14 1635.34 4435.28 1929.38 12 96 . 79 193.00 233.00 343.93
37110.000 707.72 .95 70803 249.14 1632.20 4379.98 1987.82 .14 98.22 193 .. 00 233 .. 00 347.36
37110.000 707.61 .84 707 . 82 404.35 1944.35 3809.06 2246.59 .00 41.25 193.00 23300 445.60
40150.000 710.46 .00 710.98 240.09 259 .. 86 5530 . 99 2209.15 .00 00 95.00 145.00 .00
40150.000 711 .41 95 711..90 182 . 82 311 . 72 5658 . 96 2029.32 230.00 10 . 00 95.00 145.00 240.00
40150.000 711.42 96 711..89 18786 30758 557527 2117.15 250.00 .01 95.00 145 .. 00 245.00

. 40150.000
40150.000
40150000
711..65
711..72
711.37
.19
27
91
712.20
712.27
712.72
127.22
126.45
51 . 53
00
.00
.00
5886.32
5885.04
7982.71
2113.68
2114.96
17.29
.12
.13
.31
95.00
95.00
95.00
95.00
95.00
95 . 00
145 . 00
145.00
14500
222.22
221.45
14653

06FEB91 09:21:40
-- PAGE 13
SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES
WARNING SECNO= 40150.000 PROFILE= 6 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

_~~~~~~~~~~~~~lif

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 14

Floodway width summary: NORTH BUFFALO CREEK
Profile No. 2
Left Sta Right Sta
Left Distance Distance Right
Section Elevation Top Encf'oach From Center From Encroach
Number Increase Width Station Center' Station Center Station
---.-------_.-------.- .. _----------------_ .. _------_ .... _------------------_ .. _------
29900 .. 000 1 .. 00 250 .. 00 360 .. 00 124.00 484.00 126.00 610.00
33700 . 000 2.37 240 .. 00 145 .. 00 120.00 265.00 120.00 385.00
35100 . 000 2 .. 11 230.00 100 .. 00 32.50 132 .. 50 197.50 330.00
36950.000 1.65 240.00 100.00 113.00 213.00 127.00 340.00
37000.000 1 .18 240 .. 00 100 .. 00 113 00 213.00 127.00 340.00
37110.000 1.17 240 .. 00 100 .. 00 113 00 213 .. 00 127.00 340.00
40150000 .95 230 . 00 10 .. 00 110 . 00 120.00 120.00 240.00

1-25
 06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 15

Floodway width summary: NORTH BUFFALO CREEK

Profile No" 3
Left Sta Right Sta
Left Distance Distance Right
Section Elevation Top Encroach From Center From Encroach
Number Increase Width Station Center Station Center Station
29900,,000 1,00 250,,00 359,00 125,,00 484,,00 125,,00 609,,00
33700,,000 2,29 250,,00 140,00 125,,00 265,00 125,,00 390,,00
35100,,000 2,OB 250,,00 7,,50 125,,00 132,50 125,,00 257,,50
36950,000 2,,02 250,00 BB"OO 125,,00 213,00 125,,00 338,,00
37000,,000 1..45 250,,00 B8,,00 125,00 213,,00 12500 338,,00
37110,,000 1 44 250,,00 88,,00 125,,00 213,00 125,,00 338,,00
40150,000 ,,96 244,,99 ,,01 119,,99 120,00 125,,00 24500

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 16

Floodway width summar'y: NORTH BUFFALO CREEK

Profile No" 4
Left Sta Right Sta
Left Distance Distance Right
Section Elevation Top Encroach From Center' From Encroach
Number Incr'ease Width Station Center' Station Center Station
29900,,000 ,,00 352,,80 155,20 328,BO 484,00 24,00 508,00
33700,000 ,,99 304,,61 126,,51 138..49 265,00 166,.12 431,,12
35100000 ,,94 232,,61 113,,71 18,79 132,,50 213,82 346,,32
36950000 ,95 229,07 101,,86 111,14 213,,00 117.93 330,93
37000000 ,,60 229,07 101,,86 111..14 213,.00 117,,93 330,93
37110,,000 ,65 247,,14 96.79 116,,21 213,00 130,,93 343,93
40150,,000 .19 127,,22 95.00 25,00 120.00 102,,22 222,22

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 17

Floodway width summary: NORTH BUFFALO CREEK

Profile No" 5
Left Sta Right Sta
Left Distance Distance Right
Section Elevation Top Encroach From Center From Encroach
Number Increase Width Station Center Station Center Station
29900,000 1 ,,00 335,,11 172,90 311..10 484,00 24,,00 508,00
33700,000 1. 16 289,,24 131.68 133,,32 265,00 155,,92 420.92
35100,,000 1 ,34 228,,61 115,00 17,,50 132,50 211,.11 343,61
36950.000 1 ,34 227,,30 105,09 107,91 213.00 119.39 332,,39
37000,,000 ,91 227,,30 105,09 107,91 213.00 119.39 332.39
37110,,000 ,95 249" 14 9B,22 114,78 213,00 134,36 347,36
40150000 ,27 126..45 9500 25,00 12000 101..45 221..45

~ggggggg~

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 18

Floodway width summary: NORTH BUFFALO CREEK

Profile No, 6

Left Sta Right Sta

Left Distance Distance Right
Section Elevation Top Encroach From Center From Encroach
Number Increase Width Station Center' Station Center Station
29900,000 ,,00 364,,84 143,16 340,,84 484,00 24,00 508,,00
33700,000 ,,00 287,74 131,64 133,36 265,00 154,38 419,,38
35100,000 ,,00 237,99 111..28 21,22 132.50 216,,77 349,27
36950,000 00 194,52 117,,78 95,22 213,,00 99,30 312,,30
37000,000 ,,60 194,,52 117,78 95,22 213,00 99,30 312,30
37110000 ,,84 404,,35 41,25 171,75 213,00 232,60 445,60
40150,,000 .91 51,53 95,00 25,00 120,,00 26,53 146,53

06FEB91

FLOODWAY DATA,
09:21 :40

NORTH BUFFALO CREEK

- PAGE 19

PROFILE NO, 2

FLOODWAY WATER SURFACE ELEVATION

STATION WIDTH SECTION MEAN WITH WITHOUT DIFFERENCE
AREA VELOCITY FLOODWAY FLOODWAY

29900,,000 221, 2025, 3 9 699,3 698,,3 1..0

33700,000 240" 2619, 3,1 704,6 7022 2..4
35100,,000 230, 2746, 2.9 705,8 703,7 2,1
36950.000 240, 2684, 3.0 707,,3 705,7 1,6
37000,,000 240, 2798, 2,9 707,9 706,7 1,2
37110,,000 240, 2778, 2,9 708,0 706,8 1,2
40150,000 183, 2008, 4,0 711,4 710,5 .9

1-26
 _Iillillillillillillillillillillil

09:21 :40 PAGE 20

06FEB91
FLOODWAY DATA, NORTH BUFFALO CREEK
PROFILE NO" 3
FLOODWAY WATER SURFACE ELEVATION
STATION WIDTH SECTION MEAN WITH WITHOUT DIFFERENCE
AREA VELOCITY FLOODWAY FLOODWAY

29900,,000 222" 2034" 3,,9 699,,3 698,,3 1,,0

33700,000 250. 2692, 3,,0 704,5 702,,2 2,,3
35100000 214" 2198, 3,6 705,,7 703,,7 2,,0
36950,,000 250" 2860, 2,8 707,,7 705,,7 2,0
37000,,000 250, 2955" 2,7 708,,1 706,,7 1,4
37110,,000 250, 2931" 2,7 708,,2 706,8 1 ,4
40150,000 188 2049" 39 711A 710,5 ,9

_ _Iillillillillillillillillillil(llil

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 21

FLOODWAY DATA, NORTH BUFFALO CREEK

PROFILE NO" 4
FLOODWAY WATER SURFACE ELEVATION
STATION WIDTH SECTION MEAN WITH WITHOUT DIFFERENCE
AREA VELOCITY FLOODWAY FLOODWAY

29900,000 353" 3337, 2A 699,3 698,3 ,0

33700,000 305" 2794 2,,9 703,2 702,2 ,0
35100,,000 233" 2467" 3,,2 704,6 703,7 ,9
36950,,000 229" 2439" 3,,3 706,7 705,7 ,0
37000"DOO 229" 2579, 3,,1 707,3 706,7 ,6
37110,,000 247, 2703" 3,,0 707A 706,8 ,6
40150000 127, 1682 4,8 711,,7 710,5 ,2

_ _Iillil(l(llillillillil(llillil(l

06FEB91 09:21 :40 PAGE 22

FLOODWAY DATA. NORTH BUFFALO CREEK

PROFILE NO, 5
FLOODWAY WATER SURFACE ELEVATION
STATION WIDTH SECTION MEAN WITH WITHOUT DIFFERENCE
AREA VELOCITY FLOODWAY FLOODWAY

29900,000 335" 3193" 2,5 699,,3 698,,3 ,0

33700,000 289, 2728, 2,9 703,3 7022 1
35100,000 229" 2513, 3,2 705,,0 703,7 ,,3
36950,,000 227, 2513" 3,,2 707,0 705,7 ,,3
37000,000 227, 2632" 30 707,6 706,,7 ,,9
37110,000 249, 2790" 2,9 707.7 706,,8 ,9
40150,,000 126, 1684, 4,8 711,7 710,,5 1,2

06FEB91
FLOODWAY DATA,
09:21 :40
NORTH BUFFALO CREEK
-- PAGE 23

PROFILE NO, 6
FLOODWAY WATER SURFACE ELEVATION
STATION WIDTH SECTION MEAN WITH WITHOUT DIFFERENCE
AREA VELOCITY FLOODWAY FLOODWAY

29900,000 365" 3433, 2,3 699,3 698,3 ,0

33700,DOO 288, 2671, 3,0 703,2 702,,2 ,0
35100,000 238" 2545, 3,1 704,7 703,7 ,0
36950,000 195, 2191, 3,7 7067 705,7 ,0
37000,000 195, 2300, 3,,5 707,,3 706,7 6
37110.000 404" 3601, 2,2 707,,6 706,8 8
40150,000 52" 875, 9,1 711,,4 710,5 9

1-27
 Example No.5

Input

SF Example 5: SPLIT FLOW data are entered first

TW Right bank levee between Sections 3 and 4
WS 2 3 4 -1 3.4
WC 26 460 28
TW Right bank floodway over-flow weir between Sections 2 and 3
WS 2 2 3 -1 2.7
we 19 370 21
TW Right bank levee between Sections 1 and 2
WS 2 1 2 -1 3.4
WC 19 520 24
EE
T1 Example 5: SPLIT FLOW reach data follow Split Flow EE record
T2 One profile with 40,000 cfs
T3 RED FOX RIVER
J1 0 .005 40000 20 0
* NC only used to define contraction and expansion coefficients
NC 0 0 0 .1 .3
* NH record used to define Manning's 'n' values for Section 1
NH 5 .1 415 .050 650 .030 710 .050 1020 .1
NH 1635
X1 1 11 650 710 0 0 0
X3 622 752
GR 25 20 18 110 17 415 14 650 1 675
GR 0 690 1 710 13 710 14 1020 14 1590
GR 25 1635
NH 4 .100 415 .050 575 .030 640 .100 1250
X1 2 10 575 640 600 600 600
X3 525 735
GR 25 30 20 110 20 200 17 415 10 575
GR 4 580 4 615 18 640 18 1195 25 1250
NC .100 .050 .030
X1 3 10 390 600 500 500 500
X3 390 600
X4 1 17.2 390
GR 25 40 22 260 18.7 370 15 420 7.1 500
GR 7.5 530 17.3 560 20 600 22 850 25 875
NH 5 .100 130 .050 330 .036 460 .050 610 .100
NH 700
X1 4 8 330 460 700 700 700
X3 300 600
GR 26 30 24 130 23 330 9.5 370 10 400
GR 22 460 22 610 26 700
EJ
ER

1-28
 Output

********************************************
* HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES * U. S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS
* HYDROLOGIC ENGINEERING CENTER
: Version 4,,6,,0; Febr'uary 1991 * 609 SECOND STREET. SUITE 0
* DAVIS j CALIFORNIA 95616~4687
* RUN DATE D6FEB91 TIME 11 :02:02
******************************************** :**********i;l~l*r~~;lle~**************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX

--
END OF BANNER

06FEB91 11 :02:02 PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 11 :02:02
HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

SPLIT FLOW BEING PERFORMED

SF Example 5: SPLIT FLOW data ar'a enter'ed f if'st

TW Right bank levee between Sections 3 and 4

WS 2 3 4 -1 3,4
we 26 460 28
TW Right bank floodway over'-flow weir between Sections 2 and 3
WS 2 2 3 -1 2,7
we 19 370 21

TW Right bank levee between Sections 1 and 2

WS 2 1 2 -1 34
WC 19 520 24

06FEB91 11 :02:02
-- PAGE 2
T1 Example 5: SPLIT FLOW reach data follow Split Flow EE f'ecord
T2 One profile with 40,000 cf.
T3 RED FOX RIVER

Jl ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

0 .005 40000 20 0
NC only used to define contr'action and expansion coefficients
NC 0 0 0 ,1 .3
NH r'ecord used to define Manning 's 'n' values for Section
NH 5 ,1 415 ,,050 650 030 710 ,,050 1020 ,,1
NH 1635
Xl 1 11 650 710 0 0 0
X3 622 752
GR 25 20 18 110 17 415 14 650 1 675
GR 0 690 1 710 13 710 14 1020 14 1590
GR 25 1635

NH 4 ,,100 415 050 575 030 640 ,100 1250

Xl 2 10 575 640 600 600 600
X3 525 735
GR 25 30 20 110 20 200 17 415 10 575
GR 4 580 4 615 18 640 18 1195 25 1250
NC ,100 050 ,030
Xl 3 10 390 600 500 500 500
X3 390 600
X4 1 17.2 390
GR 25 40 22 260 18.7 370 15 420 7.1 500
GR 7,5 530 17,,3 560 20 600 22 850 25 875
NH 5 100 130 ,050 330 ,036 460 ,050 610 ,,100
NH 700
Xl 4 8 330 460 700 700 700
X3 300 600
GR 26 30 24 130 23 330 9,,5 370 10 400
GR 22 460 22 610 26 700

1-29
 06FEB91 11 :02:02 PAGE 3

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

0 OLOB QCH OROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IDe ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF 1
CCHV= .100 CEHV= ,,300
1490 NH CARD USED
'SECNO 1 .000
3470 ENCROACHMENT STATIONS= 622.0 752.0 TYPE= TARGET= 130 .000
1.000 20.42 20.42 .00 20.00 25.B4 5.42 ,,00 ,,00 14 .00
23659.0 1094.2 20355.7 2209.1 174.7 1020.1 30B.7 .0 .0 13,,00
.00 6.26 19.95 7.16 .050 030 ,,050 .000 .00 622,,00
,,00501B 0" 0 .. 0" 0 0 3 .00 130.00 752.00

1490 NH CARD USED

'SECNO 2" 000
3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

3302 WARNI NG: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = .53

3470 ENCROACHMENT STATIONS= 525,,0 735 .. 0 TYPE= TARGET= 210.000

2.000 20.95 24.95 .00 .00 2B.13 3.18 2.06 .22 10,00
25930.6 5180.5 19016.8 1733.3 693.4 1172.5 661.4 27.8 2.3 18,,00
.01 7.47 16.22 2.62 ,050 ,030 ,100 ,000 4.00 525,,00
.002571 600. 600. 600" 2 0 0 ,,00 210.00 735,,00

'SECNO 3.000
3260 CROSS SECTION 3,00 EXTENDED 1,,49 FEET

3302 WARNI NG: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = .49

3470 ENCROACHMENT STATIONS= 390 0 600 .0 TYPE= TARGET= 210 000

3.000 19.39 26.49 ,00 ,,00 29.47 2,,98 1.32 .02 17 .20
39615.7 .0 39615.7 .0 .0 2858.5 .0 58.7 4.8 100000,,00
.02 .00 13.86 .00 ,,000 .030 ,,000 .000 7.10 390,,00
,,002686 500" 500, 500. 3 0 0 ,,00 210,,00 60000

06FEB91 11:02:02 PAGE 4

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV
o OLOB QCH OROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IDe ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

1490 NH CARD USED

'SECNO 4.000
3260 CROSS SECTION 4" 00 EXTENDED 2.30 FEET
3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 67

3470 ENCROACHMENT STATIONS= 300,,0 600,,0 TYPE= TARGET= 300000

4.000 18.80 28.30 .00 .00 32.59 4.29 2.73 .39 23.00
40000.0 987.1 32222.0 6790.9 156.7 1776.5 882.0 104.3 8.8 22.00
.03 6.30 18.14 7.70 ,050 036 .050 ,,000 9,.50 300.00
,,006117 700" 700 700. 3 0 o .00 300,,00 600.00

06FEB91 11 :02:02 PAGE 5

TW Right bank levee between Sections 3 and 4

ASO QCOMP ERRAC TASO TCO TABER NITER DSWS USWS DSSNO USSNO
384 ,29 387.88 93 384.29 387.88 ,,93 17 26.487 28,,299 3,000 4,.000

TW Right bank floodway over'-flow weir between Sections 2 and 3

ASQ QCQMP ERRAC TASO TCO TABER NITER DSWS USWS DSSNO USSNO
13685" 15 13670,,57 " 11 14069.44 14058.45 ,08 17 24954 26.487 2000 3.000

TW Right bank levee between Sections 1 and 2

ASQ DCOMP ERRAC TASO TCO TABER NITER DSWS USWS DSSNO USSNO
2271,,58 229601 1.07 16341,,03 16354.46 ,08 17 20,,419 24.954 1,,000 2,000

1-30
 06FEB91 11 :02:02 PAGE 6
THIS RUN EXECUTEO 06FEB91 11 :02:38

HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

NOTE- ASTERISK (*) AT LEFT OF CROSS-SECTION NUMBER INOICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST

REO FOX RIVER

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 150

SEeNe XLCH ELTRO ELLC ELMIN Q CWSEL CRIWS EG 10*KS VCH AREA ,01K

,,000 ,,00 ,00 ,00 00 23658,97 20,,42 ,,00 25 ,84 50,18 19,95 1503,61 3339,84

2,000 600,,00 ,00 ,00 4 ,00 25930,,56 24,95 ,00 28,,13 25,,71 16,22 2527,26 5113,,90

3,000 500,00 ,00 00 7 ,10 39615,71 26,,49 ,00 29,47 26 86 13,,86 2858,,55 7644,,48

4,000 700,00 ,00 00 9,50 40000,00 2830 00 32,59 61, 17 18,,14 2815,,18 5114,,48

06FEB91 11 :02:02 PAGE 7

RED FOX RIVER

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 150

SECNO Q CWSEL DIFWSP DIFWSX DIFKWS TOPWID XLCH

1,000 23658,97 20.42 ,00 ,00 .42 130,,00 ,00

2000 25930,56 24,95 ,00 4,,54 ,,00 210,00 600 ,00

3,,000 3961571 26,,49 ,00 ,53 ,00 210,00 500,00

4,000 40000,,00 28,,30 ,,00 ,81 ,,00 300,,00 700,,00

06FEB91 11:02:02 PAGE 8

SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES

WARNING SECNe= 2,000 PROFILE= CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNI NG SECNe= 3,000 PROFILE= CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE
WARNING SECNO= 4 ,000 PROFILE= CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

1-31
 Appendix ii

Floodway Encroachment Calculations

 Appendix II
Table of Contents

Section Page

1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

2 Encroachment Method 1 11-1

3 Encroachment Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

4 Encroachment Method 3 11-2

5 Encroachment Method 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

6 Encroachment Method 5 11-3

7 Encroachment Method 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

8 Bridge Encroachments 11-4

9 Flow Distribution Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

10 Encroachment Data Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

11 Computer Output for Floodway Calculations 11-6

11.1 Notes in Normal Output 11-6

11.2 Floodway Summary Tables 11-6
 List of Figures

Figure
Number Page

1 Encroachment Method 1 11-1

2 Encroachment Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-2

3 Encroachment Method 3 11-2

4 Encroachment Method 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

5 Encroachment Method 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11-4

6 Encroachment Method 6 11-4

List of Tables

Table
Number Page

1 Encroachments on Special Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

2 Encroachment Data Organization 11-7

ii
 Appendix II

Floodway Encroachment Calculations

1 Introduction

The evaluation of the impact of floodplain encroachments on water surface profiles can be of
substantial interest to planners, land developers, and engineers. It is also a significant aspect of flood
insurance studies. HEC-2 contains six optional methods for specifying floodplain encroachments.
Each method is illustrated in the following paragraphs. Also program options related to encroachment
determinations, data organization, and encroachment output will be covered.

2 Encroachment Method 1

With Method 1 the user specifies the exact location of the encroachment for a given cross
section. Stations and elevations which apply to all profiles of the left and/or right encroachment, are
specified on the X3 record for individual cross sections as desired. Encroachment stations for
individual cross sections can also be specified differently for each profile by using the ET record. A
9.1 in the INa field (J1.2) of the ET record would indicate that Method 1 is being used (for current
cross section only), and the left and right encroachment stations are specified on Fields 9 and 10 of
the ET record.

z
o
!i> z z L), CHANNEL BANK STATIONS
ILl I o GR DATA POINTS
.J
ILl I
I
I I
-+-._---~--_._._--------+--_ . ._ - -
STENCL SToNCR

STATION (FT)

Figure 1
Encroachment Method 1

3 Encroachment Method 2

Method 2 utilizes a fixed top width. The top width (ENCFP) can be specified on an ET or X3
record which will be used for the current and all subsequent cross sections until changed by
another X3 or ET record. The left and right encroachment stations are made equal distance from the

11-1
 centerline of the channel, which is halfway between the left and right bank stations. A 200.2 in the
INO (J1.2) of the ET record would indicate a 200 foot width will be used for Method 2. No provision is
made to insure that all of the channel area is retained as flow area.

ENCFP/2

z
o
S ,0. CHANNEL. BANK STATIONS
>
UJ ,,".J./,,~,//='7:/777,~'1' 0 GR DATA POINTS
...J I
UJ
1
I
+----1--------11---,---,---,'',.,--,,-,,,
STENCL STENCR

STATION (FT)

Figure 2
Encroachment Method 2

4 Encroachment Method 3

Method 3 calculates encroachment stations for a specified percent reduction (PERENC) in the
natural conveyance of each cross section. One-half of PERENC is eliminated on each side of the
cross section (if possible) as long as the encroachments do not infringe on the main channel. If
one-half PERENC exceeds either overbank conveyance, the program will attempt to make up the
difference on the other side. If the percent reduction in cross section conveyance cannot be
accommodated by both overbank areas combined, the encroachment stations are made equal to the

NATURAL WATER SURFACE ELEVATION

ENCROACH WATER SURFACE' El,EVATION

z
o 6 CHANNEL BANK STATIONS
S
>
o GR DATA POINTS
UJ
...J
UJ

STENCL STENCR

STATION (FT )

Figure 3
Encroachment Method 3

stations of left and right channel banks. This method requires that the first profile (of a multiple profile
run) must be a natural (unencroached) profile. Subsequent profiles of multiple profile runs may be
utilized for Method 3 encroachments. The amount of conveyance reduction is requested by
percentages specified on the ET record. The percentage can be changed by inserting another ET
record ahead of the appropriate cross section. A 10.3 in the INO field (J1.2) of the ET record for the
second profile would indicate that 10 percent of the conveyance based on the natural profile (first
profile) will be eliminated - 5 percent from each overbank. An alternate scheme to equal conveyance

11-2
reduction is conveyance reduction in proportion to the distribution of natural overbank conveyance.
For instance, if the natural cross section had twice as much conveyance in the left overbank as in the
right overbank, a 10.3 value would reduce 5 percent conveyance in each overbank, whereas a -10.3
value would reduce 6.7 percent from the left overbank and 3.3 percent from the right overbank.

5 Encroachment Method 4

Method 4 computes encroachment stations so that conveyance within the encroached cross
section (at some higher elevation) is equal to the conveyance of the natural cross section at the
natural water level. This higher elevation is specified as a fixed amount above the natural (e.g.• 100
year) profile. The encroachment stations are determined so that an equal loss of conveyance (at the
higher elevation) occurs on each overbank, if possible. If half of the loss cannot be obtained in one
overbank, the difference will be made up, if possible, in the other overbank, except that
encroachments will not be allowed to fall within the main channel.

NATURAL WATER SURFACE ELEVATION

TARGET

z
o ~--'--'~-"'-----*-
~
>
1:1 CHANNEL BANK STATIONS
W
...J o GR DATA POINTS
W

-+--------11------------+-,---,"'---
ST'ENCL ST'ENCR

STATION (FT)

Figure 4
Encroachment Method 4

A 10.4 in the INa field (J1.2) of the ET record indicates that a 1 foot rise (value is in tenths of a
foot on the left side of the decimal point) will be used to determine the encroachments based on
equal conveyance. An alternate scheme to equal conveyance reduction is to reduce conveyance in
proportion to the distribution of natural overbank conveyance (a value of -10.4). See Method 3 for an
explanation of this. Also, the first profile must be for natural (unencroached) conditions and
subsequent profiles can be computed for different targets.

6 Encroachment Method 5

Method 5 operates much like Method 4 except that an optimization scheme is used to obtain the
target difference in water surface elevation between natural and encroached conditions. A maximum
of 21 trials is allowed in attempting a solution. The routine uses the percent reduction in conveyance
as the objective function to be optimized to obtain the desired target. Convergence is usually
obtained in three of four trials. The number of trials processed is printed under the variable name
ICONT. Equal conveyance reduction is attempted in each overbank. Input for Method 5 is specified
on the ET record in the same fashion as for Method 4. A 10.5 value in the INa field (J1.2) of the ET

11-3
record would indicate a target of 1 foot difference in water surface elevations. This method can be
changed before any cross section, like Methods 1 through 4. Also, as with Methods 3 and 4, the first
profile must be for natural (unencroached) conditions and subsequent profiles can be computed for
different targets.

NATURAL WATER SURFACE ELEVATION

NATURAL PLUS TARGET

TARGET

z
o
b.
~
CHANNEL BANK STATIONS
/
W o GR DATA POINTS
..I
LU
I
I 'r7/r I

L l.--- ENCROACHMENT LIMITs---J

I
STENCL
I
STENCR

STATION (FT)

Figure 5
Encroachment Method 5

7 Encroachment Method 6

Method 6 operates in the same manner as Method 5 except that the optimization is based on
obtaining a target difference in energy grade line elevation between natural and encroached
conditions. Input for Method 6 is specified on the ET record and can be changed before any cross
section, like Methods 1 through 5. A 10.6 in the INQ field (J1.2) of the ET record would indicate a
floodway with a target of 1 foot difference in energy elevations. Also, the first profile must be for
natural (unencroached) conditions and subsequent profiles can be computed for different targets.

~
"" L
""'l7;777";'7n777T;-7n-""-.6l. ~.:::: - --:=
NATURAL ENERGY GRADE LINE El EVATION

"rom " .." - - ''''

b.
~._~
CHANNEL BANK STATIONS
~ I /
1;;, 0 GR DATA POINTS

ii1 ~,-----t-: - - - - . - - - - - - ' t -

!----ENCROACHMENT L1MITS~
I
STENCL
I
STENCR

STATION (FTl

Figure 6
Encroachment Method 6

8 Bridge Encroachments

Each of the six methods can be used to evaluate the effect of encroachments on bridges (BT
records). Bridge encroachments for special bridge analysis must be requested by adding a .01 to the

11-4
code on the ET record for the encroachment Methods 1 through 6. Thus, 9.11, 100.21, 10.31, 10.41,
10.51, or 10.61 would request the bridge encroachments for Method 1 through 6, while 9.1, 100.2,
10.3, 10.4, 10.5, or 10.6 would not encroach BT records. The following table describes how each
method handles encroachments on special bridges.

Table 1
Encroachments on Special Bridges

Method Special Bridge Encroachments

1 Bridge encroachments defined by target values of Method 1.

2 Bridge encroachments defined by target values of Method 2.
3-6 Bridge encroachments defined by encroachments determined
at the cross section immediately downstream of the bridge.

Without this option, the program will not calculate encroachments on special bridge or special
culvert models. For normal bridge models BT data encroachments are handled in the same manner
as GR data encroachments.

9 Flow Distribution Option

This option is recommended when computing floodway encroachments. With flow distribution
the program prints out the lateral distribution of area, velocity, and discharge in the overbank
subareas (formed by points on the GR record) for each cross section. Because the distribution of
discharge is given as a percent, it can also be considered a percentage-distribution of conveyance.

The flow distribution option is called by setting the variable ITRACE (J2.10 or X2.1 0) equal to 15.
If the number of subareas carrying flow in the overbanks is less than 11, the distribution using all
subareas will be printed. Otherwise, the distribution will be based on sub-areas that carry more than 3
percent of the flow. An example of flow distribution is shown in Figure 11, on page 40.

10 Encroachment Data Organization

The table on the following page illustrates a possible organization of data records for an
encroachment analysis. Only the variables directly associated with encroachment analysis are shown
in the table. For this example, three profiles are calculated with the first profile as the natural profile.
Both profiles two and three are initiated with encroachment Method 4; other methods are then used
for subsequent cross sections.

11-5
11. Computer Output for Floodway Calculations

11.1 Notes in Normal Output

3470 Encroachment Stations = W, X Type = V, Target = Z. The values of STENCl and

STENCR (left and right encroachment stations) are Wand X. The method used in determining these
stations is method V and the specified target (width or percent) for that method is Z. If the target is
percent, a ratio less than one is used instead of percent so that a percent target can be distinguished
from a topwidth target.

2800 Natural 01 = A, WSEL = B, ENe 01 = C, WSEL = D, Ratio = E. This note is printed

out for encroachment Methods 3 through 6. The index discharge (0 assuming S\ = .01) is equai to A
for the natural profile at the water elevation of B. The index discharge for the encroached cross
section is equal to C at elevation D. Elevation D is equal to B for Method 3, but is higher for Methods
4 through 6. The reduction ratio of 1-(C/A) is shown as E. This ratio for Method 3 is normally equal to
the target for Note 3470 which is based on the input percentage on the ET record. E will be less than
the target when the overbanks do not carry the target percentage of flow. The ratio is normally equal
to zero for Methods 4 through 6 (the target on Note 3470 will be the equivalent ratio for Method 3),
since there is no reduction in the flow carrying capability except for the raise in water elevation from B
to D. When the reduction ratio, E, is negative, there is an increase in the index Q using only the
channel area.

11.2 Floodway Summary Table

There are three pre-defined summary tables for floodway calculations. The tables are described
in the following section. All three tables are shown in Example No. 4 output in Appendix I.

Summary Table 110 (Encroachment Data Table). Summary Table 110, requested on the J3
record, provides information relating to encroachment analysis. The column headings for Table 110
are described below.

a. SECNO - cross section number

b. CWSEl - computed water surface elevation

c. DIFKWS - the difference between the computed water surface elevations for each
profile and the first profile (which should be the natural profile for
encroachment options)

d. EG - energy grade line elevation

e. TOPWID - cross section width at the calculated water surface elevation

f. QlOB amount of flow in the left overbank

g. QCH amount of flow in the channel

h. QROB amount of flow in the right overbank

i. PERENC - the target of encroachment requested on ET record

11-6
 Table 2
Encroachment Data Organization

Card Values Comments

T1-T3 Title information (natural profile)
INQ(J12 = 2) Read second field of ET and QT record
Jl
WSEL(J1.9) Starting water surface elevation is specified here.
J2 ITRACE(J2.10 = 15) Request flow distribution for natural profile
J3 IVAR(J31 = 110), IVAR(J32 = 200) Summary Table 110 and 200 will be requested for summary printout
NC
QT
ENCFP{ET2 = O} 1:';..,.,+
•• .....nlil.............., ..."'I .....,..III"""
,,"~ t'............... 1Ig,...... ~. t' ...... I1' ....

ET ENCFP(ET3 = 84) Second profile is Method 4 with .8 foot rise

ENCFP(ET4 = 10A) Third profile is Method 4 with one foot rise.

X1
GR

X1
GR
ENCFP(ET2 = 0) First profile is natural profile (no change)

ET ENCFP(ET 3 = 7.4) Second profiles is changes to 7.. 4

ENCFP(ETA = 541) Third profile is changed to 5.41 Bridge encroachment stations (for the BT records) will be the same
as the downstream encroachments
X1
GR
SB
ENCFP(ET2 = 0) First profile is natural profile (no change).

ENCFP(ET 3 = 711) Second profile is changed to Method 1 for bridge Bridge encroachments (for both BT and GR
ET (ET.7 = STENCL) records are specified in the seventh and eighth fields of the ET record
(ET8 = STENCR)

ENCFP(ET.. 4 = 0) Continue previous encroachment instructions,

Xl
X2
BT
ENCFP(ET.2 = 0) First profile is natural profile (no change)

ET ENCFP(ET 3 = 15 3) Second profile is changed to Method 3

ENCFP(ETA = 105) Third profile is changed to Method 5

X1
GR

X1
GR
EJ End of data,
T1 .. T3 Title information (Method 4 encroachment)
INQ(J12 = 3) Read third fields of ET and QT records

J1 STRT(J15 = 0) Slope area method of starting should not be used for encroachment profile

WSEL(JL9) Starting water surface elevation specified here,

J2 NPROF(J21 = 2) Second profile
Tl .. T3 Title information (Method 4 encroachment).
INQ(J1 2 = 4) Read fourth field of ET and QT records

J1 STRT(Jl,5 = 0) Slope area method should not be used

WSEL(J19) Starting water surface elevation specified area

J2 NPROF(J21 = 3) Last profile

ER End of run

11-7
 j. STENCL - the station of the left encroachment

k. STCHL - the station of left bank

I. STCHR - the station of right bank

m. STENCR - the station of the right encroachment

Summary Table 115. A floodway distance table that provides the stations for left and right
encroachment, and the center line (halfway between bank stations), plus the distance from the center
station to left and right encroachment stations. These data facilitate transfer of encroachment station
locations to plan maps.

Summary Table 200 (FIA Table 1). A floodway table similar to FIA Table 1 which summarizes
information on floodway widths, mean velocities and water surface elevations as required for flood
insurance studies. The water surface elevations and the difference rounded to a tenth of a foot for
output display.

11-8
 Appendix III

Application of HEC-2 Bridge Routines

 Appendix III
Table of Contents

Chapter Page

1 Bridge Loss Calculations

1.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . ....... . .... .. . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . .. 111-1

1.2 Contraction and Expansion Losses. . .... .. . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . .. 111-1
1.3 Normal Bridge Method . . . ....... . .... .. . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . .. 111-1
1.4 Special Bridge Method . . . ....... . .... .. . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . .. 111-1
1.5 Input Losses 111-8

2 General Modeling Guidelines

2.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111-11

2.2 Cross Section Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111-11
2.3 Effective Area Option 111-12
2.4 Selection of Methods 111-14

3 Loss Coefficients

3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111-17

3.2 Contraction and Expansion 111-17
3.3 Special Bridge 111-17

4 Examples of Input Preparation

4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111-23

4.2 Special Bridge Example 111-23
4.3 Normal Bridge Example 111-27
4.4 Input Bridge Loss Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111-30

5 Bridge Problems and Suggested Approaches

5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111-33

5.2 MUltiple Bridge Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111-33
5.3 Dams and Weirs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111··34
5.4 Perched Bridges 111-34
5.5 Low Water Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111-34
5.6 Bridges on a Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111-34
5.7 Parallel Bridges 111-35

6 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111-37

EXHIBITS

A Special Bridge Example - Computer Run

B Normal Bridge Example - Computer Run
C Input Loss Example - Computer Run
 List of Figures

Figure
Number Page

1 Momentum Curves from Special Bridge Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 111-3

2 General Program Logic for Low Flow Calculations 111-4

3 Special Bridge Method General Logic Diagram 111-7

4 Typical Discharge Rating Curve for Bridge Culvert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. iii-8

5 Flow Diagram for Combination Flow 111-10

6 Cross Section Locations in the Vicinity of Bridges 111-11

7 Cross Sections Near Bridges 111-13

8 Special Bridge Example Cross Sections 111-24

9 Special Bridge Example Input 111-25

10 Normal Bridge Example Cross Sections 111-28

11 Normal Bridge Example Input 111-29

12 Input Bridge Loss Example Input 111-31

List of Tables

Table
Number Page

1 Contraction and Expansion Coefficients 111-17

ii
 Chapter 1

Bridge Loss Calculations

1.1 Introduction
HEC-2 computes energy losses caused by structures such as bridges and culverts in two parts.
One part consists of the losses that occur in reaches immediately upstream and downstream from the
bridge where contraction and expansion of the flow is taking place. The second part consists of
losses at the structure itself and is calculated with either the normal bridge method or the special
bridge method. As an alternative to having the program compute the losses, it is possible to input a
loss (or water surface elevation) determined externally from the program.

1.2 Contraction and Expansion Losses

Losses due to contraction and expansion of flow between cross sections are determined by
standard step profile calculations. Manning's equation is used to calculate friction losses, and all
other losses are described in terms of a coefficient times the absolute value of the change in velocity
head between adjacent cross sections. When the velocity head increases in the downstream
direction, a contraction coefficient is used; and when the velocity head decreases, an expansion
coefficient is used.

1.3 Normal Bridge Method

The normal bridge method handles a bridge cross section in the same manner as a natural river
cross section, except that the area of the bridge below the water surface is subtracted from the total
area, and the wetted perimeter is increased where the water is in contact with the bridge structure.
The bridge deck is described either by entering the constant elevations of the top of roadway and low
chord as variables ELTRD and ELLC respectively on the X2 record, or by specifying a table of
roadway stations and elevations, and corresponding low chord elevations, on the BT records. When
only ELLC and ELTRD are used, these elevations are extended horizontally until they intersect the
ground line defined on the GR records. Pier losses are accounted for by the loss of area and the
increased wetted perimeter of the piers as described in terms of cross section coordinates, usually on
the GR record.

1.4 Special Bridge Method

The special bridge method computes losses through the structure for either low flow, pressure
flow, weir flow, or for a combination of these. The profile through the bridge is calculated using
hydraulic formulas to determine the change in energy and water surface elevation through the bridge.

111-1
 Low Flow. The procedure used for low flow calculations in the special bridge method depends
on whether the bridge has piers. Without piers, the low flow solution is accomplished by standard
step calculations as in the normal bridge method. The transfer to the normal bridge method is
necessary because the equations used in the special bridge method for low flow are based on the
obstruction width due to the piers.

Without piers, the special bridge solution would indicate that no losses would occur. For a
bridge with piers, the program goes through a momentum balance for cross sections just outside and
inside the bridge to determine the class of flow. The momentum calculations are handled by
employing the following momentum relations based on the equations proposed by Koch-Carstanjen
[Eichert/Peters, 1970] [Koch-Carstanjen, 1962].

(111-1)

= flow areas at upstream and downstream sections, respectively

= flow area (gross area - area of piers) at a section within constricted

reach

= obstructed areas at upstream and downstream sections,

respectively

= vertical distance from water surface to center of gravity of A l , Az•

A 3, respectively

mpl ' mp3 = ~lYpl and ~3Yp3' respectively

CD = drag coefficient equal to 2.0 for square pier ends and 1.33 for
piers with semicircular ends

ypll ypz = vertical distance from water surface to center of gravity of Apl and
~3' respectively

Q = discharge

g = gravitational acceleration

The three parts of the momentum equation represent the total momentum flux in the constriction
expressed in terms of the channel properties and flow depths upstream, within and downstream of the
constricted section. If each part of this equation is plotted as a function of the water depth, three
curves are obtained (Figure 1) representing the total momentum flux in the constriction for various
depths at each location. The desired solutions (water depths) are then readily available for any class
of flow. The momentum equation is based on a trapezoidal section and therefore requires a
trapezoidal approximation of the bridge opening. A logic diagram for the momentum calculation is
shown in Figure 2.

111-2
 -
-
..c::

~
Q.
Q)
ri (A, - -
Co
A ,)
E
7 2. P
-
o 9 1
Q)
~

en
Q.
::>

Momentum Flux in
Constriction, M2

.
-
C
.2
ct) =
-- -;::
..c::-
_en
Q.C
~ (5 MeRIT

Momentum Flux in
Constriction, M2

-
..c::
Q.
Q)
~

E =
oQ)

-
c
o
~

en
~
Cl

Momentum Flux in
Constriction, M
2

Figure 1
Momentum Curves from Special Bridge Method

111-3
 2-77

SUBPROGRAM BLFLO, LOW FLOW CONTROL

I CALCULATE CRITICAL DEPTH OUTSIDE BRIDGE CONSTRICTION

I
! 1225'

Q
I CALCULATE CRITICAL DEPTH WITHIN BRIDGE CONSTRICTION
I
..
CD
:::J 1260
CD ~
2!. I CALCULATE MOMENTUM WITHIN BRIDGE FOR CRITICAL DEPTH
I
."
o ! 1260

..
co
I I)
3
. -- IS SUBCRITICAL FLOW ASSUMED INSTEAD OF SUPERCRITICAL FLOW? J
12?0
,--

b
co." I
c:;" US'
\IS MOMENTUM IN CONSTRICTION BASED ON DOWNSTREAM DEPTH
GREATER THAN CRITICAL MOMENTUM WITHIN BRIDGE?
I IS MOMENTUM IN CONSTRICTION BASED ON UPSTREAM DEPTH
GREATER THAN CRITICAL MOMENTUM AT BRIDGE? I
"'c
o .. 1 1275
1 1
I .. CD

~N
,S

CALCULATE UPSTREAM WATER

1 NO

WATER DEPTH IN BRIDGE =

YES

SOLVE FOR DEPTH (CLASS C)

1300 N(

WATER DEPTH IN BRIDGE =

IN BRIDGE WHICH HAS MOMEN- CRITICAL; ~ FLon
SURFACE EL. BY YARNELL CRITICAL: ~ FLOW
TUM EQUAL TO MOMENTUM WITH-
." ENERGY EQ. FOR CLAS S A 1285 IN CONSTRICTION BASED ON 1315

~
o
FLOW
1280 1
SOLVE FOR NEW DOWN-
UPSTREAM DEPTH
f330-1380, 1310 1
SOLVE FOR NEW UPSTREAM
II) 1 STREAM DEPTH (LESS THAN DEPTH (ABOVE CRITICAL)
n SOLVE FOR DEPTH IN BRIDGE CRITICAL) BASED ON
CRITICAL MOMENTUM AT I SOLVE FOR DOWNSTREAM DEPTH BASED ON CRITICAL

5-
WHICH HAS ~MENTUM EQUAL
TO MOMENTUM WITHIN BRIDGE i (LESS THAN CRITICAL) WHICH
HAS MOMENTUM WITHIN
MOMENTUM AT BRIDGE

a CONSTRICTION BASED ON 11330-1380, 1290 CONSTRICTION BASED ON 11330-1380, 1320

o'
:::J
DOWNS TREAM DEPTH
f330-1380, 1415
UPSTREAM DEPTH
11330-1380, 1390
I/)
PRINT NOTE: DOWNSTREAM PRINT NOTE: UPSTREAl'1
DEPTH IS , NOT ELEVATION IS
HYDRAULIC JUMP OCCURS NOT NEW BACKWATER
RETURN TO MAIN PROGRAM DOWNSTREAM
RETURN TO MAIN PROGRAM
r REQUIRED

1290 1325

1 1
SOLVE FOR UPSTREAM SOLVE FOR DOWNSTREAM
DEPTH (AllOVE CRITICAL) DEPTH (BELOW CRITICAL)
BASED ON CRITICAL BASED ON CRITICAL
MOMENTUM AT BRIDGE MOMENTUM AT BRIDGE

1330-1380, 1385 1330-1380, 1390

*Numbers refer to statement numbers in source deck of computer orogram

 Class A low flow occurs when the water surface through the bridge is above critical depth, i.e.,
subcritical flow. The special bridge method uses the Yarnell equation for this class of flow to
determine the change in water surface elevation through the bridge. As in the momentum
calculations, a trapezoidal approximation of the bridge opening is used to determine the areas.

H3 = 2K (K + lOw - 0.6) (a + 15a 4 )

v;
2g
(111-2)

where: H3 = drop in water surface from upstream to downstream sides of the bridge

K = pier shape coefficient

t> = ratio of velocity head to depth downstream from the bridge

obstructed area
ex = total unobstructed area

V3 = velocity downstream from the bridge

The computed upstream water surface elevation is simply the downstream water surface elevation
plus H3 • With the upstream water surface elevation known, the program computes the corresponding
velocity head and energy elevation for the upstream section.

Class B low flow can exist for either a subcritical or supercritical profile. For either profile, class
B low flow occurs when the profile passes through critical depth in the bridge constriction. For a
subcritical profile, critical depth is determined in the bridge, a new downstream depth (below critical)
and the upstream depth (above critical) are calculated by finding the depths whose corresponding
momentum fluxes equal the momentum flux in the bridge for critical depth. With this solution,
Statement 5227 DOWNSTREAM ELEV IS X, NOT Y, HYDRAULIC JUMP OCCURS DOWNSTREAM is
printed with the elevation X as the supercritical elevation. The program does not provide the location
of the hydraulic jump. A supercritical profile could be computed starting at the downstream section
with a water surface elevation X. For a supercritical profile, the bridge is acting as a control and is
causing the upstream water surface elevation to be above critical depth. Momentum equations are
again used to recompute an upstream water surface elevation (above critical) and a downstream
elevation below critical depth. For this situation, the Statement 5920 UPSTREAM ELEVATION IS X
NOT Y, NEW BACKWATER REQUIRED is printed indicating a subcritical profile should be calculated
upstream from the bridge starting at elevation X.

Class C low flow is computed for a supercritical profile where the water surface profile stays
supercritical through the bridge constriction. The downstream depth and the depth in the bridge are
computed by the momentum equations based on the momentum flux in the constriction and the
upstream depth.

Pressure Flow. The pressure flow computations use the orifice flow equation of U.S. Army
Engineer Manual 1110-2-1602, "Hydraulic Design of Reservoir Outlet Structures," [USACE, 1963J:

111-5
 (111-3)

where: H = difference between the energy gradient elevation upstream and tailwater
elevation downstream

K = total loss coefficient

A = net area of the orifice

g = gravitational acceleration

Q = total orifice flow

The total loss coefficient K, for determining losses between the cross sections immediately upstream
and downstream from the bridge, is equal to 1.0 plus the sum of loss coefficients for intake,
intermediate piers, friction, and other minor losses. The section on loss coefficients provides values
for the total loss coefficient and shows the derivation of the equation and the definition of the loss
coefficient.

Weir Flow. Flow over the bridge and the roadway approaching the bridge is calculated using the
standard weir equation:

Q = CLH 3 / 2 (111-4)

where: C = coefficient of discharge

L = effective length of weir controlling flow

H = difference between the energy grade line elevation and the roadway crest
elevation

Q = total flow over the weir

The approach velocity is included by using the energy grade line elevation in lieu of the upstream
water surface elevation for computing the head, H. Values for the coefficient of discharge 'C' are
presented in the section on loss coefficients. Where submergence by tailwater exists, the coefficient
'C' is reduced by the program [Bradley, 1978]. Submergence corrections are based on a
trapezoidal weir shape or optionally an ogee spillway shape. A total weir flow, Q, is computed by
subdividing the weir crest into segments, computing L, H, a submergence correction and Q for each
segment, and summing the incremental discharges.

Combination Flow. Sometimes combinations of low flow or pressure flow occur with weir flow.
In these cases a trial and error procedure is used, with the equations just described, to determine the
amount of each type of flow. The procedure consists of assuming energy elevations and computing
the total discharge until the computed discharge equals, within 1 percent, the discharge desired.

Decision Logic. The general flow diagram for the special bridge method is shown in Figure 3.
By following the decision logic associated with a bridge solution, the program user can determine
what adjustment could be made in the program input to alter the computed solution. A discussion of
the logic sequence is provided to assist the user in interpreting the program solutions.

111-6
 2-77

GENERAL FLOW DIAGRAM

SPECIAL BRIDGE METHOD

CAlCULAT~ WATER SURFACE ELEVATION

0" OTHtR SIIJE OF IlRIUGE ASSUMWG
LOW FLOW. CONTROL "sUBPROGRAM BLFLd'

IS THE ASSUI1ED LOW FLOW

NO
WATER SURFACE ELEVATION
.....-----IABOVE THE H1NIMUI1 TOP OF'
ROADWAY (IS THERE WEIR
FLOW? 15*_
YES

1
ET Ef,ERGY ELEV. • ASSUMED
~ ..L.. -tWATER ELEVATION PLUS PREVIOUS
... SECTION VELOCITY HEAD (OUTSIDE
BRIDGE • 1820 •

FLOW IS BY COMBINATION
OF LOW FLOW AND WEIR
FLOW. 196

LOW FLOW CONTROL RETUlltl

NO
I~ lil"HlUIi TOP UF ROAIlWi\Y
~L~VATlO" AliuVE THE
Hlbll~ST U.S .. LOW CHURIJ
ELtVATlO,i?

NO
COMPARE EG FOR PRESSURE
I~ THE ~NERGY ELEVATlOi, AilO WEI R AllIl LOW AilO
YES FUR LOW FLOW AliuVE WEIR FLOW. HIGHER EG
j'II\AH1UI1 E,lERGY FOR LOW CONTROLS. 2380
fLUW (LRITICAl UEPTHJ?

YES

NO
tRRUR h;.SSAbE ENERGY ELEVATION IS
SlJYERLRI TICAl. UETERNINEU IN SUBROUTIllE
FLuw-P~SSlJRE IlWEIR. DEPTH NUST BE
FLu~
UETERMINED FOR KNOWN
1925 ENERGY ELEVATION BY TRIAL
ANil ERROR IN IlAlN PROGRAM.
1810

*Number's refer to statement nurrbers in subprogram BWEIR,

Figure 3
Special Bridge Method General Logic Diagram

111-7
 The first step in the special bridge method is to assume low flow conditions and estimate the
water surface elevation on the other side of the bridge. How that estimate is made depends on
whether the bridge has piers. If there are bridge piers, the program goes through the momentum
equations to determine class of flow and water surface elevation. Without piers, the program
temporarily assumes the water depth is the same on both sides of the bridges.

The program then checks for weir flow by comparing the estimated water surface elevation to the
minimum top of road elevation (ELTRD). If it is possible that weir flow exists, the program estimates
an energy elevation based on the velocity head at the previous section.

The program then compares the estimated low flow energy elevation to the maximum elevation of
the bridge low chord (ELLC). If the low flow energy elevation (EGLWC) is greater than the low chord
elevation (ELLC) the program will calculate an energy elevation assuming pressure flow (EGPRS). If
the low flow energy elevation is less than ELLC, the program concludes that low flow controls and
checks again to determine if weir flow exists. If there is weir flow, the program will check for piers.
With piers, a trial and error solution will be made for low flow (by the Yarnell equation) and weir flow
(by the weir equation). Without piers, the normal bridge solution (standard step calculation with
adjustments in area and wetted perimeter) will be used to compute the upstream elevation. If weir
flow did not exist, the program would check for piers and then solve for a low flow solution. With
piers, the low flow solution would be based on the momentum or the Yarnell equation; and without
piers, the solution would be computed using standard step calculations.

Had the energy elevation required for pressure flow (EGPRS) been calculated, the program would
go on to compare the low flow energy elevation EGLWC with EGPRS. Figure 4 illustrates the
comparison of EGLWC and EGPRS.

Combined Pressure and

Weir Flow.
Weir Flow; Q= CLH 3 / 2

Top of Roadway --or

(ELTRO)
Pressure Flow
O=A-/2gH/K

-..
c
~
Low Flow
o Control
>
iij
>-
.....
Cl'

c
ILl

Discharge

Figure 4
Typical Discharge Rating Curve for Bridge Culvert

111-8
 One exception to the direct comparisons of the two energy elevations is when the minimum
elevation of the top of road (ELTRD) is less than the maximum elevation of the low chord (ELLC). For
this type of bridge, a combination of weir flow and low flow can occur. The low flow energy elevation
(EGLWC) is compared to the estimated maximum energy elevation for low flow control (1.5 times
depth plus invert elevation), rather than EGPRS, because the low road elevation would cause weir flow
to exist prior to the occurrence of pressure flow. Depth is defined here as the difference between the
low chord (ELLC) and the invert elevation (ELMIN).

At critical depth, 1.5 times the depth represents the minimum specific energy that could occur for
a rectangular section. If critical depth occurred just at the maximum low chord elevation, it would
produce the maximum possible energy elevation for low flow. Therefore, an energy elevation greater
than that value would have to be for pressure flow. For the energy range between the low chord and
the maximum low flow energy, the program will compute the energy elevations for low and weir flow
and pressure and weir flow. The higher of the two energy elevations will control. Energy elevations
below the maximum low chord are for low flow or low and weir flow for this type of bridge.

Based on the previous checks, the bridge routine has differentiated between low flow and
pressure flow. With either type of flow, the program checks against the minimum top of road elevation
(ELTRD) to determine if weir flow also exists. If the energy elevation is greater than ELTRD, a trial and
error solution is made to determine the distribution of flow. The computed weir flow is listed under
QWEIR and the flow under the bridge is given under QPR regardless of whether it is low flow or
pressure flow. The flow diagram for computing the combination flow solution is shown in Figure 5.
Up to 20 iterations are made to balance the total discharge to within 1 percent of the given discharge.

Important parameters in the decision logic of the special bridge method are the two test
elevations ELLC and ELTRD. Because they play such an important role in the bridge analysis, it is
recommended they always be coded as input on fields four and five of the X2 record.

1.5 Input Losses

One other method of computing water surface profiles through bridges is to input the bridge loss.
The loss used could be just the "structure" loss, or it could be the total loss between any two adjacent
cross sections. Differences in water surface elevations can be read on the X5 record for each
discharge profile. The field read on the X5 record is called by variable INQ on the second field of the
J1 record.

For control structures, the known water surface elevations as provided by a rating curve can be
read on an X5 record for multiple profiles or an X2 record for a single profile job. However, for a given
X5 record, the data must consist entirely of either known water surface elevations or of differences in
water surface elevation. Both types of input cannot be placed on the same record.

11I-9
 2-77

SUBPROGRAM BWEIR, COMBINATION OF WEIR

FLOW AND ORIFICE (OR L.OW) FLOW

CALCULATE DISCHARGE UNDER BRIDGE BY

y
MAKE INITIAL ESTIMATE OF ENERGY ELEVATION
ORIFICE EQUATION I
~
1970-2005

!
INITIALIZE WEIR FlOW TO ZERO
2120
IS FlOW A COMBINATION OF WEIR AND ORIFICE
AND NOT WEIR AND LOW FlOW?
YES I

rl ! 2125
!NO
2020

I
CALCULATE HEAD, WEIR LENGTH FOR FIRST MAKE INITIAL ESTIMATE OF DISCHARGE
ROADWAY SEGMENT WHICH IS BELOW THE PASSING UNDER BRIDGE (CHANNEL Q)
ASSUMED ENERGY ELEVATION

~
2130-2150

CALCULATE SUBMERGENCE WEIR COEFFICIENT

!
CALCULATE OOWNSTREAM VELOCITY HEAD
2030

FOR ROADWAY SEGMENT USING ASSUMED CHANNEL Q AND I+-

PREVIOUS AREA

~
2165

CALCULATE UPSTREAM WATER ELEVATION

CALCULATE DISCHARGE OVER WEIR SEGMENT
BASED ON YARNELL' S ENERGY EQUATION
AND ADD TO PREVIOUS WEIR DISCHARGES

~
2195 CALCULATE UPSTREAM VELOCITY HEAD
FROM ASSUMED ENERGY AND CALCULATED
PROCEED TO NEXT ROADWAY SEGMENT WATER SURFACE ELEVATION

~
rm
2215
INCREASE ENERGY ELEVATION TO .1 FT
ABOVE UPSTREAM WATER SURFACE IF
IS END OF ROADWAY SEGMENT ABOVE ASSUMED VELOCITY HEAD WAS NEGATIVE
ENERGY ELEVATION?

NO~ 2220
!
H CALCULATE HEAD AND WEIR LENGTH FOR
SEGMENT OF ROADWAY
CALCULATE UPSTREAM:
VELOCITY FROM VELOCITY HEAD,
AREA FROM DEPTH,
~
2230
DISCHARGE FROM AREA AND VELOCITY
ARE ANY OF REMAINING ROADWAY ELEVATIONS
BELOW ASSUMED ENERGY ELEVATION?
NO
!
YES~ 2240 ARE ASSUMED AND COMPUTED CHANNEL Q
WITHIN ONE PERCENT?
YES
4-J CALCULATE NEW STARTING HEAD AND WEIR
LENGTH
NO!
2265 MAKE NEW ASSUMPTION OF CHANNEL Q
t--
2085
ADD DISCHARGES FOR WEIR AND ORIFICE (OR
LOW FlOW) TO OBTAIN COMPUTED DISCHARGE
FOR ASSUMED ENERGY ELEVATION

~
~ IS COMPUTED DISCHARGE WITHIN ONE PE~.=J
OF ACTUAL DISCHARGE?

~ NO 2280

I MAKE NEW ASSUMPTION OF ENERGY ELEVATION

2315-2350
TNO
CALCULATE MAXIMUM ENERGY ElEVATION FOR
LOW FlOW ASSUMING CRITICAL DEPTH AT LOW
CHORD ELEVATION

L-.-. FOR ASSUMED TYPE OF FlOW UNDER BRIDGE

IS FINAL ENERGY ELEVATION COMPATIBLE?

IF NOT ASSUME OPPOSITE TYPE OF FlOW

UNDER BRIDGE

l YES
ACCEPT ENERGY ELEVATION, SOLVE FOR COR-
RECT WATER SURFACE ELEVATION IN MAIN END
PROGRAM
2370

Figure 5
Flow Diagram for Combination Flow

111-10
 Chapter 2

General Modeling Guidelines

2.1 Introduction
Considerations in modeling the geometry of a reach of river in the vicinity of a bridge are
essentially the same for both the normal bridge method and the special bridge method. Suggested
techniques are presented in this section and are applied in subsequent examples on bridge coding.

2.2 Cross Section Locations

Figure 6 shows in plan view the basic configuration of cross sections for computing losses
through bridges. For ease of discussion, assume a subcritical profile starting downstream from the
bridge.

Cross section 1 is sufficiently downstream from the bridge that flow is not affected by the bridge.
The flow has fully expanded, and the basic input problem is to determine how far downstream from
the bridge the cross section should be located. A rule of thumb is to locate the downstream cross
section about four times the average length of the side constriction caused by the bridge abutments.
Therefore, cross section 1 would be located downstream from the bridge four times the distance AB
or CD shown in Figure 6. Because the constriction of flow may vary with the discharge, the
downstream reach length should represent the average condition if a range of discharges are used in
the model.

.(' .

I
I
I
/
/
,/

Figure 6
Cross Section Locations In the Vicinity of Bridges

Locating cross section 1 based on a 4:1 expansion of flow downstream from the bridge may
provide a reach length to cross section 2 that is too long for a reasonable estimate of friction loss. If

111-11
intermediate cross sections are required, the 4:1 expansion rate could be used to locate the lateral
extent of intermediate cross sections. The user should carefully review the program output to
determine if an adequate number of cross sections are used. A change in conveyance of more than
30 percent between the two cross sections and a relatively long reach would indicate a need for
intermediate cross sections.

Cross section 2 is a river cross section immediately (Le., within a foot or two) downstream from
the bridge. The cross section should represent the effective 1 flow area just outside the bridge and its
location could be considered as the downstream face of the bridge. It is important to work with
effective flow area because it is assumed in the application of the energy equation that the mean
downstream velocity for each subsection can be determined from Manning's equation. The method
used to define the effective area at this cross section is discussed under effective flow area. The
standard step solution at cross section 2 would include determination of the expansion loss from
cross section 2 to cross section 1.

The bridge loss occurring from cross section 2 to cross section 3 is determined by either the
special bridge method with the SB record or by standard step calculations through one or two cross
sections that define the bridge opening (normal bridge method). The selection of the bridge routine
and the input requirements are presented in a subsequent cross section.

Cross section 3 represents the effective flow area just upstream from the bridge. The reach
lengths from cross section 2 to cross section 3 are generally equal to the width of the bridge. The
energy elevation computed by the special bridge method is applied to this cross section or, for the
normal bridge method, a standard step solution from a cross section in the bridge to this cross
section provides the energy elevation. The energy loss computed between cross sections 2 and 3
represents the loss through the bridge structure itself.

Cross section 4 is an upstream cross section where the flow lines are approximately parallel and
the full cross section is effective. Because the flow contraction can occur over a shorter distance than
the flow expansion, the reach length between cross sections 3 and 4 can be about one times the
average bridge opening between the abutments (distance B-C in Figure 6). However, this criterion for
locating the upstream cross section may result in too short a reach length for situations where the
ratio of the width of the bridge opening to the width of the floodplain is small. An alternative criterion
would be to locate the upstream cross section a distance equal to the bridge contraction (distance AB
or CD in Figure 6). The program will compute the contraction portion of the bridge loss over this
reach length by the standard step calculations.

2.3 Effective Area Option

A basic problem in setting up the bridge routines is the definition of effective flow area near the
bridge structure. Referring to Figure 6, the dashed lines represent the effective flow boundary for low
flow and pressure flow conditions. Therefore, for cross sections 2 and 3, ineffective flow areas to
either side of the bridge opening (along distance AB and CD) should not be included for low flow or
pressure flow. The elimination of the ineffective overbank areas can be accomplished by redefining
the geometry at cross sections 2 and 3 (as shown in part C of Figure 7) or by using the natural
ground profile and requesting the program's effective area option to eliminate the use of the overbank
area. By redefining the cross section, a fixed boundary is used at the sides of the cross section to
contain the flow, when in fact a solid boundary is not physically there. The use of the effective area
option does not add wetted perimeter to the flow boundary above the given ground profile.

1 Effective flow is that portion of flow where the main velocity is normal to the cross section and in
the downstream direction.

11I-12
 f f1F11f
I
I
I
I
,
I

A. Channel Profile and Section Locations

B. Bridge Cross Section on Natural Floodway

C. Portion of Cross Sections 2 & 3 Effective for l.ow Flow and Pressure
Flow

Figure 7
Cross Sections Near Bridges

111-13
 The bridge example shown in Figure 7 is a typical situation where the bridge spans the entire
floodway and its abutments obstruct the natural floodway. This is the same situation as was shown in
plan view in Figure 6. The cross section numbers and locations are the same as those discussed in
"Cross Section Locations" (see Section 2.2). The input problem is to convert the natural ground profile
at cross sections 2 and 3 from the cross section shown in part "B" to that shown in part "C" of Figure
7.

The effective area option of the program (IEARA = 10, Field 1, X3 record) is used to keep all the
flow in the channel until the elevations associated with the left and/or right bank stations are exceeded
by the computed water surface elevation. The program will allow the controlling elevations of the left
and right bank stations to be specified by the user. This is done by reading in effective area
elevations (ELLEA and ELREA) in Fields 8 and 9 of the X3 record. If these elevations are not read in,
elevations specified on the GR records for the left and right bank stations will be used.

The effective area option applies to the left and right bank stations; therefore, those stations
should coincide with the abutments of the bridge. For cross sections 2 and 3, the left and right bank
stations should line up with the bridge abutments. An X3 record would be used with these cross
sections to call for the effective area option and to designate effective area elevations for the left and
right bank stations. The given elevations would correspond to an elevation where weir flow would just
start over the bridge. For the downstream cross section, the threshold water surface elevation for weir
flow is not usually known on the initial run, so an estimate must be made. An elevation anywhere
between the low chord and top-of-road elevation could be used; so an average of the two elevations
might be a reasonable estimate.

Using the effective area option to define the effective flow area allows the entire overbank to
become effective as soon as the effective area elevations are exceeded. The assumption is that under
weir flow conditions, the water can generally flow across the whole bridge length and the entire
overbank in the vicinity of the bridge would be effectively carrying flow up to and over the bridge. If it
is more reasonable to assume only part of the overbank is effective for carrying flow when the bridge
is under weir flow, then the cross section should be redefined for cross sections 2 and 3 to eliminate
the portion of the overbank area considered ineffective even under weir flow conditions.

Cross section 3, just upstream from the bridg~, is usually coded in the same manner as cross
section two. In many cases the cross sections are identical. The only difference generally is the
elevation to use for the effective area option. For the upstream cross section, the elevation usually
would be the low point of the top-of-road (ELTRD).

Using the effective area option in the manner just described for the two cross sections on either
side of the bridge provides for a constricted section when all of the flow is going under the bridge.
When the water surface is higher than the control elevations used, the entire cross section is used.
The program user should check the computed solutions on either side of the bridge section to insure
they are consistent with the type of flow. That is, for low flow or pressure flow solutions, the printout
should show the effective area restricted to the main channel. When the bridge data indicates weir
flow, the solution should show that the entire cross section is effective.

2.4 Selection of Methods

When selecting the method of computing the water surface profile through a bridge, there are
three basic choices: (1) determine the change in water surface elevation or the water surface
elevation by an "external" technique and input the results into the program, (2) calculate the energy
loss based on friction using the standard step method - normal bridge method, or (3) calculate the
energy loss by previously discussed formulas of the special bridge method. Each method should be
considered and the following discussion provides some basic guidelines. For the analysis of culverts,
the special culvert option is recommended, see Appendix IV.

111-14
 Input Losses. The following are examples of when a change or known water surface elevation
might be read into the program:

1. If a structure acts as a hydraulic control and a rating curve is available, reading in the
known water surface elevation is the easiest and surest way to establish proper water
surface elevations.

2. The use of observed data to estimate losses through a bridge can also be an
expeditious method of establishing the losses.

3. An alternate computation technique can be used such as the Bureau of Public Roads
(BPR) procedure [Bradley, 1978] for determining the loss for low flow conditions. The
calculated loss can then be read in. Care must be taken to insure the loss calculated
by an alternate method is properly used in the program. For example, the BPR
technique provides the increase in water surface elevation above the norma! water
surface elevation without the bridge. Therefore, it includes the effects of contraction
and expansion losses and the loss caused by the structure, but it does not reflect the
normal friction loss that would occur without the bridge.

Normal Bridge Method. The use of the standard step method for computing losses is most
applicable when friction losses are the predominate consideration. The following examples are some
typical cases where the normal bridge method might be used.

1. For long culverts under low flow conditions, the standard step method is the most
suitable approach. Several sections can be taken through the culvert to model
changes in grade or shape or to model a very long culvert.

2. In cases where the bridge and abutments are a small obstruction to the flow, the
normal bridge method can be used.

3. Because the special bridge method requires a trapezoidal approximation of the bridge
opening for low flow solutions, the normal bridge method could be used where the
flow area cannot be reasonably approximated by a trapezoid (see Section 5.2, page
11I-33).

Special Bridge Method. The special bridge method is capable of solving a wide range of flow
problems. The following are situations where the method is applicable.

1. The special bridge method will determine the class of low flow based on a trapezoidal
approximation of a bridge with piers. If a bridge opening can be reasonably modeled
by a trapezoid, the program will determine when the profile goes through critical depth
and what the corresponding water surface elevation is on either side of the bridge.

2. Pressure flow is computed using the orifice equation. The orifice coefficient can be
computed to account for friction; therefore, the special bridge method would be
suitable for pressure flow through long culverts.

3. Weir flow is computed in the special bridge method; therefore, dams and weirs can be
modeled as well as bridges. When computing pressure flow or weir flow, the program
user might consider whether the bridge deck could survive such conditions.

4. Combinations of low or pressure flow and weir flow can be computed using the
hydraulic formulas. An iterative procedure solves the combination flow problem for a
variety of conditions. For low flow and weir flow solutions the bridge must have piers
for the program to handle the low flow part of the combination flow. Otherwise the
program will revert to the normal bridge method.

111-15
 Chapter 3

Loss Coefficients

3.1 Introduction

After the cross sections are located and the method of solution is determined, the program user
has to select coefficients associated with the method chosen. For the normal bridge method the
Manning's 'n' values are used to determine the friction loss. The contraction and expansion losses
caused by the bridge are estimated using contraction and expansion coefficients.

3.2 Contraction and Expansion Coefficients

These coefficients are used to compute energy losses associated with changes in the shape of
river cross sections (or effective flow areas). The loss due to expansion of flow is usually much larger
than the contraction loss, and losses from short abrupt transitions are larger than losses from gradual
transitions. The transition loss is computed by multiplying a coefficient times the absolute difference
in velocity heads between cross sections. If the values for the coefficients are being redefined to
account for contraction and expansion through a bridge, the new values are read on the NC record
prior to the section where the change in velocity head is evaluated. Referring back to Figure 6, on a
subcritical profile, the new values should be read in just before section two and changed back to the
original values after section four. Typical values are shown below.

Table 1
Contraction and Expansion Coefficients

Contraction Expansion

No transition loss computed 0.0 0.0

Gradual transitions 0.1 0.3
Bridge sections 0.3 0.5
Abrupt transitions 0.6 0.8

The maximum value for the expansion coefficient would be one (1.0).

3.3 Special Bridge Coefficients

When using the special bridge method, coefficients must be read in for the Yarnell equation, the
orifice equation, and the weir equation. The following discussion provides suggested values and
methods for estimating the required coefficients.

111-17
 Pier Shape Coefficient XK is used in Yarnell's energy equation for computing the change in
water surface elevation through a bridge for class A low flow. Because the calculation is based on the
presence of piers, both the coefficient and a total width (BWP) must be read on the SB record. If
there are no piers, both variables can be left blank and the program will use a standard step solution
for low flows. The following table gives values of XK for various pier shapes.

Pier Shape XK

Semicircular nose and tail 0.90

Twin-cylinder piers with connecting diaphragm 0.95
Twin-cylinder piers without diaphragm 1.05
90° triangular nose and tail 1.05
Square nose a'1d tail 1~25
Ten pile trestle bent 2.50

The Yarne" equation is a semi-empirical equation based on hydraulic model data. As such, it
probably should not be applied in cases where the flow obstruction is something other than a pier; for
example, the fill separating twin circular culverts.

Loss Coefficient XKOR is used in the orifice flow equation,

(111-5)

This form of the equation can be derived by applying the energy equation from a point just
downstream from the bridge (2) to a point just upstream (i), see Figure 6.

y, + Z, + a,
Vf = yz + Zz +
vi
az 2g + HL (111-6)
2g

where: y = depth of water

Z = invert elevation

VZ
a2g
- = velocity head

HL = head loss

Defining the head (H) on the orifice as the difference between the upstream energy elevation and the
downstream water surface elevation (the definition used in HEC-2) produces:

(111-7)

111-18
Substituting H from Equation 111-7 into Equation 111-6 produces:

(111-8)

Head loss (H L) through the bridge can be defined in terms of the bridge velocity head and loss
coefficient Kb • The example to a point just downstream can be defined by an expansion coefficient Ke
and the change in velocity head.

(11I-9)

where: b = subscript designating the bridge

The head loss equation (Equation 111-9) then can be used to define HL in Equation 111-8:

H = 2g
V; K(V;)
0: 2 +
2g b
K(V;2g _ 2gV;)
+
e
0: 2 (111-10)

If the expansion coefficient (Ke ) is taken as 1.0, the equation can be rewritten into the form of the
orifice equation by adding the continuity equation (Q = VA).

(111-11)

where: K = Kb + 1

The loss coefficient used in the program's orifice equation can be related to the loss coefficient C from
another commonly used orifice flow equation:

(111-12)
Q = CA V2gH

The conversion (XKOR=1/C 2) can be used for tabulated values of C. However, care must be taken to
insure the definition of H used in the various formulations is applicable.

The Bureau of Public Roads [Bradley, 1978] shows experimental values for C for fully submerged
conditions to vary from 0.7 to 0.9. A value of 0.8 is recommended as being applicable for the average
two to four lane concrete girder bridge. The definition of H is consistent with that used in HEC-2. In
the absence of calibration data, a value of 1.56 for XKOR (C = 0.8) would be applicable to most
bridges and short culverts. For longer culverts, the coefficient can be calculated by the sum of XKOR
as shown.
(111-13)

11I-19
 where: k e = entrance loss coefficient

kf = friction loss coefficient

The coefficient for friction loss (k f ) can be computed from Manning's equation by equating two
equations for friction loss in the culvert.

(111-14)
•

where: Sf = the average friction slope

L = the length of the culvert

Manning's equation for the velocity in the culvert is rearranged to define Sf'

(111-15)
2.22R 4 / 3

By substituting Equation 111-15 for Equation 111-14, the coefficient k f can be defined based on culvert
parameters.

= . L. 2g
2.22R 4 / 3 -v~

(111-16)

Typical values of the coefficients are shown below:

Description k

Intake (k e ) 0.1 to 0.9

Intermediate piers 0.05
Friction (Manning's equation) kf
XKOR = Lk + 1

where: English k f =29n 2 L/R 4 / 3

Metric kf =19.6n2 L/R 4 / 3

111-20
 King's Handbook [King/Brater, 1963], in its discussion on pipe culverts gives an entrance loss of
.1 for a flush inlet, and 0.15 for a projecting inlet for concrete pipes. Inlet loss coefficients as high as
0.9 for a projecting entrance and corrugated metal pipes are indicated. All the coefficients were
applied to the velocity head for the pipe (also see Appendix III for additional information on entrance
and exit coefficents).

For multiple culverts, an equivalent coefficient can be computed to apply in cases where all
culverts are flowing full.

Q = V2gh AT ~ 1
K equiv
(11I-17)

AT 2
2

where: Kequiv =

AT = total area

Ai area of individual culvert

Ki = coefficient for individual culvert

n = number of culverts

Coefficient of Discharge, COFQ is used in the standard weir equation: Q = CLH 3 / 2 . Under free
flow conditions (discharge independent of tailwater) the coefficient of discharge 'C', ranges from 2.5
to 3.1 (1.39 - 1.72 metric) for broad-crested weirs depending primarily upon the gross head on the
crest ('C' increases with head). Increased resistance to flow caused by obstructions such as trash
on bridge railings, curbs, and other barriers would decrease the value of 'C'. With submerged flow
(discharge affected by tailwater), the coefficient 'C' should be reduced. This is done automatically
by the program using the Waterways Experiment Station Design Chart 1114. The correction is based
on model studies with a low agee crest weir.

Tables of weir coefficients 'C' are given for broad-crested weirs in King's Handbook with the
value of 'C' varying with measured head 'H' and breadth of weir. For rectangular weirs with a
breadth of 15 feet and a 'H' of 1 foot or more, the given value is 2.63. Trapezoidal shaped weirs
generally have a larger coefficient with typical values ranging from 2.7 to 3.08.

Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways [Bradley, 1978] provides a curve of 'C' versus the head on the
roadway. The roadway section is shown as a trapezoid and the coefficient rapidly changes from 2.9
for a very small 'H' to 3.03 for H = 0.6 feet. From there, the curve levels off near a value of 3.05.

With very little prototype data available, it seems the assumption of a rectangular weir for flow
over the bridge deck (assuming the bridge can withstand the forces) and a coefficient of 2.6 would be
reasonable. If the weir flow is over the roadway approaches to the bridge, a value of 3.0 would be
consistent with available data. If weir flow occurs a combination of bridge and roadway, an average
coefficient (weighted by weir length) could be used.

11I-21
 Chapter 4

Examples of Input Preparation

4.1 Introduction

Example problems using the two bridge methods and direct input of bridge loss are provided to
illustrate input preparation. The special bridge method is used for a "typical bridge with piers" and the
normal bridge method is used for an arch bridge. A simple example illustrates use of the X5 record to
read in a change in water surface elevation. Chapter 5, "Bridge Problems and Suggested
Approaches', presents the modifications of basic input requirements for some typical bridge problems
such as multiple bridge openings, perched bridges, low water bridges and others.

4.2 Special Bridge Example

The example problem cross sections, with computed water surface elevations, are shown in
Figure 8. The bridge spans the entire floodway and has abutments that constrict the natural flow. To
simplify input, it will be assumed that the reach has a constant cross sectional shape and has a bed
slope of zero. Other pertinent data is shown on the figure. The following discussion describes the
input problem and the input is shown in Figure 9. A computer run with the data set is given in
Exhibit A.

The problem is set up for a multiple profile run using the QT record. Manning's 'n' values are
read on the NC record and contraction and expansion coefficients of 0.3 and 0.5 were selected.

Cross Section 1 is the downstream cross section located where the flow has fully expanded
back onto the floodplain. The section will be repeated as cross section 2; therefore, the left and right
bank stations are selected to be consistent with the bridge opening. The section is located
downstream using the 4:1 expansion of the flow as previously presented. The reach lengths for the
first section are set to zero as this is the section where the profile is being initiated. The GR records
are used to describe the natural ground section in the usual manner.

Cross Section 2 is immediately downstream from the bridge. The reach lengths between
sections one and two are set equal to four times the average abutment length (60 feet ±) for a total
reach length of 240 feet. Because the natural section was considered applicable, the ground profile
was repeated.

The effective area option is used at cross section 2 to confine the flow to the bridge opening
when flow through the bridge is low flow or pressure flow. The left and right bank stations have
already been set consistent with the abutment locations. All that is required is the X3 record with a
ten in the first field and the selection of an elevation above which weir flow can be expected over the
bridge. For the initial data input, the elevation at cross section 2 corresponding to weir flow is
generally unknown, so an estimate must be made. In the example, water cannot flow around the
bridge so weir flow must pass over the bridge. A reasonable estimate for the downstream elevation
(Le., at cross section 2) is an elevation midway between the low chord and top of road elevations, or
36 feet in this example. The limiting elevations for the effective area option are entered in Fields 8 and
9 of the X3 record.

111-23
 Simple Creek Simple Cr'eek
Cross-section 1 000 Cross-sec"t.lon 2 000
r---~- 090....:..~ 080~'---'- --'--~~ 080--'----------'

50

., .,040
.
0"
>
.
>

100j----..,-~-'~300--400---500-"--600---;oo----810 '0 0+-.---------;O;;-~---:;OO-___SOO---,'0-,-0--~800

Distance Distance

Downstream Natural Section Downstream from Bridge

Simple Creek Simple Creek

Cross-section 3 000 Cross-section 4 000
- - '- , 0 8 0 - ' - - - " - r---~- 080~'--~_ -'---~ 080-'-__'
~
o

.,040 .,040
> >
• •

1°0+---"'-'-'-'--2ilO---rn---:;OO-_M_- 60
5 TO0---"0-0 --7-orO--~8 10
o ---~---~---~---~---~---~---~---~
100 200 300 400 sao 600 700 900
Dlstllnce Drstllnce

Upstream from Bridge plus Bridge Data Upstream Natural Section

Figure 8
Special Bridge Example Cross Sections

111-24
 Figure 9
Special Bridge Example Input

Record SB defines bridge characteristics for the special bridge method. The first three variables
are the coefficients for computing class A low flow, pressure flow, and weir flow, respectively. The first
field contains the pier shape coefficient for the Yarnell equation. The shape of the piers is the basis
for selecting the coefficient as shown on page 19. For the example, twin-cylinder piers without
diaphragm require a coefficient of 1.05. For a bridge without piers, the first field can be left blank.

For the pressure flow calculations, the value of XKOR is used in the orifice equation. Based on
the typical value suggested by the Bureau of Public Roads, a value of 1.6 was selected.

The weir flow coefficient, COFQ, is used to calculate weir flow. In the example, most of the weir
flow would occur over the bridge rather than the road, so a value of 2.6 was selected.

The variable RDLEN was not used because it is only applicable for a horizontal weir with a crest
length RDLEN. To define the weir profile for the example problem the BT records are used.

Six variables on the SB record provide the data to model the bridge opening. Five variables
define the bridge for low flow calculations with the momentum and Yarnell equations. The bottom
width of the trapezoid (BWC) and the side slope (SS) provide the basic trapezoid. Variable BWP gives

111-25
the total width of piers and ELCHU and ELCHD give the upstream and downstream elevations for the
invert of the trapezoid. The sixth variable, BAREA, provides the net area of the bridge opening for
calculating pressure flow.

In making a trapezoidal approximation of a bridge opening, dimensions should be chosen so that

the corresponding water surface elevation versus area curve duplicates as closely as possible the
elevation versus area curve for the actual bridge opening. If the area-elevation relation cannot be
preserved over the complete range of elevations, emphasis should be placed on the range of
elevations to be used in the problem. If low flows are to be run, then the elevation-area curve
corresponding to the trapezoid should be appropriate for the lower depths in the bridge section. For
high flows, the small depths would not be as important. To check the trapezoidal area for large flows,
the user should compare the program computed output variable TRAPEZOID AREA to the net bridge
area (BAREA) based on the actual bridge. The two areas should be close, especially if flows near the
bridge's low flow capacity are being computed.

The variables ELCHU and ELCHD define the upstream and downstream invert elevations for the
trapezoidal area. If the trapezoid invert is the same as the minimum elevation (ELMIN) for the previous
cross section (cross sectiorl' 2 in this example), then the elevations can be left blank on the SB record.
In some cases, the invert elevation must be set higher than ELMIN to give a better bridge model
(elevation-area curve) at higher discharges. In those cases, the invert elevations can be read on the
SB record.

For the example problem, the invert elevation for the trapezoid was set at 20 feet, slightly higher
than the actual elevation. A bottom width of 15 feet and side slopes of 1.6 give a reasonable
trapezoidal approximation. Total net area based on the trapezoidal model is 555 square feet.

The variable BAREA is the net area under the bridge to be used in the orifice equation. Once the
program has determined that flow through the bridge is by pressure flow, the trapezoidal
approximation is no longer used, and flow calculations are made using the orifice equation. The total
open area under the bridge (BAREA) is used for the pressure flow calculations. Based on the given
bridge geometry, an area of 565 square feet is entered in Field 7 of the SB record.

Cross Section 3, immediately upstream from the bridge, is a repeat of cross section two for this
example. The reach lengths for this section are the length of the water course through the bridge.

Following the Xi record for cross section 3 is an X2 record. This record is required with the
special bridge method to call the special bridge method (IBRID = 1 in Field 3) and to give test
elevations for pressure flow and weir flow (ELLC and ELTRD in Fields 4 and 5). The maximum
elevation on the low chord of the bridge, ELLC, is used by the program to check if there is a
possibility of pressure flow. The low point of the top of road, ELTRD, is used to test if weir flow exists.
Even though the program can scan the BT records to find these elevations, it is good practice to
always specify them on the X2 record. Also, the need for low chord elevations on the BT records is
eliminated when coding a bridge with piers for the special bridge method. The effective area option is
defined for cross section 3 in the same manner as for crosS section 2. For the upstream side of the
bridge, the elevations for the control of effective area are set to the minimum top of road (ELTRD). As
in cross section 2, the X3 records has a ten in the first field and the control elevations in Fields
8 and 9.

The BT records, necessary to define the weir for the special bridge method are placed with input
records for cross section 3. Because the bridge in the example problem has piers, the program will
remain with the special bridge method for all solutions. That is, the program cannot revert to the
normal bridge method for the given input. This is important to check when coding the BT records
because it can simplify input. If the program remains in the special bridge method, all that is needed

111-26
on the BT records is specification of road stations and elevations to define the weir. In defining the
weir under these circumstances, road stations do not have to be consistent with the GR record
stations.

Without a pier, the special bridge method will use standard step calculations for low flow and for
combination weir and low flow solutions (the weir equation would not be used). When standard step
calculations are made, the program computes conveyance by segments across the section; therefore,
the BT stations under these conditions would have to line up with GR stations and both top of road
and low chord elevations would have to be given. The BT records in the example show the minimum
required data for the example problem.

Cross section 3 is a repeat section, so there are no GR records. If GR records were used with
cross section 3, they would follow the BT records.

Cross Section 4 completes the model for the example problem. It is a full flow section located
upstream from the bridge beyond the zone of flow contraction. The reach length is estimated by a
one to one ratio of the average abutment constriction on the flow. In the example, the distance is 60
feet. Because the same ground geometry is used, no GR records are read.

If the contraction and expansion coefficients, read on the NC record, were to be changed to
lower values for subsequent profile calculations proceeding upstream from cross section 4, the new
values would be read in after section four and before the next X1 record.

The coded input for this problem was run on HEC-2. The program output is shown in Exhibit A.

4.3 Normal Bridge Method Examp!e

The second example, an arch bridge, will be modeled using the normal bridge method. Again,
the problem is fairly simple and intended to illustrate the basic input requirements. The geometric
data are shown in Figure 10 and the complete data listing is shown in Figure 11. The computer
solution for the problem is shown in Exhibit B. Discussion of the input follows.

A single profile is to be calculated with Manning's 'n' values defined on the NC record. The
starting 'n' values define the natural channel and overbanks. Contraction and expansion coefficients
of 0.3 and 0.5, respectively, were selected.

The first two cross sections represent the same modeling situation discussed under the special
bridge method example. Cross Section 1 is the downstream section located where the flow has fully
expanded onto the floodplain. It is located 400 feet downstream from the bridge based on the 4: 1
expansion of the flow as previously presented. Cross Section 2 is just downstream from the bridge
and represents the contacted effective flow leaving the bridge. The X3 record is used, as before, to
call the effective area option and to extend the elevation of channel control for cases where all the flow
is going through the bridge.

Input for the normal bridge method differs from input for the special bridge at this point. After
cross section 2, located immediately downstream from the bridge, comes cross section 3
representing a section through the bridge. For the bridge the Manning's 'n' value for the channel
should change. Therefore, the NC record is read in prior to cross section 3 with a channel 'n' value
of 0.025 for the bridge.

11I-27
 Oonn&r RI'V&r, 1969 Flood
Cross-s&Ct Ion 1,000

5~00-~-~-~-~-~-~-~-~OO
Dletanee

Downstream Natural Section

Donn""r RIV&r 1969 Flood Donn&r River 1969 Flood

Cross-section 2000 Cross-sect I on 5 000

Downstream from Bridge Upstream from Bridge

Donner Rlve-r., 191>9 Flood Donn&r River 19&9 Flood

Cross-section 3 000 Cross··sect I on " ooa

". ~ fIn 1\I:0:;

,. 1\1 :1
!I Jj"Ii 'I I
i

Downstream Bridge Section Upstream Bridge Section

Oonn$r RI'V&r 1969 Flood

Cross··sect Ion 6000

,,730

700 -........-r-o-- ............... -.......-r--- ............... _ ............... _ ............... _ ............... _--.

1000 f~OO 1400 'aoo "00 ~OGl ~!OO ~400 ~500
Dt,nan", ..

Upstream Natural Section

Figure 10
Normal Bridge Example Cross Sections

111-28
 Figure 11
Normal Bridge Example Input

111-29
 After changing the 'n' value for the bridge, the bridge is described using the BT records, as
shown in Figure 10.

The BT records for the normal bridge method should only have stations that are used on the GR
records. Consistent stationing is required because the program computes the conveyance of the
cross section incrementally for each GR station. To properly correct the area and wetted perimeter for
the presence of the bridge, the given BT stations must coincide with the GR stations. For GR stations
between given BT stations, the program will linearly interpolate the road elevation (variable RDEL) and
low chord elevation (variable XCEL) to calculate the incremental conveyance.

For bridge stations in the overbank areas, the low chord elevation (XCEL) is usually set equal to
the ground point elevation (EL on the GR record). In the channel area, the low chord elevation
defines the low chord of the bridge. For the example problem, the low chord elevations define the
bottom of the archs. The top of road elevations define the road profile for the cross section.

As cross section 3 is just inside the bridge on the downstream side, cross section 4 is located
inside the bridge at the upstream end. This section is a repeat section of the downstream bridge
section. The cross section elevations were not changed; however, the bridge can be modeled with a
slope by adding an incremental elevation in Field 9 of the X1 record. The BT records for this cross
section are also repeated from cross section 3 by using the X2 record with a one in Field 7 (variable
REPBT). If the bridge had been modeled with a slope, the same incremental elevation adjustment
used on the X1 record would be applied by the program to the low chord elevations on the BT record.
The top of road elevations are not changed by the program. The standard step solution from cross
section 3 to cross section 4 determines friction and expansion or contraction losses through the
bridge. If only friction losses should be computed, the values for the contraction and expansion
coefficients should be redefined to very small values just before cross section 4. After cross section 4,
the values can be reset to calculate shock losses.

Cross Section 5 represents the effective flow area just upstream from the bridge. The Manning's
'n' value must first be changed back to represent the channel. An NC record with the channel 'n'
value is read in just before cross section 5. This cross section could be modeled as a repeat of cross
section 4, but without the BT records. The effective area option is again used to maintain the flow in
the channel up to the top of road elevation (X3 record with ten in Field 1 and control elevations in
Fields 8 and 9).

The last cross section for the bridge model is a cross section upstream from the zone of
contraction for the bridge. Cross section 6 represents the full floodplain and is located 110 feet
upstream, determined by using a one on one contraction rate. The ground section is redefined by GR
records. This cross section completes the geometric model for the normal bridge method.

4.4 Input Bridge Loss Example

Bridge losses can be read into the program by two different methods. A bridge loss in terms of a
change in water surface elevation can be read on the X2 record (variable BLOSS on Field 6) or on the
X5 record. The X5 record will be demonstrated in this example because it can be used for multiple
profiles, where as only a single loss can be read on the X2 record.

The example used with the special bridge method will be repeated here. However, instead of
modeling the bridge, the calculation will involve only cross sections 1 through 4 (see Figure 8) and the
bridge loss will be input at cross section 4. It is assumed for the application that the bridge loss has
been determined externally from the program.

11I-30
 The input is a repeat of that for the previous special bridge example (Figures 8 and 9) up through
the first cross section. This is followed by input for the far upstream cross section 4. An X5 record is
added to the usual data at cross section 4.

The X5 record can be used in two ways. Either a water surface elevation or a change in water
surface can be defined. The choice is indicated on the record by the sign used (plus or minus) with
the variable N on the first field. The variable indicates the number of values to be specified on the X5
record. A positive N indicates water surface elevations and a negative N indicates increments of water
surface elevation. The latter is used in this example.

On multiple profile runs, the variable INa (Field 2 of the J1 record) tells the program which field of
the aT record to read. The same procedure is used to read the X5 record. In this example, each
field to be read on the aT record has a corresponding bridge loss to be read on the X5 record. The
first field of the X5 record shows the number of values to be read. The value in the first field is
negative to indicate that changes in water surface elevation are to be read. The changes in the
example are the computed results from the special bridge example. The computer run is shown in
Exhibit C.

Figure 12
Input Bridge Loss Example Input

111-31
 Chapter 5

Bridge Problems and Suggested Approaches

5.1 Introduction

The examples presented in the previous section were for relatively simple structures so that
fundamental principles of input preparation should be emphasized. However, many bridges are more
complex than the one illustrated, and the following discussion is intended to show how HEC-2 can be
used to calculate profiles for some of the types of bridges that are frequently encountered. The
discussion here will be an extension of the previous examples and will address only those aspects of
input preparation that have not been discussed previously.

5.2 Multiple Bridge Opening

Many bridges have more than one opening for flood flow, especially over very wide floodplains.
Multiple culverts, bridges with side relief openings, and separate bridges over a divided channel are all
examples of multiple bridge openings. With more than one bridge opening, and possible different
control elevations, the problem can be very complicated. Some general considerations follow.

For low flow situations, the normal bridge method is more applicable than the special bridge
method. The SB record cannot be used to model more than one trapezoidal bridge opening.
Modeling two or more separate bridge openings as one trapezoidal section with wide piers (variable
BWP) is generally unsatisfactory because the semi-empirical Yarnell equation has not been calibrated
for such flow conditions.

Pressure flow can be modeled with the special bridge method, however, only one controlling
elevation (ELLC) can be used. Therefore, if the maximum low chord elevation (variable ELLC) is the
same on all bridge openings, or if the flow is high enough to inundate all the openings, the orifice
equation can be used. Chapter 3, "Loss Coefficients", provides a method of computing an equivalent
coefficient for multiple culverts.

If flow through some of the culverts is low flow while flow through other culverts is pressure flow,
the program cannot provide a direct solution with the special bridge method. To use the special
bridge method, the openings would have to be modeled separately and a "divided flow· approach
would be required [Chow, 1959]. A normal bridge solution could be directly obtained if the
distribution of flow based on conveyance was reasonable and if one water surface elevation could be
assumed for the entire bridge section.

Computer determination of low flow by the normal bridge method and pressure flow by the
special bridge method can be obtained in a multiple profile run. By coding the bridge input using the
special bridge without a pier, the program will use the normal bridge method for low flow solutions.
The BT records would have to be coded consistent with requirements for the normal bridge method.
For the higher discharges where pressure flow occurs, the solution would be obtained from the orifice
equation in the special bridge method.

111-33
 5.3 Dams and Weirs

Flow over uncontrolled dams and weirs can be modeled with the special bridge method. Weir
flow is calculated over weirs defined by either the stations and road elevations on BT records or by a
fixed weir length (ROLEN) and elevation (ELTRO) defined on records SB and X2, respectively. To use
the special bridge method where all flow is weir flow requires the same basic data as for a bridge.
Recalling the calculation sequence, the special bridge method assumes low flow and then pressure
flow prior to determining that weir flow exists. On the SB record, it is necessary to input some
arbitrarily small values for the variables defining the trapezoid and the orifice area (variables BWC,
BAREA, and SS). The small areas defined by the trapezoid and BAREA will cause the program to
solve for a combination of pressure flow and weir flow. With a very small orifice area, the pressure
flow will be negligible and a weir flow solution will have been achieved.

5.4 Perched Bridges

A perched bridge is one for which the road approaching the bridge is at the floodplain ground
level, and only in the immediate area of the bridge does the road rise above ground level to span the
watercourse. A typical flood flow situation with this type of bridge is to have low flow under the bridge
and overbank flow around the bridge. Because the road approaching the bridge is usually not much
higher than the surrounding ground, the assumption of weir flow is often not justified. A solution
based on standard step calculations would be better than a solution based on weir flow with
correction for submergence. Therefore, this type of bridge should generally be modeled using the
normal bridge method, especially when a large percentage of the total discharge is in the overbank
areas.

5.5 Low Water Bridges

A low water bridge is designed to carry only low flows under the bridge. Flood flows are carried
over the bridge and road. When modeling this bridge for flood flows, the anticipated solution is a
combination of pressure and weir flow, which implies using the special bridge method. However, with
most of the flow over the top of the bridge, the correction for submergence may introduce
considerable error. If the tailwater is going to be high, it may be better to use the normal bridge
method. In fact, if almost all the water is over the top, the bridge may be modeled as a cross section
over the top of the bridge, ignoring the flow under the bridge.

5.6 Bridges on a Skew

Skewed bridge crossings are generally handled by making adjustments to the bridge dimensions
to define an equivalent cross section perpendicular to the flow lines. The adjustments can be made in
the normal bridge method by mUltiplying the actual dimensions of the bridge by the cosine of the
skew angle. The cosine of the angle is coded on the X1 record (variable PXSECR in Field 8) for the
cross section coordinates on GR records and on the X2 record (variable BSQ in Field 9) for the data
on the BT records. If the special bridge method is used, the data coded on the SB record must be
adjusted prior to input. There is no internal method in the program to adjust the data on the SB
record.

In the publication "Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways· [Bradley, 1978] the effect of skew on low flow
is discussed. In model testing, skewed crossings with angles up to 20 degress showed no
objectionable flow patterns. For increasing angles, flow efficiency decreased.

111-34
 A graph illustrating the impact of skewness indicates that using the projected length is adequate
for angles up to 30 degrees for small flow contractions.

5.7 Parallel Bridges

With the construction of divided highways, a common modeling problem involved parallel bridges.
For new highways, these bridges are often identical structures. The hydraulic losses through the two
structures has been shown to be between one and two times the loss for one bridge [Bradley, 1978].
The model results [Bradley, 1978] indicate the loss for two bridges ranging from 1.3 to 1.55 times the
loss for one bridge crossing, over the range of bridge spacings tested. Presumably if the two bridges
were far enough apart, the losses for the two bridges would equal twice the loss for one. For the
program user faced with a dual bridge problem, computing a single bridge loss and then adjusting it
with criteria [Bradley, 1978] may be the most expedient approach. If both bridges are modeled, care
should be exercised in depicting the expansion of flow between the bridges.

111-35
 Chapter 6

References

Bradley, Joseph, Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways, Hydraulic Design Series No.1, Federal Highway
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, revised Second Edition, March 1978.

Chow, Ven Te, Open Channel Hydraulics, McGraw - Hill Book Company, 1959.

Eichert, B.S. and Peters, J.C., "Computer Determination of Flow Through Bridges," ASCE, J. Hyd.
Div., Vol. 96, No. HY7, July 1970.

Horace W. King and Ernest F. Brater, Handbook of Hydraulics, Fifth Edition, McGraw - Hill Book
Company, 1963.

Hydrologic Engineering Center, HEC-2, Water Surface Profiles, Programmers Manual, September
1982 (out of print).

Hydrologic Engineering Center, Water Surface Profiles, IHD Volume 6, July 1975 (out of print).

Koch-Carstanjen, Von de Bewegung des Wassers und Den Dabei Auftretenden Kraften,
Hydrofynamim, Berlin 1962. A partial translation appears in Appendix I, "Report on Engineering
Aspects of Flood of March 1938," U.S. Army Engineer District, Los Angeles, May 1939.

Portland Cement Association, Handbook of Concrete Culvert Pipe Hydraulics, 1964.

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Backwater Curves in River Channels, EM 1110-2-1409, 7 December
1959.

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Hydraulic Design of Reservoir Outlet Structures, EM 1110-2-1602, 1
August 1963.

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Hydraulic Design of Spillways, EM 1110-2-1603, 31 March 1965,
Plate 33.

111-37
 Exhibit A

Special Bridge Example

Computer Run
******************************************** ***************************************
• HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES • • U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS
* • HYDROLOGIC ENGINEERING CENTER
: Ver'sion 4,,6,,0; Febr'uar'Y 1991 • 609 SECOND STREET, SUITE 0 •
• DAVIS, CALIFORNIA 95616·4687 *
• RUN DATE 06FEB91 TIME 16:02:27 * (916) 756-1104 *
******************************************** ***************************************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX
END OF BANNER

06FEB91 16:02:27
-- PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 16:02:27

*************************************
HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Version 4.6.0; Febr'uary 1991

*************************************
T1 SPECIAL BRIDGE EXAMPLE
T2 Low flow profile
T3 Simple Creek
Jl ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS a WSEL Fa
2 30
Request the Speical Br'idge Summar'y Tables on J3,

J3 VARIABLE CODES FOR SUMMARY PRINTOUT

100 105

NC ,08 .08 .05 .3 5

aT 3 2000 4500 6000
Xl 1 10 325 375 0 0 0
GR 50 0 40 75 35 250 30 325 19 345
GR 20 360 28 375 38 475 43 625 50 700
New NC contraction and exparition coefficients go her'e if they ar'e changed for'
the bridge calculations, Expansion loss would be evaluated at Section 2"
Xl 2 MO MO MO
Effective area option to control the flow to the bridge width up to elev" 36,
X3 10 36 36

Special Br'idge input between downstr'8am and upstr'eam sections

SB 1,,05 1.6 2.6 15 2 565 1.6 20 20
Remaining br'idge input is pr'ovided with the upstr'eam section,
Xl 3 60 60 60
X2 input for' Special Br'idge J Max" low-chor'd elev "
and Min, top - of - r'oad elev"
X2 35 1 37
Effective ar'ea option to contr'ol the flow to the bridge width up to elev 37
X3 10 37 37
Br'idge Table to define top-of-r'oad profile. Low chor'd values are not
required because the bridge has a pier' width for low-flow calculations"
Low chord values are requir'ed for standard step low-flow solution"
BT -6 0 50 75 40 350 37
BT 475 38 625 43 700 50

06FEB91 16:02:27 PAGE 2

Xl 4 60 60 60
New NC contr'action and expansion coefficients go here if they were change
for the bridge. The new coefficients would apply to the following sections,

06FEB91 16:02:27 PAGE 3

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L··BANK ELEV
Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST
'PROF

CCHV= .300 CEHV= .500

*SECNO 1.000
1.000 11 ,00 30.00 .00 30,00 30.47 .47 .00 00 30.00
2000.0 .0 1980.2 19.8 .0 357.5 20.0 .0 .0 28.00
.00 ,00 5.54 .99 ,000 ,050 ,080 ,000 19,00 325,00
,002853 0, 0, 0, 0 0 0 00 70,,00 39500

A-1
 'SECNO 2.000
3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE. ELLEA= 36. DO ELREA= 36 . 00

2.000 11..68 30.68 . 00 . 00 31.08 .40 .59 ,02 30,00

2000.0 .0 2000.0 .0 .0 391.7 .0 2.1 .3 28 . 00
.01 .00 5.11 .00 ,000 . 050 . 000 ,000 19,00 32500
.. 002146 240, 240 240 .. 0 0 0 . 00 50,00 375,00

SPECIAL BRIDGE

SB XK XKOR COFQ ROLEN BWC BWP BAREA SS ELCHU ELCHO

1 . 05 1.,80 280 .. 00 15,,00 200 565 . 00 1 "SO 20,00 20,00

'SECNO 3 .. 000
CLASS A LOW FLOW

3420 BRIDGE W.. S .. = 3059 BRIDGE VELOCITY= 6.31 CALCULATED CHANNEL AREA= 317,

EGPRS EGLWC H3 OWEIR OLow BAREA TRAPEZOID ELLC ELTRo WEIRLN

AREA
00 31 . 12 . 04 0, 2000, 565, 555 . 35.,00 37.00 0.
3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON·EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 37 .. 00 ELREA= 37.,00

3.000 11..72 30.72 .. DO .. DO 31.12 ,40 .04 . DO 30.00

2000.0 .0 2000.0 .0 .0 393.6 .0 2.7 .4 28,00
.02 .00 5.08 .00 ,000 .. 050 ,000 . 000 19,00 325,00
,002112 60 .. 60, 60, 0 0 0 . 00 50,00 375,00

_1iI1i11i11i11i11i11i11i11i11i11i1

06FEB91 16:02:27 PAGE 4

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV
0 OLOB OCH OROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENOST

'SECNO 4.000
4.000 11.90 30.90 .00 .00 31.26 .36 .12 ,01 30 . 00
2000.0 2.8 1954.1 43.1 6.0 402.3 42.0 3.2 .5 28 . 00
.02 .47 4.86 1.03 .. 080 050 . 080 ,000 19 . 00 311,55
001874 60, 60, 60, 2 0 0 ,00 92..42 403,97

~1iI1i11i11i11i11i11i11i11i1

06FEB91 16:02:27 PAGE 5

T1 PRESSURE FLOW PROFILE
J1 ICHECK INa NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS 0 WSEL FO
3 34

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

~1iI1i11i11i11i11i11i11i11i1

06FEB91 16:02:27 PAGE 6

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV
0 OLOB OCH OROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENOST

'PROF 2
CCHV= .300 CEHV= 500
'SECNO 1.000
1.000 15.00 34.00 .00 34.00 34.70 .70 ,00 . 00 30 .. 00
4500.0 180.2 3966.1 353.6 120.0 557.5 180.0 .0 .0 28 . 00
.00 1,50 7,11 1,96 .080 . 050 .080 .. 000 19 .. 00 26500
.. 002603 0, 0 .. 0, 0 0 0 . 00 170,00 43500

'SECNO 2 . 000
3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 36 ., 00 ELREA= 36 . 00
2.000 15 . 54 34.54 . 00 ,00 35.46 .. 92 .65 ,11 30 . 00
4500.0 .0 4500.0 .0 .0 584.7 .0 4.0 .6 28 . 00
.01 .00 7.70 .00 . 000 ,050 ,000 000 lB . OO 325 .. 00
. 002859 240 .. 240 240 .. 2 0 0 ,00 50 . 00 375,00

SPECIAL BRIDGE

SB XK XKOR COFQ ROLEN BWC BWP BAREA SS ELCHU ELCHO

1,05 1.60 2,60 ,00 15 . 00 2 . 00 56500 1,60 20.,00 20,00

'SECNO 3 .. 000
PRESSURE FLOW

EGPRS EGLWC H3 OWEIR OPR BAREA TRAPEZOID ELLC ELTRo WEIRLN

AREA
36 . 12 35,56 ,11 0, 4500 . 565, 555, 3500 37.,00 0
3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE. ELLEA= 37.,00 ELREA= 37 . 00
3.000 16,31 35.31 . 00 ,00 36.12 .81 .66 ,00 30.00
4500.0 .0 4500.0 .0 .0 623.3 .0 4.8 .7 28,00
.01 .00 7.22 .00 000 ,050 000 . 000 19,00 325,00
,002310 60 .. 60 60 . 2 0 0 ,00 50,00 375,00

A-2
 llllllllllllllllllllllll_

06FEB91 16:02:27 PAGE 7

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L·BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R·BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC lCONT CORAR TOPWlO ENOST

*SECNO 4.000
4.000 16.97 35.97 .00 .00 36.35 .38 .10 ,13 30,00
4500.0 398.5 3583.4 520.1 277.4 656.3 318.1 6.1 .9 28,00
.01 1.43 5.46 1.64 ,,080 ,050 ,080 ,000 19,00 215,,83
,001233 60" 60, 60, 2 0 0 ,,00 238,,94 454,76

_000_00000

06FEB91 16:02:27 PAGE 8

T1 PRESSURE AND WEIR FLOW PROFILE

J1 ICHECK 100 NINV lOIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

4 36
J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLOC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

06FEB91 16:02:27
-- PAGE 9

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L·BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R·BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL lOC ICONT CORAR TOPWlO ENDST

*PROF 3

CCHV= .300 CEHV= .500

*SECNO 1.000
1.000 17.00 36.00 .00 36.00 36.66 .66 00 00 30.00
6000.0 532.8 4771.3 696.0 280.0 657.5 320.0 .0 .0 28.00
.00 1,,90 7,26 2,,17 ,080 ,,050 080 ,000 19,,00 215,00
,002173 0" 0, 0" 0 0 0 00 240,00 455,00

*SECNO 2.000
2.000 17.62 36.62 .00 .00 37.16 .54 .46 .04 30,,00
6000.0 643.5 4598.6 757.9 354.8 688.5 371.4 7.4 1.4 28,,00
.01 1.81 6.68 2.04 ,080 050 080 ,000 19,,00 193,,33
,001732 240, 240. 240, 2 0 0 ,00 267.86 461" 19
SPECIAL BRlOGE

SB XK XKOR com ROLEN 6WC BWP BAREA $$ ELCHU ELCHO

1,05 1,60 2,,60 .00 15,,00 2,,00 565,,00 1,,60 20,,00 20,00

*SECNO 3.000
PRESSURE AND WEIR FLOW. Weir Submer'gence Based on TRAPEZOlOAL Shape
EGPRS EGLWC H3 QWEIR QPR BAREA TRAPEZOlO ELLC ELTRD WEIRLN
AREA
3942 37,,83 ,04 765, 5182" 565, 555, 35,00 37.00 303,

3.000 19.40 38.40 .00 .00 38.71 .31 1.55 .00 30.00
6000.0 973.5 4094.5 932.1 645.4 777.7 542.8 9.7 1.8 28.00
.02 1.51 5.27 1. 72 ,080 050 ,080 ,000 19,,00 130,,89
.000915 60. 60, 60" 2 0 2 00 356,21 487 10

*SECNO 4.000
4.000 19.47 38.47 .00 .00 38.77 .30 .05 .00 30,00
6000.0 986.3 4073.1 940.7 659.3 781.2 550.8 12.4 2.3 28,00
.02 1.50 5.21 1. 71 ,080 050 ,080 ,,000 19,00 128 AD
,000891 60, 60 60, 1 0 0 ,00 360,83 489,23

06FEB91 16:02:27
-- PAGE 10

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 16:02:32

*************************************
HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Version 4.6.0; February 1991

*************************************
NOTE· ASTERISK (*) AT LEFT OF CROSS· SECTION NUMBER INDICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST

Simple Cr'eek
SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 100

SECNO EGLWC ELLC EGPRS ELTRD QPR QWEIR CLASS H3 DEPTH CWSEL VCH EG

3.000 31.12 35 00 .00 37,00 2000,,00 ,00 1,,00 ,04 11,,72 30,72 5,08 3112
3,000 35,,56 35,00 36,12 37,,00 4500,00 00 10,00 ,11 16,,31 35,,31 7,22 36,,12
3,000 37,,83 35,00 39.42 37,,00 5182,,04 76535 30.00 04 19 AD 38.40 5,27 38,71

A-3
 06FEB91 16:02:27 PAGE 11

Simple Cr'eek
SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 105

SECNO CWSEL HL OLOSS TOPWID OLOB QCH OROB

.......................................... __ ... _---- ..... _--------------------_ ... __ ..........
1 .. 000 30 . 00 .00 .00 70.00 . 00 1980.22 19.78
1 .. 000 34 .. 00 .00 .00 17000 18025 3966 .. 11 353.64
1 .. 000 36 .. 00 .00 .00 24000 532 . 76 4771 . 26 695.96
2 .. 000 30 .. 68 .59 .02 50 .. 00 .00 2000.00 . 00
2.000 34 .. 54 .. 65 .11 50.00 .. 00 4500 . 00 .00
2.000 36 .. 62 .46 .04 267.86 643 . 54 4598 . 57 757.88

3 .. 000 30.72 . 04 . 00 50.00 .00 2000 . 00 .00

3 .. 000 35.31 . 66 . 00 50 . 00 .00 4500 .. 00 .00
3.000 3840 .55 .. 00 356 . 21 973.47 4094 .. 47 932 . 06
4 .. 000 30.90 .12 .01 92.42 2.84 1954 . 11 43 .. 05
4.000 35 .. 97 10 .13 238.94 396 . 47 3583 . 39 520.14
4 .. 000 38.47 05 . 00 360 . 83 986 . 26 4073 . 07 940.67

{I{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1{1

06FEB91 16:02:27 PAGE 12

SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES

A-4
 Exhibit B

Normal Bridge Example

Computer Run
******************************************** ***************************************
WATER SURFACE PROFILES • U. S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS •
HYOROLOGIC ENGINEERING CENTER •
: Version 4,,8,,0; Februar'y 1991 • 609 SECONO STREET, SUITE 0 •
• OAVIS, CALIFORNIA 95616-4687 •
• RUN DATE 06FEB91 TIME 07:43:14 • (916) 756-1104 •
******************************************** ***************************************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX
END OF BANNER

06FEB91 07:43: 14 PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 07:43:14

**********************1111**************
HEC2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Ver'sion 4.6.0; Febr'uary 1991

*************************************
T1 Multiple Ar'ch Railroad Br'idge (Nor'mal Bridge Example)
T3 Donner River I 1969 Flood
J1 ICHECK INC NINV IOIR STRT METRIC HVINS 0 WSEL FO

0 3 0 0 0,0025 0 0 0 715 0

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

-1 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

NC 0,055 0.060 0.035 0.3 0.5

OT 5 41000 105000 130000 285000 530000
X1 1 20 1280 1970
GR 775 1000 750 1080 725 1120 720 1140 715 1150
GR 714 1170 712 1200 711 1220 710 1240 710 1280
GR 705 1300 700 1560 697 1590 697 1620 700 1630
GR 703,1 1720 705 1930 712 1970 716 2030 757 2090

Limit flow width with EFFECTIVE AREA OPTION

X1 2 65 1295 1676 400 400 400

X3 10 755 755
GR 760 1000 750 1010 734 1043 732 1049 730 1056
GR 727 1063 725 1070 723 1076 722 1081 720 1090
GR 718 1100 717 1104 715.5 1116 715 1120 710 1130
GR 706 1142 705 1295 705 1300 705 1311 705 1323
GR 705 1338 704.5 1352 704 1365 704 1375 704 1380
GR 704 1394 704 1399 703 1409 703 1423 703 1437
GR 703 1451 703 1463 702.5 1474 702 1478 702 1493
GR 702 1498 702 1508 702 1522 702 1536 702 1548
GR 701.5 1562 701 1572 701 1577 701 1592 701 1596
GR 701 1600 701 1608 701 1621 701.5 1633 701.5 1647
GR 701.5 1660 702 1671 702 1676 705 1860 709 1869
GR 710 1874 716 1890 719 1897 721 1903 725 1910
GR 728 1918 730 1927 750 1980 760 1981 762 2010

Califor'nia Nor'ther'" R, R, Bridge (River' Mile 15.434)

NC ,025
X1 3 1 1 1
BT -64 1000 760 760 1010 760 750 1043 760 734
BT 1049 760 732 1056 760 730 1063 760 727
BT 1070 760 725 1076 760 723 1081 760 722
BT 1090 760 720 1100 760 718 1104 760 717

06FEB91 07:43:14
1120
-- 760 715 1130 760
PAGE

710
2

BT 1116 760 715.5

BT 1142 760 706 1295 760 705 1300 760 728
BT 1311 760 741 1323 760 747 1338 760 750
BT 1352 760 747 1365 760 739 1375 760 727
BT 1380 760 704 1394 760 704 1399 760 728
BT 1409 760 741 1423 760 748 1437 760 750
BT 1451 760 747 1463 760 739 1474 760 728
BT 1478 760 702 1493 760 702 1498 760 729
BT 1508 760 740 1522 760 748 1536 760 750
BT 1548 760 747 1562 760 739 1572 760 727
BT 1577 760 701 1592 760 701 1596 760 728
BT 1600 760 732 1608 760 740 1621 760 747
BT 1633 760 749 1647 760 747 1660 760 740
BT 1671 760 727 1676 760 702 1860 760 705
BT 1869 760 709 1874 760 710 1890 760 716
BT 1897 760 719 1903 760 721 1910 760 725
BT 1918 760 728 1927 760 730 1980 760 750
BT 1981 760 760

Repeat BT and GR data from downstr'eam face of br'idge

X1 4 20 20 20
X2 1

NC ,035

B-1
 Limit flow width with EFFECTIVE AREA OPTION
X1 5 12 1280 1860 1
X3 10 760 760
GR 750 1000 725 1070 720 1090 715 1120 708 1130
GR 705 1150 705 1280 701 1350 702 1800 705 1860
GR 708 1980 750 1990

X1 6 20 1240 1860 110 110 110

GR 755 1000 750 1030 725 1080 718 1120 717 1130
GR 716 1140 715 1180 713 1240 705 1380 704 1760
GR 703 1840 715 1860 717 1870 717 1890 718 1930
GR 719 1980 725 2020 730 2040 735 2060 750 2090

06FEB91

SECNO
07:43:14

DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG

-- HV HL OLOSS L··BANK ELEV
PAGE 3

QCH TWA R-BANK ELEV

~IME
aLOB aROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL
' VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR wrN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF 1

CCHV= .300 CEHV= ,500

'SECNO 1.000
1.000 18.67 715.67 .00 715.00 717.74 2.07 ,00 ,,00 710,,00
105000.0 1937.1 102874.3 188.5 518.1 8835.2 101.3 .0 .0 712,,00
.00 3,,74 11 ,64 1 86 ,055 ,035 ,060 ,,000 697,00 1148,,65
,002520 0" 0" 0" 0 0 3 ,00 876.46 2025,,11

'SECNO 2,000

3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

7185 MINIMUM SPECIFIC ENERGY

3720 CRITICAL DEPTH ASSUMED

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON- EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 755,00 ELREA= 755,,00

2.000 14,92 715.92 715,92 ,00 722.64 6,72 1.63 2.33 705,,00
105000.0 .0 105000.0 .0 .0 5047.4 .0 66.6 5.B 702,00
.01 .00 20.80 .00 ,000 035 ,000 ,,000 701 ,00 1295,,00
,007661 400, 400, 400" 4 15 0 ,00 381,,00 1676,00

'SECNO 3,000

3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

3370 NORMAL BRIDGE, NRD= 64 MIN ELTRD= 760,00 MAX ELLC= 750,00

3685 20 TRIALS ATTEMPTED WSEL,CWSEL

3693 PROBABLE MINIMUM SPECIFIC ENERGY
3720 CRITICAL DEPTH ASSUMED
3.000 16,30 717 .30 71730 ,00 724.90 760 .01 .44 705,00
105000.0 .0 105000.0 .0 .0 4746.1 .0 66.7 5.8 702,00
.01 ,00 22,12 ,,00 ,000 ,025 ,,000 .000 701,,00 1102,82
,006107 1" 1, 1, 20 19 0 -5549,82 790,,21 1893,02

'SECNO 4" 000

06FEB91 07:43:14
-- PAGE 4

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

a aLOB QCH aROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

3370 NORMAL BRIDGE, NRD= 64 MIN ELTRD= 760 ,00 MAX ELLC= 750,00

3685 20 TRIALS ATTEMPTED WSEL,CWSEL

4.000 19,,59 720.59 717,,30 ,00 725.73 5,,13 .09 .74 705,00
105000.0 .0 105000.0 .0 .0 5774.5 .0 69.1 6.2 702,00
.01 .00 18.18 .00 ,,000 ,,025 ,000 .000 701,00 108734
003427 20" 20, 20" 26 19 0 -7163,23 814.43 190177

'SECNO 5,000

3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 2,,79

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 760,00 ELREA= 760,,00

5.000 25,,14 726.14 ,,00 00 727.01 ,B7 .00 1.28 705,00

105000.0 .0 105000.0 .0 .0 14064.3 .0 69.3 6.2 705,00
.01 ,00 7.47 ,00 ,000 ,035 ,,000 ,,000 701,,00 1280,00
,000441 1, 1, 1" 3 0 0 ,,00 580,,00 1B60,00

'SECNO 6.000
6.000 23.23 726.23 .00 .00 727.07 .B4 .05 .01 713,00
105000.0 4712.5 97502.4 2785.0 1537.9 12831.1 1194.4 106.7 8.1 715,00
.01 3.06 7.60 2.33 ,055 035 ,060 ,000 703,00 1077,,54
,,000568 110, 110, 110 2 0 0 ,00 947,,37 2024,,91

--
B-2
 06FEB91 07:43:14 PAGE 5
THIS RUN EXECUTEO 06FEB91 07:43:24
HEC2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES
Ver'sion 4.6.0; Febr'uar'Y 1991
**************************************

NOTE- ASTERISK (*) AT LEFT OF CROSS-SECTION NUMBER INOICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST

Donner River', 1969 Flood

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 150

SECNO XLCH ELTRD ELLC ELMIN Q CWSEL CRIWS EG 10*KS VCH AREA 01K

.000 .00 00 .. 00 697.00 105000.00 715 .. 67 00 717. 74 25.20 11 . 64 9454.60 20918.40

2 .000 400.00 . 00 .00 701 . 00 105000 .00 715.92 715 . 92 722 .64 76.61 20.80 5047 .. 44 11996.08

3 .000 1 .. 00 760 00 750.00 701 .00 105000 .00 717 .. 30 717 . 30 724.90 61 . 07 22 .12 4746.14 13436.58

4 .000 20.00 76000 750.00 701 .00 105000.00 720 .. 59 71730 725 . 73 34.27 18 .18 5774 .50 17935.29

5 . 000 1.00 . 00 .00 701 .00 105000 .. 00 726.14 . 00 727..01 4.41 7 .. 47 14064 . 30 50020.34

6 . 000 11000 . 00 .00 703 00 105000.00 726.23 .00 727.07 5,68 7,,60 15563,41 44057,.65

06FEB91 07:43:14 PAGE 6

Donner River. 1969 Flood
SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 150

SECNO Q CWSEL DIFWSP DIFWSX DIFKWS TOPWID XLCH

000 105000 .. 00 71567 .00 .00 . 67 876..46 .00

2 . 000 105000 . 00 715 92 .00 .25 .. 00 381 .. 00 400.00

3.000 105000 .. 00 717 .30 00 37 .00 790 .. 21 .00

4 .000 105000 . 00 720.59 00 3 . 30 .00 814 .. 43 20 00

5 .000 105000.00 726.14 . 00 5.55 .00 580.00 1 . 00

6.000 105000.00 726.23 . 00 .09 .00 947.37 11000

_ _Iillillil_ _

06FEB91 07:43:14 PAGE 7

SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES
CAUTION SECNO= 2 . 000 PROFILE= CRITICAL DEPTH ASSUMED
CAUTION SECNO= 2 . 000 PROFILE= MINIMUM SPECIFIC ENERGY
CAUTION SECNO= 3 . 000 PROFILE= CRITICAL DEPTH ASSUMED
CAUTI ON SECNO= 3 .. 000 PROFIl.E= PROBABLE MINIMUM SPECIFIC ENERGY
CAUTION SECNO= 3 . 000 PROFILE= 20 TRIALS ATTEMPTED TO BALANCE WSEL

CAUTI ON SECNO= 4.000 PROFILE= 20 TRIALS ATTEMPTED TO BALANCE WSEL

WARNING SECNO= 5 . 000 PROFILE= CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

B-3
 Exhibit C

Input Loss Example

Computer Run
• HEC·2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES • U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS
• HYDROLOGIC ENGINEERING CENTER
: Ver'sion 4,.8.,0; Febr'uar'y 1991 • 609 SECOND STREET, SUITE 0 •
• DAVIS, CALIFORNIA 95616·4687 •

:**********i~1~1*r;~;11~~*************:
• RUN DATE 06FEB91 TIME 07:50:10'
********************************************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX
END OF BANNER

06FEB91 07:50:10 PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 07:50:10

HEC·2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Version 4.6.0; Febr'uar'y 1991

*************************************
T1 BRIDGE PROBLEM WITH INPUT LOSS
T2 X5 input for WSEL change from Special Br'idge Example
T3 SIMPLE CREEK
T4 LOW FLOW PROFILE

J1 ICHECK INQ NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

2 30

NC ,,08 .08 .05 .3 ,,5

QT 3 2000 4500 6000
X1 1 10 325 375 0 0 o
GR 50 0 40 75 35 250 30 325 19 345
GR 20 360 28 375 38 475 43 625 50 700
BT 475 38 625 43 700 50

All br'idge sections eliminated. Total loss defined on X5 r'ecof'd ..

Losses computed in Special Br'idge Example
X1 4 360 360 360
X5 ·3 0,,90 1,,97 2.47

06FEB91 07:50:10 PAGE 2

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L·BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R·BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IDC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF 1

CCHV= .300 CEHV= ,,500

'SECNO 1.000
1.000 11 .00 30.00 .00 30.00 30.47 .47 .00 .00 30,,00
2000.0 .0 1980.2 19.8 .0 357.5 20.0 .0 .0 28 .. 00
.00 .00 5,,54 .99 .000 050 .080 ,,000 19 00 325.00
.002853 0" 0 .. 0, 0 0 0 .00 70 ,00 395.00

'SECNO 4" 000

WATER EL=X5 CARD= 30.900
4.000 11.90 30.90 .00 .00 31.26 .36 .82 ,03 30,,00
2000.0 2.9 1954.0 43.1 6.1 402.5 42.0 3.4 .7 28 . 00
.02 .47 4.85 1.03 ,,080 ,050 080 000 19,00 31150
,001871 360 360 360. 0 0 0 ,00 92 . 50 404,00

06FEB91 07:50:10
-- PAGE 3

T1 PRESSURE FLOW PROFILE

J1 ICHECK INa NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

3 34

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

C-1
 06FEB91 07:50:10
- PAGE 4

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

Q OLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF 2
CCHV= .300 CEHV= ,,500
'SECNO 1.000
1.000 15.00 34.00 .00 34.00 34.70 .70 ,00 ,00 30,00
4500.0 180.2 3966.1 353.6 120.0 557.5 180.0 .0 .0 28,,00
.00 1,,50 7,,11 1,96 ,080 ,050 ,080 ,000 19,,00 265,,00
,,002603 0, 0, 00 170,00 435,,00

'SECNO 4,,000
0"
° ° °
WATER EL=X5 CARD= 35,970

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 45

4.000 16.97 35.97 .00 .00 36.35 .38 .62 .10 30,00
4500.0 395.6 3584.7 519.6 276.7 656.0 317.6 8.7 1.7 28,00
.02 1.43 5.46 1.84 ,080 ,050 ,080 ,,000 19,,00 216,05
,001236 360, 360, 360, 0 0 ,00 238,65 454,70
°

06FEB91 07:50:10
- PAGE 5

11 PRESSURE AND WEIR FLOW PROFILE

J1 ICHECK INQ NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

4 36

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

06FEB91 07:50:10
- PAGE 6

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

Q OLOB QCH OROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IDC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF 3
CCHV= .300 CEHV= ,500
'SECNO 1.000
1.000 17.00 36.00 .00 36.00 36.66 .66 ,,00 ,,00 30,,00
6000.0 532.8 4771.3 696.0 280.0 657.5 320.0 .0 .0 28,,00
.00 1,,90 7,26 2,,17 ,,080 ,050 ,080 ,000 19,,00 215,,00
,,002173 0, 0, 0 0 ,00 240,00 455,00

'SECNO 4,,000
0"
°
WATER EL=X5 CARD= 38.470
3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = ,56

4.000 19.47 38.47 .00 .00 38.77 .30 .48 .11 30,00
6000.0 985.5 4074.4 940.2 658.5 781.0 550.3 13.4 2.5 28,00
.02 1.50 5.22 1.71 ,080 ,,050 080 ,000 19,00 128,,55
,,000893 360, 360" 360, 0 0 0 ,00 360,55 489,10

06FEB91 07:50:10
- PAGE 7

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 07:50:12

*************************************
HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Ver'sion 4.6.0; February 1991

*************************************
NOTE- ASTERISK (') AT LEFT OF CROSS-SECTION NUMBER INOICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST

SIMPLE CREEK

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 150

SECNO XLCH ELTRD ELLC ELMIN Q CWSEL CRIWS EG 10*KS VCH AREA "D1K
,000 ,,00 ,,00 ,00 1900 2000,00 30,00 00 30.47 28 53 5,54 377,,50 374.42
,,000 ,,00 ,,00 ,00 1900 4500,,00 34,00 ,00 34,,70 26,03 7,11 857,,50 882 08
,000 ,,00 00 ,00 19,,00 6000,00 36,00 ,00 36,66 21,73 7,26 125750 1287,06

4 ,000 360,00 ,,00 ,00 19, 00 2000,00 30,90 ,00 31,26 18, 71 485 450,,63 462 34
4 000 360,,00 ,00 00 19,00 4500,00 3597 ,,00 36,35 12,,36 5.46 1250,32 1279 92
4 ,000 360,00 ,00 00 19,00 6000,00 38.47 ,00 38,77 8,93 522 1989,78 2008 02

C-2
 06FEB91 07:50:10 PAGE 8

SIMPLE CREEK

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 150

SECNO Q CWSEL DIFWSP DIFWSX DIFKWS TOPWID XLCH

,,000 2000,,00 30,,00 ,00 ,,00 ,00 70,00 ,00
,,000 4500,,00 3400 4,,00 ,,00 ,00 170,00 ,00
,000 6000,00 36,00 2,,00 ,00 00 240,,00 00

4 ,000 2000,,00 30,90 ,00 ,90 ,00 92,50 36000

4 ,000 450000 35,97 507 1,97 ,00 23865 36000
4 ,000 6000,,00 38A7 2,50 2A7 ,00 360,,55 360,00

06FEB91 07:50:10 PAGE 9

SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES
NOTE SECNO= 4,000 PROFILE= 1 WSEL BASEO ON X5 CARD
NOTE SECNO= 4 000 PROFILE= 2 WSEL BASEO ON X5 CARO
WARNING SECNO= 4 ,000 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE
NOTE SECNO= 4 ,000 PROFILE= 3 WSEL BASEO ON X5 CARD
WARNING SECNO= 4,000 PROFILE= 3 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

C-3
 Appendix iV

Application of the HEC-2 Culvert Option

 Appendix IV
Table of Contents

Chapter Page

1 Introduction

1.1 Advantages of the Special Culvert Option IV-2

1.2 Limitations of the Special Culvert Option IV-2
1.3 Converting Special Bridge Models to Special Culvert Models IV-2
1.4 Using This Appendix IV-3

2 Culvert Hydraulics

2.1 Introduction to Culvert Terminology IV-5

2.2 Flow Analysis for Culverts IV-6
2.3 Computing Inlet Control Headwater IV-6
2.4 Computing Outlet Control Headwater IV-7

2.4.1 FHWA Full Flow Equations IV-8

2.4.2 Direct Step Water Surface Profile Computations IV-8
2.4.3 Normal Depth of Flow in the Culvert IV-9
2.4.4 Critical Depth of Flow in the Culvert IV-9
2.4.5 Super-Critical Culvert Flow IV-10
2.4.6 Horizontal Culvert Slope IV-10

3 Using the Special Culvert Method

3.1 Cross Sections for Culvert Modeling IV-11

3.1.1 Cross Section 1 of SpeCial Culvert Model IV-11

3.1.2 Cross Section 2 of Special Culvert Model IV-12
3.1.3 Cross Section 3 of Special Culvert Model IV-13
3.1.4 Cross Section 4 of Special Culvert Model IV-14
3.1.5 Expansion and Contraction Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV-14

3.2 Defining the Culvert With the SC Record IV-15

3.2.1 CUNO: Number of Identical Culverts IV-15

3.2.2 CUNV: Manning's Roughness Coefficient IV-15
3.2.3 ENTLC: Entrance Loss Coefficient IV·15
3.2.4 COFQ: Weir Flow Coefficient IV-18
3.2.5 RISE: Pipe Culvert Diameter or Box Culvert Height IV-20
3.2.6 SPAN: Box Culvert Span (Width of Opening) IV-20
3.2.7 CULVLN: Culvert Length IV-20
3.2.8 CHRT and SCL: FHWA Chart Number and Scale Number IV-20
3.2.9 ELCHU and ELCHD: Culvert Invert Elevations IV-25

3.3 Defining the Weir Profile With the BT Records IV-25

3.4 Controlling the Special Culvert Option With the X2 Record IV-28
3.5 Special Culvert Output IV-29
 Table of Contents (continued)

Chapter Page

4 Examples of the Special Culvert Method

4.1 Example of Box Culvert Analysis IV-31

4.2 Example of Pipe Culvert Analysis IV-32
4.3 Multiple Culverts Example IV-33

5 References/Bibliography IV-35

Exhibits

A Federal Highway Administration Culvert Charts

B Box Culvert Example - Computer Run
C Pipe Culvert Example - Computer Run
D Multiple Culverts Example - Computer Run

ii
 List of Figures
Figure
Number Page

~ ~
1.1 Typical Culvert Road Crossing IV-1

2.1 Cross Section of a Pipe Culvert IV-5

2.2 Cross Section of a Box Culvert IV-5
2.3 Flow Chart for Outlet Control Computations IV-7

3.1 Cross Section Layout for Special Culvert Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV-12

3.2 Cross Section 2 of Special Culvert Method """.""""" .. " ""." !V-12
3.3 Cross Section 3 of Special Culvert Method IV-13
3.4 Culvert Inlet with Headwall and Wingwalls IV-21
3.5 Culvert Inlet Mitered to Conform to Slope IV-21
3.6 Culvert Inlet Projecting from Fill .. " " IV-22
3.7 Culvert Inlet with Beveled Ring Entrance IV-22
3.8 Flared Wingwalls (Chart 8) IV-23
3.9 Inlet Top Edge Bevel (Chart 9) IV-23
3.10 Inlet Side and Top Edge Bevel with Ninety Degree Headwall (Chart 10) IV-23
3.11 Inlet Side and Top Edge Bevel with Skewed Headwall (Chart 11) IV-24
3.12 Non-Offset Flared Wingwalls (Chart 12) IV-24
3.13 Offset Flared Wingwalls (Chart 13) IV-25
3.14 Illustration of Weir Flow Conditions IV-26
3.15 Illustration of Combination Flow Conditions "." IV-26
3.16 Defining the Top-of-Road for Roadways in Open Cuts IV-27
3.17 Defining the Top-of-Road for Roadways with Solid Rails , IV-27
3.18 Defining the Top-of-Road for Roadways with Open Rails IV-28
3.19 Defining a Horizontal Weir for the Special Culvert Method " "..... IV-28

4.1 Illustration of Box Culvert Example IV-31

4.2 Pipe Culvert Example IV-32
4.3 Illustration of Multiple Culverts Example IV-33

List of Tables

Table
Number Page

3.1 Expansion and Contraction Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV-14

3.2 Manning's 'n' for Corrugated Metal Pipe IV-16
3.3 Manning's 'n' for Closed Conduits Flowing Partly Full IV-17
3.4 Entrance Loss Coefficient for Box Culverts IV-18
3.5 Entrance Loss Coefficient for Pipe Culverts " IV-18
3.6 Broad-Crested Weir Coefficients IV-19
3.7 Trapezoidal Weir Coefficients , , IV-19
3.8 FHWA Chart and Scale Numbers for Pipe Culverts" , IV-21
3.9 FHWA Chart and Scale Numbers for Box Culverts IV-22
3.10 CLASS Values for Special Culvert Option IV-29

iii
 Chapter 1

Introduction

The HEC-2 program offers three methods for computing head losses through bridge or culvert
structures: the Normal Bridge Method, the Special Bridge Method, and the Special Culvert Method.
The normal bridge method is based on Manning's equation and uses the standard step method to
determine bridge losses. The special bridge method, on the other hand, trtilizes a series of hydraulic
equations to analyze flow through bridges for a number of different flow conditions. Both of these
methods are described in Appendix III.

The special culvert method is similar to the special bridge method, except that the Federal
Highway Administration's (FHWA) standard equations for culvert hydraulics are used to compute
losses through the structure. This appendix describes the application of the special culvert method.

Figure 1.1 illustrates a typical box culvert road crossing. As shown, the culvert is similar to a
bridge in many ways. The walls and roof of the culvert correspond to the abutments and low chord of
the bridge, respectively.

L _=----==--=_'SI2
I~ I __
- -_-_--_-_--=-.-_- ~
A

PLAN VIEW
"'2flS
. -I'
I'

40.

"
~
z 30
o
;::
::;
W
...J
W
SECTION A-A
20 '--~--+I -~--t-~--+I--+----+I--+---+I-~--;I
850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150

DISTANCE (feet)

Figure 1.1
Typical Culvert Road Crossing

Because of the similarities between culverts and other types of bridges, the normal bridge and
special bridge methods available in the HEC-2 computer program can often be applied to the analysis
of culverts. The layout of cross sections, the use of the effective area option, the selection of loss
coefficients, and most other aspects of bridge analysis apply to culverts as well.

IV-1
1.1 Advantages of the Special Culvert Option
The special culvert method offers the following advantages for modeling flow through culverts,
when compared with the normal bridge or special bridge methods:

• Reduced Data Requirements: For the special bridge or normal bridge methods, the
culvert shape must be defined using the ground elevation coordinates (GR records)
and the low chord coordinates (BT records). This can be tedious, especially for
circular culverts. For the special culvert method, the culvert shape is defined using the
pipe diameter for circular culverts, or the height and width of the opening for box
culverts.

• Familiar Hydraulic Coefficients: The hydraulic capacity of the culvert is described

using familiar terminology and coefficients, such as the Manning's roughness
coefficient and the entrance loss coefficient.

• Similarity to FHWA Nomographs: The HEC-2 special culvert method is based on the
same equations as the familiar FHWA culvert nomographs. Therefore, the results of
the special culvert option can be easily confirmed using the nomographs.

• Flexibility in Hydraulic Modeling: The HEC-2 special culvert method provides a good
solution for head loss through a roadway crossing under a wide variety of flow
conditions, including low flow conditions.

1.2 Limitations of the Special Culvert Option

The HEC-2 special culvert option is subject to the following limitations:

• Constant Cross Section: The culvert cross section, flow rate, and bottom slope are
assumed to be constant throughout the length of the culvert.

• Positive or Horizontal Culvert Slope: The culvert bottom slope is required to be

positive or zero. That is, the invert or flow-line of the culvert cannot be lower in
elevation on the upstream side of the culvert than on the downstream side.

• No Mixed Sizes or Shapes: Each culvert road crossing is assumed to be composed

of only one culvert or a number of identical culverts.

• No Super-Critical Profiles: The special culvert option may be used in subcritical

profile computations only.

1.3 Converting Special Bridge Models to Special Culvert Models

The special culvert option has been designed to operate like the special bridge option whenever
possible. This similarity makes it easy to convert eXisting special bridge models to special culvert
models. The following steps are reqUired:

1) Change the value of the variable IBRID in Field 3 of the X2 record from 1 to 2 to
indicate that the special culvert option will be used in place of the special bridge
method.

IV-2
 2) Delete the value of the variable CMOM in Field 8 of the X2 record. This variable is
used only for the special bridge option and is not required for the special culvert
option. Although the program will ignore any value entered for this variable, it is good
practice to leave Field 8 blank when using the special culvert option, in order to avoid
confusion.

3) Replace the S8 record with an SC record. Copy the values of variables COFQ (Field
3), ROLEN (Field 4), ELCHU (Field 9), and ELCHO (Field 10) from the S8 record to the
SC record. These variables are used by the special culvert method as well as the
special bridge method. Make sure that ELCHU is equal to or higher than ELCHO.

4) Enter the appropriate values for the number of identical culverts (CUNO) and the
culvert n-value (CUNV) in Field 1 of the SC record. Also enter the culvert entrance
loss coefficient (ENTLC) in Field 2, the height of the culvert opening (RISE) in Field 5,
the length of the culvert (CULVLN) in Field 7, and the Federal Highway Administration
chart number (CHRT) and scale number (SCL) in Field 8 of the SC record. For box
culverts, the width of the culvert opening (SPAN) should also be entered in Field 6 of
the SC record. Chapter 3 of this appendix describes all of these input values.

5) Check the remaining input data to be sure that the modeling guidelines described in
Chapter 3 of this appendix have been followed. Important items to check include the
cross section layout and spacing, the definition of the top of road for weir flow, and
the specification of effective flow areas.

The converted culvert model should now be ready for analysis using the special culvert method.

1.4 Using this Appendix

This appendix is intended to ge~ you started in using the HEC-2 special culvert option quickly
and easily, and also to provide a reference should questions or problems arise in the future. Chapter
2 of this appendix provides background information on culvert hydraulics and the terminology
associated with culverts. Chapter 3 provides a complete discussion of the HEC-2 special culvert
option, inclUding the layout of all required cross sections, the sources of all required data for the
culvert, and the appropriate values for all hydraulic coefficients. Chapter 4 presents three complete
examples of the HEC-2 special culvert option, including complete listing of input data, results, and a
discussion.

All equations and other material in this appendix are presented using standard English or
American units of measurement. However, the special culvert option has been designed and
implemented to work equally well with corresponding metric (S.I.) units.

IV-3
 Chapter 2

Culvert Hydraulics

This chapter introduces the basic concepts of culvert hydraulics which are used in the HEC-2
special culvert option.

2.1 Introduction to Culvert Terminology

A culvert is a relatively short length of closed conduit which connects two open channel
segments or bodies of water. Two types of culverts are most commonly used: pipe culverts, which
are circular in cross section, and box culverts, which are rectangular in cross section. Figures 2.1
and 2.2 illustrate pipe culverts and box culverts, respectively.

------
DIAMETER
(CHAMFERED CORNER

sz
I~I>-~-
f-
0-
"
W
o I>

~
o...J
LL

CULVERT SPAN

---
Figure 2.1 Figure 2.2
Cross-Section of a Pipe Culvert Cross-Section of a Box Culvert

Culverts are made up of an entrance where water flows into the culvert, and a barrel, which is
the closed conduit portion of the culvert. The total flow capacity of a culvert depends upon the
characteristics of the entrance as well as the culvert barrel.

The tailwater at a culvert is the depth of water on the discharge or downstream side of the
culvert, as measured from the downstream flow-line of the culvert. The flow-line is the lowest point on
the inside of the culvert at a particular cross section. It is sometimes called the invert. The tailwater
depth depends on the flow rate and hydraulic conditions downstream of the culvert.

IV-5
 The headwater at a culvert is the depth of water on the entrance or upstream side of the culvert,
as measured from the upstream flow-line of the culvert. The headwater is related to the tailwater as
follows:

Tailwater
+ Energy Loss Through Culvert
Drop in Flow-Line Elevation Through Culvert

= Headwater

2.2 Flow Analysis for Culverts

The analysis of flow in culverts is quite complicated. It is common to use the concepts of "inlet
control" and "outlet control" to simplify the analysis. Inlet control flow occurs when the flow capacity
of the culvert entrance is less than the flow capacity of the culvert barrel. Outlet control flow occurs
when the culvert capacity is limited by downstream conditions or by the flow capacity of the culvert
barrel. The HEC-2 special culvert method computes the headwater required to produce a given flow
rate through the culvert for inlet control conditions and for outlet control conditions. The higher
headwater 'controls" the design and determines the type of flow in the culvert for a given flow rate and
tailwater condition.

For inlet control, the required headwater is computed by assuming that the culvert inlet acts as
an orifice or as a weir. Therefore, the inlet control capacity depends primarily on the geometry of the
culvert entrance.

For outlet control, the required headwater is computed by taking the depth of flow at the culvert
outlet, adding all head losses, and subtracting the change in flow-line elevation of the culvert from the
upstream to downstream end. The HEC-2 special culvert option considers the entrance losses, the
friction loss in the culvert barrel, and the loss of velocity head at the outlet in computing the outlet
control headwater of the culvert.

2.3 Computing Inlet Control Headwater

For inlet control conditions, the capacity of the culvert is limited by the capacity of the culvert
opening, rather than by conditions farther downstream. Extensive laboratory tests by the National
Bureau of Standards, the Bureau of Public Roads, and other entities resulted in a series of equations
which describe the inlet control headwater under various conditions. These equations form the basis
of the FHWA inlet control nomographs shown in the exhibit [FHWA, 1972].

The FHWA inlet control equations are used by the HEC-2 special culvert option in computing the
inlet control headwater. The equations are adapted slightly to allow the use of metric units.

The nomographs in the exhibit of this appendix are considered to be accurate to within about 10
percent in determining the required inlet control headwater ([FHWA, 1972]. The nomographs were
computed assuming a culvert slope of 0.02 feet per foot (2 percent). For different culvert slopes, the
nomographs are less accurate because inlet control headwater changes with slope. However, the
special culvert option of HEC-2 considers the slope in computing the inlet control headwater.
Therefore, the special culvert option should be more accurate than the nomographs, especially for
slopes other than 0.02 feet per foot.

IV-6
2.4 Computing Outlet Control Headwater
For outlet control flow, the required headwater must be computed considering several conditions
within the culvert and downstream of the culvert. Figure 2.3 illustrates the logic of the outlet control
computations:

__________ves=,_eut:..:..:.'..:.et'--.'.:..s..:,..,."..:..:..:...:.oe<l=-<L
r Depth

">1"'"
CUlvert

(Rise)'?
• >
~" • __ ~
V

Full Flow NJ. Slope Is YES. Slope Is

PosItive Is Culvert H:rlzontal
Headwater
Depth Slope O? =
~uted ltfna AffA
Full Flow ~tlons

~
Is s
tit flow is """"" in
Depth YES, Flow Is Yes Tallwat« No
~-Q-jtjCIII
Il~~~~t~
It I
1 }Sub-_o-c-_ C"_'- - . - - - - - Depth » ~Itlcal

Culvert? ""'th

r0>
Inl.tDepth O=w!puted
s Is 10, Tallwele-
Using Direct Step
Tal hete.- t(), Tallweler Depth Tafl....ter Depth = frtJr"tnell Inl~tDepth ~ed

y
N) Depth > YES < tb"Ife I Depth Depth > )''''''=th'--._--, Met"'" Using 01reet Step
O'"1tlce.1 Depth Tai lmt. . Depth "thod
in Culvert? Assumed os Critical Depth
Assl.Ifted liS
Downstream Bounc2ry
Downstream Boundcry

~
$1 BactwatQl'" A-ofllCl
s
Tal !'orater Wi Bad::wIIter Ao-ofll lkllforll Flow
Inlet Depth = YES Depth > to
Inlet Depth tonputEld
Critical Depth Q-ltlcalOepth lnlet()epth Cofrputed Inlet Depth =
l5lng Direct Step InCulvert? USing D'..ect Step Ta I hll1tet"" Depth
"thod

U2 I¥awdown Profi I

I nlet Depth Co!tputed InletDepth Conputed

USing Direct Step Using DIrect Step
I4ethod St.artl~ wit Method Starting wit
TallWl!lter Depth O"ltlcal Depth

Headwcter Depth
= Inlet Depth
• Entrance Loss

'----------------.l{ ~

Figure 2.3
Flow Chart for Outlet Control Computations

IV-7
2.4.1 FHWA Full Flow Equations

For culverts flowing full, the total head loss, or energy loss, through the culvert is measured in
feet. The head loss, LB, is computed using the following formula:

(IV-1)

in which:

LF = friction loss (feet)

LE = entrance loss (feet)

Lx = exit loss (feet)

The friction loss in the culvert is computed using Manning's formula, which is expressed as
follows:

Qn )2 (IV-2)
~ = L ( 1. 486AR2/3

in which:

LF = friction Loss (feet)

L = culvert length (feet)

Q = flow rate in the culvert (cfs)

n = Manning's roughness coefficient

A = area of flow (square feet)

flow area
R = hydraulic radius (feet) = wetted perimeter

The entrance loss is computed as described in Section 3.2.3 of this appendix. The exit loss is
assumed to equal the velocity head in the culvert.

2.4.2 Direct Step Water Surface Profile Computations

For culverts flowing partially full, the water surface profile in the culvert is computed using the
direct step method. This method is very efficient, because no iterations are required to determine the
flow depth for each step. The water surface profile is computed for small increments of depth (usually
between 0.01 and 0.05 feet). If the flow depth equals the height of the culvert before the profile
reaches the upstream end of the culvert, the friction loss through the remainder of the culvert is
computed assuming full flow.

IV-8
 The direct step method computes the flow depth in the culvert at the inlet. The entrance loss,
computed as described in Section 3.2.3 of this appendix, is added to the computed flow depth in the
culvert to compute the outlet control headwater.

2.4.3 Normal Depth of Flow in the Culvert

Normal depth is the depth at which uniform flow will occur in an open channel. In other words,
for a uniform channel of infinite length, carrying a constant flow rate, flow in the channel would be at a
constant depth at all points along the channel, and this would be the normal depth.

Normal depth often represents a good approximation of the actual depth of flow within a channel
segment. For inlet control conditions, the depth of flow within the culvert is assumed to be equal to
normal depth. This assumption is only valid if the culvert barrel is sufficiently long to allow the flow
depth to stabilize at normal depth.

For both box culverts and pipe culverts, the program computes normal depth using an iterative
approach to arrive at a value which satisfies Manning's equation:

Q = 1. 486 AR(Z/3>{S (IV-3)

n

in which:

Q = flow rate in the channel (cfs)

n = Manning's roughness coefficient

A = area of flow (square feet)

flow area
R = hydraulic radius (feet) =
wetted perimeter
S = slope of energy grade line (feet per foot)

2.4.4 Critical Depth of Flow in the Culvert

Critical depth occurs when the flow in a channel has minimum specific energy. Specific energy
refers to the sum of the depth of flow and the velocity head. At critical depth, the velocity head is
equal to one-half the average depth of flow. Critical depth depends only on the channel shape and
flow rate.

The depth of flow at the culvert outlet is assumed to be equal to critical depth for culverts
operating under outlet control with low tailwater. Critical depth may also influence the inlet control
headwater for unsubmerged conditions.

The special culvert option computes the critical depth in a pipe culvert by an iterative procedure,
which arrives at a value satisfying the following equation:

IV-9
 (IV-4)

in which:

Q = flow rate in the channel (cfs)

g = acceleration due to gravity (32.2 ft/sec2)

A= cross-sectional area of flow (square feet)

T= top width of flow (feet)

Critical depth for box culverts is computed by the following equation [AISI, 1980]:

y=
e
3W !I-
g
(IV-5)

in which:

Ye = critical depth (ft)

q = unit discharge per linear foot of width (cfs/ft)

g = acceleration due to gravity (32.2 ft/sec 2 )

2.4.5 Super-Critical Culvert Flow

The special culvert option allows super-critical flow in the culvert as a temporary condition in an
otherwise sub-critical stream profile. The simple assumptions shown in Figure 2.3 are used to
compute the headwater depth for super-critical culvert flow.

2.4.6 Horizontal Culvert Slope

The special culvert option also allows horizontal culvert slopes. The primary difference is that
normal depth is not computed for a horizontal culvert. Outlet control is either computed by direct step
for partial full tailwater or the full flow equation.

IV-10
 Chapter 3

Using the Special Culvert Method

HEC-2 computes the energy losses caused by culverts in two parts:

1) the losses due to expansion and contraction of flow on the downstream and upstream
sides of the structure

2) the energy loss through the roadway structure itself.

The special culvert method has the capability to compute energy losses at a roadway culvert
crossing for a number of different flow conditions, including inlet control flow, outlet control flow, weir
flow over the roadway, or any possible combination of these flow conditions. The special culvert
method uses hydraulic formulas to determine what flow conditions exist, what portion of the total flow
rate falls into each condition, and what change in energy head and water surface elevation will occur
through the culvert structure for a given total flow rate.

This chapter describes the use of the HEC-2 special culvert method for computing both types of
energy losses. The layout of channel cross sections around the culvert is described, as is the
information required to describe the culvert and roadway structures.

3.1 Cross Sections for Culvert Modeling

The number of HEC-2 cross sections required to analyze a given bridge, culvert, or related
structure varies according to the modeling method selected.

The special culvert method requires the same cross sections as the special bridge method. Four
cross sections are required for a complete bridge model. This total includes one cross section
sufficiently downstream of the culvert that flow is not affected by the culvert, one at the downstream
end of the culvert, one at the upstream end of the culvert, and one cross section located far enough
upstream that the culvert again has no effect on flow. Figure 3.1 illustrates the cross sections
required for a special culvert model.

3.1.1 Cross Section 1 of Special Culvert Model

Cross section 1 for a special culvert model should be located at a point where flow has expanded
from its constricted top width within the culvert to its unrestrained top width downstream of the culvert.
The cross section spacing downstream of the culvert should be based on a 4 to 1 expansion of flow.
In other words, the maximum rate at which flow can expand after being constricted in the culvert is
assumed to be one foot laterally for every four feet traveled in the downstream direction. (See
Appendix III, ·Application of HEC-2 Bridge Routines· for a more complete discussion of cross section
locations.) The entire area of cross section 1 is usually considered to be effective in conveying flow.

IV-11
 DETERMINED
USING 1:1 LENGTH OF DETERMINED USING
CONTRACT ION CULVERT 4 : 1 EXPANS ION

CULVERT
--------------
r--_ _ -l:-w~-----I--.

Figure 3.1
Cross Section Layout for Special Culvert Method

3.1.2 Cross Section 2 of Special Culvert Model

Cross section 2 of a special culvert model is located at the downstream end of the culvert. It does
not include any of the culvert structure or embankments, but represents the physical shape of the
channel just downstream of the culvert. The shape of the culvert itself is entered on an SC record
between cross sections 2 and 3 of the special culvert model. No BT (bridge table) records are
included for cross section 2.

The HEC-2 effective area option is used to restrict the effective flow area of cross section 2 to the
flow area allowed by the edges of the culverts, until flow overtops the roadway. An NC record is
placed just before cross section 2 to change the expansion and contraction coefficients, as described
in Section 3.1.5. Figure 3.2 illustrates cross section 2 of a typical special culvert model of a circular
culvert. As indicated, the GR records are not required to define the culvert shape for the special
culvert model. On Figure 3.3, the channel bank locations are indicated by small circles and the
stations and elevations are indicated by triangles.

42

38

38-~
C 34
.2
~

g 32
Q)
W
30

2.

Station

Figure 3.2
Cross Section 2 of Special Culvert Model

IV-12
 Cross sections 1 and 2 are located so as to create a channel reach downstream of the culvert in
which the HEC-2 program can accurately compute the friction losses and expansion losses
downstream of the culvert.

3.1.3 Cross Section 3 of Special Culvert Model

Cross section 3 of a special culvert model is located at the upstream end of the culvert, and
represents the physical configuration of the channel immediately upstream of the culvert.

The special culvert method uses a combination of BT records, an SC record, and an X2 record to
describe the culvert or culverts and the roadway embankment. The SC record describing the culvert
crossing is located between the data for cross section 2 and cross section 3. The data for cross
section 3 includes an X2 record which instructs the HEC-2 program to perform culvert loss
computations. In addition, cross section 3 includes BT records describing the top of roadway profile
for weir flow computations. The BT records used for the special culvert method are not required to
include low chord elevations, since the special culvert method does not use these elevations.

The HEC-2 effective area option is used to restrict the effective flow area of cross section 3 to the
flow area allowed by the edges of the culverts, until flow overtops the roadway. Figure 3.3 illustrates
cross section 3 of a typical special culvert model of a circular culvert, including the roadway profile
defined on BT records, and the culvert shape defined on the SC record. As indicated, the GR records
are not required to define the culvert shape for the special culvert model. On Figure 3.3, the channel
bank locations are indicated by small circles and the stations and elevations of effective area control
are indicated by triangles.

42

40

38

---~
36

C 34
0
+oJ
0
>
Q)
32

W
30

28

26

24
860 1000 1020 1040 1060 1080 11 11 0 1140 11 0

Station

Figure 3.3
Cross Section 3 of Special Culvert Model

IV-13
3.1.4 Cross Section 4 of Special Culvert Model
The final cross section in the special culvert model is located at a point where flow has not yet
begun to contract from its unrestrained top width upstream of the culvert to its constricted top width in
the culvert. This distance is determined assuming a one to one contraction of flow. In other words,
the maximum rate at which flow can contract to pass through the culvert opening is assumed to be
one foot laterally for every one foot traveled in the downstream direction.

The entire area of cross section 4 is usually considered to be effective in conveying flow. An NC
record is placed just after cross section 4 to change the expansion and contraction coefficients, as
described in Section 3.1.5.

3.1.5 Expansion and Contraction Coefficients

User-defined coefficients are required to compute head losses due to the contraction and
expansion of flows upstream and downstream of a culvert. These losses are computed by multiplying
an expansion or contraction coefficient by the absolute difference in velocity head between two cross
sections. Normally, the greatest expansion loss occurs between the first two cross sections of a
bridge model, as flow expands from the width of the culvert opening to the full width of the channel or
floodplain. Similarly, the greatest contraction loss occurs between the last two cross sections of the
bridge model, as flow contracts from the full width of the channel or floodplain to the width of the
culvert opening.

If the velocity head increases in the downstream direction, a contraction coefficient is applied.
When the velocity head decreases in the downstream direction, an expansion coefficient is used.
Some recommended values of the expansion and contraction coefficients are indicated in Table 3.1.
As indicated by the tabulated values, the expansion of flow causes more energy loss than does
contraction, and head losses increase with the abruptness of the transition.

Table 3.1
Expansion and Contraction Coefficients

Contraction Expansion
Description of Transition Coefficient Coefficient

No Transition Loss Computed 0.0 0.0

Gradual Transitions 0.1 0.3
Bridge Cross Sections 0.3 0.5
Abrupt Transitions (including most culverts) 0.6 0.8

When redefining expansion and contraction coefficients for a culvert, the coefficients should be
changed to the desired values for the culvert just after the first cross section in the culvert model and
changed back to the previous values just after the final cross section.

IV-14
3.2 Defining the Culvert with the SC Record

The special culvert (SC) record is required to input coefficients for inlet control, outlet control, and
weir flow for analysis by the special culvert method. Geometric properties of the culvert such as
diameter (in the case of pipe culverts) and span and rise (in the case of box culverts) are also input
on the SC record. The SC record is only required when using the special culvert method. Appendix
VIII summarizes the information provided on the SC record. The following sections of this appendix
provide a more complete description of each item.

3.2.1 CUNO: Number of Identical Culverts

The number of identical culverts is the value left of the decimal point in Fie!d 1 of the SC record.
For example, a value of 3.012 in Field 1 of the SC record indicates that three identical culverts are
present at the current cross section. (Note: the 0.012 value right of the decimal point indicates that
the culvert n-value is 0.012, as described in Section 3.2.2.)

If multiple culverts are specified, HEC-2 automatically divides the flow rate equally among the
culverts and analyzes each culvert separately. All of the culverts must be identical; they must have
the same cross-sectional shape, upstream and downstream invert elevations, roughness coefficients,
and inlet shapes.

3.2.2 CUNV: Manning's Roughness Coefficient

The Manning's roughness coefficient is the value right of the decimal point in Field 1 of the SC
record. For example, a value of 3.012 in Field 1 of the SC record indicates that the culvert has a
roughness coefficient of 0.012. (Note: the 3 value left of the decimal point indicates that there are
three identical culverts at this location, as described in Section 3.2.1.)

HEC-2 uses Manning's equation to compute friction losses in the culvert barrel, as described in
Section 2.4 of this appendix. The roughness of the culvert is represented by Manning's roughness
coefficient, commonly called the n-value. Suggested values for Manning's n-value are listed in Table
3.2 and Table 3.3, and in many hydraulics reference books. Roughness coefficients should be
adjusted according to individual judgment of the culvert condition.

3.2.3 ENTLC: Entrance Loss Coefficient

The entrance loss coefficient is input in Field 2 of the SC record.

Entrance losses are computed as a fraction of the velocity head or kinetic energy of flow in the
culvert. The velocity head in the culvert is computed as:

(IV-6)

IV-15
 in which:

Hv = velocity head in the culvert (feet)

v = flow velocity in the culvert (ft/sec)

g = acceleration due to gravity (32.2 ft/sec 2)

Table 3.2
Manning's tn' for Corrugated Metal Pipe

12 inch diameter 0.011

18 inch diameter 0.014
24 inch diameter 0.016 0.015 0.012
36 inch diameter 0.019 0.017 0.012
48 inch diameter 0.020 0.020 0.012
60 inch diameter 0.021 0.019 0.012
Annular 3 x 1 in. 0.027 0.023 0.012

48 inch diameter 0.023 0.020 0.012

54 inch diameter 0.023 0.020 0.012
60 inch diameter 0.024 0.021 0.012
66 inch diameter 0.025 0.022 0.012
72 inch diameter 0.026 0.022 0.012
78 inch & larger 0.027 0.023 0.012

60 inch diameter 0.033 0.028

72 inch diameter 0.032 0.027
120 inch diameter 0.030 0.026
180 inch diameter 0.028 0.024

[AISI, 1980]

The velocity head is multiplied by the entrance loss coefficient to estimate the amount of energy
lost as flow enters the culvert. A higher value for the coefficient gives a higher head loss. As shown in
Table 3.4, entrance losses can vary from about 0.2 to about 0.5 times the velocity head for box
culverts. Table 3.5 indicates that values of the entrance loss coefficient range from 0.2 to about 0.8
for pipe culverts. For a sharp-edged culvert entrance with no rounding, 0.5 is recommended. For a
well-rounded entrance, 0.2 is appropriate. An example of a fairly well-rounded entrance is the socket
end of a concrete pipe section.

IV-16
 Table 3.3
Manning's 'n' for Closed Conduits Flowing Partly Full

Neat, surface 0.013

Mortar 0.015

Culvert, and 0.010 0.011 0.013

Culvert with bends, connections, and some debris 0011 0.013 0.014
Finished 0.011 0012 0.014
Sewer with manholes, inlet, etc.. , straight 0.013 0.015 0.017
Unfinished, steel form 0.012 0.013 0.014
Unfinished, smooth wood form 0.012 0.014 0.016
Unfinished, rough wood form 0.015 0.017 0.020

~~
Laminated, treated 0.Q15 0.017 0.020

Common drainage 1
Vitrified sewer 0.011 0.014 0.017
Vitrified sewer with manholes, inlet, etc.. 0.013 0.Q15 0.017
Vitrified subdrain with open joint 0.014 0.016 0.018

Glazed 0011 0013 0015

Lined with cement mortar 0.012 0.015 0.017
Sanitary sewers coated with sewage slime with bends and connections 0.012 0.013 0.Q16
Paved invert, sewer, smooth bottom 0.016 0.019 0.020
Rubble masonry, cemented 0.Q18 0.025 0.030

[Chow, 1959]

IV-17
 Table 3.4
Entrance Loss Coefficient for Box Culverts

Type of Structure and Design of Entrance

Square-edge top corner

Top corner rounded to radius of 1/12 barrel dimension

Source: ·Street and Highway Drainage,· Institute of Transportation and Traffic Engineering,
University of California at Berkeley, 1969.

Table 3.5
Entrance Loss Coefficient for Pipe Culverts

Type of Structure and Design of Entrance

Projecting from fill (no headwall)

With headwall or headwall and wingwalls, square edge

3.2.4 COFQ: Weir Flow Coefficient

Weir flow over a roadway is computed in the special culvert method using exactly the same
methods used in the HEC-2 special bridge method. The standard weir equation is used:

Q = CLH1. 5 (IV-7)

in which:

Q = flow rate (cfs)

C = COFQ = weir flow coefficient

L = weir length (feet)

H = weir head (feet)

IV-18
 For flow over a typical bridge deck, a weir coefficient of 2.6 is recommended. A weir coefficient of
3.0 is recommended for flow over elevated roadway approach embankments. The weir flow coefficient
will generally be near 3.0 for special culvert models because the roadway embankment for a culvert is
often similar to a roadway approach embankment. More detailed information on weir discharge
coefficients may be found in Tables 3.6 and 3.7.

Table 3.6
Broad-Crested Weir Coefficients

Breadth of Crest of Weir in Feet Measured Head in Feet (H)

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
5 2.68 2.65 2.66 2.70 2.79
10 2.68 2.64 2.64 2.64 2.64
15 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63

[Brater/King, 1976]

When the weir (roadway) is submerged by high tailwater, the weir flow coefficient is automatically
reduced by the HEC-2 program. The program adjusts for weir submergence based on either the
curves in ·Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways· [FHWA, 1978], or the Waterways Experiment Station's
Design Chart 111-4 [U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, 1953]. The ·Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways·
method, the default method of the program, is based on a trapezoidal-shaped roadway embankment,
whereas the WES method is based on a ogee-shaped spillway.

Use of the WES method is designed by a negative weir coefficient COFQ in Field 3 of the SC
record. The "Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways" method is designated by a positive weir coefficient
COFQ.

Table 3.7
Trapezoidal Weir Coefficients

Slope of Slope of Width Measured Head in Feet (H)

Upstream Downstream of Crest
Face (H:V) Face (H:V) (feet
0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00
1:1 1:1 0 4.14 4.08 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75
2:1 2:1 0 3.81 3.87 3.87 3.87 3.87 3.87 3.87
2:1 2:1 .67 3.13 3.43 3.61 3.56 3.58 3.62 3.68

[Brater/King, 1976]
Note: A weir crest width of zero indicates a triangular weir.

IV-19
3.2.5 RISE: Pipe Culvert Diameter or Box Culvert Height

The value in Field 5 of the SC record is used as the inside diameter of a pipe culvert or the inside
height of a box culvert.

Box culverts are described by the span and rise, which are the horizontal and vertical
dimensions of the culvert opening, respectively. For example, a "4 by 3 box culvert" has a span of
4 feet and a rise of 3 feet.

The inside height of the culvert opening is important not only in determining the total flow area of
the culvert, but also in determining whether the headwater and tailwater elevations are adequate to
submerge the inlet or outlet of the culvert.

3.2.6 SPAN: Box Culvert Span (Width of Opening)

Box culverts are essentially rectangular in cross section. For analysis of box culverts, the
horizontal dimension of the rectangle, measured in feet, is input in Field 6 of the SC record. If Field 6
contains a zero or is blank, the culvert is assumed to be a circular culvert with the diameter provided
in Field 5.

Most box culverts have chamfered corners on the inside, as indicated in Figure 2.2. The
chamfers are ignored by the special culvert option in computing the cross-sectional area of the culvert
opening. Some manufacturers' literature contains the true cross-sectional area of each size of box
culvert, considering the reduction in area caused by the chamfered corners. If you wish to consider
the loss in area due to the chamfers, then you should reduce the span of the culvert. You should not
reduce the rise of the culvert, because the program uses the culvert rise to determine the
submergence of the culvert entrance and outlet.

3.2.7 CULVLN: Culvert Length

The culvert length is input in Field 7 of the SC record. It is measured in feet along the center-line
of the culvert. The culvert length is used to determine the friction loss in the culvert barrel and the
slope of the culvert.

3.2.8 CHRT and SCL: FHWA Chart Number and Scale Number

The culvert FHWA chart number and scale number are input in Field 8 of the SC record. The
FHWA chart number is entered left of the decimal point and the FHWA scale number is entered right
of the decimal point. For example, a value of 1.2 in Field 8 of the SC record indicates FHWA chart
number 1 and FHWA scale number 2.

The FHWA chart number and scale number refer to a series of nomographs published by the
Bureau of Public Roads (now called the Federal Highway Administration) in 1965 [BPR, 1965], which
allowed the inlet control headwater to be computed for different types of culverts operating under a
wide range of flow conditions. These nomographs and others constructed using the original methods
were republished [FHWA, 1985]. The exhibit of this appendix contains copies of all the pipe culvert
and box culvert nomographs from the 1985 FHWA publication.

IV-20
 Each of the FHWA charts has from two to four separate scales representing different culvert
entrance designs. The appropriate FHWA chart number and scale number should be chosen
according to the type of culvert and culvert entrance. Tables 3.8 and 3.9 may be used for guidance in
selecting the FHWA chart number and scale number.

Table 3.8
FHWA Chart and Scale Numbers for Pipe Culverts

Chart Scale
Number Number

1 Square edge entrance with headwall (See Figure 3A)

2 Groove end entrance with headwall (See Figure 3A)
3 Groove end entrance, pipe piojecting 1iom 1i11 (Sea Figure 3.6)

1 (See Figure 3A)

2 Mitered to conform to slope (See Figure 3.5)
3 Pipe projecting from fill (See Figure 3.6)

1 bevel: biD = 0.042; aiD = 0.063; clD = 0.042; diD = 0083

2(8) Large bevel; biD = 0.083; aiD = 0.125; clD = 0.. 042; diD = 0125

NOTE: For chart 3, enter scale number 1 for scale A and scale number 2 for scale B.. See chart 3 in Exhibit A of this appendix
for detail.

Chart numbers 1, 2, and 3 apply only to pipe culverts. Similarly, chart number 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,
and 13 apply only to box culverts. The HEC-2 program checks the chart number to assure that it is
appropriate for the type of culvert being analyzed. HEC-2 also checks the value of the Scale Number
to assure that it is available for the given chart number. For example, a scale number of 4 would be
available for chart 11, but not for chart 12.

Table 3.8 lists the FHWA chart and scale numbers for pipe culverts. Figures 3.4 through 3.7 can
be used as guidance in determining which chart and scale numbers to select for various types of
culvert inlets.

ill I I 1 1 1

\li~~
\~ ~
----/ ) ;
Figure 3.4 Figure 3.5
Culvert Inlet with Headwall and Wingwalls Culvert Inlet Mitered to Conform to Slope

IV-21
 a

DIAMETER ~ D1

Figure 3.6 Figure 3.7

Culvert Inlet Projecting from Fill Culvert Inlet with Beveled Ring Entrance

Table 3.10 lists the FHWA chart and scale number for box culverts. Figures 3.8 through 3.13
illustrate the culvert inlets corresponding to various box culvert charts.

Table 3.9
FHWA Chart and Scale Numbers for Box Culverts

1 Wingwalls flared 45 degrees (1 :1); inlet top edge bevel = 0.0420

2 Wingwalls flared 337 degrees (1,5:1); inlet top edge bevel = 0.0830
3 Wingwalls flared 184 degrees (3:1); inlet top edge bevel = 00830

IV-22
 ~--r--
ANGLE OF
WINGWALL
FLARE -------

Figure 3.8 Figure 3.9

Flared Wingwalls (Chart 8) Inlet Top Edge Bevel (Chart 9)

SIDE BEVEL
Fo.ce- HEAD'w'ALL
Bevel Angle
.l-.. 45° For 10 = 1I2'xB
33.7° For b = lHxB
10
l-,
B = Inlet 'w'iclth in Feet

TOP BEVEL

Bevel Angle
45 ° For cI = 1I2'xD
L
TOP B E V E l L
33.7° For cI = l'xD ~-
D
~~~~>i'77rT.;ri;

D = Inlet Height in Feet D/12 = MINIMUM HEAD'w'ALL HEIGHT

ABOVE TOP BEVEL

Figure 3.10
Inlet Side and Top Edge Bevel with Ninety Degree Headwall (Chart 10)

IV-23
 TOP BEVEL

~/12 Min.

-L
O.042D f
rt5
~
9

l \

SIDE BEVEL

45~~BT~- T
B B

Figure 3.11
Inlet Side and Top Edge Bevel with Skewed Headwall (Chart 11)

EQUAL FLARE

EQUAL FLARE
ANGLES 18.4
DR 45 9
9
¢IJINGIJALL
~
-
-----
-1 ANGLES 18.4 9

Figure 3.12
Non-Offset Flared Wingwalls (Chart 12)

IV-24
 J-----r. ~
~ ==1:--1==-=-=
- D/1~_N ~
'-f --1-··-1
EQUAL FLARE - ____
ANGLES --

~---
WI NGWALL -.::!W~7tt= ~ =[-=1-
BEVEL d

OFFSET
-- .....-- ..-
. ....
B_E_VE_L_A_N_GL"'E7"OC,..m._ _ ----l.-- .
c:------

Figure 3.13
Offset Flared Wingwalls (Chart 13)

3.2.9 ELCHU and ELCHO: Culvert Invert Elevations

The culvert flow-line slope is the average drop in elevation per foot of length along the culvert.
For example, if the culvert flow-line drops 1 foot in a length of 100 feet, then the culvert flow-line slope
is 0.01 feet per foot. Culvert flow-line slopes are sometimes expressed in percent. A slope of 0.01
feet per foot is the same as a one percent slope.

The culvert slope is computed from the upstream flow-line elevation input in Field 9 of the SC
record, the downstream flow-line elevation input in Field 10, and the culvert length input in Field 7.
The following equation is used to compute the culvert slope:

ELCHU - ELCHD
s = (IV-8)
VCULVLN 2 - (ELCHU - ELCHD) 2

As already noted, HEC-2 cannot analyze culverts with adverse (negative) slopes. Most culverts
are installed with some "positive slope"; that is, the flow-line of the culvert is slightly lower on the
downstream end than the upstream end, so that some flow velocity can be maintained in the culvert
even under low flow conditions. A sufficient slope to maintain a minimum flow velocity of 3 feet per
second is often required.

The slope of the culvert is used by the program to compute the drop in flow-line between the
upstream and downstream ends of the culvert. It is also used to compute the normal depth of flow in
the culvert under inlet control conditions.

3.3 Defining the Weir Profile With the BT Records

Weir flow occurs when water begins to flow over the roadway. The HEC-2 program performs
weir flow calculations using the standard weir flow equation. Total weir flow is computed by
subdividing the roadway crest into segments, computing the discharge for each segment, and
summing the discharges.

IV-25
 TOP OF ROAD. WA TER SURFACE
. SPILLS OVER TOP OF ROAD

____ ~ _ _...L._
~~
__l _

PROFILE VIEW

Figure 3.14
Illustration of Weir Flow Conditions

Combinations of culvert flow and weir flow are analyzed by HEC-2 using an iterative procedure.
Energy elevations are assumed and discharges computed for each type of flow until the total
computed flow rate is within one percent of the actual total flow rate at the roadway crossing.

WEIR FLOW
1N OVERBANK

L.OW FLOW
I N CHANNEL _-'

Figure 3.15
Illustration of Combination Flow Conditions

The top-of-road profile for weir flow computations is defined using BT records at cross section 3
of the special culvert model. For the special culvert method, BT stations do not have to match GR
stations, because the standard step method is not used for the special culvert method. However, the
entire top-of-road profile must be coded on the BT records, even if the top-of-road and ground
elevations are the same for a portion of the cross section. Weir flow computations are based on the
road profile as represented on the BT records only. Therefore, if only a portion of the road profile is
included on the BT records, the length of the roadway for weir flow computations will be less than the
actual length.

Proper definition of the top of roadway is a crucial step in assembling an accurate and reliable
HEC-2 culvert model. Actual top-of-road elevations should always be used in defining the top of
roadway at cross section 3 in the special culvert method. The natural ground elevations in the
overbank should not be used to represent the top-of-roadway profile, even though there is a tendency
to do so when copying a natural channel cross section for use in the culvert model. An exception to

IV-26
this rule is that natural ground elevations should be used instead of top of road elevations when the
roadway is in a cut, i.e., when natural ground is higher than the top of the roadway. Figure 3.16
illustrates this situation.

NATURAL

-:----. EFFECT I VE TOP OF ROAD FOR GR~UND

~'--~ , / HEC- 2 SPEC I AL CULVERT MODEL "'"" ' "

~~~ L ACTUAL TOP OF ROADWAY \ ~ ,,~0

,---\ ACTUAL TOP OF
~~OO~
~ ~-all
ROADWAY

Figure 3.16
Defining the Top-of-Road for Roadways in Open Cuts

Bridge railings or curbs should sometimes be considered when defining the top of roadway. If a
railing or curb forms a substantial obstruction to flow over the roadway, the top of the rail or curb
should be considered as the effective top-of-road. Figures 3.17 and 3.18 illustrate roadways with solid
and open rails.

EFFECTIVE TOP OF ROAD FOR

HEC- 2 SPEC I AL CULVERT MODEL SOLID RAIL

-1i77.i%':""ft"'W-""","","~-·-- L
~_
/ /-----~TUAL
L
TOP OF

-------------
ROADWAY

11:£'//1

Figure 3.17
Defining the Top-of-Road for Roadways with Solid Rails

IV-27
 ACTUAL TOP OF ROADWAY
EFFECTIVE TOP OF ROAD FOR
OPEN RAIL

/ HEC-' s~e_R_T_M-l.0-,-D_EL_----;;p-'-_--"--J...<j TOP OF CURB

-/O;;;:~=;;IIIR-- "---"-r;/tGi.;;;:_:1'"'w------"--l

00
Figure 3.18
Defining the Top-of-Road for Roadways with Open Rails

In lieu of BT records, a horizontal weir may be specified using Field 4 of the SC record and Field
5 of the X2 record. However, this option should be used carefully, because the same weir length will
be used for all flow rates. This contrasts with most bridges, in which longer and longer segments of
the roadway are inundated as flow rates increase. Figure 3.19 illustrates a horizontal weir.

Figure 3.19
Defining a Horizontal Weir for the Special Culvert Method

3.4 Controlling the Special Culvert Option With the X2 Record

An X2 record is required at cross section 3 of the special culvert model. Field 3 of the X2 record
should contain a "2" to indicate to HEC-2 that special culvert computations are to be performed.

Other variables on the X2 record are used in the special culvert method as they are in the special
bridge method. Field 5 of the X2 record is used to define the minimum top-of-road elevation for use
by the HEC-2 program in testing for weir flow. Therefore, when the energy grade line upstream of the
roadway exceeds the elevation specified in Field 5 of the X2 record, the program begins to compute
weir flow.

IV-28
3.5 Special Culvert Output
The special culvert method generates detailed output for each cross section. This output includes
the following:

1) A listing of the data values read from the SC record.

2) A description of the selected FHWA chart and scale.

3) A statement of whether the culvert operates under inlet control or outlet control.

4) The values of four important variables:

EGIC - the computed energy grade line elevation for inlet control;
EGOC - the computed energy grade line elevation for outlet control;
PCWSEL - the water surface elevation computed by HEC-2 for the previous cross
section; and
ELTRD - the minimum top of road elevation for weir flow.

Summary Table 101 is available to provide the results of the special culvert option. Summary
Table 101 includes the following variables:

SECNO - the cross section number

EGOC - the computed energy grade line elevation for outlet control
EGIC - the computed energy grade line elevation for inlet control
H4 - the difference between the computed energy grade elevation upstream
and downstream of a culvert.
ELTRD - the minimum top-of-road for weir flow.
QCULV - the computed flow through the culvert. Equivalent to the QCH variable
used in special bridge models.
CLASS - an indicator of the type of flow occurring at the roadway crossing. The
CLASS variable has several values relating specifically to the special
culvert option. Table 3.10 lists these CLASS values.

Table 3.10
CLASS Values for Special Culvert Option

CLASS
Value Description
6 Inlet control, all flow is passing through the culvert.
7 Outlet control, all flow is passing through the culvert.
16 Inlet control, combination of culvert flow and weir flow.
17 Outlet control, combination of culvert flow and weir flow.

The variables QWEIR, CWSEL, VCH, and EG are also used in Summary Table 101 and have the
same significance for special culvert models as special bridge models. The special bridge Summary
Table 105 is also applicable to special culvert models. In Summary Table 105, the QCH variable
contains the value for QCULV.

IV-29
 The special culvert examples in Section 4 of this Appendix illustrate the detailed and summary
output for the special culvert option.

Error messages and warnings are also provided for special culvert computations. See special
notes 5105 through 5185 in Appendix V (pages V-6 through V-7) for error messages and warnings
which pertain to the special culvert option.

IV-30
 Chapter 4

Examples of the Special Culvert Method

This chapter presents four examples of culvert models using the special culvert method. The
following examples are included:

1) A road crossing with a single box culvert.

2) A road crossing with a singie pipe culvert.

3) A road crossing with multiple box culverts.

4.1 Example of Box Culvert Analysis

As an example of the application of a special culvert model of a box culvert, the culvert illustrated
in Figure 4.1 is considered. The culvert underneath the roadway is a 10' X 6' concrete box culvert, 50
feet in length. A Manning's 'n' value of 0.013 is assumed for the culvert. At both ends of the culvert
are a vertical headwall and 45 degree wing walls. According to Table 3.9 of this appendix, Scale 1 of
FHWA chart 8 is appropriate for this type of culvert. According to Table 3.4 of this appendix, the
entrance loss coefficient for this type of entrance is about 0.4, assuming that the top edge of the
entrance is not rounded.

A concrete apron extends about 5 feet past the end of the culvert. The roadway on either side of
the channel is not elevated. The drop in invert elevation is 0.1 foot through the culvert, so the slope of
the culvert invert is 0.2 percent.

A A
L ----1T----- __J'

40
PLAN VIEW

2ftS
v
~
Z
o
F
;;
30 ~~
':!
w
SECTION A-A
20 '--~_--1I_~_--+I_~--+1 -~--I-I -~---+-I -~---jl
850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150

DISTANCE (feet)

Figure 4.1
Illustration of Box Culvert Example

IV-31
 Cross section 1 of the special culvert model is located downstream of the culvert crossing at a
distance determined by the 4:1 flow expansion rule. The flow expands from a top width of 10 feet in
the culverts to a maximum of about 60 feet downstream, the spacing between cross sections 1 and 2
should be about 4 X (30 - 5) = 100 feet.

Cross section 2 is located at the downstream end of the culvert. The n-value is changed at cross
section 2 because the concrete apron extends past the downstream end of the culvert. The effective
area option is used at cross section 2 to restrict flow to the portion of the cross section in and directly
above the culvert opening until the roadway is overtopped. Both of the test elevations on the X3
record at cross section 2 are set at 32. These elevations are computed by subtracting the expected
head loss through the culvert (about 1.3 feet) from the top-of-road elevations for the left and right
sides of the road (each of which is 33.3).

The weir flow coefficient is set at 3.0. This is the recommended value for roadway embankments.
The fill over the culvert is assumed to be similar to a roadway embankment.

The downstream channel flow-line elevation is equal to 24.9 for this example. The upstream
flow-line elevation is 0.1 foot higher. These values are entered in Fields 9 and 10 of the SC record.

Cross section 3 is located at the upstream end of the culvert. The effective area option is also
used at cross section 3 to restrict flow to the portion of the cross section in and directly above the
culvert until the roadway is overtopped. The test elevations on the X3 record at cross section 3 are
set at the top-of-road elevations for the left and right sides of the road (each of which is 33.3).

Cross section 4 is located upstream of the culvert at a distance determined using the 1:1
contraction rule. Since the flow must contract from a total top width of about 120 feet at cross section
4 to a top width of 10 feet in the culvert, the spacing between cross sections 3 and 4 should be about
60 - 5 = 55 feet. An example output of the box culvert option is shown in Exhibit B of this appendix.

4.2 Example of Pipe Culvert Analysis

This example deals with a roadway crossing over a reinforced concrete pipe culvert. As shown in
Figure 4.2, the culvert is a 84-inch reinforced concrete pipe 50 feet in length. A Manning's 'n' value
of 0.013 is assumed for the culvert. At both ends of the culvert are a vertical headwall and 45 degree
wing walls. According to Table 3.9 of this appendix, Scale 1 of FHWA Chart 1 is appropriate for this
type of culvert. According to Table 3.6 of this appendix, the entrance loss coefficient for this type of
entrance is about 0.5, assuming that the top edge of the entrance is not rounded.

l. __ ~¥.>
~EW
PLA" zrrs__._ J

]=-~,
~ ~ ~ 1~

DISTANCE (feet)
'* 1100 lt~

Figure 4.2
Pipe Culvert Example

IV-32
 A concrete apron extends about 5 feet past the end of the culvert. The roadway on either side of
the channel is not elevated. The drop in invert elevation is 0.1 foot through the culvert, so the slope of
the culvert invert is 0.2 percent.

Cross section 1 of the special culvert model is located downstream of the culvert crossing at a
distance determined by the 4: 1 flow expansion rule.

Cross section 2 is located at the downstream end of the culvert. The n-value is changed at cross
section 2 because the concrete apron extends past the downstream end of the culvert. The effective
area option is used at cross section 2 to restrict flow to the portion of the cross section in and directly
above the culvert opening until the roadway is overtopped. Both of the test elevations on the X3
record at cross section 2 are set at 32.9. These elevations are computed by subtracting the expected
head loss through the culvert (about 0.8 feet) from the top-of-road elevations for the left and right
sides of the road (each of which is 33.7).

The weir flow coefficient is set at 3.0. This is the recommended value for roadway embankments.
The fill over the culvert is assumed to be similar to a roadway embankment.

The downstream channel flow-line elevation is equal to 25 for this example. The upstream
flow-line elevation is 0.1 foot higher. These values are entered in Fields 9 and 10 of the SC record.

Cross section 3 is located at the upstream end of the culvert. The effective area option is also
used at cross section 3 to restrict flow to the portion of the cross section in and directly above the
culvert until the roadway is overtopped. The test elevations on the X3 record at cross section 3 are
set at the top-of-road elevations for the left and right sides of the road (each of which is 33.7).

Cross section 4 is located upstream of the culvert at a distance determined using the 1:1
contraction rule. An example output of the pipe culvert option is shown in Exhibit C of this appendix.

4.3 MUltiple Culverts Example

This example deals with a situation where the roadway crossing consists of two 72-inch
reinforced concrete pipe culverts. As illustrated on Figure 4.3, the culverts are 50 feet in length. A
Manning's 'n' value of 0.013 is assumed for the culverts. At each end of the culverts is a vertical
headwall and 45 degree wingwalls. According to Table 3.8 (page IV-21), Scale 1 of FHWA Chart 1 is
appropriate for this type of culvert. According to Table 3.5 (page IV-18), the entrance loss coefficient
for this type of entrance is about 0.5, assuming that the top edge of the entrance is not rounded.

~ ~-------~
~~ ~
~ 20 SECTION A-A
85() 900 m
DISTANCE (feet)

Figure 4.3
Illustration of Multiple Culverts Example

IV-33
 A concrete apron extends about 5 feet past the end of the culvert. The roadway on either side of
the channel is not elevated. The drop in invert elevation is 0.1 foot through the culvert, so the slope of
the culvert invert is 0.2 percent. Elevated roadway approach embankments extend into the floodplain
on each side of the bridge.

Cross section 1 of the special culvert model is located downstream of the culvert crossing at a
distance determined by the 4: 1 flow expansion rule.

Cross section 2 is located at the downstream end of the culvert. The n-value is changed at cross
section 2 because the concrete apron extends past the downstream end of the culvert. The effective
area option is used at cross section 2 to restrict flow to the portion of the cross section in and
directly above the culvert opening until the roadway is overtopped. Both of the test elevations on the
X3 record at cross section 2 are set at 32.5. These elevations are computed by subtracting the
expected head loss through the culvert (about 1.3 feet) from the top-of-road elevations for the left and
right sides of the road (each of which is 33.8).

The weir flow coefficient is set at 3.0. This is the recommended value for roadway embankments.
The fill over the culvert is assumed to be similar to a roadway embankment.

The downstream channel flow-line elevation is equal to 25 for this example. The upstream
flow-line elevation is 0.1 foot higher. These values are entered in Fields 9 and 10 of the SC record.

Cross section 3 is located at the upstream end of the culvert. The effective area option is also
used at cross section 3 to restrict flow to the portion of the cross section in and directly above the
culvert until the roadway is overtopped. The test elevations on the X3 record at cross section 3 are
set at the top-of-road elevations for the left and right sides of the road (each of which is 33.8).

Cross section 4 is located upstream of the culvert at a distance determined using the 1:1
contraction rule.

The results of a multi-profile HEC-2 run for this example may be found in Figure 4.6. Solutions for
culvert flow and combination culvert flow and weir flow conditions are determined by the HEC-2
program. An example output of multiple culverts is shown in Exhibit D of this appendix.

IV-34
 Chapter 5

References and Bibliography

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), Modern Sewer Design, Washington, D.C., 1980. This book is
an excellent reference on practical hydraulics.

Bonner, Vernon R., Computing Water Surface Profiles with HEC-2 on a Personal Computer, U.S. Army
Corps of Engineers, Hydrologic Engineering Center, Training Document 26.

Bradley, Joseph, Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways, Hydraulic Design Series No.1, Federal Highway
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, revised Second Edition, March 1978.

Brater, Ernest F. and Horace Williams King, Handbook of HydraUlics, McGraw-Hili, Inc., New York,
1976. This book is not a good place to start learning about hydraulics, but we keep coming back to it
for information not easily available elsewhere.

Bureau of Public Roads (BPR), Hydraulic Charts for the Selection of Highway Culverts, Hydraulic
Engineering Circular No.5, U.S. Department of Commerce, December 1965. The methods and charts
in this publication form the basis for much of the information in later FHWA publications.

Chow, Ven Te, Open Channel Hydraulics, McGraw-Hili, Inc., New York, 1959. This is the classic text
on flow in open channels.

Davis, Calvin Victor and Kenneth E. Sorensen, Editors, Handbook of Applied Hydraulics, McGraw-Hili,
Inc., New York, 1969. This is a handy reference for certain hydraulic information.

Eichert, Bill S. and John C. Peters, Computer Determination of Flow Through Bridges, Technical
Paper No. 20, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Hydrologic Engineering Center, 1970.

Eichert, Bill S. and John C. Peters, ·Computer Determination of Flow Through Bridges·, Journal of the
Hydraulics Division, ASCE, Vol. 96, No. HY 7, July 1970.

Featherstone, R. E. and C. Nalluri, Civil Engineering Hydraulics, Granada Publishing Limited, London,
1982. This book is fairly theoretical, but with many examples.

Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), Hydraulic Design of Improved Inlets for Culverts, Hydraulic
Engineering Circular No. 13, U.S. Department of Transportation, August 1972. The methods and
charts in this publication form the basis for some of the information presented in the FHWA's
"Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts" (FHWA 1985).

Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), Hydraulic Design of Energy Dissipators for Culverts and
Channels, Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 14, U.S. Department of Transportation, December 1975.

Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), Capacity Charts for the Hydraulic Design of Highway
Culverts, Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 10, U.S. Department of Transportation, March 1978. This
is a good reference on culvert hydraUlics and design. The capacity charts can be used to check the
results of the HEC-2 Special Culvert Option.

IV-35
Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts, Hydraulic Design
Series No.5, U.S. Department of Transportation, September 1985. This is an invaluable reference for
hydraulic engineers. If you design or analyze culverts, you need this book. The hydraulic charts in
this publication can be used to check the results of the HEC-2 Special Culvert Option.

French, Richard H., Open Channel Hydraulics, McGraw-Hili, Inc. New York, 1985. This is a
comprehensive, up-to-date text on open-channel flow.

Portland Cement Association, Handbook of Concrete Culvert Pipe Hydraulics, 1964.

Shearman, J.O., et ai, Bridge Waterways Analysis Model: Research Report, Report No.
FHWNRD-86/108, U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, July 1986.

Zelensky, Paul N., Approximate Method for Computing Backwater Profiles in Corrugated Metal Pipes,
Federal Highway Administration, Offices of Research & Development, Report No. FHWA-RD-76-42,
April 1976. This report presents an approximate method for backwater computations in structural
plate corrugated metal pipes with 6 x 2 inch corrugations.

IV-36
 Exhibit A

Federal Highway Administration

Culvert Charts
 180 10,000
CHART 1
o
-168 ·8,000 EXAMPLE (I) (2) (3)
r- 6
156 0-42 inch.. (3.. 5 , ..t) ... 6.
6,000
Q-120 cis
·144 . 5,000 ~5.
6. ~ 5.
4,000 .t!.!:* HW
132 0 , ••t
~4.
3,000 (I) 2 .. 5 8. 8
5. f- 4.
120 (2) 2.1 7.4 [
2,000 (3) 2.2 7..1 -F=-4 . - - f - - - J : - -
108 I- 3.
I- 3.
"0 in It.t

96 I- 3.
- 1,000
800
84
600
500
72 400
(/)
ILl
:J:
300 I- 1.5 ·1.5
o (/)
Z (/)
lJ..
a: I----..---F---~--­
60 o 200 ~ ~ 1.5
z ILl
I-
Z
o 54
~
oCt
o
100
Z
80

60
50
40 oHW SCALE
-·36 30 (I)

33
20 (2)

30
(3)

2'7
10

24 8

6 To use scale (2) or (3) praj.ct

5 horizontally to scale (I),then
21 use straight inclined line through
4 o and 0 scal.l, or rlv.r.1 01 I- .6
illustrated . I- .6
3 ~.6
18

15
:- .5
L .5 L- .5
1.0

12 HEADWATER DEPTH FOR

HEADWATER SCALES 2 a3
CONCRETE PIPE CULVERTS
REVISED MAY 1964 WITH INLET CONTROL
BUREAU OF PUBLIC ROADS JAN 1963

A-1
CHART 2
o

BUREAU OF PUBLIC ROADS JAN .963

A-2
 CHART 3
o
180
168 ! ~
D ~ t ENTRANCE
TYPE
0.042 0.063 0.042 0083 A
156
0.083 0.125 0.042 0.125 8
144 A B

~36 ~30
132 BEVELLED RING
[3000 MINIMUM 300·

120
2000
3.0
108
0-
1000
96 ~ 20
800 :I:
20 ;;;
84 600 n:
ILl
500 t-
ILl
400 :=; 15
72 <l:
300 15 0
(/)
ILl
:x: ...z z
0 200 ::;
z -60 :x:
t-
z '"
z
Z
a.
ILl
(/) a: o
0 54 IJ.. ....::>
0 100 n:
t- ILl
n: Z t-
ILl 48 80 <l: 10
~ (3 10 ~
:::> 60
0 <l:
ILl ILl
IJ..
42 C) 50 :x:
n:

---- ---
9
0
n:
<l:
:x:
40 ~--
ILl 0
t- 36 (/) 30
ILl
:=;
<l:
0
33
0

--
0
8
-8

----
30
.7
27 10 7
8
24
6
5
21 6 6
4
3
18
2 52
52

15
10

HEADWATER DEPTH FOR

12
CIRCULAR PIPE CULVERTS
IERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION
WITH BEVELED RING
MAY 1973
I NLET CONTROL

A-3
CHART 8
D
12

II (I) (2) (3)

C' f:-ff
500
EXAMPLE
10 5'.2' Box 0' 75 cfs
400
O/B ' 15 cf5/ft

·9 HW HW
300 In let
0 feet
1-5 1-6
(I) L75 35 ~5
8 (2) 1,90 3B ~4 1-5
200
~4
(3) 2,05 4, I -- I=-----
1-4
7 1-3
~3
~3
~
o 100
6 o
lL.
80 .E2. '=-2 --

5
0:
w
0..
en
lL.
60
50
~
~.
~
X
-- 1-2
-~
1-. 2

<.)
C9
I- L5
~ - ~ L5
w Z - 40 w
X ~ 1.5
W F--.
lL. lL.
Z 4 0
en
e :;:
0:
x W
~ LO
o ~
al
lL.
z _.
o 1-9 ~ LO 1-1.0
~
x
3 AnQI.Of~
Win9woll
X
~
Cl..
I- .. 9 1--9
C9
10 Flare ~ w I- ,8
W 0
X 0:
8 w
I- I- .8 ~ .8
<[ F,,7
lL.
6 ~
o 0
5 <[
~7 1-,7
o HW SCALE WINGWALL w
I- 4 o FLARE XI- 6
<[
0: (I) 30" to 75"
3 (2) I- .6 1=,6
(3) O· (extensions I- .5
of sides)
2
~.5 1-5
To use scale (2) or (3) project
horizontally to Icole (I) I then
use stroic~ht inclined line throu9h 1-,4
o and Q Icoles I Of revene as
Illustrated"

.8 1-,4 ~ 4

.6
,,35 35
.5 L ,,30
HEADWATER DEPTH
FOR BOX CULVERTS
WITH INLET CONTROL
BUREAU OF PUBLIC ROADS JAN 1963

A-4
 CHART 9
[J
(I) (2) 40

12 4.0
400
3.. 0
II
300 3.0
SCALE ENTRANCE TYPE 2.. 5
EXAMPLE
10
5'x5'BOX Qz250CFS II) 45" WINGWALL FLAIR I-'
200 WITH d = .. 0430 I.l..
a: 2 .0
9 (2) IS" TO 33.7" WINGWALL w
0.
FLAI R WITH d =.OS3 0 20
INLET
HW 10 (F~~T) t
I.. S

I.S
(I) 1.41 7.1 :!!: 16
'S (2) 1.33 6.7 I-
0
....
o 1.6
o
I.l..
100 ~
:l: 14

.-- ------
a: 1..4-·"---~-·-­

7 W :l:
a..
I/)
I.l..
o
---- "
i ii
:l:

IS
·12
1..2
I/)
Z ~

I-
W
6
......... -.
.--
In
---- 40
\I
a:
~
:!!:
\I

10
W
I.l.. 55
v;, ----
E.~~::o- z
.... w
.__.__ 0 o
10
Z

o 5
-----...- :l:
I-
30
~
....
e: 9
o 9 III

~
~
x ::;)
o 45 o 20 TOP E DG E o S
m I- SEVEL ANGLE w
I.l.. W REQUIRED S i=
o ~
"a: 15 d/DANGLE
l- 4 « 0.042 45"
:l:
....
7
I :l:
0.OS3 IS"-337" 0.
o .7
"
W
I/)

o FACE~45" OR 337"
III
o
a:
I 10
III
35 I.l..
o 9 TOP BEVEL d .... .6
«
'S HEIGHT 0 IN FEET ~
o o

D~L.
I- 7 «
« 12 MIN . , ", , '.,
III
a: 6
:l:

BEVEL d
5
BEVEL ANGLE
;)..•...•.. . t.,' .
..5
4 LONGITUDINAL SECTION

25
3

[ .4
4

III (2)
2

HEADWATER DEPTH FOR INLET CONTROL

RECTANGULAR BOX QJLVERTS
FLARED W1NGWALLS 18 0 TO 33.7 0 a 45 0
WITH BEVELED EDGE AT lOP OF INLET

A-5
CHART 10
D
EXAMPLE
B - 7 FT 0-5 FT 0'500 CFS CINB ·71 5 INLET FACE-ALL EDGES:
HW HW IIN/FT BEVELS 337'0:15) . _ ~
ALL EDGES 0- f•• f V2 IN/FT BEvELS 45- (I: II _____
CHAMFER 3/4' 231 II 5 3/4 INCH CHAMFERS
112 !"'.IFT BEvEL 2.09 !0.4
8
,9
12 I IN/H BEvEL 18B 94 '-10 -7
600 -9 -8
·7 ,6
II !lOO -8
-7 -6 f-5
10 400
6 5 ~4

9
b 300 -5
~ -4

8 w-- 200
-4 f-3
n.
3
'"<.>
.... 150 -0 -3
7 z ~
t-
w iii e; f----2

6
w
....
Z
z
g 100
90 E~"'t"P~---
1--
-J:
-- 2
80 __ --:::.:-- ~ -2
w
""TO J:
60 ....
0
f---- 15
-15
50
'":lii
Q:
-1.5
40 w
I-

30 -J:
Z

-4 .....
n.
w
20 a f-I.O
f----IO
Q: -10
[NOTES ON !lEY£LSI W
15 l- f- 09
FACE DIMENSION OF ALL
SIDE AND TOP BEVELS
« 09
SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN
3: - 09
a
3 SHOW"t. TO OBTAIN BEvEL «
w f- 08
TERMINATION IN ONE PLANE 10
IN A RECTANGULAR BOX. J: -08
EITHER INCREASE. OR .,OR 9 - 0.8
DECREASE THE BEVEL ANGLE 8
7 " f-07
r- 07
·6
5 ] - 07

f-O.6 r- 06
4
06

um Hei...ht
aeve' - 05
'---05
( - 05
FACE DIMENSIONS bAND d OF
2
BEvELS ARE EACH RELATED TO
THE OPEN ING DIMENSION AT
RIGHT ANGLES TO THE EDGE

HEADWATER DEPTH FOR INLET CONTROL

RECTANGULAR BOX CULVERTS
90° HEADWALL
FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION
MAY 1973
CHAMFERED OR BEVELED INLET EDGES

A-6
 CHART 11
[J

EXAMPLE
8~7FT. 0-5FT. Qll500CFS
BEvELED EDGES-TOP AND SIOES~
EDGE a SKEW HW HW 3/4 INCH CHAMFER AU EDGES - , ~ \
3/4- CHAMFER ---0 f ..'
SKEW ANGLE --=-45- 30- 15- 1~45·7
12
",5~ 2.5i i25 600
30" 243 12 I
15- 2.36 II e 500 6
II VARIED BEVEL 400
10· TO 45· 2.07 103
·10
300
9

7 I- 2
W
W
U- 2 ·2
2
Z
6
o 15
15 15 15

...J
w
0::
40 '"ffi -J..--'+..---h---J..-
~

0::
I-
~ 30
z
U-
0 10
~- 20 10 10
8U- 10 0.9
15 09
0:: 0::
09 09
W W
a.. I- 0.8
w
C>
10 ~
o 08 0.8 08
0::
9
8 <t 0.7
<t W
:I: 7 :I:
u 0.7 07
07
'"Ci 6
5 06
4 06 06
0.6
TOP EDGE
2 3 05
OBTUSE AHGLE SIDE 0.5
BEVEL NOT NECESSARY FOR SKEW 30" AND MORE 05 05

4~\\ ~"""" BEvELED EDGES

AS DETAILED
IN T \ '~I SKEW

_.~g:1·· ~~'.
ANGLE 8Emb
10" 3JIO·,8(lt)
I~" I-.e
22·",,2- I-LAt·...

~~~
SKEWED HEADWALL INLET 30" 1-1/2-. a
~ 37·112- 2·x II
S_/ V.....bIe b", 90" 4~" 2-V2-. B
Tab"
SKEW LESS THAN 30" SKEW 30" AND MORE
ACUTE ANGLE SIDE
BEVELED INLETEDGES HEADWATER DEPTH FOR INLET CONTROL
DESIGNED FOR SAME CAPACITY AT ANY SKEW
SINGLE BARREL BOX CULVERTS
FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION SKEWED HEADWALLS
MAY 1973 CHAMFERED OR BEVELED INLET EDGES

A-7
CHART12 D
EXAMPLE
B= 7FT 0= 5 FT. Q= 500 CFS 30° SKEW
-i = 715 NORMAL INLET~
WINGWALL FLARE-45° 184°
\
184°
INLET aww HW HW

~~6 ~~6
NORMAL 0 FT.
45°WW
18..4 °WW
12 SKEWED 15~45"
2.18
2.27
0.9
114 F ~OO
500
E!
18AOR MORE 5 5
II 400 5
WW 2.20 110
0 300 4

9
200 3
8 S 150
i!!:
iii
......
7
~ 100
90 E.'A.t>-""'~ ---
___ .;:;.:.--
...
0
2
2
....W ....0
:J:
-80....-- U)

...w 6 70 :I:
z
__
__
___
---~wa:: ....
-l 60 a::
~
15 15
15
50
i!!:
e 5 a:: 0
«0 40 :J:
-l
w m ... ....Q.
a:: !!sa:: 30 W
a:: w 0
« 4 t;Q.
a::
m
...0 ...0 20
w
....
«
10 1.0 10

a::
w ~ 0.9 0.9 0.9
....
:J:
Q. 15 0
W «
(!)
(!)
w
W 3 :J: 08 08 08
a:: 10
:J: « 9
:J: 8
() NOTE:
U) 7 0.7 -07 07
HEADWATER SCALE FOR SKEWED
0 6 INLETS IS CONSTRUCTED FOR 30°
5 SKEW AND 3:1 WINGWALL FLARE
(16.4°) 0.6
4 ALSO A GOOD APPROXIMATION 0.6 0.6
FOR ANY SKEW ANGLE FROM 15°
TO 45° AND FOR GREATER FLARE
3 ANGLES OF WINGWALLS

0.5 0.5 0.5

2

HEADWATER DEPTH FOR INLET CONTROL

NORMAL
RECTANGULAR BOX CULVERTS
WING WALL INLETS
FLARED WINGWALLS
BUREAU OF PUBLIC ROADS
a
OFFICE OF R 0 AUG UST 1966
NORMAL AND SKEWED IN LETS
3/4" CHAMFER AT lOP OF OPENING

A-8
 CHART 13
D
EXAMPLE
B=7FT D=5FT Q=600CFS 184°wwa d = 0.083D \ \
.Q.=7L5 33.7 0 wwa d = 0083D
B .
WINGWALL TOP EDGE HW HW 450WW8d=0042Dl 6:
FLARE ANGLE BEVEL 0 IT
12
45 0 112 IN.lFT 206 10.3
.--600
500
TOP EDGE
;...6 ~5
-
BEVEL ANGLE 1-5 4
II 337 0 I IN 1FT I 90 9.5 REQUIRED
184° IIN/FT 182 9.0
400 -4
10
300 ...!!.... ....c:s ·4
:3
9
b 0.042 ~ ~3
f? 0.083 I
1-3
0: 200 l-
W
8 0- I
U) 150 2
lA- iii
--::: t2- .--
-2
7 ~ o I
W
lA- ~ 100 c'j./l.¢E.------ lA-
~ 90 .!'-- o
89----
o
.----_
J 0
70
U)
:::E -15
15
60 0: H5
__ ---- i
~-:;- G:l ·50
z
w 0: 40
0: 0:
0: <
< CD 30 0-
w
CD
4 lA-
o
o 0: 10
W 10 '0
l- I-
I
C)
<
0: 15 ~ 09 0.9 0.9
w W o
3 I
0- <
W
W 10 I -0.8 0.8 08
~ ·9
< 8 WINGWALLS
Z; 7 FLARE ANGLE MIN. OFFSET
rI 45° 314'x B (FT) e-07 0.7 07
U) 6
o 5 1:1.5 33.7° I"x B
* I. 2 26.. 6 0 1-1/4"x B
4 '·3 18Ao 1·-1/2"x B 06 0.6
e-06
2
3 -It USE 33.JOx O.o083DTOP
EDGE BEVEL AND READ
HW ON SCALE FOR 184° 05
ww 0.5 0.5
LONGiTUDINAL SECTION
EQUAL
FLARE-z-
ANGLES

HEADWATER DEPTH FOR INLET CONTROL

PLAN
RECTANGULAR BOX CULVERTS
BUREAU OF PUBLIC ROADS OFFSET FLARED WINGWALLS
OFFICE OF R8 D AUGUST 196B
AND BEVELED EDGE AT TOP OF INLET

A-9
 Exhibit B

Box Culvert Example

Computer Run
********************************************
• HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS •
• HYVROLOGIC ENGINEERING CENTER •
: Ver'sion 4,,6,,0; Febr'uar'y 1991 • 609 SECOND STREET, SUITE 0 •
• DAVIS, CALIFORNIA 95616-4667 •
• RUN DATE 06FEB91 TIME 13:50:28' • (916) 756-1104 •
******************************************** ***************************************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX

06FEB91 13:50:26 PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 13:50:28

HEC- 2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

T1 SINGLE BOX CULVERT EXAMPLE - with 10 x 6 foot box

T3 SIMPLE CREEK Profile 1

J1 ICHECK IOO NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HYINS Q WSEL FQ

2 .. 00015 30.0

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

-1

USE J3 RECORDS TO REQUEST CUSTOM SUMMARY TABLE

AND REGULAR SPECIAL CULVERT SUMMARY TABLES 101 ANO 105

J3 VARIABLE CODES FOR SUMMARY PRINTOUT

36 66 42 2 43 26 4 58
101 105

USE NC RECORO TO SET RIVER LOSS COEFFICIENTS

NC 0.1 0.1 0.04 0.1 0.3

QT 3 150 300 400

CROSS.. SECTION 1 OF SPECIAL CULVERT MODEL DOWNSTREAM OF CULVERT

X1 1 10 975 1042
GR 37 . 1 865 36.6 903 35 939 337 975 24.9 1000
GR 24.9 1011 34.1 1042 35 .. 7 1074 357 1106 36.7 1145

USE NC RECORD TO SET EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION COEFFICIENTS FOR CULVERT

NC 0.3 05

CROSS-SECTION 2 OF SPECIAL CULVERT MODEL AT DOWNSTREAM CULVERT FACE

LEFT AND RIGHT BANKS REDEFINED TO LIMIT FLOW TO WIDTH OF CULVERT
NH 3 0.1 975 0.04 1042 0.1 1135
X1 2 10 1003 1013 100 100 100
USE X3 RECORD TO RESTRICT EFFECTIVE FLOW AREA TO CULVERT WIDTH
X3 10 32.5 32.5
GR 36.9 665 34.9 936 33.5 975 25 .. 2 1003 25 1003
GR 25 1013 25.3 1013 33 . 7 1042 35.6 1085 36.3 1135

SC RECORD DEFINES A SINGLE 10X6 CONCRETE 90X CULVERT

06FEB91 13:50:26
-- PAGE 2

SC .013 0 .. 4 3.0 6.0 10.0 50 6.1 25 24 . 9

CROSS-SECTION 3 OF SPECIAL CULVERT MODEL AT UPSTREAM CULVERT FACE

USE NH FOR N-VALUES AT CROSS .. SECTION 3 BECAUSE OF CONCRETE APRON
NH 3 0.1 975 0.04 1042 0.1 1135
X1 3 10 1003 1013 50 50 50
X2 2 333
X3 10 33.3 33 3
BT ··8 685 36.9 93$ 34 . 9 975 33 .5
BT 1003 33.3 1013 33 . 3 1042 33 7
BT 1085 35.6 1131; 38.3
GR 36.9 685 34.9 938 33 . 1; 975 25 . 2 1003 25.1 1003
GR 25.1 1013 25.3 1013 337 1042 35 . 8 1065 38.3 1135

NC 0 .1 o1 0.04

CROSS-SECTION 4 OF SPECIAL CULVERT MODEL UPSTREAM OF CULVERT

X1 4 10 975 1042 21; 25 25
GR 37.1 665 36.6 903 31; 939 33 . 7 975 25 .1 1000
GR 25 .. 1 1011 34 .. 1 1042 357 1074 372 1106 38 .7 1145

B-1
 06FEB91 13:50:28
-- PAGE 3

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IDC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF 1

CCHV= .100 CEHV= ,,300

'SECNO 1.000
1.000 5.40 30.30 ,,00 30,00 30.31 ,02 ,,00 ,00 33,70
150.0 .0 150.0 .0 .0 149.9 .0 .0 .0 34,,10
.00 ,00 1,00 ,00 ,,000 ,040 ,,000 ,000 24 90 984,,66
,,000151 0" 0" 0, 0 0 4 ,,00 44,,53 1029" 19

CCHV= .300 CEHV= ,500

1490 NH CARD USED
'SECNO 2,000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO .47

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 32,,50 ELREA= 32,,50

2.000 527 30.27 ,00 ,,00 30.40 " 13 ,,03 ,06 25 20

150.0 .0 150.0 .0 .0 52.7 .0 .2 .1 25,,30
.01 .00 2.85 .00 ,000 040 ,000 ,000 25,00 1003,,00
,000682 100" 100" 100, 2 0 0 ,00 10,,00 1013,00

SPECIAL CULVERT

SC CUNO CUNV ENTLC COFQ ROLEN RISE SPAN CULVLN CHRT SCL ELCHU ELCHO
1 ,013 .40 3,00 ,,00 6,,00 10,00 50,,00 8 1 25,00 24,,90

CHART 8 BOX CULVERT WITH FLARED WINGWALLS; NO INLET TOP EOGE BEVEL
SCALE 1 WINGWALLS FLARED 30 TO 75 DEGREES

1490 NH CARD USED

'SECNO 3,,000

SPECIAL CULVERT OUTLET CONTROL

EGIC = 28,021 EGOC = 30.452 PCWSE= 30272 ELTRD= 33,300

SPECIAL CULVERT

EGIC EGDC H4 QWEIR QCULV VCH ACULV ELTRD WEIRLN

2802 30.45 ,05 0" 150, 2,871 60,0 33,30 0,

06FEB91 13:50:28
-- PAGE 4

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL. XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IDC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON··EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 33,,30 ELREA= 33,.30

3.000 5,,22 30.32 ,,00 ,00 30.45 ,13 ,05 00 25,,20

150.0 .0 150.0 .0 .0 52.2 .0 .3 .1 25,,30
.01 .00 2.87 .00 ,,000 ,,040 .000 .000 25.10 1003,,00
,000686 50. 50" 50. 2 0 0 ,00 10.00 1013,,00

'SECNO 4" 000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 2,,14

4.000 538 30.48 ,00 ,00 30.49 .02 .01 .03 33.70
150.0 .0 150.0 .0 .0 151.0 .0 .4 .1 34,,10
.02 .00 .99 .00 .000 ,040 .000 .000 25,10 984,,37
,000150 25" 25, 25, 2 0 0 ,,00 45,,15 1029.52

06FEB91 13:50:28
-- PAGE 5

T1 SINGLE BOX CULVERT EXAMPLE - Profile 2

J1 ICHECK IOO NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

3 ,00015 32,,0

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

2 -1

B-2
 -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

06FEB91 13:50:28 PAGE 6

SECNO DEPTH CWSEl CRIWS WSElK EG HV Hl OlOSS l-BANK ElEV

a alOB OCH aROB AlOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ElEV
TIME VlOB VCH VROB XNl XNCH XNR WTN ElMIN SSTA
SLOPE XlOBl XlCH XlOBR ITRIAl IDe ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

*PROF 2
CCHV= .100 CEHV= 300
'SECNO 1.000
1.000 7,,40 32.30 ,,00 32,00 32.32 . 02 . 00 ,00 33,,70
300.0 .0 300.0 .0 .0 251.2 .0 .0 .0 34,10
.00 ,00 1..19 ,00 . 000 . 040 . 000 ,000 24,90 978,99
,000151 0, 0, 0, 0 0 4 ,00 56,93 1035,92

CCHV= .300 CEHV= . 500

1490 NH CARD USED
'SECNO 2 .. 000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = ,,40

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, EllEA= 32,50 ElREA= 32,50

2.000 7,20 32.20 ,,00 .00 32.47 . 27 . 03 12 25,20

300.0 .0 300.0 .0 .0 72.0 .0 .4 .1 25,30
.01 .00 4.17 .00 . 000 ,040 . 000 ,000 25,00 1003,00
000964 100" 100 . 100" 2 0 0 ,,00 10,00 1013,00

SPECIAL CULVERT

SC CUNO CUNV ENTlC COFQ ROLEN RISE SPAN CUlVlN CHRT SCl ElCHU ELCHO
1 . 013 ,,40 3,00 ,00 6,00 10,00 50,00 8 1 25 . 00 24 . 90

CHART 8 BOX CULVERT WITH FLARED WINGWAllS; NO INLET TOP EDGE BEVEL
SCALE 1 WINGWAllS FLARED 30 TO 75 DEGREES

1490 NH CARD USED

'SECNO 3 . 000

SPECIAL CULVERT OUTLET CONTROL

EGIC = 29,665 EGOC = 32,787 PCWSE= 32,203 ElTRD= 33,300

SPECIAL CULVERT

EGIC EGOC H4 QWEIR aCUlV VCH ACUlV ElTRD WEIRlN

29,86 32,79 ,32 0 300 4,,035 60,,0 33,,30 0,

06FEB91 13:50:28
--- PAGE 7

SECNO DEPTH CWSEl CRIWS WSElK EG HV Hl OlOSS l-BANK ElEV

a alOB OCH aROB AlOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ElEV
TIME VlOB VCH VROB XNl XNCH XNR WTN ElMIN SSTA
SLOPE XlOBl XlCH XlOBR ITRIAl IDe ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, EllEA= 33,,30 ElREA= 33,,30

3.000 7,43 32.53 ,00 ,00 32.79 ,25 ,32 . 00 25 . 20

300.0 .0 300.0 .0 .0 74.4 .0 .5 .1 25,30
.01 .00 4.03 .00 ,000 040 000 ,000 25,10 1003 . 00
,,000845 50" 50, 50, 2 0 0 00 10 .. 00 1013,,00

'SECNO 4000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 2 67

4.000 7 . 75 32.85 . 00 ,,00 32.86 02 01 ,07 33,70

300.0 .0 300.0 .0 .0 275.7 .0 .6 .1 34,10
.02 .00 1.09 .00 ,000 040 ,000 000 25.,10 977,,48
,000119 25, 25 25, 2 0 0 ,00 60,20 1037,,68

06FEB91 13:50:28
--- PAGE 8

T1 SINGLE BOX CULVERT EXAMPLE - P"ofile 3

J1 ICHECK INa NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS a WSEl Fa

4 ,00015 34,,0

J2 NPROF IPlOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN AllDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

3 -1

06FEB91 13:50:28 PAGE 9

SECNO DEPTH CWSEl CRIWS WSElK EG HV Hl OlOSS l-BANK ElEV

a alOB OCH aROB AlOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ElEV
TIME VlOB VCH VROB XNl XNCH XNR WTN ElMIN SSTA
SLOPE XlOBl XlCH XlOBR ITRIAl IDe ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

B-3
 'PROF 3

CCHV= .100 CEHV= ,,300

'SECNO 1.000
1.000 8,,42 33.32 ,00 3400 33.34 03 ,00 ,00 33,70
400.0 .0 400.0 .0 .0 312.5 .0 .0 .0 34,10
.00 ,,00 1,,28 ,00 ,,000 ,,040 ,,000 ,,000 24,,90 976,09
,000149 0, 4 ,00 63,,27 1039,36
0" 0"
° °
CCHV= .300 CEHV= ,,500
1490 NH CARD USED
'SECNO 2.000
2.000 8.33 33.33 .00 .00 33.36 .03 01 00 25.20
400.0 125.3 150.4 124.3 111.5 83.3 111.3 .7 .1 25,30
.02 1.12 1.81 1.12 .040 040 ,040 ,,000 25,00 975,57
,,000149 100, 100, 100., ,00 65,16 1040,,73
° ° °
SPECIAL CULVERT

SC CUNO CUNV ENTLC COFQ ROLEN RISE SPAN CULVLN CHRT SCL ELCHU ELCHO
1 ,013 .40 3.00 ,,00 6,00 10,00 50,,00 8 1 25,,00 24,,90

CHART 8 BOX CULVERT WITH FLARED WINGWALLS; NO INLET TOP EDGE BEVEL
SCALE 1 WINGWALLS FLARED 30 TO 75 DEGREES

1490 NH CARD USED

*SECNO 3.000
SPECIAL CULVERT

EGIC EGOC H4 OWEIR QCULV VCH ACULV ELTRD WEIRLN

3093 34,37 ,,62 87" 316. 1,585 60,,0 33,30 85,

3.000 8.85 33.95 .00 .00 33.98 .02 .62 ,00 25,20
400.0 131.1 140.3 128.5 131.6 88.5 129.8 1.1 .2 25,30
.03 1.00 1.59 .99 ,040 ,,040 ,,040 ,,000 25,,10 963,06
,000103 50, 50, 50, ,00 8410 1047,16
2
° °
'SECNO 4.000
4.000 8,,86 33.96 .00 ,00 33.98 ,,02 .00 ,00 33,,70
400.0 .0 400.0 .0 .9 346.3 .0 1.3 .3 3410
.04 .04 1.15 .00 ,100 ,040 ,000 000 25.,10 96794
25, 25, ,00 73.56 104150
000113 25
° ° °

06FEB91 13:50:28
-- PAGE 10

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 13:50:34

*************************************
HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Ver'sion 4.6.0; February 1991

*************************_.**********
NOTE- ASTERISK (*) AT LEFT OF CROSS-SECTION NUMBER INDICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST

SIMPLE CREEK

SUMMARY PRINTOUT

SECNO CUMDS ELMIN CWSEL CRIWS Q VCH TOPWID KRATIO

1,000 ,,00 24,,90 30,,30 ,,00 150,00 1,00 44,,53 ,,00
1,000 ,,00 24,,90 32,,30 ,00 300,00 1..19 56,,93 ,,00
1.,000 ,,00 24,.90 3332 ,00 400.,00 1,28 63,,27 ,,00

* 2.,000 100,,00 2500 3027 ,,00 150 .. 00 2.85 10.00 47

* 2,000 100,,00 2500 32,20 ,00 300.,00 4,,17 10,,00 .40
2,000 100,,00 25,00 33.33 00 400,00 1,,81 65,16 00

3 ,000 150,,00 25.10 30,32 ,00 150,00 2,,87 10,00 ,00

3 ,000 150,,00 25.,10 32.53 00 300,00 4,,03 10,,00 ,07
3 ,000 150,,00 2510 33.95 ,00 400,00 1,59 8410 .20
4.,000 175,00 25,10 30,,48 ,00 150 .00 ,,99 45,,15 2,14
4,000 175,00 25,,10 32.,85 00 300 ,00 ,,09 60,,20 2,67
4,000 175,00 25,10 33.,96 00 400 ,00 ,,15 73,,56 ,96

06FEB91 13:50:28
-- PAGE 11

SIMPLE CREEK

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 101

SECNO EGOC ELLC EGIC ELTRD QCULV OWEIR CLASS H4 DEPTH CWSEL VCH EG

3,000 30,45 ,,00 28,02 33 .30 150,00 ,,00 7 . 00 ,05 5.22 30,32 2 ,87 30,,45
3,000 32.,79 ,00 29.86 33,30 300.,00 ,00 7,00 .32 7,,43 32,53 4,03 32.,79
3,000 34.,37 ,00 30,,93 33.30 315 .. 60 87,,11 17,00 ,62 8,85 33,95 1,59 33.98

8-4
 06FEB91 13:50:28 PAGE 12

SIMPLE CREEK

SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 105

SECNO CWSEL HL OLOSS TOPWID OLOB QCH OROB

1.000 30 .. 30 .00 .00 44 . 53 .00 150.00 .00

1 .. 000 32 .. 30 .00 . 00 56 . 93 00 300 .. 00 .00
1 .. 000 33 . 32 . 00 .. 00 63.27 00 400 . 00 . 00

2 . 000 30.27 .03 . 06 10 .. 00 .00 150 .. 00 . 00

2 .. 000 32.20 .03 . 12 10 .. 00 .00 300 .. 00 .. 00
2.000 33 .. 33 .01 .00 65 . 16 125 .34 150.40 124.26

3 . 000 30 .. 32 .05 .00 10 .. 00 .00 150 . 00 . 00

3000 32 .. 53 .32 .00 10.00 .00 300 . 00 . 00
3 .. 000 33.95 62 00 84.10 131 .12 140 . 33 128 .. 54

4 .000 30.48 01 . 03 45 . 15 00 150 .. 00 .00

4 .000 32.85 .01 .. 07 60.20 00 300 .. 00 .00
4 .000 33 .. 96 .00 .00 73.56 . 04 399 .. 96 00

-QQQQQQQQQQQQQ

06FEB91 13:50:28 PAGE 13

SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES

WARNING SECNO= 2.000 PROFILE= 1 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIOE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 2.000 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 4 . 000 PROFILE= 1 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 4 . 000 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

B-5
 Exhibit C

Pipe Culvert Example

Computer Run
 * HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS
HYDROLOGIC ENGINEERING CENTER
: Ver'sion 4,6" 0; Febr'uar'y 1991 * 609 SECOND STREET, SUITE 0
* OAVIS, CALIFORNIA 95616-4687
RUN DATE D6FEB91 TIME 13:52:23 * * (916) 756-1104
******************************************** ***************************************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX

06FEB91 13:52:24 PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 13:52:24

HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Ver'sion 4.6.0; Febr'uar'y 1991

*************************************
T1 SINGLE PIPE CULVERT EXAMPLE - Seven foot pipe
T3 EASY CREEK Pr'ofile 1
Jl ICHECK INQ NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

2 ,00015 31.,0

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

·1

USE J3 RECORDS TO REQUEST CUSTOM SUMMARY TABLE

AND REGULAR SPECIAL CULVERT SUMMARY TABLES 101 AND 105

J3 VARIABLE CODES FOR SUMMARY PRINTOUT

38 66 42 2 43 26 4 58
101 105

USE NC RECORD TO SET RIVER LOSS COEFFICIENTS

NC 0,1 0.1 0.04 0.1 0,3

QT 3 200 260 400

CROSS-SECTION 1 OF SPECIAL CULVERT MODEL DOWNSTREAM OF CULVERT

Xl 1 10 975 1042
GR 37,1 865 36,6 903 35 939 33,,7 975 24,9 1000
GR 24,9 1011 341 1042 35,7 1074 357 1106 38,7 1145

USE NC RECORO TO SET EXPANSIDN AND CONTRACTION COEFFICIENTS FOR CULVERT

NC 0,3 0.5
CROSS· SECTION 2 OF SPECIAL CULVERT MODEL - AT DOWNSTREAM CULVERT FACE
LEFT AND RIGHT BANKS REDEFINEO TO LIMIT FLOW TO WIDTH OF CULVERT
NH 3 .1 975 .04 1042 .1 1145
Xl 2 12 1003 1010 100 100 100
USE X3 RECORD TO RESTRICT EFFECTIVE FLOW AREA TO CULVERT WIDTH
X3 10 32.2 32.2
GR 37.1 865 36.6 903 35 939 337 975 25 1000
GR 25 1003 25 1010 25 1011 341 1042 35,,7 1074
GR 37,,2 1106 38,,7 1145

SC RECORD DEFINES A SINGLE 84·INCH CONCRETE PIPE CULVERT

06FEB91 13:52:24 PAGE 2

SC ,013 0,,5 3,0 7,,0 50 1.1 25,1 25,0

NH 3 .1 975 .04 1042 ,,1 1145

CROSS-SECTION 3 AT UPSTREAM CULVERT FACE FLOW LIMITED TO CULVERT WIDTH
Xl 3 12 1003 1010 50 50 50
X2 2 33,,3
X3 10 33.3 33.3
BT -10 865 37,,1 903 36,,6 939 35
BT 975 33,,7 1003 33,7 1010 33,,7
BT 1042 34,1 1074 35.,7 1106 37,2
BT 1145 38,,7
GR 37,1 865 36.6 903 35 939 33,7 975 25,,1 1000
GR 25,,1 1003 25,,1 1010 25,1 1011 34,1 1042 35,,7 1074
GR 37,2 1106 38,,7 1145

NC 0 ,1 0,1 ,04

CROSS-SECTION 4 • A FULL-FLOW SECTION UPSTREAM FROM THE CULVERT

Xl 4 10 975 1042 25 25 25
GR 37,1 865 36,,6 903 35 939 33,7 975 25,1 1000
GR 25,,1 1011 34,,1 1042 35,7 1074 37,,2 1106 38,7 1145

C-1
 1CI1C11C1~~~1CI1C1~~~1CI_

06FEB91 13:52:24 PAGE 3

SECNO DEPTH CWSEl CRIWS WSElK EG HV Hl OlOSS l-BANK ElEV

Q QlOB QCH QROB AlOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ElEV
TIME VlOB VCH VROB XNl XNCH XNR WTN ElMIN SSTA
SLOPE XlOBl XlCH XlOBR ITRIAl IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF 1
CCHV= .100 CEHV= .300
'SECNO 1.000
1.000 6.16 31.06 .00 31.00 31.08 .02 .00 .00 3370
200.0 .0 200.0 .0 .0 185.5 .0 .0 .0 34.10
.00 .00 1.08 .00 .000 .040 .000 .000 24.90 982.51
.000151 O. O. 0 .. 0 0 3 00 49.24 1031,,75

CCHV= .300 CEHV= .500

1490 NH CARD USED
'SECNO 2.000
3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = ,,31

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, EllEA= 32" 20 ElREA= 32.20

2.000 5.92 30.92 .00 ,,00 31.28 36 .04 .17 25,,00

200.0 .0 200.0 .0 .0 41.5 .0 .3 .1 2500
.01 .00 4.83 .00 .000 .040 .000 .000 25.00 1003,,00
.001574 100" 100" 100. 2 0 0 .00 7.00 1010 . 00

SPECIAL CULVERT

SC CUNO CUNV ENTlC COFQ ROLEN RISE SPAN CUlVlN CHRT SCl ElCHU ELCHO
1 .013 ,,50 3,,00 ,,00 7.00 ,,00 50,,00 1 1 25,,10 25 . 00

CHART 1 CONCRETE PIPE CULVERT; NO BEVELED RING ENTRANCE

SCALE 1 SQUARE EDGE ENTRANCE WITH HEADWAll

1490 NH CARD USED

'SECNO 3.000
SPECIAL CULVERT OUTLET CONTROL
EGIC = 30 .. 515 EGQC = 31 746 PCWSE= 30 . 921 ElTRD= 33.700
SPECIAL CULVERT

EGIC EGQC H4 QWEIR QCUlV VCH ACUlV ElTRD WEIRlN

30.52 31.75 .46 O. 200 4 .. 513 38,,5 33.70 O.

_~lCI~~~~~~~~~~~~lf

06FEB91 13:52:24 PAGE 4

SECNO DEPTH CWSEl CRIWS WSElK EG HV Hl OlOSS l-BANK ElEV

Q QlOB QCH QROB AlOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ElEV
TIME VlOB VCH VROB XNl XNCH XNR WTN ElMIN SSTA
SLOPE XlOBl XlCH XlOBR ITRIAl IDC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON .. EFFECTIVE, EllEA= 3330 ElREA= 33.30
3.000 6 .. 33 31.43 .00 .00 31.75 .32 .46 00 25.10
200.0 .0 200.0 .0 .0 44.3 .0 .3 .1 25.10
.01 .00 4.51 .00 ,,000 .040 000 .000 25.10 1003.00
,,001260 50" 50. 50 2 0 0 .00 7.00 101000

'SECNO 4.000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 3 . 56

4.000 6.73 31.83 .00 .00 31.84 .01 .01 .09 33 . 70
200.0 .0 200.0 .0 .0 217.9 .0 .4 .1 34,,10
.02 .00 .92 .00 .000 040 .000 ,,000 25.10 980..44

--
.000099 25. 25. 25. 2 0 0 .00 53.74 103418

06FEB91 13:52:24 PAGE 5

T1 SINGLE PIPE CULVERT EXAMPLE - Profile 2

J1 ICHECK INQ NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEl FQ

3 .00015 32.5
J2 NPROF IPlOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN AllDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE
2 -1

C-2
 _00000000000

06FEB91 13:52:24 PAGE 6

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L··BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IQC ICONT CORAR TOPWIO ENDST

'PROF 2

CCHV= .100 CEHV= .,300

'SECNO 1.000
1.000 7,19 32.09 ,,00 32,,50 32.11 ,,02 ,00 ,,00 33,70
280.0 .0 280.0 .0 .0 239.7 .0 .0 .0 34,10
.00 ,00 1..17 ,00 ,000 ,,040 ,,000 ,000 24,90 979,57
.000149 0, 0" 0, 0 0 4 .00 55,,66 1035,23

CCHV= .300 CEHV= ,500

1490 NH CARD USED
'SECNO 2" 000

3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 28

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 32 .. 20 ELREA= 32,20

2.000 6,87 31.87 ,,00 .00 32.40 ,,53 04 ,25 2500

280.0 .0 280.0 .0 .0 48.1 .0 .3 .1 2500
.00 .00 5.82 .00 .000 040 000 .000 25,00 100300
,,001876 100" 100" 100" 2 0 0 ,,00 7,00 101000

SPECIAL CULVERT

SC CUNO CUNV ENTLC COFQ ROLEN RISE SPAN CULVLN CHRT SCL ELCHU ELCHO
1 .013 ,,50 3,,00 ,00 7,00 ,00 50.00 1 1 25,,10 25.00

CHART 1 " CONCRETE PIPE CULVERT; NO BEVELED RING ENTRANCE

SCALE 1 SQUARE EDGE ENTRANCE WITH HEADWALL

1490 NH CARD USED

'SECNO 3" 000

SPECIAL CULVERT OUTLET CONTROL

EGIC = 31,888 EGOC = 33,,204 PCWSE= 31875 ELTRD= 33,,700

06FEB91 13:52:24
-- PAGE 7

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

SPECIAL CULVERT

EGIC EGOC H4 QWEIR QCULV VCH ACULV ELTRD WEIRL.N

31.89 33.20 ,,80 0. 280 5,205 38,,5 33.70 0"

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, EL.LEA= 33" 30 ELREA= 33,30

3.000 7.68 32.78 ,,00 ,00 33.20 ,,42 ,80 ,,00 25,10
280.0 .0 280.0 .0 .0 53.8 .0 .4 .1 25,10
.01 .00 5.20 .00 ,,000 ,040 ,,000 .000 25,,10 1003,00
,,001294 50. 50. 50" 2 0 0 00 7,,00 1010,00

'SECNO 4" 000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 4,05

4.000 8,,22 33.32 00 ,,00 33.33 .01 ,01 ,12 3370

280.0 .0 280.0 .0 .0 304.9 .0 .5 .1 34.10
.02 .00 .92 .00 ,000 ,,040 ,,000 000 25,10 97611
.000079 25" 25" 25 2 0 0 00 63 .. 20 103931

~OOOOOOO~

08FEB91 13:52:24 PAGE 8

T1 SINGLE PIPE CULVERT EXAMPLE - Pr'ofile 3

Jl ICHECK INC NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

4 ,00015 33,5

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN AL.L.OC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

3 -1

C-3
 06FEB91 13:52:24 PAGE 9

SECNO OEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENOST

"PROF 3
CCHV= .100 CEHV= ,,300
"SECNO 1.000
1.000 B .37 33.27 ,,00 33.50 33.30 ,,03 .00 ,,00 33,,70
400.0 .0 400.0 .0 .0 309.7 .0 .0 .0 34,,10
.00 ,,00 1,,29 ,,00 ,,000 .040 ,,000 ,,000 24.90 976.22
,,000153 0 .. O. O. 0 0 3 .00 62.99 1039.21

CCHV= .300 CEHV= 500

1490 NH CARO USED
"SECNO 2.000
2.000 8.28 33.28 .00 .00 33.31 .03 .01 .00 25,,00
400.0 152.1 104.2 143.7 123.5 58.0 125.3 .7 .1 25,,00
.02 1.23 1.80 1.15 040 ,,040 ,,040 ,,000 25,,00 976,,19
.000139 100. 100" 100. 0 0 0 ,,00 63.04 1039.23

SPECIAL CULVERT

SC CUNO CUNV ENTLC COFQ ROLEN RISE SPAN CULVLN CHRT SCL ELCHU ELCHO
1 .013 .50 3,,00 ,,00 7 .. 00 .00 50,,00 1 1 25.10 25,,00

CHART 1 CONCRETE PIPE CULVERT; NO BEVELED RING ENTRANCE

SCALE 1 SQUARE EDGE ENTRANCE WITH HEADWALL

1490 NH CARD USED

"SECNO 3.000
SPECIAL. CULVERT

EGIC EGOC H4 QWEIR QCULV VCH ACULV ELTRD WEIRLN

34.17 3600 1..17 133" 266" 1.430 38.5 33,,70 96"

3.000 9.36 34.46 .00 .00 34.48 .02 1.17 .00 25.10
400.0 156.8 93.8 149.4 163.2 65.6 161.8 1.1 .2 25,,10
.03 .96 1.43 .92 .040 040 ,,040 ,,000 25.10 953,,61
.000075 50" 50 50" 1 0 0 ,,00 95.83 1049,,45

"SECNO 4.000
4.000 9 .. 37 34.47 ,,00 .00 34.48 .02 .00 ,,00 33,,70
400.0 .6 399.4 .1 8.1 380.5 1.3 1.3 .3 34,,10
.04 .07 1.05 .04 .100 .040 .100 .000 25,,10 953.79
.000083 25" 25 25" 0 0 0 .00 95,,53 1049,,32

06FEB91 13:52:24
-- PAGE 10

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 13:52:30

*************************************
HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Ver'sion 4.6.0; February 1991

*****""*""""**""""""***""""""****""***""*""""*""***

NOTE- ASTERISK ("J AT LEFT OF CROSS-SECTION NUMBER INDICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST

EASY CREEK

SUMMARY PRINTOUT

SECNO CUUDS ELMIN CWSEL CRIWS Q VCH TOPWID KRATIO

.000 .. DO 24.90 31.06 ,,00 200.00 ,,08 49,,24 ,,00
.. 000 ,,00 24.90 32.09 .00 280.00 ,,17 55,,66 00
,,000 ,,00 24.90 33.27 00 400,,00 .29 62.99 00
2,,000 100,,00 25,,00 30 .. 92 ,,00 200,,00 4 .83 7.00 ,,31
2.000 100.00 25,,00 31.87 ,,00 280,,00 5 .82 7,,00 ,,28
2,,000 100,,00 25.00 33 .. 28 .00 400,,00 1 80 63,,04 ,,05
3,,000 150.00 25.10 31.43 00 200,,00 4.51 7.00 ,,12
3,,000 150.00 25 .. 10 32.78 ,,00 280,,00 5.20 7,,00 ,,20
3000 150.00 25.10 34.46 ,,00 40000 1,,43 95 . 83 .36
4 .000 175.00 25 .10 31 .. 83 00 200,,00 92 53,,74 3.56
4 .000 175.00 25 .10 33 .. 32 .00 280,,00 .92 6320 4.05
4 .000 175.00 25 .10 34 .. 47 .00 400,,00 05 95.53 .95

C-4
 06FEB91 13:52:24
-- PAGE 11

EASY CREEK
SUMUARY PRINTOUT TABLE 101

SEeNO EGOC ELLC EGIC ELTRD QCULV QWEIR CLASS H4 DEPTH CWSEL VCH EG

3 .. 000 31 .. 75 ,00 30,52 33,70 200,00 00 7,00 ,,46 6 . 33 31 ..43 4,51 31 . 75

3 .. 000 33 . 20 00 31,89 33 .. 70 280,00 ,00 7 .. 00 . 80 7 . 68 32 .. 78 5,20 33 . 20
3,000 36 . 00 00 34,17 33,,70 265,68 132,80 17 .. 00 ,17 9,,36 34,46 1,,43 34,,48

06FEB91 13:52:24 PAGE 12

EASY CREEK

SUMUARY PRINTOUT TABLE 105

SECNO CWSEL HL OLOSS TOPWIO OLOB QCH OROB

1,000 31,06 . 00 ,00 49,24 ,00 200,,00 .. 0O

1 . 000 32,09 .. 00 ,00 55 . 66 . 00 28000 ,00
1 . 000 33,,27 .. 00 .. 00 62,99 00 400 . 00 ,00

2,000 30,92 .. 04 .. 17 700 . 00 20000 ,00

2 . 000 31,87 .. 04 25 7,00 .. 00 280,00 ,00
2,000 33,28 ,01 .. 00 63 . 04 152 . 14 104,20 143 .. 66

3 . 000 31,,43 ..46 ,00 7 . 00 ,00 200,00 ,00

3 . 000 32 .. 78 .. 80 .. 00 7 . 00 ,00 280,00 ,00
3 .. 000 34,,46 1 17 ,00 95 . 83 156,79 93,82 149 ,39

4 ,000 31 .. 83 01 ,09 53,,74 ,00 200,00 .. 00

4 ,000 33,,32 01 .. 12 63 . 20 .. 00 280 .. 00 . 0O
4 ,000 34,,47 00 . 00 95,53 .. 58 399,36 . 06

-ggggggggg-

06FEB91 13:52:24 PAGE 13

SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES

WARNING SECNO= 2,,000 PROFILE= 1 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 2,,000 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 4 000 PROFILE= 1 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 4,000 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

C-5
 Exhibit 0

Multiple Culverts Example

Computer Run
 ******************************************** ***************************************
* HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES * U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS *
* HYOROLOGIC ENGINEERING CENTER
: Ver'sion 4,,6,,0; February 1991 : * 609 SECONO STRE ET. SUITE D
* DAVIS. CALIFORNIA 95616-4667
* RUN DATE 06FEB91 TIME 13:53:59 * * (916) 756-1104 *
******************************************** ***************************************

x X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

X X X X X X X
X X X X X
XXXXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 13:53:59

HEC-2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Version 4.6.0; Febr'uary 1991

*************************************

T1 MULTIPLE PIPE CULVERTS EXAMPLE Two six foot eulver'ts

T3 Sample Creek
J1 ICHECK INa NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HYINS Q WSEL FQ

2 ,,00015 30,,0

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

··1

USE J3 RECORDS TO REQUEST CUSTOM SUMMARY TABLE

AND REGULAR SPECIAL CULVERT SUMMARY TABLES 101 AND 105

J3 VARIABLE CODES FOR SUMMARY PRINTOUT

3B 66 42 2 43 26 4 58
101 105
USE NC RECORD TO SET REGULAR CHANNEL LOSS COEFFICIENTS

NC 0 .. 1 0.1 0.04 0.1 0.3

QT 3 250 400 500

CROSS-SECTION 1 OF SPECIAL CULVERT MODEL DOWNSTREAM OF CULVERTS

X1 1 8 972 1027
GR 36.1 856 32.7 917 30,,9 972 24,,8 986 24.8 1013
GR 31 1027 33,,2 1095 37,,2 1150

USE NC RECORD TO SET EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION COEFFICIENTS FOR CULVERTS

NC 0. 3 0.5

CROSS-SECTION 2 OF SPECIAL CULVERT MODEL AT DOWNSTREAM CULVERT FACE

LEFT AND RIGHT BANKS ARE REDEFINED TO LIMIT FLOW TO WIDTH OF CULVERT
NH 3 0.1 972 0.04 1027 0.1 1150
X1 2 10 993 1007 200 200 200
USE X3 RECORD TO RESTRICT EFFECTIVE FLOW TO CULVERT WIDTH (X3 1 10) =
X3 10 32.3 32.3
GR 36.1 856 32.7 917 30.9 972 25 986 25 993
GR 25 1007 25 1013 31 1027 33,,2 1095 37.2 1150

--
SC RECORD DEFINES DUAL 72· I NCH CONCRETE PIPE CULVERTS

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 2

SC 2 . 013 0,,5 30 6,,0 50 1. 1 251 25 . 0

CROSS-SECTION 3 AT UPSTREAM CULVERT FACE WITH EFFECTIVE FLOW OPTION

X2 . 3 =
2 INDICATES CULVERT OPTION· ROAD OVERFLOW AT 33 7 FEET
BT DATA DEFINE ROAD PROFILE FOR OVERFLOW CALCULATIONS.
NH 3 0.1 972 0.04 1027 0.1 1150
X1 3 10 993 1007 50 50 50
X2 2 33,,7
X3 10 33.7 33 . 7
BT -8 856 36,,1 917 34.8 972 33 . 9
BT 993 33,,8 1007 33 . 8 1027 33 . 7
BT 1095 35.7 1150 37.2
GR 36.1 856 32.7 917 30.9 972 251 986 25.1 993
GR 25.1 1007 25.1 1013 31 1027 33 . 2 1095 372 1150
CROSS· SECTION 4 IS A FULL FLOW SECTION UPSTREAM FROM CULVERT

NC 0,,1 0,,1 0.04

X1 4 8 972 1027 50 50 50
GR 36.1 856 32,,7 917 30.9 972 25.1 986 25.1 1013
GR 31 1027 33 . 2 1095 37.2 1150

0-1
 06FEB91 13:53:59
-- PAGE 3

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF 1

CCHV= .100 CEHV= ,300

'SECNO 1.000
1.000 5.49 30.29 . 00 30,00 30.31 ,02 .00 .,00 30,90
250.0 .0 250.0 .0 .0 217.0 .0 .0 .0 31,00
.00 ,00 1 ,15 . 00 000 . 040 ,000 ,000 24,80 973,39
,000152 0, 0., 0 .. 0 0 4 00 52.,01 1025,40

CCHV= •300 CEHV= 500

1490 NH CARD USED
'SECNO 2,000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE. KRATIO = 41

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 32,30 ELREA= 32.30

2.000 5,28 30.28 00 . 00 30.45 ,18 ,06 .08 2500

250.0 .0 250.0 .0 .0 73.9 .0 .7 .2 25.,00
.02 .00 3.38 .00 .,000 . 040 ,000 .,000 25,00 993 . 00
.000904 200, 200 . 200, 2 0 0 .00 14,00 1007.00

SPECIAL CULVERT

SC CUNO CUNV ENTLC COFQ ROLEN RISE SPAN CULVLN CHRT SCL ELCHU ELCHO
2 ,013 .,50 300 ,00 600 .,00 50.,00 1 1 2510 25 .. 00

CHART 1 CONCRETE PIPE CULVERT; NO BEVELED RING ENTRANCE

SCALE 1 SQUARE EDGE ENTRANCE WITH HEADWALL

1490 NH CARD USED

'SECNO 3,000

SPECIAL CULVERT OUTLET CONTROL

EGIC = 29.499 EGOC = 30,843 PCWSE= 30,275 ELTRD= 33700

SPECIAL CULVERT

EGIC EGOC H4 QWEIR QCULV VCH ACULV ELTRD WEIRLN

--
2950 30,84 .39 0, 250 . 3,197 56.,5 3370 0.,

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 4

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L-BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON··EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 33.,70 ELREA= 33.70

3.000 558 30.68 00 .00 30.84 .16 .39 .00 2510

250.0 .0 250.0 .0 .0 78.2 .0 .8 .2 25.10
.02 .00 3.20 .00 000 ,040 .000 ,000 25.10 993.00
.,000748 50, 50, 50, 2 0 0 ,00 14.00 1007.00

'SECNO 4,000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 2.47

4.000 5.,78 30.88 .00 00 30.90 .02 ,01 .04 30,90

250.0 .0 250.0 .0 .0 236.1 .0 .9 .2 31 .. 00
.03 .00 1.06 .00 . 000 .,040 .000 .,000 25.,10 972,05
,000122 50. 50, 50. 2 0 0 ,00 54 .. 67 1026.72

06FEB91 13:53:59
-- PAGE 5

T1 MULTIPLE PIPE CULVERTS EXAMPLE Pr'of ile two

J1 ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

3 .,00015 32.0

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLDC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

2 -1

D-2
 06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 6

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L,·BANK ELEV

Q QLDB OCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

'PROF 2

CCHV= .100 CEHV= ,,300

'SECNO 1.000
1.000 6.94 31.74 ,,00 32.00 31.77 .03 ,00 ,00 30,90
400.0 1.1 398.1 .8 10.9 295.8 8.6 .0 .0 31,,00
.00 ,,10 1,,35 ,,09 ,100 040 ,100 ,,000 24,80 946,,21
,000148 O. 0" 0, 0 0 4 ,00 103,78 1049,99

CCHV= .300 CEHV= ,,500

1490 NH CARD USED
'SECNO 2,,000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE. KRATIO = 37

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON-EFFECTIVE, ELLEA= 3230 ELREA= 32,,30

2.000 6,68 31.68 ,00 ,,00 31.96 ,,28 ,,06 ,,13 25,,00
400.0 .0 400.0 .0 .0 93.5 .0 .9 .3 2500
.01 .00 4.28 .00 ,,000 ,040 ,,000 ,,000 25,00 993,00
,001054 200, 200, 200, 2 0 0 ,00 14,00 100700

SPECIAL CULVERT

SC CUNO CUNV ENTLC COFQ ROLEN RISE SPAN CULVLN CHRT SCL ELCHU ELCHO
2 ,,013 ,50 3,00 ,00 6,,00 ,,00 50,00 1 1 2510 25,00

CHART 1 CONCRETE PIPE CULVERT; NO BEVELED RING ENTRANCE

SCALE 1 SQUARE EDGE ENTRANCE WITH HEADWALL

1490 NH CARD USED

'SECNO 3,,000

SPECIAL CULVERT OUTLET CONTROL

EGIC = 31,,125 EGOC = 32,,955 PCWSE= 31,,678 ELTRD= 33,700

SPECIAL CULVERT

EGIC EGOC H4 QWEIR QCULV VCH ACULV ELTRD WEIRLN

31,,12 3296 ,,99 0, 400 3,,740 56,,5 3370 0,

lIH:Il:llilliIOOl:Il:'l:":llill:'OOOOOOO

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 7

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L .. BANK ELEV

Q QLOB OCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R-BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XL.CH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC lCONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NON· EFFECTIVE , ELLEA= 33,70 ELREA= 33,70

3.000 764 32.74 00 ,,00 32.96 22 .99 ,,00 25,10

400.0 .0 400.0 .0 .0 106.9 .0 1.1 .3 25" 10
.02 .00 3.74 .00 ,000 040 ,000 ,000 25 10 993,00
,000674 50" 50, 50, 2 0 0 00 1400 1007,00

'SECNO 4" 000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO = 2,,99

4.000 7.91 33.01 .00 .00 33.02 .02 .01 ,,06 30,90
400.0 9.7 382.2 8.0 67.2 353.0 62.2 1.4 .4 31,,00
.03 .14 1.08 .13 ,100 ,040 .100 ,000 25" 10 911..50
000075 50, 50" 50 2 0 0 ,,00 177,,52 1089,,02

06FEB91 13:53:59
-- PAGE 8

T1 MULTIPLE PIPE CULVERTS EXAMPLE Pr'ofile thr'ee

Jl ICHECK 100 NINV IDIR STRT METRIC HVINS Q WSEL FQ

4 ,,00015 35,,0

J2 NPROF IPLOT PRFVS XSECV XSECH FN ALLOC IBW CHNIM ITRACE

3 ·1

D-3
 liHiHillilli.....lill(l......................

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 9

SECNO DEPTH CWSEL CRIWS WSELK EG HV HL OLOSS L·BANK ELEV

Q QLOB QCH QROB ALOB ACH AROB VOL TWA R·BANK ELEV
TIME VLOB VCH VROB XNL XNCH XNR WTN ELMIN SSTA
SLOPE XLOBL XLCH XLOBR ITRIAL IOC ICONT CORAR TOPWID ENDST

*PROF 3

CCHV= .100 CEHV= ,300

*SECNO 1.000
1.000 7.84 32.44 .00 35.00 32.48 .03 ,00 ,00 30 .. 90
500.0 5.6 489.7 4.7 36.4 334.3 32.2 .0 .0 31,00
.00 .,15 1,46 ,15 ,100 ,040 100 .,000 24 ,80 924,82
.000149 0, 0, 0, 0 0 4 ,00 146 81 1071,63

CCHV= .300 CEHV= ,500

1490 NH CARD USED
*SECNO 2.000
2.000 7.48 32.48 .00 .00 32.51 .03 .03 ,00 25,00
500.0 168.3 178.6 153.2 153.5 104.6 141.0 1.8 .7 25,00
.04 1.10 1.71 1.09 ,042 .,040 ,042 ,000 25,00 923 . 91
.,000144 200, 200, 200, 0 0 0 . 00 148,64 1072 . 55

SPECIAL CULVERT

SC CUNO CUNV ENTLC COFQ RDLEN RISE SPAN CULVLN CHRT SCL ELCHU ELCHD
2 ,013 ,50 3 . 00 ,00 600 ,00 50,00 1 1 25,10 25,00

CHART 1 CONCRETE PIPE CULVERT: NO BEVELED RING ENTRANCE

SCALE 1 SQUARE EDGE ENTRANCE WITH HEADWALL

1490 NH CARD USED

* SECNO 3,000

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE. KRATIO 160

SPECIAL CULVERT

EGIC EGOC H4 QWEIR QCULV VCH ACULV ELTRD WEIRLN

3234 34.,47 1.,65 43, 459, 1.,209 56.,5 33 . 70 87.,

3.000 9.05 34.15 .00 .00 34.16 .01 1.65 ,DO 2510
500.0 180.2 153.3 166.5 298.1 126.8 285.8 2.5 .9 25 . 10
.06 .60 1.21 .58 ,049 040 . 049 .,000 25,10 890 . 90
,000056 50, 50. 50 . 1 0 0 .,00 217 . 23 1108 . 13

*SECNO 4.000
4.000 9.05 34.15 .00 .00 34.17 .02 .00 .00 30.,90
500.0 27.9 445.8 26.2 148.5 416.1 146.0 3.3 1.1 31,00
.07 .19 1.07 .18 .100 ,040 ,100 ,000 25,10 890.91
.,000059 50, 50. 50 0 0 0 . 00 217,22 1108,12

06FEB91 13:53:59
-- PAGE 10

THIS RUN EXECUTED 06FEB91 13:54:05

*************************************
HEC··2 WATER SURFACE PROFILES

Ver'sion 4.6.0: February 1991

************-************************

NOTE· ASTERISK (*l AT LEFT OF CROSS·SECTION NUMBER INDICATES MESSAGE IN SUMMARY OF ERRORS LIST

Sample Creek
SUMMARY PRINTOUT

SECNO CUMDS ELMIN CWSEL CRIWS Q VCH TOPWID KRATIO

1.000 . 00 24,80 30,29 ,00 250,00 .,15 52,01 00
1.000 .00 24 . 80 31,74 ,00 400,00 .35 103,78 ,00
1,000 ,00 24 . 80 32.44 ,00 500,00 ,46 146,81 ,00

* 2 .. 000 200,00 25,00 30,,28 . DO 250.,00 3,38 14,00 ..41

* 2.,000 200,00 25.,00 31,68 . 00 400,00 428 14.,00 .,37
2 . 000 200,00 25.,00 32..48 .,00 500,00 1,71 148.,64 . 02
3.,000 250,00 25,10 30.,68 ,00 250,00 3,20 14.,00 ,10
3.,000 250,00 25,,10 32.,74 ,00 400,00 374 14.,00 ,25
3.,000 250,00 25,10 34.,15 ,00 500,00 1,21 217,23 ,60

4,000 300.,00 25.,10 30,88 ,00 250,00 06 54,67 2..47

4.,000 300.,00 2510 33,01 ,00 400 . 00 ,08 17752 2.,99
4,000 300.,00 25 . 10 34 . 15 00 500,00 .,07 217 . 22 97

D-4
 06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 11

Sample Creek
SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 101

SECNO EGOC ELLC EGiC ELTRD QCULV QWEiR CLASS H4 DEPTH CWSEL VCH Ell

3.000 30.84 00 29.50 33.70 250 .00 .00 7.00 . 39 5.58 30.68 3 .. 20 30.84
3 .. 000 32 . 96 00 31..12 33 . 70 400.00 .00 7 .. 00 . 99 7.64 32.74 3 .. 74 32 . 96
3 . 000 34 . 47 00 32.34 33 . 70 458.93 43 .. 14 17.00 65 9.05 34 .. 15 1.21 3416

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 12

Sample Cr'eek
SUMMARY PRINTOUT TABLE 105

SECNO CWSEL HL OLOSS TOPWID OLOB QCH OROB

1.000 30.29 .. 00 . 00 52.01 .00 250 .. 00 .. 00

1.000 31 .. 74 .. 00 .. 00 103 .. 78 1..11 398.09 .80
1.000 32.44 .00 .00 146.81 5 . 56 489 .. 74 4 .70

2 .. 000 3028 .06 . 08 14.00 . 00 250 . 00 .00

2 .. 000 31 .. 68 06 .13 14.00 .. 00 40000 . 00
2 .. 000 32.48 .03 00 148.64 168 .. 27 178 . 56 153 . 18

3.000 30.68 .39 . 00 14 . 00 .00 250 .. 00 . 00

3.000 32.74 .99 .00 14 .. 00 00 400.00 .. 00
3 .. 000 34 .15 .65 .00 217.23 180 25 153 .. 27 166.48

4 .000 30 .. 88 .01 . 04 54.67 .00 250.00 .00

4 .000 33.01 .01 . 06 177.52 9 .. 73 382 . 23 8.04
4 .000 34.15 . 00 . 00 217.22 27.95 445 . 81 26.24

_1iI1i11i11i11i11i11i11i11i1

06FEB91 13:53:59 PAGE 13

SUMMARY OF ERRORS AND SPECIAL NOTES

WARNING SECNO= 2 .. 000 PROFILE= 1 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 2 .. 000 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE
WARNING SECNO= 3 . 000 PROFILE= 3 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 4 . 000 PROFILE= 1 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

WARNING SECNO= 4.000 PROFILE= 2 CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE ACCEPTABLE RANGE

0-5
 Appendix V

Special Notes
 Appendix V

Special Notes

This appendix explains special notes which commonly appear as part of the normal output. The
special notes should be carefully reviewed to assure an accurate profile. If the reason the notes
appear are not satisfactorily substantiated, the job may be rerun obtaining trace printout. (A source
listing is required to interpret program traces.)

Statement
Number Notes and Remarks

1221 NUMBER PROFILES TOO LARGE. The number of profiles calculated exceeds limit of
14.

1262 TAILWATER IS BELOW BRIDGE TRAPEZOID BOTTOM PROGRAM ABORTING AT

SECTION X. The water surface elevation at the downstream cross section is below the
trapezoid bottom specified on the SB record for this section. Remodel the invert of the
downstream cross section to raise the water surface elevation or modify the SB
trapezoid.

1340 RECORD NOT RECOGNIZED. First two columns in input record read did not
correspond to any of the standard alphanumeric characters used to identify records.

1362 XKOR INCREASED TO 1.2. The orifice coefficient was zero or minus and was therefore
changed to 1.2 since 1.0 is the minimum value. (SB.2)

1365 SB RECORD, BWP = O. On the special bridge method record SB, the pier width
omitted. If there are no piers, this is satisfactory. (SB.6)

1366 SB RECORD, BAREA = O. On the special bridge method record 5B, the area of the
bridge when flowing full is omitted and therefore this job has been terminated. (SB.7)

1400 CCHV = , CEHV -. A change in contraction and expansion losses has been made.
(NCA and NC.5)

1415 INQ EXCEEDS NUMQ. The field of the QT records to be used for the current Q,
specified by variable INQ, contained no flow data. (INQ,J1.2)

1445 Q EXCEEDS 19. The number of discharges on the QT record exceed the maximum
allowable number of 19.

1452 NV RECORDS EXCEED 4. The number of items specified on the NV record exceed the
allowable.

1455 NV RECORD USED. A table of Manning's 'n' values for the channel and
corresponding elevations was used.

V-1
Statement
Number Notes and Remarks

1481 EL(N) DON'T INCREASE. The elevations on the NV records must increase when the
channel roughness is varied with elevation and therefore, the job has been terminated.

1490 NH RECORD USED. Manning's 'n' value varied horizontally in accordance with
values on NH record.

1518 NH RECORD STATIONS NOT INCREASING. The stations on the NH record specifying
changes in Manning's roughness must increase and therefore, the job has been
terminated.

1525 NH VALUES EXCEED 20. Manning's roughness coefficient specified on the NH record
exceeded the allowable number.

1530 MANNINGS N VALUES FOR CHANNEL COMPOSITED. The criterion described in

Section 2.3 is used to determine whether a composite 'n' value should be computed.
This message indicates a composite value was computed, and the value is printed as
the channel 'n' (varibale XNCH). (See J6.3 for user control.)

1535 Q = O. The discharge was not specified on the QT or J1 records.

1537 START TRIB COMPo Since a negative section number was used, the profile is to be
computed on a tributary starting with the water surface elevation which was computed
for the same (positive) section number on the main stem.

1553 STARTING NC RECORD OMITTED. The starting values on the NC record were not
given. The roughness values assumed were very small (.00001).

1645 INT SEC ADDED BY RAISING SEC X, Y, FT AND MULTIPLYING BY Z. An intermediate

cross section was calculated by the computer and inserted between two cross sections
specified by input data.

1707 STCHL OF X, GREATER THAN Y. The station of the left bank is larger than the station
of the right bank. The value of STCHL is changed to equal the first station of the cross
section. (X1.3)

1740 CHIMP TEMPLATE DOES NOT INTERSECT CROSS SECTION, STMAX SET EQUAL TO
X. The projected side slopes of the template do not cross the GR data.

1807 BT RECORDS EXCEED 100 PTS. Number of points describing the bridge (BT record)
exceed allowable.

1857 BT RECORD, STA DON'T INCREASE. The roadway stations on the BT record should
increase. Data should be corrected.

1860 XLCEL OF X, EXCEEDS RDEL OF Y. The low chord elevation of X exceeds the
corresponding value of the top of roadway Y. Data should be corrected. (BT records)

1912 GR RECORDS, STATIONS DON'T INCREASE. The ground profile points do not
increase in horizontal station. The station must be equal to, or greater than the
previous station.

V-2
Statement
Number Notes and Remarks

2020 NUMBER EL, STA, PTS EXCEED 100. The number of points used to describe the
ground profile for the current cross section exceed the allowable. Additional GR points
may have been generated by encroachment options.

2077 GR RECORDS MISSING. The GR records for a given X1 record with NUMST greater
than zero were not given.

2096 WSEL NOT GIVEN, AVG OF MAX, MIN USED. The starting water surface elevation was
not given and therefore, has been assumed as halfway between the maximum and
minimum elevation in the cross section. (J1.9)

2620 NO IMPROVEMENT MADE TO THIS SECTION. The subroutine CHIMP has been
requested by the CI record and the excavation described will not cut the existing cross
section.

2725 WSEL EXCEEDS LIMITS OF TABLE FOR MANNING's 'n'. An assumed water surface
elevation fell outside the elevation limits which specified Manning's 'n' values on NV
record. Table values were extrapolated for 'n' values.

2750 NUMBER OF COMPUTED POINTS EXCEED 100. The number of points added by
subroutine CHIMP have caused the total to exceed one hundred. Reduce the number
of points on the GR record.

2800 NATURAL 01 = A, WSEL = B, EMC 01 = C, WSEL = D, RATIO = E. See explanation

in Section 11.1, Appendix II, page 11-6.

3073 NEGATIVE SLOPE, WSEL = , EG = , PCWSE = ,XEG = , WLEN = RESTART

COMPUTATIONS AT SECNO = , USING 'n' VALUES COMPUTED FOR SECNO =. A
negative slope of the energy gradient has been computed while trying to calculate
roughness values that will exactly duplicate the observed high water marks. Due to this
condition, the computations will start over again using the previous section's roughness
values.

3075 SET S = SAVE. The computed slope at this section was negative or zero. The slope
was set equal to the computed average slope between this and the previous section.

3170 NO ENCROACHMENT MORE THAN 800 XSEC. The number of cross sections for a
given data set exceeded the maximum allowable for encroachment analysis.

3235 SLOPE TOO STEEP, EXCEEDS X. The computed slope of the energy grade line
exceeded X, and critical depth has probably been crossed. If this cross section is a
bridge, the special bridge method should be used in lieu of the normal bridge.

3265 DIVIDED FLOW. The area below the computed water surface elevation is divided into
two or more segments by high ground. If this condition occurs for three or more cross
sections consecutively, then separate profiles should be run up each leg of the divided
flow as the water surface elevations are not necessarily identical at each cross section.

3280 CROSS SECTION EXTENDED X FEET (METERS). The cross section's ends have been
projected vertically 50 feet (meters) in order to calculate the hydraulic properties of the
cross section. Exactly X feet (meters) of this extension were used. If this vertical
assumption could produce unreasonable results, the input data should be corrected.

V-3
Statement
Number Notes and Remarks

3301 HV CHANGED MORE THAN HVINS. The difference between velocity heads computed
for the current and previous cross sections exceeded the allowable specified by input
as HVINS (or .5 feet if HVINS = 0, J1.7).

3302 WARNING: CONVEYANCE CHANGE OUTSIDE OF ACCEPTABLE RANGE, KRATIO =.

The ratio (KRATIO) of the conveyance of this cross section to the conveyance of the
previous section is outside the following range: 0.7< KRATIO < 1.4. This could indicate
that additional cross sections are required if the reach lengths are long.

3370 NORMAL BRIDGE, NRD = X, MIN ELTRD = Y, MAX ELLC = Z. The normal bridge
method was used for this cross section. The number of points used in describing the
bridge deck are given.

3377 BLOSS READ IN. The difference in water surface elevation between the previous and
current cross section was given by input data. (X2.6)

3420 BRIDGE W.S. = X, BRIDGE VELOCITY = Y. The water surface elevation under the
bridge is specified by X and the velocity through the bridge is Y.

3470 ENCROACHMENT STATIONS = ~X TYPE = Y TARGET = Z. The values of STENCL

and STENCR (left and right encroachment stations) are Wand X. The method used in
determining these stations is method Y and the specified target (width or percent) for
that method is Z. If the target is a percent, a ratio less than one is used instead of
percent so that a percent target can be distinguished from a top width target.

3495 OVERBANK AREA ASSUMED NONEFFECTIVE, XLBEL = X, RBEL = Y. The effective

area option (IEARA) was used and the computed water surface elevation was below at
least one of the bank elevations specified by X and Y and therefore, this flow area was
assumed noneffective. (X3.1)

3649 NUMBER SECTION EXCEED LIMIT. The number of cross sections for the given data
set exceeds limit of 800.

3685 20 TRIALS ATTEMPTED WSEL, CWSEL. The number of trials in balancing the
assumed and computed water surface elevations for the standard step procedure of
backwater has reached 20. Check the assumed water elevation for reasonableness.

3693 PROBABLE MINIMUM SPECIFIC ENERGY. This note is similar to 7185 except it is not
certain (only probable), that critical depth has been crossed. It is known that no depth
of flow assumed in any of the trials produced an energy grade line elevation as high as
the minimum energy at critical depth.

3700 BRIDGE STENCL = X, STENCR = Y. The bridge profile has been encroached upon,
the left and right encroachment stations are X and Y.

3710 WSEL ASSUMED BASED ON MIN DIFF. At the conclusion of 20 trials the assumed
water surface elevation will be made equal to the elevation that came the closest to
balancing. This condition usually occurs near the top of banks when the effective area
option is used (IEARA = 10). Check results for reasonableness.

V-4
Statement
Number Notes and Remarks

3720 ASSUMED CRITICAL DEPTH. Critical depth has been assumed for this cross section.
This assumption should be verified by inspection of channel properties. Additional
cross sections may need to be inserted in order to preserve the assumption of
gradually varying flow.

3790 DATA ERROR. JOB DUMPED. The computer detected an error in input and terminated
that particular job (profile), but continued on with the next job of the input data.

3800 PREVIOUS ST GREATER THAN CURRENT. Either an input error caused the stations of
the GR record to not increase or a programming error has been found.

3805 Q = O. The discharge was not specified for this job.

3810 HT IS -. The height (HT), determined by subtracting the ground elevation from the
assumed water surface elevation, has been found to be negative. Corrections for
bridge deck (ELTRD - ELLC) used in the normal bridge method will have caused this
note if any ELLC is greater than the corresponding ELTRD. If this is not the case a
program error has been found, and a trace may be required to determine the source of
the error.

3820 STA(N) GREATER STMAX. One of the stations of the points on the current ground
profile records (GR) was greater than the maximum station for this profile.

3830 AROB OR ALOB IS - A negative area in the left or right overbank has been computed.
A program error probably has been detected. A trace may be required to determine
the program error.

3840 SECTION NOT HIGH ENOUGH. The computed water surface elevation exceeds the
maximum specified on input records, therefore, the cross section ends have been
vertically raised 50 feet.

3965 REACH OF - NOT EQUAL TO SECNO OF -. The J4 record has been used to specify
routing reaches which must be equal to the section numbers (SECNO) on the first field
of the X1 record. The section numbers must also be in increasing order.

4020 80 TRIALS NOT ENOUGH FOR CRITICAL DEPTH. This note indicates a data error or
program error has been detected. If no data error is detected, job may be rerun, with
ITRACE equal to one, in order to obtain reason for failure of parabolic optimization
process.

4478 FLOATING ICE COVER, ICE THICKNESS LOB = X, CH = Y, ROB = Z. Computations

at this cross section include the hydraulic effects of a stationary floating ice cover. Ice
cover thickness in left overbank is X feet or meters, channel thickness is Y feet or
meters and right overbank thickness is Z feet or meters.

4575 CRITICAL DEPTH ASSUMED BELOW ELLC OF - EGLC = - EGC = - WSEL = -. Critical
depth is being computed in a bridge section and the minimum energy below the low
chord is less than the minimum energy above the top of the bridge.

V-5
Statement
Number Notes and Remarks

4677 BRIDGE DECK DEFINITION ERROR AT STATIONS X Y. The low chord or top of road
line, defined on the BT records for a normal bridge, has intersected the ground line as
defined on the GR records. The program will not account for the bridge deck blockage
between GR stations X and Y.

5020 SPECIAL BRIDGE. The input has specified that the bridge routine to be used for this
cross section is the special bridge method.

5070 VARIABLE ELCHU OR ELCHD ON RECORD SB NOT SPECIFIED. The elevations of the
channel upstream and downstream of the bridge are not specified on input fields and
have therefore, been assumed equal to the minimum elevation for the previous cross
section. (SB.9 and SB.1 0)

5105 VARIABLE ELCHU ON SC CARD NOT SPECIFIED. The upstream invert elevation of the
culvert is not specified in the input data (SC.9). ELCHU and ELCHD (SC.10) have been
assumed equal to the minimum elevation of the previous cross section.

5110 ELCHU LESS THAN ELCHD. In the special culvert option, the upstream invert elevation
is less than the downstream value (adverse slope). The profile analysis is aborted.

5115 SUPERCRITICAL FLOW--SPECIAL CULVERT OPTION NOT AVAILABLE. The profile is

aborted because the special culvert option is only available for subcritical flow. Change
IDIR (J1.4) to zero.

5120 INCORRECT VALUE FOR FHWA CHART NUMBER. An incorrect value of the FHWA
Chart Number (SC.8) is entered. The profile is aborted. Correct the chart number.

5125 INCORRECT VALUE FOR FHWA SCALE NUMBER. An incorrect value of the FHWA
Scale Number (SC.8) is entered for the specified chart number (SC.8). The profile is
aborted. Correct the chart or scale number.

5130 EGIC TOO LARGE; REDUCED TO XXXX. The energy gradient elevation (culvert inlet
control flow) computed while assuming there is no weir flow is very high. This value is
reduced to a more realistic value for the computation of weir flow.

5135 EGOC TOO LARGE; REDUCED TO XXXX' The energy gradient elevation (culvert outlet
control flow) computed while assuming there is no weir flow is very high. This value is
reduced to a more realistic value for the computation of weir flow.

5140 NORMAL DEPTH EXCEEDS CULVERT HEIGHT. The culvert normal depth exceeds the
culvert height. It is therefore assumed equal to the culvert height.

5145 30 TRIALS OF NORMAL DEPTH NOT ENOUGH; POSSIBLY INVALID. After 30 iterations,
the program cannot obtain a normal depth value within the predefined precision. The
normal depth is assumed equal to the value obtained at the last iteration.

5150 EG OF XXXX LESS THAN XEG OF XXXX' The upstream energy gradient elevation of the
culvert is less than the downstream value, indicating negative losses. The upstream
energy gradient elevation is therefore assumed equal to the downstream energy
gradient.

V-6
Statement
Number Notes and Remarks

5155 20 TRIALS OF QWEIR NOT ENOUGH; POSSIBLY INVALID. While computing culvert
flow and weir flow, the total discharge cannot be balanced with the actual discharge
after 20 iterations.

5160 CULVERT BACKWATER, FROUDE > 1; JOB DUMPED. The culvert backwater routine
starts with a supercritical flow condition. Therefore, the job has been terminated.

5165 CULVERT BACKWATER, STEP < 0; JOB DUMPED. While computing the length for
each iteration (step) the program has ended up with a negative value. Therefore, the
job has been terminated.

5170 100 TRIALS OF CULVERT BACKWATER NOT ENOUGH. The culvert backwater profile
requires more than 100 iterations. Therefore, the inlet depth DEPIN is set equal to the
outlet depth DEPOUT.

5175 20 TRIALS OF QELTRD NOT ENOUGH; ASSUMED = XXXX. QELTRD is the maximum
discharge through the culvert before any weir flow occurs. The program cannot obtain a
correct value of QELTRD after 20 iterations.

5180 RISE (SC.5) LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO ZERO. The user has entered a rise or
diameter value (SC.5) which is zero or negative. Therefore, the culvert has no
cross-sectional area and cannot be analyzed.

5185 BOX SPAN (SC.6) LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO ZERO. The user has entered a chart
number (SC.8) which is within the range of 8 through 12. This indicates that a box
culvert is to be analyzed. However, the user has entered a span (SC.6) value which is
zero or negative. Therefore, the box culvert has no cross-sectional area and cannot be
analyzed.

5227 DOWNSTREAM ELEV IS X, NOT Y, HYDRAULIC JUMP OCCURS DOWNSTREAM (IF

LOW FLOW CONTROLS). The upstream momentum is so great that the water
downstream of the bridge is supercritical and not subcritical.

5290 UPSTREAM ELEVATION IS X NOT Y, NEW BACKWATER REQUIRED. Since

supercritical flow was assumed by input and since the bridge obstruction drowns out
the supercritical flow upstream of the bridge, new backwater is required, from the
bridge upstream.

5470 ERROR OS DEPTH WRONG SIDE CRITICAL. The calculated depth in the low flow
routine was determined on the wrong side of critical depth. A trace may be required to
determine cause.

6070 LOW FLOW BY NORMAL BRIDGE. When the pier width is specified as zero for the
special bridge method and when low flow controls, the friction loss is computed using
the normal bridge method instead of the special bridge method. (SB.6=0)

6110 EGLWC OF X LESS THAN XEG OF Y. The energy gradient elevation for the controlling
low flow is less than the energy gradient for the previous cross section indicating
negative losses. The energy gradient elevation for the current cross section is
therefore, assumed equal to that for the previous energy gradient (no loss) and the run
has been continued.

V-7
Statement
Number Notes and Remarks

6180 SUPERCRITICAL FLOW, PRESSURE FLOW. Based on a comparison of EGPRS and

EGLWC (the higher controls) the program concluded pressure flow. The solution of
pressure flow in combination with supercritical flow is generally not compatible. The
bridge model should be examined for possible input errors.

6400 TRIAL AND ERROR FOR CHANNEL Q FAILED. For the low flow and weir flow
combination, the discharge through the channel must be determined. In trying to
determine the discharge through the channel by an iterative process, the assumed and
computed discharges do not agree in 50 trials. The allowable error of one percent is
too severe for the computation or a programming inadequacy has been detected.

6790 POSSIBLE INVALID SOLUTION 20 TRIALS OF EG NOT ENOUGH. In determining the

energy grade line elevation for a combination of weir flow and low flow, the discharge
computed for an assumed energy grade line elevation could not balance with the actual
discharge to be used in the water surface profile determination. When this condition
occurs, the job should be rerun using the trace feature and the cause of this failure
determined.

6840 FLOW IS BY WEIR AND LOW FLOW. The minimum top of roadway in one or both
overbank dips below the low chord over the bridge and the resulting water surface
elevation, which is below the low chord oyer the bridge, was computed using Class A
low flow under the bridge and weir flow in the low overbank.

6870 D.S. ENERGY OF X HIGHER THAN COMPUTED ENERGY OF Y. The energy grade line
elevation of X for the previous (downstream) cross section is higher than the current
cross section's computed energy grade line elevation of Y. The current energy grade
line elevation was computed for a combination of weir and pressure flow. The energy
grade line elevation for this cross section has been assumed equal to the previous
energy elevation in order to eliminate negative losses. The weir coefficients used
apparently were too efficient or a very long flat weir section has been encountered.

7185 MIN SPECIFIC ENERGY. The computer determined that it was impossible to proceed
from the previous cross section to the current cross section without crossing critical
depth and therefore, critical depth has been assumed for the current cross section. In
other words, maximum losses cannot produce an energy elevation as high as the
minimum energy at critical depth. If this note occurs for several consecutive cross
sections, it is apparent that the wrong type of flow (IDIR) has been assumed for this
segment of the profile. The cross sections should be reversed, IDIR changed and the
profile rerun.

7230 SLOPE-AREA TRIALS EXCEED 100. In determining the starting water surface elevation
using the slope of the energy grade line from input, 100 trials were not sufficient to
balance the calculated discharge with the actual discharge (Q). If this condition occurs,
an error in the input data or a programming error has been encountered. Rerun with
trace feature if input data appear satisfactory.

8190 PLOTTED POINTS (BY PRIORITY) .. - - - ETC. This note gives the priority for plotting the
values for the cross section. If two or more points are close enough together that a
single space of the printer cannot distinguish between them, then only the last point
plotted will be seen on the output. For instance, the energy gradient elevation (E) will
hide the water surface elevation (W) for very small velocity heads.

V-8
Statement
Number Notes and Remarks

8560 XSEC POINT - , X, EL, ST - Y, Z. The subscript computed for the current point was too
low or too high to be plotted and is therefore, not shown on the cross section. The X
indicates the type of point being plotted (X for ground point). The elevation and station
of this point are printed out as Y and Z.

8930 RDST NOT ON GR Record. The roadway station printed out here does not appear on
the ground profile record (GR). For the normal bridge method all stations on the BT
record must also appear on the GR record. This note can be ignored for the special
bridge method.

V-9
 Appendix VI

Output Data Description

 Appendix VI

Output Data Description

This appendix contains a description of all output variables that apply to any cross section. Many
of these variables can be selected for summary printout display.

Variable Description

ACH Cross section area of the channel.

ACULV Gross area of culvert.

AEX Area of channel improvement excavation in square feet at cross section.

ALOB Cross section area of the left overbank.

ALPHA Velocity head coefficient.

AREA Cross section area.

AROB Cross section area of the right overbank.

ASQ The assumed split flow value used to compute the water surface
elevation.

AV DEPTH The average depth of flow for the normal depth section based on the total
area divided by the water surface topwidth (split flow option).

AVG VELOCITY The average velocity of the normal depth overflow reach (split flow
option).

B Stream width, used for ice stability analysis.

BANK ELEV LEFTfRIGHT Left and right bank elevations.

BAREA Net area of the bridge opening below the low chord. Entered on SB
record.

B-S N Value of composite Manning's 'n' for ice covered stream computed by
Belokon-Sabaneev formula.

BW The bottom width of the trapezoidal excavation.

C Chezy's roughness coefficient, used in ice stability equation.

VI-1
 Variable Description

CASE An internal program control variable. It provides no information to the

user.

CCHV Contraction coefficient.

CEHV Expansion coefficient.

CHRT Chart number for FHWA culvert nomographs

CHSLOP Channel slope.

CLASS Identification number for following types of bridge/culvert flow.

Class Type of Flow

1 Low Flow - Class A

2 Low Flow - Class B
3 Low Flow - Class C
6 Culvert Analysis, Inlet Control
7 Culvert Analysis, Outlet Control
10 Pressure Flow Alone
11,15 Weir and Low Flow - Class A
12 Weir and Low Flow - Class B
13 Weir and Low Flow - Class C
16 Culvert Analysis, Weir Flow & Inlet Control
17 Culvert Analysis, Weir Flow & Outlet Control
30 Pressure Flow and Weir Flow
59 Special Bridge Reverts to Normal Bridge Method
67 For Encroachment Methods 3 through 6

CLSTA The centerline station of the trapezoidal excavation.

CORAR Area of the bridge deck subtracted from the total cross sectional area in
the normal bridge method.

CRIWS Critical water surface elevation.

CULVLN Length of culvert barrel.

CUMDS Cumulative channel distance from first cross section. (Units are based on
J1.6 and J6.4 input).

CUNO Number of identical culverts.

CUNY Manning's 'n' value for culvert barrel.

CWSEL Computed water surface elevation.

DEPTH Depth of flow.

VI-2
 Variable Description

DIFEG Difference in energy elevation for each profile.

DIFKWS Difference in water surface elevation between known and computed.

DIFWSP Difference in water surface elevation for each profile.

DIFWSX Difference in water surface elevation between sections.

DSSNO The downstream section number where the split flow reach begins.

DSWS The computed downstream water surface elevation (split flow option).

EG Energy gradient elevation for a cross section which is equal to the

computed water surface elevation CWSEL plus the velocity head HV.

EGIC Energy grade elevation for inlet control when using culvert analysis option

EGLWC The energy grade line elevation computed assuming low flow.

EGOC Energy grade elevation for outlet control when using culvert analysis
option.

EGPRS The energy grade line elevation computed assuming pressure flow.

ELENCL Elevation of left encroachment.

ELENCR Elevation of right encroachment.

ELLC Elevation of the bridge low chord. Equals ELLC entered on the X2 record
if used, otherwise it equals maximum low chord in the BT table.

ELMIN Minimum elevation in the cross section.

ELTRD Elevation of the top of roadway. Equals ELTRD entered on the X2 record
if used, otherwise it equals the minimum top of the road in the BT table.

ENDST Ending station where the water surface intersects the ground on the right
side.

ENTLC Entrance loss coefficient for culvert analysis.

ERRAC The percent error between the assumed discharge and computed
discharge using the split flow option.

FRCH Channel Froude number for uniform conditions.

H Hydraulic radius, used in ice stability equation.

H3 Drop in water surface elevation from upstream to downstream sides of the

bridge computed using Yarnell's equation assuming Class A low flow.

H4 Drop in energy elevation from upstream to downstream using culvert

analysis option.

VI-3
 Variable Description

Hl Energy loss due to friction for standard-step solutions. For all others it is
the change in energy elevation.

HV Discharge-weighted velocity head for a cross section.

IDC Number of trials required to determine critical depth.

ICEN Manning's 'n' value for floating ice entered on IC record.

ICONT Number of trails to determine the water surface elevation by the slope
area method, or the number of trials to balance the energy gradient by
the special bridge method, or the number of trials required to calculate
encroachment stations by encroachment methods 5 and 6.

IHlEa Friction loss equation index.

ITRIAl Number of trials required to balance the assumed and computed water
surface elevations.

K*CHSl Channel bed slope (times 1,000).

KRATIO Ratio of the upstream to downstream conveyance.

l-SANK ElEV Elevation of left bank station.

MAX DEPTH The maximum depth that occurs on the normal depth overflow section
(split flow option).

NICE Manning's 'n' for underside of ice cover.

NITER The number of iterations executed to compute split flow discharge.

OlOSS Energy loss due to minor losses such as transition losses.

PCWSE Previous computed water surface elevation.

PERENC The target of encroachment requested on the ET record.

POWER Channel stream power (Ib/(ft*s) or N/(m*s)).

a Total flow in the cross section.

aCH Amount of flow in channel.

aCHP Percent of flow in the channel.

aCOMP The computed split flow value based on the computed water surface
elevation.

aCUlV Flow through culvert, using culvert analysis option.

alOS Amount of flow in the left overbank.

VI-4
 Variable Description

QLOBP Percent of flow in the left overbank.

QLOW Low flow at bridge, special bridge analysis. Pressure flow at the bridge,
special bridge analysis.

QPR Total pressure of low flow· at the bridge.

QROB Amount of flow in the right overbank.

QROBP Percent of flow in the right overbank.

QWEIR Total weir flow at the bridge.

R-BANK ELEV Elevation of right bank station.

RBEL Right bank elevation.

RISE Height of box culvert or diameter of pipe culvert.

SCL Scale number for FHWA culvert nomographs.

SECNO Identifying cross section number. Equal to the number in the first field of
the X1 record.

SHEAR Boundary shear stress within channel (lb/ft2 or N/m 2).

SLOPE Slope of the energy grade line for the current section.

SPAN Width of box culvert.

SPGR Specific gravity of floating ice. Entered on IC record.

SSTA Starting station where the water surface intersects the ground on the left
side of the cross section.

STENCL The station of the left encroachment.

STENCR The station of the right encroachment.

STCHL Station of the left bank.

STCHR Station of the right bank.

TABER Percent of error between the total assumed split flow and total computed
split flow.

TASQ The total assumed split flow for the entire stream.

Tca The total computed split flow for the entire stream.

TELMX Elevation of the lower of the end points of the cross section.

VI-5
 Variable Description

T/H (TH1) Ratio of channel ice thickness and hydraulic radius, used in ice stability
equation.

TIME Travel time from the first cross section to the current cross section in
hours.

TOFWIDTH The width of the normal depth over flow section (split flow option).

TOP WIDTH The width of the overflow section based on the computed water surface
(split flow option).

TOPWID Width at the calculated water surface elevation.

TOTAL AREA The total cross sectional area for a normal depth overflow reach (split flow
option).

TRAPEZOID AREA Net area of the bridge opening up to the low chord as defined by SS,
BWP and BWC on the SB record. Should be close to BAREA on the SB
record.

TVOLI Total volume of ice in channel and overbanks.

TWA Cumulative surface area (acres or 1000 square meters) of the stream
(floodplain) from the first cross section.

USSNO The upstream section number where the split flow reach ends.

USWS The computed upstream water surface elevation (split flow option).

VCH Mean velocity in the channel.

VEXR Volume of channel improvement excavation in thousands of cubic yards

in a reach (between two adjacent cross sections).

VEXT Cumulative volume of channel improvement excavation in thousands of

cubic yards up to the current cross section.

VLOB Mean velocity in the left overbank.

VOL Cumulative volume (acre-feet or 1000 cubic meters) of water in the stream
from the first cross section.

VOLICH Cumulative volume of ice in channel.

VOLIL Cumulative volume of ice in left overbank.

VOLIR Cumulative volume of ice in right overbank.

VROB Mean velocity in the right overbank.

WEIRLN Length of roadway for weir flow computations, defined by "BT" data and
energy grade elevation.

VI-6
 Variable Description

WSELK Known water surface elevation; for example, a high water mark.

WTN Length weighted value of Manning's 'n' for the channel. Used when
computing Manning's 'n' from high water marks.

X*K Pariset's ice stability indicator (times 1000).

XFCH1 Froude number for ice stability analysis.

XICE1 Computed ice stability factor (Pariset' X).

XLBEL Left bank elevation.

XLCH Distance in the channel between the previous cross section and the
current cross section.

XLOBL Distance in the left overbank between the previous cross section and the
current cross section.

XLOBR Distance in the right overbank between the previous cross section and
the current cross section.

XNCH Manning's 'n' for the channel area.

XNL Manning's 'n' for the left overbank area.

XNR Manning's 'n' for the right overbank area.

XSTAB1 Maximum ice stability factor X, for stable ice cover, from Pariset's ice
stability function.

ZINCH Composite 'n' value for ice covered channel computed with Belokon-
Sabaneev formula.

ZITL Ice thickness in left overbank.

ZITR Ice thickness in right overbank.

ZITCH Ice thickness in channel.

.01K The total discharge (index Q) computed assuming SI/2 = .01 .

10*KS Slope of energy grade line (times 10,000).

VI-7
 Appendix VII

Input Data Description

 Appendix VII
Table of Contents

Section Page

1 Introduction VII-1

2 Functional Use Index , VII-2

3 ED Record (HEC-2 Data Edit Program (EDIT-2) VII-3

4 Split F!ow Records

4.1 SF Record - Split Flow Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., VII-4

4.2 JC Record - Title Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , VII-4
4.3 JP Record - Job Parameter " , VII-5
4.4 TW Record - Title for Weir Location " " , VII-6
4.5 WS Record - Weir Parameter Data VII-6
4.6 WC Record - Weir Coordinate Data , VII-?
4.? TN Record - Title for Normal Depth Location VII-8
4.8 NS Record - Normal Depth Parameter Data VII-8
4.9 NG Record - Ground Coordinate Data VII-9
4.10 TC Record - Title for Rating Curve Location VII-1 0
4.11 CS Record - Rating Curve Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. VII-10
4.12 CR Record - Rating Curve Data VII··11
4.13 EE Record - End of Split Flow Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. VII-11

5 Documentation Records

5.1 AC Record - Archival Option VII-12

5.2 C_ Record - Comments for Describing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. VII-13
5.3 T1 - T9 Records - Title Records

5.3.1 T1, T2, T4 - T9 Records VII-14

5.3.2 T3 Record " VII-14

6 Job Control Records

6.1 J1 Record - Starting Conditions VII-15

6.2 JR Record - Starting Rating Curve """ VII-17
6.3 JS Record - Starting Split Flow Assumption " VII-18
6.4 J2 Record - Optional Features VII-19
6.5 J3 Record - Selection of Variables for Summary Tables " VII-22
6.6 J4 Record - Storage-Outflow Records for HEC-1 " VII-29
6.? J5 Record - Printout Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " VII-30
6.8 J6 Record - Optional Friction Loss Equations VII-32
6.9 EJ Record - End of Job VII-34
6.10 ER Record - End of Run VII-34
 Table of Contents (continued)

Section Page

7 Change Records

7.1 IC Record - Ice Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. VII-35

7.2 NC Record - Starting Manning's 'n' Values & Shock Losses VII-37
7.3 NH Record - Horizontal Variations of Manning's 'n' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. VII-38
7.4 NV Record - Vertical Variations in Manning's 'n' VII-39
7.5 KH Record - Horizontal Description of Equivalent Roughness 'k' . . . . . . .. VII-40
7.6 QT Record - Table of Discharges for Multiple Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. VII-41
7.7 ET Record - Encroachment Table VII-42

8 Cross Section Records

8.1 X1 Record - General Items for Each Cross Section VII-45

8.2 RC Record - Rating Curve for Inputting Water Surface Elevations VII··47
8.3 CI Record - Channel Improvement VII··48
8.4 X2 Record - Optional Items for Each Cross Section (Bridge, etc.) . . . . . .. VII-50
8.5 X3 Record - Optional Items for Each Cross Section
(Effective Area, etc.) VII-52
8.6 X4 Record - Additional Points for Cross Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. VII-54
8.7 X5 Record - Use of Input Water Surface Elevations VII-55
8.8 GR Record - Ground Profile Elevations & Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. VII-56

9 Bridge and Culvert Records

9.1 SB Record - Special Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. VII-57

9.2 SC Record - Special Culvert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. VII-59
9.3 BT Record - Bridge Table of Elevations, Stations VII-61

10 FR - Free Format Indicator Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. VII-63

11 Input Record Summary VII-64

ii
 HEC-2 Input Description
Introduction

1. Introduction

This appendix contains a detailed description of the data input requirement for each variable on
each input record. It also contains a Functional Use Index which can be used to determine which
input variables are required for specific tasks. The Summary of Input Records shows the sequential
arrangement of records. ~v1any of the records described can be omitted if the options to \vhich they
apply are not required.

The location of the variables for each input record is shown by field number. Each record is
divided into ten fields of eight columns each, except Field 1. A variable in Field 1 may only occupy
record Columns 3 through 8 since record Columns 1 and 2 (called Field 0) are reserved for required
identification characters. The values a variable may assume and the conditions for each are
described. Some variables simply call for use of program options by using the numbers -1, 0, 1, 10,
and 15. Other variables contain numbers which express the magnitude of the variable. For these a
plus or minus sign is shown in the description under ·value" and the numerical value of the variable is
entered as input. Where the value of a variable is to be zero, the variable may be left blank since a
blank field is read as zero.

Any number without a decimal point must be right justified in its field. Any number without a sign
is considered positive.

The location of variables on records is often referred to by an abbreviated designation; for

example, J1.5 refers to the fifth field of the J1 record.

VII-1
 HEC-2 Input Description
Functional Use Index

2. Functional Use Index

Task Records Used

Basic Applications T1, T2, T3, J1.4 - J1.9, NC,

X1.1-X1.9, GR, EJ, ER
Archival Option AC
Data Comment Records C
Multiple Profiles, Summary Printout J2.1, J3

Printout Control J5
Traces & Input Data Printout J1.1, J2.10, X2.10
Storage-Discharge Output J4
Printer Plots of Cross Sections and Profiles J2.2 - J2.5, X1.1 0
Optional Friction Loss Equations J6.1
Flow Distribution J2.10, X2.10
Critical Depth Option J2.7
Direct Solution for Manning's 'n' J1.3, X2.2
Optional Records for Specifying Manning's 'n' J2.6, NH, NV
Equivalent Roughness 'k' KH
Options for Specifying Discharge J1.2, J1.8, J1.10, X2.1, QT
Specifications of Ineffective Flow Areas & X3, ET
Encroachments
Additional Ground Points X4
Channel Modification Due to Excavation J2.8, J2.9, CI
Bridge and Culvert Losses X2.3 - X2.6, BT, SB, SC, X5
Use of HEC-2 Data Edit Program ED
Use of Free Format Input FR, FIX, FREE
Use of the Flow Under Ice Option IC
Water Surface Based on a Rating CUNe J1.5, JR, RC
Basic Applications of Split Flow Option SF, TW, WS ,WC, EE

VII-2
 HEC-2 Input Description
EDIT2
ED

3. ED Record (HEC-2 Data Edit Program (EDIT-2) - Optional

Controls certain run options for data edit program. Does not need to be removed for HEC-2
runs.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA ED Record identification characters.

1 LIST YES Produce listing of input data before editing

(Blank) it (default).

NO Suppress listing.

2 CC YES Produce 81 column output with

(Blank) carriage control in Column 1 suitable for line
printer output or other wide carriage devices
(default).

NO Limit output width to 80 columns without carriage

control (Le., for eighty column interactive
terminals).

3 GRANGE o Use default value (150) for GR record

(Blank) elevation difference test.

+ Value to use for GR record elevation difference

test.

The HEC-2 data edit program (EDIT-2) is designed to accept as input any HEC-2 data file exactly
as set-up for input to HEC-2. It will handle stacked jobs and all other features which are available in
the September 1988 release of HEC-2.

The edit program will function with default run parameters for any HEC-2 data file. There are
three parameters which may be entered on an optional ED record. If used, the ED record must be the
first record in the data file and there may be only one. The format of the ED record is similar to HEC-2
data records; Le., the letters ED in Columns 1 and 2 and the three values in the first three fields right
justified to Columns 8, 16, and 24.

Suggestion for Using the EDIT2 Program. When RECORD OUT OF ORDER errors occur, many
subsequent fallacious error messages may be triggered. It is suggested that the user correct the
RECORD OUT OF ORDER errors first and rerun the edit program.

VII-3
SF HEC-2 Input Description
Split Flow Records
JC

4 Split Flow Records

4.1 SF Record - Split Flow Title

The SF record is used to flag the split flow option. Only one SF record can be used. This record
is required if the split flow option is going to be used. The SF record has to be the first record in an
HEC-2 file.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA SF Record identification characters.

1-10 Alphanumeric title data.

4.2 JC Record - Title Job

The JC record is used to indicate that JP record follows. The JP record must follow the JC
record. This record is optional.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA JC Record identification characters.

1-10 Alphanumeric title data.

VilA
 HEC-2 Input Description JP
Split Flow Records

4.3 JP - Job Parameter

The JP record is used to set several job parameters dealing with the split flow computations. The
JC and JP records are optional and can be placed anywhere in the split flow data or completely left
out. They should be placed normally after the SF records.

FiELD VARiABLE VALUE DESCRiPTiON

o IA JP Record identification characters.

1 ISFTR o Printout control of split flow computations will be

held to a minimum.

1 Trace each split flow iteration.

10 Trace both the split flow and backwater iterations.

2 AEROR o The program will use a value of two percent

allowed error for convergence.

+ The user may specify the allowed percent

tolerance for convergence.

3 NAITER o The maximum number of iterations for split flow to

be executed per profile (20 is the default value).

+ The user may specify the maximum number of

iterations.

4 IUEG -1,0 The program will use the water surface to

determine the overflow.

1 The program will use the energy grade line to

determine the overflow.

5 PERFR o One hundred percent of the overflow is to be

returned at SNOFR 0/VSA, NS.4, and CSA).

+ Percent of overflow to be returned at SNOFR

0/VSA, NSA, and CSA).

VII-5
TW HEC-2 Input Description
Split Flow Records
WS

4.4 TW Record - Title for Weir Location

The TW record is required for each set of weir outflow data set. The TW record must be followed
by a set of WS and WC records.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA TW Record identification characters.

1-10 Alphanumeric title data.

4.5 WS Record - Weir Parameter Data

The WS record is required for each TW record used and must follow it. The WS record contains
information dealing with the number of points describing the weir, weir flow coefficient, location of the
upstream and downstream limits of the weir in relation to section numbers as used in the X1 records,
and the section number where the flow returns. If the flow does not return, a value of negative one
should be used. It is required that the section numbers used to set-up the backwater model increase
from downstream to upstream. The same rule applies for supercritical models.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA WS Record identification characters.

1 NWPL + Number of coordinate points that describe the weir

on the we record.

2 DSSNO + Downstream section number where the first weir

coordinate applies.

3 USSNO + Upstream section number where the last weir

coordinate applies.

4 SNOFR + Section number where the lost weir flow returns.

-1 The weir flow does not return.

5 COEFL + Coefficient of discharge for use in weir flow

equation.

6-10 Not used.

VII-6
 HEC-2 Input Description
Split Flow Records
we

4.6 WC Record· Weir Coordinate Data

The we record is used to input the weir coordinates. The weir coordinates must start at the
downstream end and proceed upstream. The maximum number of coordinates is 100.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

a IA we Record identification characters.

1,3,5,
7,9 STA(I) + Station value of weir coordinate.

2,4,6,
8,10 ELO(I) + Elevation value of weir coordinate.

VII-7
TN HEC-2 Input Description
Split Flow Records
NS

4.7 TN Record· Title for Normal Depth Location

The TN record is required for each set of normal depth outflow data set. The TN record must be
followed by a set of NS and NG records.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA TN Record identification characters.

1-10 Alphanumeric title data.

4.8 NS Record· Normal Depth Parameter Data

The NS record is similar to the WS record with the exception that instead of having the weir flow
coefficient, it has the energy slope and 'n' value.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA NS Record identification characters.

1 NWPL + Number of coordinate points that describe the

normal depth flow cross section on the NG record.

2 DSSNO 0,+ Downstream section number where the first

coordinate point on the NG record applies.

3 USSNO 0,+ Upstream section number where the last

coordinate point on the NG record applies.

4 SNOFR 0,+ Section number where the lost flow returns.

-1 The lost flow does not return.

5 XNVND + The 'n' value to be used for normal depth

calculation.

6 SLOPND + The energy slope to be used for normal depth

calculations.

7-10 Not used.

VII-8
 HEC-2 Input Description NG
Split Flow Records

4.9 NG Record - Ground Coordinate Data

The NG record is used to input the normal depth cross section coordinates. The coordinate
must start at the downstream end and proceed upstream. The maximum number of coordinates is
100.

FiELD VARiABLE VALUE DESCRiPTiON

0 IA NG Record identification characters.

1,3,5, STA(I) + Station value of cross section.

7,9

2,4,6, ELO(I) + Elevation value of cross section.

8,10

VII-9
TC HEC-2 Input Description
Split Flow Records
CS

4.10 TC Record - Title for Rating Curve Location

The TC record is required for each set of rating curve outflow data set. The TN record must be
followed by a set of CS and CR records.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA TC Record identification characters.

1-10 Alphanumeric title data.

4.11 CS Record - Rating Curve Parameter Data

The CS record is similar to the WS record with the exception that the location (upstream and
downstream) is a point location and therefore the value entered for USSNO and DSSNO should
normally be equal.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA CS Record identification characters.

1 NWPL + Number of discharge elevation pairs to be read

from the CR records to follow.

2 DSSNO 0,+ Downstream section number where the rating

curve applies.

3 USSNO 0,+ Upstream section number where the rating curve

applies.

4 SNOFR 0,+ Section number where the lost flow returns.

-1 The lost flow does not return.

5-10 Not used.

VII-10
 HEC-2 Input Description CR
Split Flow Records
EE

4. i 2 CR Record - Rating Curve Data

The CR record is used to input the rating curve of outflows. The location of the rating curve has
to be at a specific location on the river. Therefore the location has to be specified at only one point.
The variables DSSNO and USSNO should be set equal. If they are not, the program will use the
mean of the two locations. The maximum number of rating curve points is 100.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

0 IA CR Record identification characters.

1,3,5, STA(I) + Discharge values for rating curve.

7,9

2,4,6, ELO(I) + Elevation values for rating curve.

8,10

4.13 EE Record - End of Split Flow Data

The EE record is required to terminate the reading of the split flow data. The EE record should
be in front of the first regular HEC-2 record, such as the AC, C, or T1 records.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA EE Record identification characters.

1-10 Not used.

VII-11
AC HEC-2 Input Description
Documentation Records

5 Documentation Records

5.1 AC Record - Archival Option

To use the Archival Option. one or more AC records must be inserted at the beginning of a data
file (I.e" before C records or first T1 record if C records are not used). Columns 3 through 80 of each
AC record are available for alphanumeric comments to document the archival tape. As many AC
records as required may be used. It is the users responsibility to provide the required job control
statements to insure that the file written to Unit 96 will appear on magnetic tape or otherwise be saved
by the system after execution. On an Archival execution cross section plots should not be requested.
Also, the maximum number of summary tables is reduced by two for an Archival run.

RECORD
NUMBER FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

1 0 IA AC Record identification characters.

1 1-10 Blank.

2 - as 0 IA AC Record identification characters.

many
records
necessary

1-10 Alphanumeric comments to document the

Archival tape.

Example Application

AC Flood plain determination -- Spring Creek. Baker. CA

AC Cross sections from FEMA 2 foot contour map dated 6/18/90
AC ACE Engineers Contract No. 19675848. 11/7/90
T1
T3
J1

ER

VII-12
 HEC-2 Input Description
Documentation Records
c
5.2 C_ Record - Comments for Describing Data (optional)

Comment records for labeling a cross section must be placed immediately ahead of the first title
(T1-T9) record. Comments will be printed in the data input list and in the detailed printout just ahead
of the cross section whose number appears in Field 1 of records 3 - 100. Multiple comment records
may be used to label a single cross section number.

RECORD
NUMBER FiELD VARiABLE VALUE DESCRiPTiON

1 o fA C Record identification characters

(C, blank). Rest of record is blank.

2 o IA C Record identification character.

2 1 NUMCT + Number of data comment records to be

printed. An unlimited number of comment
records may be used.

3-unlimited o IA C Record identification character.

1 CNOS Cross section number (Field 1 of X1 record)

where title is to be printed. Cross section
numbers (X1.1) referenced by comment
records should be unique.

3-unlimited 2-10 COCO Comment to be printed ahead of cross section

number CNOS.

Example Application

C
C 3
C 100 Junction with Dry Creek
C 185 Spring Creek Gage
C 256 Study Limit
T1

ER

VII-13
T1 - T9 HEC-2 Input Description
Documentation Records

5.3 T1 • T9 Records· Title Records (optional)

5.3.1 11, 12, 14 • 19 Records

Title record for output title. These records are entered before the J1 record. An unlimited
number of title records may be input ahead of each J1 record.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA T1 Record identification characters.

or
T2
etc.

1-10 none Numbers and alphabetical characters.

5.3.2 13 Record

Title record for output title. The stream name should be entered in Fields 2 through 4 for
output in the title of the summary tables and cross section and profile plots.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA T3 Record identification characters.

1 o Not used.

2-4 TITLE Title for summary tables and cross section and
profile plots.

5-10 none Numbers and alphabetical characters for title.

VII-14
 HEC-2 Input Description J1
Job Control Records

6 Job Control Records

6.1 J1 Record - Starting Conditions (required)

Job record specifying starting conditions and program options. This record is required for each
job (profile).

FiELD VARiABLE VALUE DESCRiPTiON

o IA J1 Record identification characters.

1 ICHECK -10 Do not print data records NC - EJ.

o Print data records NC - EJ before execution of first

profile.

2 INQ o QT, ET or X5 records are not used.

2-20 Field number on QT, ET and X5 records to be

used for this profile Gob).

3 NINV o Option to compute Manning's 'n' from known

high water marks will not be used.

1 Manning's 'n' will be computed from known high

water marks. Enter known water surface elevation
as variable WSELK on second field of X2 record
(X2.2) for each cross section.

4 IDIR o Subcritical flow. Cross sectional data (GR records)

are input starting at the downstream end of the
stream.

1 Supercritical flow. Cross sectional data are input

starting at the upstream end.

5 STRT -1 Start computations at critical depth.

o Start with known water surface elevation. Enter

WSEL in field nine.

+< 1 Start by slope-area method. Enter estimated

energy slope here. This starting option cannot be
used in conjunction with encroachment Methods 3,
4, 5, and 6 at first cross section.

VII-15
J1 HEC-2 Input Description
Job Control Records

J1 Record (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

+>1 Number of rating curve (discharge elevation) pairs

to be read on the following JR records to start the
backwater.

6 METRIC o Input and output in English units.

1 Input and output in Metric units.

7 HVINS o No interpolated cross sections to be generated by

computer.

+ Enter maximum allowable change in velocity head

between cross sections. If this value is exceeded,
interpolated cross sections will be inserted by the
program.

8 Q o Discharge specified by QT record, INQ(J1.2) is two

or greater.

+ Starting river flow (cfs or cms).

9 WSEL + If STRT(J1.5) is zero enter known starting water

surface elevation.

10 FQ o A factor of 1.0 will be used to multiply all

discharges (QT, X2.1 and J1.8).

+ Factor to multiply all flows by (QT, X2.1 and J1.8).

VII-16
 HEC-2 Input Description
Job Control Records
JR

6.2 JR Record - Starting Rating Curve

The JR records are used to input a starting rating curve. A set can be placed for each profile
being run. They must follow the J1 record and the number of rating curve points must be greater than
two. It is required that the number of rating curve points be entered on the J1 record, Field 5. A
maximum of 20 discharge elevation values is allowed. The program linearly interpolates between
given rating curve values and extrapolates for values outside the rating curve.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

0 IA JR Record identification characters.

1,3,5, QJ1 (i) + Discharge values.

7,9

2,4,6, XJ1 (i) -,0,+ Water surface elevation values.

8,10

Example Application

T1
T3
J1 0 3 o 0 7 0 o 0 o 0
JR 50 204.3 100 204.8 200 205.1 350 206.2 500 207.3
JR 1000 208.5 2000 210.5
J2

ER

VII-17
JS HEC-2 Input Description
Job Control Records

6.3 JS Record - Starting Split Flow Assumption

The JS record is used to specify the starting assumed lost discharges for each reach defined in
the split flow data set. If the JS record is not entered for a profile, then the program assumes that the
first trial assumed lost flow is zero for all the split flow reaches. The JS record should follow the J1
record or the JR record if used. A maximum of 100 values are allowed.

FiELD VARiABLE VALUE DESCRiPTiON

0 IA JS Record identification characters.

1 N + Number of assumed lost discharges to read.

2 ARLQ(4,1) + Assumed lost discharge for first reach.

3 ARLQ(4,2) + Assumed lost discharge for second reach.

ARLQ(4,N) + Assumed lost discharge for last reach.

Continue on in field one of additional JS records up to ARLQ(4,N).

Example Application

SF

EE
T1
T3
J1
JS 5 404 o 1118 150 650
J2

ER

VII-18
 HEC-2 Input Description J2
Job Control Records

6.4 J2 Record - Optional Features

Optional record for first profile, required record for all subsequent profiles.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o fA J2 Record identification characters.

1 NPROF Oar 1 Data records will be read NC - EJ.

-1 Calls for summary printout for a single profile run.

2-14 Profile number using cross section data from first

profile. Up to 14 profiles can be computed using
the initial cross section data records
NC - EJ.

2 IPLOT o No cross sections will be plotted for this job unless

individual plots are specified by using IPLOT on Xi
record (X1.10).

1 Line printer plots for all cross sections in this job.

10 Same as above except, data points will be plotted

only up to the water surface elevation.

3 PRFVS o Computer selects vertical scale of profile plot for

current profile based on an elevation spread not
exceeding 12 inches.

+ Users selects vertical scale to be used for current

profile. Enter number of elevation units per inch.

No profile will be plotted.

4 XSECV o Computer selects vertical scale of cross section

plot for each cross section individually.

+ User selects vertical scale to be used for all cross

sections. Enter number of elevation units per inch.

VII-19
J2 HEC-2 Input Description
Job Control Records

J2 Record (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

5 XSECH o Computer selects horizontal scale of cross section

plot for each cross section individually.

+ User selects horizontal scale to be used for all

cross sections. Enter number of horizontal units
r"\.ft" lino nf 1'\.1 1+n.1 1+ If th.a u.t"'to.r+il"lf:ll I ~,..a 1.0 "f th.o. t"\rl"'\fil.o
t"1iiiii1 I" Ivv. V""Iot''''''. II 1.'1"'" .wl"I~1 llii/II~I'tiiii VI .... v t"'...., ....,..

(PRFVS) is given, then the value of XSECH will be

used for the horizontal scale of both the cross
sections and profiles.

6 FN o A factor of 1.0 will be used.

+ Factor to multiply all Manning's 'n' values by.

(NC, NVand NH records).

Factor to multiply NC channel 'n' values by

(NC.3). NC record overbank 'n' values (NC.1 and
NC.2) are not modified. (All NVand NH 'n' values
are modified).

7 ALLDC -1 Critical depth will be computed for all cross

sections using an allowable error of 2.5 percent of
the depth.

Same as ALLDC equal to negative one, except

allowable error of ALLDC percent will be used.

o Critical depth will not be computed unless the

actual depth is close to critical (except when low
flow occurs for the special bridge method or when
supercritical flow profiles are computed). An
allowable error of 2.5 percent of the depth will be
used.

+ Same as ALLDC equal zero except, allowable error

of ALLDC percent will be used.

VII-20
 HEC-2 Input Description J2
Job Control Records

J2 Record (continued)

Channel Modification Due to Excavation

Through the use of subroutine CHIMP the existing cross section (as described by GR records)
may be modified by a trapezoidal channel excavation as specified by the use of the optional record CI
and the eighth and ninth fields of the J2 record. A CI record should be located after the X1 record of
the cross section where the improvement is to be initiated. The trapezoidal modification will start on
the first cross section that has a CI record and will continue on each cross section until a CI record is
read that has .01 for the channel bottom. Any changes in the variables on the CI record must be
made by another CI record. Only those variables that change need to be shown on the CI record.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

8 IBW 0 If a CI or IC record is read, the sixth field of the

record will be used.

6-10 Field number of field on CI record where channel

bottom width is specified, or ice thickness factor
on IC record.

A negative value will create a TAPE16 file of

adjusted cross section data in GR format. CI input
is not required for this option.

9 CHNIM 0 Overbank 'n' values are unchanged.

+ NH record (horizontal 'n' value variation) is to be

simulated by the computer so that the channel
'n' value is used for a distance of CHNIM on
each side of the left or right bank stations (which
may be modified by the channel excavation
described by the CI record). NH or NV records
should not be used with this option.

10 ITRACE 0 No trace for this job unless specified by individual

cross sections using ITRACE on X2 record (X2.10).
Trace printout is used by programmers to debug
the program, it is not recommended for general
application.

1 Minor trace for all cross sections.

10 Major and minor trace for all cross sections.

(Large amount of output.)

15 Flow distribution printout for all cross sections (no

major or minor trace for all cross sections).

VII-21
J3 HEC-2 Input Description
Job Control Records

6.5 J3 Record - Selection of Variables for Summary Tables (optional)

Optional record (up to five records may be used). Used on the first profile of a multiple profile
run to select variables for the summary printout. If a summary printout is requested (J2.1) and a J3
record is not supplied, a pre-defined table (Table 150) is printed.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA J3 Record identification characters.

1-10 IVAR(I) Codes to specify summary tables. Pre-defined

tables may be called as shown below (100 and
200 series). User-defined tables may be generated
by specifying up to 13 variable codes per table.
Where two or more user-defined tables are
specified, a blank field should be used to separate
the tables. Tables are printed in order specified.
Pre-defined tables are printed in numerical order
after any user-defined table. A maximum of five
tables may be generated.

Codes for Pre-Defined Tables

Code Table

100 Hydraulic calculations for special bridges only.

101 Hydraulic calculations for culverts only.

105 For cross section output at special bridge or culvert.

110 Encroachment data.

115

120 Channel improvement data.

150 Standard summary (two tables produced).

200 Floodway data (FIA Table 1)1.

1Flood Insurance Study, Guidelines and Specifications, Federal Emergency Management Agency,
1987.

VII-22
 HEC-2 Input Description J3
Job Control Records

J3 Record (continued)

Variable Codes for User Defined Tables

Variable Code Variable Code Variable Code

Name Number Name Number Name Number

Cross section and Reach Water Surface and Energy Culvert Variables
Variables from Input Related Variables
H4 85
SECNO 38 CWSEL 1 EGOC 83
STCHL 21 CRIWS 2 EGIC 84
STCHR 22 WSELK 9 OCULV 86
XLBEL 23 EG 3
RBEL 24 HL 11 Encroachment Variables
ELMIN 42 OLOSS 12
XLCH 39 IHLEQ 62 PERENC 36
CUMDS 66 STENCL 27
CHSLOP (K*CHSL) 33 Difference Variables STENCR 28
ELENCL 31
Velocity Variables DIFEG 61 ELENCR 32
DIFWSP 50
VL.OB 55 DIFWSX 51 Channel Improvement
VROB 56 DIFKWS 52 (CHIMP) Variables
VCH 26
HV 10 Discharge Variables CLSTA 29
AL.PHA 57 BW 30
TIME 6 64
a 43 VEXR
OLOB 13 VEXT 65
Calculated Geometric OCH 14
Variables OROB 15 Flow Under Ice Variables
OLOBP 35
DEPTH 8 OCHP 60 TH1 70
TOPWID 4 OROBP 59 XICE1 71
AREA 25 01K 34 XSTAB1 72
TWA 37 XFCH1 73
VOL 7 Manning's 'n' Variable ZINCH 74
SSTA 53 TVOU 75
ENDST 54 XNL (K*XNL) 16 VOUL 76
TELMX 63 XNR (K*XNR) 18 VOUR 77
XNCH (K*XNCH) 17 VOUCH 78
Hydraulic Parameters WTN (K*WTN) 19 NICE 79
ZITL 80
CASE 20 Bridge Variables ZITR 81
SLOPE (10K*S) 5 ZITCH 82
KRATIO 58 CLASS 49
SHEAR 67 OWEIR 46
FRCH 68 aPR 47
POWER 69 EGPRS 44
EGLWC 45
H3 48
ELTRD 40
ELLC 41 See following pages for
descriptions of variables.

VII-23
J3 HEC-2 Input Description
Job Control Records

J3 Record (continued)

Summary Printout Data Description

Code Variable
Number Name Description

1 CWSEL Computed water surface elevation.

2 CRIWS Critical water surface elevation.

3 EG Energy gradient elevation for a cross section which is equal to the

computed water surface elevation CWSEL plus the discharge-
weighted velocity head HV.

4 TOPWID Cross section width at the calculated water surface elevation.

5 SLOPE (10K*S) Slope of the energy grade line for the current section (times
10,000).

6 TIME Travel time from the first cross section to the present cross section
in hours.

7 VOL Cumulative volume of water in the stream from the first cross
section (in acre··feet for English units or 1000 cubic meters in
Metric units).

8 DEPTH Depth of flow.

9 WSElK Known water surface elevation.

10 HV Mean velocity head across the entire cross section.

11 Hl Energy loss due to friction.

12 OlOSS Energy loss due to expansion or contraction.

13 alOB Amount of flow in the left overbank.

14 aCH Amount of flow in the channel.

15 aROB Amount of flow in the right overbank.

16 XNl (K*XNl) Manning's 'n' for the left overbank area (time 1.000).

VII-24
 HEC-2 Input Description J3
Job Control Records

J3 Record (continued)

Summary Printout Data Description

Code Variable
Number Name Description

17 XNCH (K*XNCH) Manning's 'n' for the channel area (times 1,000).

18 XNR (K*XNR) Manning's 'n' for the right overbank area (times 1,000).

19 WTN (K*WTN) Weighted value of Manning's 'n' for the channel based on the
distance between cross sections and channel flow from the first
cross section. Used when computing Manning's 'n' from high
water marks (times 1,000).

20 CASE An internal program control variable. It provides no information to

the user.

21 STCHL Station of the left bank.

22 STCHR Station of the right bank.

23 XLBEL Left bank elevation.

24 RBEL Right bank elevation.

25 AREA Cross section area.

26 VCH Mean velocity in the channel.

27 STENCL The station of the left encroachment.

28 STENCR The station of the right encroachment.

29 CLSTA The centerline station of the trapezoidal excavation.

30 BW The bottom width of the trapezoidal excavation.

31 ELENCL Elevation of left encroachment.

32 ELENCR Elevation of right encroachment.

VII-25
 HEC~2 Input Description
J3
Job Control Records

J3 Record (continued)

Summary Printout Data Description

Code Variable
Number Name Description

33 CHSLOP (K*CHSL) Channel slope (times 1,000).

34 .01K The total discharge (index Q) carried with Sl/2 = .01 (equivalent to
.01 times conveyance).

35 QLOBP Percent of flow in the left overbank.

36 PERENC The target of encroachment requested on ET record.

37 TWA The cumulative topwidth area (acres or 1000 square meters).

38 SECNO The cross section identification number.

39 XLCH Channel reach length.

40 ELTRD Minimum elevation for top of road profile.

41 ELLC Maximum low chord elevation.

42 ELMIN Minimum elevation in cross section.

43 Q Discharge.

44 EGPRS Energy elevation assuming pressure flow.

45 EGLWC Energy elevation assuming low flow.

46 QWEIR Total weir flow at the bridge.

47 QPR Total pressure or low flow at the bridge.

48 H3 Change in water surface elevation from Yarnell's equation.

49 CLASS Controlling flow type for bridge solution.

50 DIFWSP Difference in water surface elevation for each profile.

51 DIFWSX Difference in water surface elevation between sections.

VII-26
 HEC-2 Input Description J3
Job Control Records

J3 Record (continued)

Summary Printout Data Description

Code Variable
Number Name Description

52 DIFKWS Difference between known and computed water surface elevations.

53 SSTA Starting station where the water surface intersects the ground (on
the left side of the cross section).

54 ENDST Ending station where the water surface intersects the ground on
the right side.

55 VLOB Average velocity in the left overbank area.

56 VROB Average velocity in the right overbank area.

57 ALPHA Velocity head coefficient.

58 KRATIO Ratio of the upstream to downstream conveyance.

59 QROBP Percent of flow in the right overbank.

60 QCHP Percent of flow in the channel.

61 DIFEG Difference in energy elevation for each profile.

62 IHLEQ Friction loss equation index.

63 TELMX Elevation of the lower of the two end points of cross section.

64 VEXR Volume of excavation in reach.

65 VEXT Volume of excavation, total.

66 CUMDS Cumulative channel distance from first cross section.

67 SHEAR Boundary shear stress within the channel.

68 FRCH Froude number for main channel.

69 POWER Stream power within main channel.

VII-27
J3 HEC-2 Input Description
Job Control Records

J3 Record (continued)

Summary Printout Data Description

Code Variable
Number Name Description

70 TH1 Ratio (T/H) of ice thickness (T) to maximum depth (H) in channel.

71 XICE1 Calculated ice stability factor X based on TM.

72 XSTAB1 Ice stability factor based on Pariset curve based on TH1.

73 XFCH1 Froude number (for ice stability analysis) for the channel based on
H equal to the maximum depth in the channel.

74 ZINCH Channel N value based on Belokon-Sabaneev Formula.

75 NOLI Cumulative volume of ice in cubic yards or cubic meters.

76 VOLIL Cumulative volume of ice on left bank.

77 VOLIR Cumulative volume of ice on right bank.

78 VOLICH Cumulative volume of ice in the channel.

79 NICE ICE N value read in.

80 ZITL Ice thickness for the left bank.

81 ZITR Ice thickness for the right bank.

82 ZITCH Ice thickness for the channel.

83 EGOC Computed energy grade elevation for outlet control.

84 EGIC Computed energy grade elevation for inlet control.

85 H4 Energy elevation difference from downstream to upstream of the

culvert.

86 QCULV Flow through the culvert.

VII-28
 HEC-2 Input Description J4
Job Control Records

6.6 J4 Record - Storage-Outflow Records for HEC-1 (optional)

Optional record used only on the first profile of a multiple profile run to obtain storage-discharge
output in a form that can be used as input to the HEC-1 program for modified-Puis routing. A KK
record is generated by HEC-2 for each routing reach. Storage and corresponding discharge values
are written to SV and sa records, respectively. KK and KM records are printed to identify the reach,
and an RS record is printed without data. The storage-routing variables required on the RS record
must be added by the HEC-1 user. Routing reach cross section numbers, REACH(I), specified on this
record must correspond to an X1 record SECf\JO valus. Output is 'vvritten to TAPE?

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA J4 Record identification characters.

1-10 REACH(I) + Defines routing reaches by pairs of cross section

numbers representing downstream and upstream
ends of reaches. REACH(I), when I is an odd
number, indicates a downstream end. An even
number for I indicates an upstream end. Fifty
reaches can be specified.

A blank field indicates that no more cross section

numbers will follow.

Zeros in a field are read as a cross section

number, not a blank.

VII-29
J5 HEC-2 Input Description
Job Control Records

6.7 J5 Record - Printout Control

The optional J5 record can be used to suppress detailed (cross section by cross section) and
summary printout. The J5 record(s) may be used for single or multiple profile jobs. For multiple
profile jobs, the J5 record(s) is inserted with job records for the first profile. Printout of the data input
list, flow distribution data, and profile and cross section plots are unaffected by this option; for printout
control of these options refer to the J1, J2, X1, and X2 records. Use of the J5 record for various
printout options is illustrated in the following table.

Field

0 1 2 3
(IA) (LPRNT) (NUMSEC) (SECNOS(I)) 4 .. N Desired Printout

J5 -10 -10 Summary printout only for all cross

sections
J5 -10 X Detailed and summary printout
beginning at cross section X
J5 -10 + Xl Xz .. Detailed and summary printout for
Xn cross sections (Xv'" XJ

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA J5 Record identification characters.

1 LPRNT -10 and NUMSEC = -10, suppress detailed printout for

all cross sections.

and NUMSEC equals zero or plus, print detailed

and summary printout for only those cross
sections indicated by NUMSEC and SECNOS(I)
(J5.2 and J5.3).

-1 Same as -10 except a list of cross section numbers

is furnished to aid in debugging runs that do not
run to completion.

VII-30
 HEC-2 Input Description J5
Job Control Records

J5 Record (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

2 NUMSEC -10 Suppress detailed printout for all cross sections.

Requested summary printout is not suppressed.

a Suppress all detailed and summary printout from

the first cross section to the cross section
indicated in J5.3.

+ Any positive number indicates that the following

fields will contain cross section numbers
SECNOS(I).

3-10 SECNOS(I) ,,0,+ If NUMSEC is plus, one hundred cross section

numbers can be specified. If additional records
are required, all ten fields should be used for
SECNOS(I).

A blank field indicates that no more cross section

numbers will follow.

Zeros in a field are read as a cross section

number, not a blank.

VII-31
J6 HEC-2 Input Description
Job Control Records

6.8 J6 Record - Friction Loss Equations (optional)

The J6 record is an optional record which can be utilized to select equations for computation of
friction losses, transfer control of output print files to computer system control, choose the method of
evaluating subdivision of conveyance within the channel, and select the station of the cross section at
the downstream end of the model. These options may be used for single or multiple profile jobs. For
multiple profiles the J6 record is inserted with job records for the first profile only.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA J6 Record identification characters.

1 IHLEQ o Average conveyance equation used to compute

friction losses. This equation has been utilized in
the preceding version of HEC-2 and is
recommended for general application.

1 Program selects, on a reach by reach basis, one of

the following equations: average friction slope,
geometric mean friction slope, or harmonic mean
slope. Selection is based on flow conditions. 1

2 Average friction slope equation used to compute

friction losses.

3 Geometric mean friction slope equation used to

compute friction losses.

4 Harmonic mean friction slope equation used to

compute friction losses.

2 ICOPY o The program will internally handle the disk/tape

units containing the output print files.

1 The program will transfer control of disk/tape units

for output print files to the computer.

ISee Table 2, Chapter 4, page 22, of the User's Manual for details.

VII-32
 HEC-2 Input Description J6
Job Control Records

J6 Record (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

3 SUBDIV Default value. Allow subdivision of the channel if

° both bank side slopes are flatter than 5H:1V
(horizontal to vertical). The slope is computed
from the bank station to the point of 'n' or 'k'
value change.

-1 Allow the program to subdivide if 'n' or 'k' is

changed in the channel cross section for any side
slope.

+ Value defining the side slope criterion for

subdividing instead of the default value of five (5).

4 STRTDS -,0,+ Station of the first cross section of the downstream

end of the model. The units of STRTDS can be
either in feet or meters or in miles or kilometers as
indicated by the variable RMILE (J6.5).

5 RMILE Units for STRTDS are in feet or meters.

°
+ Units for STRTDS are in miles or kilometers.

VII-33
EJ HEG-2 Input Description
Job Control Records
ER
6.9 EJ Record - End of Job (required)

Required following data for the last cross section. This record is only used for the first profile of
mUltiple profile jobs because the cross section data records are read for the first profile only. Each
group of records beginning with the T1 record is considered a job.

FiELD VARiABLE VALUE DESCRiPTiON

o IA EJ Record identification characters.

1-10 Not used.

6.10 ER Record - End of Run (required)

Required at the end of a run consisting of one or more jobs in order to end computation on stop
command.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA ER Record identification characters.

1-10 Not used.

VII-34
 HEC-2 Input Description
Change Records
Ie

7 Change Records

7.1 IC Record - Ice Data (optional)

Used to input or change ice data. Calculations with floating ice cover will start at the first cross
section (X1 record) following the IC record and will continue until an IC record is read that has .01 for
SPGR (Field 5). Insert IC records with other change records (NC, NH, ET, etc.) immediately ahead of
record X1.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA IC Record identification characters.

1 ZITL + Ice thickness for the left overbank.

o No change in ice thickness for the left overbank.

-1 Open water in left overbank.

2 ZITR + Ice thickness for the right overbank.

o No change in ice thickness for the right overbank.

-1 Open water in right overbank.

3 ZITCH + Ice thickness for the channel.

o No change in ice thickness for the channel.

-1 Open water in the channel.

4 ZIN + Manning's 'n' value for ice.

o No change in Manning's 'n' value for ice.

5 SPGR + Value of ice specific gravity.

.01 No ice calculations until another IC record is read.

(Used to terminate ice calculations.)

o No change in ice specific gravity if a value was

entered on a prior IC record or if none has been
previously specified, the default value of 0.916 will
be used.

VII-35
 HEC-2 Input Description
Change Records

Ie Record (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

FZ + Factor to multiply ice thickness values (ZITL, ZITR,

ZITCH) by.

o Ice 'n' values and ice thickness wiii not be

modified.

Factor to multiply ice 'n' value (ZIN) by.

1 Field use (6-10) for a profile corresponds to the field specified in Field 8 (variable IBW) of the J2
record.

VII-36
 HEC-2 Input Description NC
Change Records

7.2 NC Record - Starting Manning's 'n' Values and Shock Losses

Manning's 'n' and the expansion and contraction coefficients for transition (shock) losses are
entered for starting each job, or for changing values previously specified. The NC record is required
for the first cross section.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA NC Record identification characters.

1 XNL o No change in Manning's 'n' value for the left

overbank.

+ Manning's 'n' value for the left overbank.

2 XNR o No change in Manning's 'n' value for the right

overbank.

+ Manning's 'n' value for the right overbank.

3 XNCH o No change in Manning's 'n' value for the

channel.

+ Manning's 'n' value for the channel.

4 CCHV o No change in contraction coefficient.

+ Contraction coefficient used in computing

transition losses.

5 CEHV o No change in expansion coefficient.

+ Expansion coefficient used in computing transition

losses.

6-10 Not used.

VII-37
 NH HEC-2 Input Description
Change Records

7.3 NH Record - Horizontal Variations of Manning's 'n' (optional)

Used to permanently change the roughness coefficients (Manning's 'n') to values which vary with
horizontal distances from the left side of the cross section. Roughness coefficients should be
redefined for each cross section with new geometry. The NH record should not be used at cross
sections employing the NV record or when utilizing the channel improvement (CI) option. If 'n'
values change within the channel, the criterion described in Section 2.3 (page 4) is used to determine
whether 'n' values should be converted to a composite value using Equation 5.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA NH Record identification characters.

1 NUMNH 1-20 Total number of Manning's 'n' values (maximum

20) entered on NH records. If NUMNH is greater
than four, multiple NH records are required and,
the first field of the second and SUbsequent NH
record, should contain a STN(N) value.

2,4,6, VALN(N) + Manning's 'n' coefficient between stations

8,10...etc STN(N-1) and STN(N). The first 'n' value applies
from the starting left station up to STN(N) (Field 3).

3,5,7, STN(N) + Station corresponding to VALN(N). Each

9,11 ...etc stations should equal one of the stations on the
next GR records. Stations must be in increasing
order. Station values will not be adjusted by X1.8
PXSECR.

VII-38
 HEC-2 Input Description
Change Records
NV

7.4 NV Record - Vertical Variations in Manning's 'n' (optional)

Used to change the channel roughness coefficient 'n' based on water surface elevations.
program interpolates channel 'n' value for each calculated water surface elevation based on 'n'
versus elevation data. This option should not be used at cross sections employing the NH record
or CHNIM (J2.9) option.

FiELD VARiABLE VALUE DESCRiPT;Ot~

o IA NV Record identification characters.

1 NUMNV 2-20 Total number of Manning's "n' values entered on

NV records (maximum 20). If NUMNV is greater
than four, multiple NV records are required and,
the first field of the second and subsequent NV
records should contain an ELN(N) value.

2,4,6, VAL(N) + Manning's 'n' coefficient for area below ELN(N).

8,10, The overbank 'n' values specified on the NC
12...etc. record will be used for the overbank roughness
regardless of the values in this table.

3,5,7, ELN(N) + Elevation of the water surface corresponding to

9, 11, VALN(N) in increasing order.
13 ... etc.

VII-39
 KH HEC-2 Input Description
Change Records

7.5 KH Record - Horizontal Description oj Equivalent Roughness ;k'

(optional)

Used to specify equivalent roughness coefficients (k values on feet or meters) which vary with
horizontal distances from the left side of the cross section. These specifications remain in effect
unless changed by new KH, NH, or NC records at subsequent cross sections. Roughness
coefficients should be redefined for each cross section with new geometry. The KH record should not
be used for cross sections employing the NV record or channel improvement (CI) option.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA KH Record identification characters.

1 NUMKH 1-20 Total number of equivalent roughness values of

'k' (maximum of 20) entered on KH records. If
NUMKH is greater than four, multiple KH records
are required, and the first field of the second and
subsequent KH records should contain a STK(N)
value.

2,4,6 VALK(N) + Equivalent roughness 'k' coefficient between

8,10,etc. stations STK(N-1) and STK(N). The first 'k' value
applies from the starting left station up to STK(1)
(Field 3).

3,5,7 STK(N) + Station corresponding to VALK(N). Each

9,11,etc. station should equal one of the stations on the
next GR record. Stations must be in increasing
order. Station values will not be adjusted by X1.8
PXSECR.

VII-40
 HEC-2 Input Description
Change Records
aT
7.6 QT Record - Table of Discharges for Multiple Profiles

Specifies a table of flows for use in computing a series of water surface profiles. The field of the
flow being used for this job is specified by variable INQ(J1.2).

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o iA QT Record identification characters.

1 NUMQ 1-19 Total number of flows (maximum 19) entered on

the QT records. If NUMQ is greater than nine, two
QT records are required, and the first field of the
second QT record should contain a Q(N) value.

2-20 Q(N) + Flow values to be used for multiple profiles.

Variable INQ(J1.2) indicates which field is used for
this job. INQ may range from 2 to 20.

VII-41
ET HEC-2 Input Description
Change Records

7.7 ET Record w Encroachment Table (optional)

This record is used to specify the Method 1 through 6 and target of the encroachment. The
method and target will be used until changed by another ET record, except for Method 1, which only
applies to the next cross section. A zero on the first ET record indicates no encroachment, while a
zero on succeeding ET records indicates no change in encroachment. The field of the ET record that
is being used for a particular profile is specified by variable INa (J1.2). Methods 3 through 6 require a
natural profile for the first profile and thus require reading a zero on the ET record of the "INa" field for
the first profile. if Methods 2 through 6 are being used and it is desired to terminate the
encroachment option, use Method 1 with the encroachment stations specified near the two ends of
the cross section. Each method is capable of evaluating the effects of encroachments on bridges.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA ET Record identification characters.

1 None None Blank field.

2-10 ENCFP(N) o No encroachment or no change in encroachment.

+ Encroachment method used. The number X.Y is

or used to specify that method Y is being used
and X is the target to be used for that method. Up
to nine values may be specified. The
encroachment method or target may be changed
at any cross section or on different profiles.

Encroachment Methods

Positive values of X.Y for Methods 3 through 6 provide an encroachment based on a reduction of
conveyance equally in both overbanks. Negative values of X.Y for Methods 3 through 6 provide an
encroachment based on a reduction of conveyance in proportion to the distribution of natural overbank
conveyance. For instance, if the natural cross section had twice as much conveyance in the left overbank
as in the right overbank, a 10.3 would reduce conveyance by five percent in each overbank, whereas a
-10.3 would eliminate 6.7 percent from the left overbank and 3.3 percent from the right overbank.

Bridge encroachments may be evaluated by adding .01 to the code X.Y for any of the methods.
Thus a 9.11,100.21,10.31,10.41,10.51, or 10.61 would request the bridge encroachments for Methods 1
through 6, while a 9.1, 100.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5, or 10.6 would not. The table on the following page
describes how each method handles encroachments on bridges.

VII-42
 HEG-2 Input Description ET
Change Records

ET Record (continued)

Method Description

1 Bridge encroachments set as indicated by target values of Method 1.

2 Bridge encroachments set as indicated by target values of Method 2.
3 -, 6 Bridge encroachments defined by encroachments determined at the cross
section immediately downstream of the bridge.

ET CARD
METHOD VALUE DESCRIPTION

1 X.1 The Xth and Xth + 1 fields of the ET record will be used for
or the encroachment stations STENCL and STENCR. STENCL should
X.11 not be zero.

2 X.2 The top width of X will determine encroachment stations

or such that the center of the top width will be centered
X.21 halfway between bank stations.

3 X.3 The natural cross section will be encroached so that X

or percent of the total conveyance will be eliminated equally
X.31 (X/2 percent) from each overbank.

·X.3 Same as X.3 except the reduction of conveyance in each

or overbank will be in proportion to the conveyance in the
-X.31 overbanks.

4 XA The natural cross section will be encroached based on a (Xli 0) foot

or increase in water surface elevation. The reduction of conveyance will
XA1 be equal in both overbanks. A 1 foot increase in water surface
elevation would require a 1004 and a .5 foot increase would require a
504.

-XA Same as XA except the reduction of conveyance in each overbank

or will be in proportion to the conveyance in the overbanks under
-XA1 natural conditions.

5 X.5 operates much like Method 4 except that an iterative solution scheme
or attempts to obtain the desired difference in water surface elevations
X.51 as closely as possible to the specified target difference.

-X.5 Same as X.5 except the reduction of conveyance in each

or overbank will be in proportion to the conveyance in the
-X.51 overbanks under natural conditions.

VII-43
ET HEC-2 Input Description
Change Records

ET Record (continued)

ET CARD
METHOD VALUE DESCRIPTION

6 X.6 Uses an optimization scheme to obtain a desired difference

or in energy grade line elevations as closely as possible to
v~ ..
A.OI the specified taiget.

-X.6 Same as X.6 except the reduction of conveyance in each

or overbank will be in proportion to the conveyance in the
-X.51 overbanks under natural conditions.

VII-44
 HEC-2 Input Description X1
Cross Section Records

8 Cross Section Records

8.1 X1 Record· General Items for Each Cross Section (required)

This record is required for each cross section (800 cross sections can be used for each profile) and is
used to specify the cross section geometry and program options applicable to that cross section.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA X1 Record identification characters.

1 SECNO + Cross section identification number.

NOTE: When using the Split Flow Option, cross
section 10 numbers must increase downstream to
upstream.

Start new tributary backwater at this cross section.

2 NUMST o Previous cross section is repeated for current section.

GR records are not entered for this cross section.

+ Total number of stations on the following GR records.

3 STCHL o NUMST(X1.2) is O.

+ The station of the left bank of the channel. Must be

equal to one of the STA(N) on next GR records.

4 STCHR o NUMST(X1.2) is O.

+ The station of the right bank of the channel. Must be

equal to one of the STA(N) on GR records and equal
to or greater than STCHL.

5 XLOBL + Length of left overbank reach between current cross

section and next downstream cross section. Zero for
=
first cross section if 10lR 0, (J1.4).

6 XLOBR + Length of right overbank reach between current cross

section and next downstream cross section. Zero for
=
first cross section if 10lR O.

7 XLCH + Length of channel reach between current cross

section and next downstream cross section. Zero for
first cross section if 10lR = O.

VII-45
X1 HEC-2 Input Description
Cross Section Records

X1 Record (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

8 PXSECR o Cross section stations will not be changed by the

factor PXSECR.

+ Factor to modify the horizontal dimensions of a cross

section. The distances between adjacent GR stations
(STA) are multiplied by this factor to expand or narrow
a cross section. The STA of the first GR point remains
the same. The factor can apply to a repeated cross
section or a current one. A factor of 1.1 will increase
the horizontal distance between the GR stations by ten
percent. (See X2.9 for station adjustment to BT data.)
This factor will adjust data from CI records and NH or
NK stations for repeat sections. It will not adjust data
from X4 records in repeat cross sections.

9 PXSECE 0 Cross section elevations will not be changed.

+ or- Constant to be added (+ or -) to GR elevation data

(either previous or current). Sediment elevation data
(X3.2) input at current cross section is not modified by
this factor. (See X2.7 for elevation change to BT data.)
Will not adjust X4 records in repeat cross sections.

10 IPLOT 0 Current cross section will not be plotted unless all

cross sections were requested by J2 record.

1 Plot current cross section using all points.

10 Plot current cross section using only those points up

to the water surface elevation.

VII-46
 HEC-2 Input Description RC
Cross Section Records

8.2 RC Record - Rating Curve for Inputting Water Surface Elevations

The RC record can be entered at any cross section and the program will determine the water surface
elevation based on the rating curve and not on backwater computations. The RC record should be
placed after the X1 record. A maximum of 20 discharge elevation values are allowed. The program
linearly interpolates between given rating curve values and extrapolates for values outside the rating
curve.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

RC Record identification characters.

°
1
IA

NRCP Number of rating curve points being read in.

+

2 QRC(1) + Discharge value.

3 XRC(1) -,0,+ Water surface elevation value.

4 QRC(2) + Discharge value.

5 XRC(2) -,0,+ Water surface elevation value.

QRC(NRCP) + Last discharge value.

XRC(NRCP) -,0,+ Last water surface elevation value.

Continue on in Field 1 of additional RC records up to QRC(NRCP) and XRC(NRCP).

VII-4?
CI HEC-2 Input Description
Cross Section Records

8.3 CI Record - Channel Improvement (optional)

This optional record provides input for the channel improvement (CHIMP) option of the program. This
option simulates the modification of cross section data (GR records) by a trapezoidal excavation. The
modification begins at the first cross section with a CI record and continues until a CI record specifying a
bottom width equal to 0.01 (variable BW, Fields 6-10) is encountered. Up to five bottom widths can be
specified for analysis during multiple profile runs. Multiple CI records may be used to model improved
channel sections with pilot channels; up to three CI records may be used at a single cross section. The
channel improvements are performed in the order that the records are specified. The natura! channel may
be filled prior to excavation if desired. (See variable BW.) Low areas of the natural cross section may be
filled by the sediment option (variable ELSEO X3.2). See J2 record, Fields 8 and 9 for further information.

Note: The CI record cannot be used In conjunction with NH records.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

0 IA CI First two columns of record for record

identification.

1 CLSTA 0 Value on previous cross section's CI record is

used.

+ Station of the centerline of trapezoidal channel

excavation which is expressed in terms of the
stations used in the natural cross section
description (GR records).

-1 CLSTA is determined by program as halfway

between bank stations.

2 CELCH 0 Value on previous cross section's CI record is

used.

+ or- Elevation of channel invert (but not -1). Note this

elevation is not modified by PXSECE (X1.9).

-1 Elevation of channel invert is equal to minimum

elevation in cross section. (For pilot channel
excavations, second and third CI records, the
channel invert elevation should be specified).

.1 "CELCH ~00001 Elevation of channel invert is based on CELCH

(Slope) * XLCH (Channel Reach Length) + PELMN
(O.S. Minimum Elevation).

VII-48
 HEC-2 Input Description CI
Cross Section Records

CI Record (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

3 XLCH.CNCH Oor+ The value to the left of the decimal point is the
channel reach length (XLCH). If 0, the channel
reach length specified on the X1 record will be
used. The value to the right of the decimal point is
the new channel 'n' value (CNCH). If 0, the
previously specified 'n' (CI or NC record) will be
used.

4 XLSS o Value on previous cross section's CI record for left

side slope of trapezoidal excavation is to be used,
or, if not previously specified, the left side slope will
be vertical.

+ Left side slope of excavation expressed as number

of horizontal units per one vertical unit (Le., 2.0 for
two horizontal to one vertical).

5 RSS o or + Same as XLSS except for right side of trapezoid.

6-10 BW o Value on previous cross section's CI record is

used.

.01 End of channel improvement. If multiple CI

records are being used, then all the CI records
must have .01 to turn off the channel improvement.
If not all of the CI records have a .01, then the
records that do not have a .01 will be used to do
the channel improvement. Note the channel 'n'
value must be redefined if CNCH (CI.3) was used.

+ Bottom width of channel. Field used (6-10) for this

profile determined by variable IBW (J2.8).

Same as + but the old channel will be filled up to

an elevation equal to the minimum bank elevation.

VII-49
X2 HEC-2 Input Description
Cross Section Records

8.4 X2 Record· Optional Items for Each Cross Section (Bridge, etc.)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

0 IA X2 Record identification characters.

1 ONEW 0 No change in flow.

+ Value of the new flow in the river. This value will

hn I Iron"'" fn ... ",II ...nl"'r"t",ini ....,.. rtorn.~~ ~I"'\""+il""\n~ • 1I"\l.t""U~'.~
UC U.;:>tJu I VI all I Ciliall III I~ "'. v.;:).., .;)'W'vUVI.v UI In:,,,,..,

changed by another X2 record or by a OT record.

2 WSELK 0 High water mark elevations are not being used.

+ Elevation of known water surface elevation (i.e.,

high water mark) at this cross section. Required if
NINV(Ji.3) equals one.

3 IBRID 0 Special bridge method will not be used.

Special bridge method will be used. SB record is

required just ahead of the Xi record for the current
cross section.

2 Special culvert will be used. SC record is required

just ahead of the Xi record for the current cross
section.

4 ELLC 0 Bridge or culvert methods are not being used.

+ or- Elevation of a horizontal low chord for the bridge

for use by the normal bridge method. For the
special bridge or culvert method, the maximum
upstream low chord elevation within the bridge
span which is used to help distinguish between
pressure flow and low flow.

5 ELTRD 0 Bridge or culvert methods are not being used.

+ or - Elevation of a horizontal top of roadway for use by

the normal bridge method. For the special bridge
or culvert method, the minimum roadway elevation
on the BT records which is used to determine if
weir flow exists.

6 BLOSS 0 Change in water surface elevation will not be

entered.

+ Change in water surface elevation to be used

between current and previous cross sections.

VII·50
 HEC-2 Input Description X2
Cross Section Records

X2 Record (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

7 REPBT o Do not repeat bridge table (BT records) used from

previous cross section.

1 Previous bridge table (BT records) is repeated for

use at the current cross section. PXSECE (X1.9)
may be utilized to modify the low chord elevations
of the repeated BT records (top of roadways
remain the same). This option is used in
describing the top of a fixed diameter culvert for
several cross sections. Horizontal stations cannot
be changed when a bridge table is repeated.

8 CMOM o Drag coefficient for calculating pier losses with

momentum equation is equal to 2.00 (square
piers).

+ Drag coefficient to be used for calculating pier

losses with momentum equations (1.33 for piers
with semicircular ends).

9 BSQ o No bridge skew is used. Factor of 1.0 will be

used.

+ This factor is used to modify (skew) the horizontal

dimensions of the bridge profile (BT records). The
value of the first RDST on the BT records to be
skewed should be equal to the station (STA) of the
first GR data point for the current cross section
(see X1.8 to skew GR data).

Trace and Flow Distribution

10 ITRACE o No trace for this cross section unless ITRACE on

J2 record (J2.10) is specified.

1 Minor trace for current cross section.

10 Major and minor trace for current cross section.

15 Flow distribution printout for current cross section.

VII-51
X3 HEC-2 Input Description
Cross Section Records

8.5 X3 Record - Optional Items for Each Cross Section (Effective Area, etc.)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

IA X3 Record identification characters.

1 IEARA a Total area of cross section described on GR

records below tile water surface elevation is used
in the computations.

10 Only the channel area (as defined by STCHL, X1.3

and STCHR, X1.4) is used in the computations,
unless the water surface elevation exceeds the
elevations of the bank stations. This option can be
utilized to contain flow between levees until
overtopping occurs, if the bank stations are coded
at the top of the levees. Overtopping can occur on
either side since the elevations of STCHL and
STCHR are tested independently. The elevations
can also be extended with ELLEA (X3.8) and
ELREA (X3.9) to define artificial levees for bridge
applications.

2 ELSED a A sediment elevation is not specified.

+ or·· Elevation of sediment deposition. All elevations

below ELSED are set equal to ELSED. This
elevation is not modified by PXSECE (X1.9).

3 ENCFP a Width between encroachments is not changed or

is not specified.

+ Width between encroachments is centered in the

channel, midway between the left and right
overbanks. Flow areas outside this width are not
included in the computations. This width will be
used for all cross sections unless changed by a
positive ENCFP on the X3 record of another cross
section or on an ET record or unless overridden by
the use of STENCL (X3.4).

4 STENCL a Encroachments by specifying station and/or

elevation will not be used on the left overbank.

+ Station of the left encroachment. Flow areas to the

left of (less than) this station and below ELENCL
are not included in the computations. This option
will override the option using ENCFP when both
are used.

VII-52
 HEC-2 Input Description X3
Cross Section Records

X3 Record (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

5 ELENCL o An encroachment elevation on the left side is not

applicable and is therefore assumed very high or
STENCL = O.
1:'1__ a. _ .. _
+ Oi'- Elevation of the left encioachment. rlvvv QICClo;:)
below this elevation and less than STENCL are not
included in the computations.

6 STENCR a An encroachment station on the right is not used.

+ Station of the right encroachment. Flow areas to

the right of (greater than) this station and below
ELENCR are not included in the computations.

7 ELENCR a An encroachment elevation on the right side is not

applicable and is therefore assumed very high or
STENCR = O.

+ or . . Elevation of the right encroachment. Flow areas

below this elevation and greater than STENCR are
not included in the computations.

8 ELLEA o The elevation (XLBEL) on the GR records

corresponding to STCHL (X1.3) is used to decide if
the left flow area is effective or not when using the
effective area option (IEARA = 10).

+ or- This elevation is used instead of XLBEL. This

option, when used with IEARA = 10, defines
artificial levees for effective flow applications at
bridges.

9 ELREA o Same as ELLEA except for right bank flows.

+ or- Same as ELLEA except for right bank flows. Left

bank value (ELLEA) must be nonzero for program
to use the right bank value.

10 Not used.

VII-53
 X4 HEC-2 Input Description
Cross Section Records

8.6 X4 Record - Additional Points for Cross Section (optional)

An additional input record X4 may be inserted following records X1, X2 or X3 in order to add
additional points, up to twenty, to describe the ground profile of the cross section. Stations of X4 data
points must fall within the range of GR stations. The X4 data point is an added point and cannot be
used to replace any GR data point. The sum of GR and X4 data points at a cross section must not
exceed 100. This option is useful when modifying data records for a proposed obstruction as it allows
points to be added anywhere in the cross section.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA X4 Record identification characters.

1 NELT 1-20 Total number of X4 data points (maximum of 20) to

be added to the current cross sections GR data
set. If NELT is greater than four, multiple X4
records are required, and the first field of the
second and subsequent X4 records should contain
a STAT(N) value.

2,4,6, ELT(N) + or- Elevation of additional ground point corresponding

8,10 ... etc. to STAT(N). Elevations added by X4 records are
adjusted by PXSECE (X1.9), if input with GR data.

3,5,7, STAT(N) + Station of additional ground point. All stations

9,11, must be less than the maximum station on the GR
13 ... etc. records. The pairs of elevations and stations do
not have to be in any particular order. Station
values are adjusted by PXSECR (X1.8), if input with
GR data.

VII-54
 HEC-2 Input Description X5
Cross Section Records

8.7 X5 Record - Use of Input Water Surface Elevations (optional)

An X5 record is used to input a water surface elevation at a cross section, or to input an

increment of elevation to be added to the water surface elevation of the previous cross section to
obtain the water surface elevation of the cross section. The X5 record can be inserted for any cross
section, including a bridge cross section, and the desired elevation or elevation increment can be
specified differently for each profile of a multiple profile job. The field of the X5 record that is used for
a particular profile is controlled by variable INO (J1.2).

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA X5 Record identification characters.

1 N 1 to 19 Number of fields (maximum of 19) used on X5

record for desired water surface elevations. If the
number of fields (N) is greater than nine, a second
X5 record is required, and the first field of the
second X5 record should have a SBWS(N) value.

-1 to -19 Number of fields used on X5 record for desired

increments of water surface elevation.

2-20 SBWS(N) + Water surface elevation (if N is positive) or

elevation increment (if N is negative). Variable INO
(J1.2) indicates which field is used for a particular
profile.

VII-55
 GR HEC-2 Input Description
Cross Section Records

8.8 GR Record - Ground Profiles Elevations and Stations

This record specifies the elevation and station of each point in a cross section used to describe
the ground profile, and is required for each Xi record unless NUMST (X1.2) is zero. The points
outside of the channel determine the subdivision of the cross section which influences calculation of a
discharge-weighted velocity head for the cross section.

FiELD VARiABLE VALUE DESCRiPTiON

0 IA GR Record identification characters.

1 EL(1) + or- Elevation of cross section point one at station

STA(1). May be positive or negative.

2 STA(1) + Station of cross section point one.

3 EL(2) + or· Elevation of cross section point two at STA(2).

4 STA(2) + Station of cross section point two.

5-10 etc.

Continue with additional GR records using up to 100 points to describe the cross section. Stations
must be in increasing order progressing from left to right across the cross section.

VII-56
 HEC-2 Input Description 58
Bridge and Culvert Records

9 Bridge and Culvert Records

9.1 SB Record - Special Bridge (optional)

This special bridge record is used to specify data for use in the special bridge method and is only
required when using the special bridge method. This record should be entered between cross
sections that are upstream and downstream of the bridge. See X2 record, Fields 3 through 9, for
additional input for the special bridge option.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA SB Record identification characters.

1 XK + Pier shape coefficient, "K", for use in Yarnell's

energy equation for Class A flow.

2 XKOR + Total loss coefficient, "K", between cross sections

on either side of bridge, for use in orifice flow
equation. Should not be less than 1.0.

3 COFQ + Coefficient of discharge "C" for use in weir flow

equation. Weir flow will be corrected for weir
submergence based on the curves in "Hydraulics
of Bridge Waterways" (Reference 13, Figure 24).
The "Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways" method is
based on a trapezoidal-shaped roadway
embankment.

The absolute value of COFQ will be used as the

coefficient of discharge "C" for use in weir flow
equation. Weir flow will be corrected for weir
submergence based on the Waterways Experiment
Station's (WES) Design Chart 111-4. The WES
method is based on a ogee-shaped spillway.

4 ROLEN o Flow over roadway is not being considered or a

table of roadway elevations and corresponding
stations will be read in on the BT record for
determining "L" in the weir flow equation.

+ Average length of roadway "L" in feet for use in the

weir flow equation. Use a constant value of "L"
only if the length of weir does not change with
depth of flow. Otherwise, use the BT record to
read in the top of roadway. Weir elevation defined
on Field 5 of X2 record.

VII-57
58 HEC-2 Input Description
Bridge and Culvert Records

58 Record (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

5 BWC + Bottom width of bridge opening including any

obstruction.

5 BVVP o f'-~o obstruction (pier) in the bridge. f'-Jcrmal bridge

method will be used in this case if low flow
controls.

+ Total width of obstruction (piers).

7 BAREA + Net area of bridge opening below the low chord in

square feet or square meters.

8 SS o Vertical side slopes.

+ Number of horizontal units per one vertical unit for

the side slopes of the trapezoidal channel under
the bridge.

9 ELCHU o Channel invert beneath bridge will be equal to the

minimum elevation in the previous cross section.
This value will not be adjusted by PXSECE (X1.9).

+ or- Elevation of the channel invert at the upstream side

of the bridge.

10 ELCHO o Channel invert will be assumed equal to the

minimum elevation in the previous cross section.

+ or- Elevation of the channel invert at the downstream

side of the bridge. This value will not be adjusted
by PXSECE (X1.9).

VII-58
 HEC-2 Input Description S8
Bridge and Culvert Records

S8 Record (continued)

The diagram below defines the six variables: BWC, BWP, SS, ELCHU, and ELCHO that define a
trapezoid for low flow calculations. Variable BAREA provides the net area of the bridge opening for
pressure flow calculations. For typical applications the net area of the trapezoid (special bridge output
variable TRAPEZOID AREA) should be close to the actual net area (BAREA). If BWP is zero, standard
step calculations will be used for low flow.

1-
-~-----==l-

....
""'- _--- ---_........
awc
...../
L-_ = ELCfiU

Trapezoidal Approximation of Bridge Opening

VII-59
sc HEC-2 Input Description
Bridge and Culvert Records

9.2 SC Record - Special Culvert

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

0 IA SC Record identification characters.

1 CUNO.CUNV + The value left of the decimal point is the integer

number of identical culverts installed at this
location. The value to the right of the decimal point
is Manning's roughness coefficient for the culvert
barrel.

2 ENTLC + Entrance loss coefficient for culvert.

3 COFQ + Coefficient of discharge "C" for use in weir flow

equation. Weir flow will be corrected for weir
submergence based on the curves in "Hydraulics
of Bridge Waterways" (Reference 13, Figure 24).
The "Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways" method is
based on a trapezoidal-shaped roadway
embankment.

The absolute value of COFQ will be used as the

coefficient of discharge "C" for use in weir flow
equation. Weir flow will be corrected for weir
sUbmergence based on the Waterways Experiment
Station's (WES) Design Chart 111-4. The WES
method is based on a ogee-shaped spillway.

4 ROLEN 0 Flow over roadway is not being considered, or a

table of roadway elevations and corresponding
stations will be input using BT records for
determining "L" in the weir flow equation.

+ Average length of roadway "L" in feet for use in the

weir flow equation. Use a constant value of "L" only
if the length of the weir does not change with
depth of flow. Otherwise, use the BT record to
input the top of roadway. The weir elevation is
defined on Field 5 of X2 record.

5 RISE + Rise (height) of box culvert opening, or diameter of

pipe culvert opening in feet.

6 SPAN 0 Culvert is circular. Diameter must be entered in

Field 5.

+ Span (width) of box culvert opening in feet.

VII-60
 HEC-2 Input Description
Bridge and Culvert Records
sc
SC Record - (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

7 CULVLN + Length of the culvert barrel in feet.

8 CHRT.SCL + Value left of decimal point is the Federal Highway

Administration chart number for the culvert. Value
right of the decimal point is the Federal Highway
Administration scale number for the culvert.

9 ELCHU o Culvert invert elevations ELCHU and ELCHO will be

assumed equal to the minimum elevation in the
previous cross section.

+ or- Elevation of the culvert invert at the upstream side

of the roadway crossing. ELCHU must be greater
than or equal to ELCHO.

10 ELCHO +,O,or- Elevation of the culvert invert at the downstream

side of the roadway crossing. This value will not be
adjusted by PXSECE (X1.9). ELCHO must be less
than or equal to ELCHU. This value will be ignored
if ELCHU (SC.9) equals zero.

VII-51
BT HEC-2 Input Description
Bridge and Culvert Records

9.3 BT Record· Bridge Table of Elevations and Stations (optional)

The bridge geometry described by this record may be used by either the normal bridge, special
bridge, or culvert methods.

Normal bridge method computes conveyance in the bridge section with the data from BT and
GR records defining the bridge section. Each BT station must correspond to a GR or X4 station. The
program eliminates the area between top-of-road and low-chord profile defined by the BT data. If the
ground and the top-of-road profiles are the same in the overbank portion of the cross section, the BT
data does not have to duplicate the GR data. If the top-of-road is above the overbank ground profile,
the low-chord elevations should be equal to the ground (GR) elevation to fill in the overbank area
between road and ground.

For the special bridge and culvert methods, the BT data define a top-of-road profile for weir
calculations. The BT data must define the entire weir length of the roadway. For culverts, and special
bridges with piers (BWP > 0), the low-chord values are not required and BT stations do not have to
equal GR stations. The ELLC variable (X2.4) defines the low-chord value required by these methods.
However, if the special bridge (BWP = 0), the low-flow solution is based on conveyance calculations,
and the BT input data must conform to the normal bridge requirements.

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

o IA BT Record identification characters.

1 NRD + Number of points describing the bridge roadway

and low chord to be read on the BT records.
Entered only on first BT record. The maximum
number of points is 100.

Same as a positive NRD except an optional data

format is utilized for the second and subsequent
BT records.

2 RDST(1) + Roadway station corresponding to RDEL(1) and

XLCEL(1).

3 RDEL(1) + Top of roadway elevation at station RDST(1).

Should be greater than the estimated energy
elevation for special bridge applications, since weir
flow calculations are based on energy elevations.

4 XLCEL(1) + Low chord elevation at station RDST (1).

5 RDST(2) + Roadway station corresponding to RDEL(2) and

XLCEL(2).

6 RDEL(2) + Top of roadway elevation at station RDST(2).

VII-62
 HEC-2 Input Description
Bridge and Culvert Records
BT
BT Record (continued)

FIELD VARIABLE VALUE DESCRIPTION

7 XLCEL(2) + Low chord elevation at station RDST(2).

8 RDST(3) + Roadway station corresponding to RDEL(3) and

VI,",!::' 10\
AL.V';;;L.\'" J.

9 RDEL(3) + Top of roadway elevation at station RDST(3).

10 XLCEL(3) + Low chord elevation at station RDST(3).

Format for Additional BT records

Standard Format

If NRD is positive (+) 8T data RDST, RDEL, and XLCEL is to be input starting in the second and
subsequent 81 records, all ten fields are available for data.

Optional Format

If NRD is negative (-) 81 data is to be input in the second through the tenth fields of the second
and subsequent 81 records, only nine fields are available for data.

For special bridge method, the last roadway elevation RDEL (NRD) should be greater than the
estimated energy elevation.

VII-63
FR HEC-2 Input Description
Optional FREE Format Records

10 FR· Free Format Indicator Record

The FR record must be the first record in the input file if free format input is used. The free format
input option allows the user to enter data using commas (,) or blank space as a delimiter between
field input. A blank should separate the record 10 and the first field input data. A blank should be
used to delimit a field that is full (i.e., 8 digits, or 6 if the first field). If a comma is used to delimit a
field that is full, the next field will be blank. MUltiple commas are interpreted as blank fields. If the last
fields of an input record are blank, you can limit your input to those fields that contain input data, i.e.,
you do not have to define the ending blank fields.

With free format, more, or less, than 10-fields of input can be entered on a single line if the
record-type has continuous data (e.g., GR or BT records). The data will be processed into 10-field
records of data. This option can be used to add data into an existing data set without extensive
editing to maintain the fixed-field format.

EOIT2 will create a fIXed-field input file from free-format data. The fixed-field file will be saved as
TAPE10. You can rename and save the TAPE10 file for use as the input file in HEC-2.

*FREE input record turns on the free-format option. This record must appear before the first free-
format data.

*FIX input record turns off the free-format option. This record must appear before the first fixed-
field input, if free-format option is active.

VII-64
 HEC-2 Input Description
Input Record Summary

11 HEC..2 Input Record Summary

Records are listed in their relative order of input in a data file.

Record Description Page

Data Edit Record

ED Optional Record for HEC-2 Data Edit Program (EDIT-2) 3

Split Flow Data Records

SF Split Flow Title 4

JC Title Job 4
JP Job Parameter 5
TW Title for Weir Location 5
WS Weir Parameter Data 6
WC Weir Coordinate Data 7
TN Title for Normal Depth Location 8
NS Normal Depth Parameter Data 8
NG Ground Coordinate Data 9
TC Title for Rating Curve Location 10
CS Rating Curve Parameter Data 10
CR Rating Curve Data 11
EE End of Split Flow Data 11

Documentation Records

AC Archival Option 12
C Comments for Describing Data 13
'T1-T9 Title Records 14

Job Control Records

*J1 Starting Conditions 15

JR Starting Rating Curve 17
JS Starting Split Flow Assumption 18
J2 Optional Features 19
J3 Selection of Variables for Summary Tables 22
J4 Routing Reaches - Punching Records for HEC-1 29
J5 Printout Control 30
J6 Friction Loss Equations 32

'Required for basic applications.

VII-55
 HEC-2 Input Description
Input Record Summary

Change Records

IC Ice Data 35
*NC Starting Manning's 'n' Values & Shock Losses 37
NH Horizontal Variations of Manning's 'n' 38
NV Vertical Variations of Manning's 'n' 39
KH Horizontal Description of Equivalent Roughness 'n' 40
QT Table Discharges for Multiple Profiles 41
ET Encroachment Table 42

Bridge and Culvert Records

SB Special Bridge 57
SC Special Culvert 59

Cross Section Records

*X1 General Items for Each Cross Section 45

RC Rating Curve for Inputting Water Surface Elevations 47
CI Channel Improvement 48
X2 Optional Items for Each Cross Section (Bridges, etc.) 50
X3 Optional Items for Each Cross Section (Effective Area, etc.) 52
X4 Additional Points for Cross Section 54
X5 Use of Water Surface Elevations 55
BT Bridge Table of Elevations & Stations 61
*GR Ground Profiles Elevations & Stations 56

End of Records

*EJ End of Job (marks end of river reach data) , 34

*ER End of Run 34

*Required for basic applications.

VII-66